Some symbolic expressions for the blue colour

Share it with your friends Like

Thanks! Share it with your friends!

Close

Some symbolic expressions for the blue colour

CONTENS

अङ्ग असित आविल इंद्रः उत्पल कर्ण काल कालक कृष्ण कृष्णवर्ण गो देवहूती नील नीलक नीलकम् नीलता नीलति नीललोहित नीलवर्ण नीलाय नीलिमन् नीली नीलीवर्ण नैल्य नैल्यम् परुष मणिः मणिक मेचक मेचकित लोह लोहित वैदूर्य शार श्याम श्यामल सार सितेतर सु हरिक हरित हरिताश्म

अङ्ग — aṅga Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899aṅga ind. a particle implying attention, assent or desire, and sometimes

impatience, it may be rendered, by well; indeed, true, please, rather

quick; «kim aṅga», how much rather!

aṅga n. ( «am» , a limb of the body

n. a limb, member

n. the body

n. a subordinate division or department, especially of a science, as the

six Vedāṅgas

n. hence the number six

n. N. of the chief sacred texts of the Jainas

n. a limb or subdivision of Mantra or counsel (said to be five, viz. 1.

«karmaṇām ārambhopāyaḥ», means of commencing operations; 2.

«puruṣa-dravya-sampad», providing men and materials; 3. «deśa-kāla-

vibhāga», distribution of place and time; 4. «vipatti-pratīkāra», counter-

action of disaster; 5. «kārya-siddhi», successful accomplishment; whence

«mantra» is said to be «paṇcāṅga»)

n. any subdivision, a supplement

aṅga n. (in Gr.) the base of a word, but in the strong cases only

n. anything inferior or secondary, anything immaterial or unessential,

see «aṅga-tā»

aṅga n. (in rhetoric) an illustration

aṅga n. (in the drama) the whole of the subordinate characters

n. an expedient

n. a mental organ, the mind

aṅga m. sg. or m. pl. N. of Bengal proper or its inhabitants

aṅga m. (sg.), N. of a king of Aṅga

aṅga m. (mfn.), having members or divisions

aṅga m. contiguous

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

aṅga indecl. gaṇa cādi. 1) eine Partikel mit versichernder Bedeutung,

welche den Nachdruck auf das ihr vorangehende Wort lenkt, «doch, ja,

gewiss»: gāmaṅgaiṣa ā hvayati dārvaṅgaiṣo apāvadhīt ṚV. 10, 146, 4. 1,

84, 7 — 9. Häufig nach flüchtigen Conjunctionen und andern kurzen

Wörtern am Anfange eines Satzes, um denselben Halt zu geben, ähnlich

wie it, z. B. yadaṅga ṚV. 3, 33, 11. 8, 6, 26. 7, 2. kimaṅga 1, 118, 3. 10,

42, 3. tvamaṅga 1, 84, 19. 5, 3, 11. tvaṁ hyāṅga AV. 5, 11, 5. ṚV. 10,

108, 3. nahyāṅga 8, 24, 15. kuvidaṅga 7, 91, 1. 10, 64, 13. 131, 2. u. s. w.

vgl. NIR. 5, 17. 6, 18. und aṅgīkar, aṅkīkāra, aṅgīkṛti. — 2) anrufend und

auffordernd, in Verbindung mit einem Vocativ oder einem Imperativ oder

im Fragesatz: aṅgāre CHĀND. UP. 4, 1, 5. āsāmaṅgaikāṁ bhindhi

(bhinddhi) 6, 12, 1. aṅgāvekṣasva saumitre kasyemāṁ manyase camūm

R. 2, 97, 16. aṅga kuru. aṅga paca P. 8, 1, 33, Sch. aṅga kūjā3 idānīṁ

jñāsyasi jālma. aṅgādhīṣva bhaktaṁ te dāsyāmi 8, 2, 96, Sch. mama

tāvanmatamidaṁ śrūyatāmaṅga vāmapi ŚIŚ. 2, 12. samanaddha kimaṅga

bhūpatiryadi saṁdhitsurasau sahāmunā 16, 34. Ueber die Betonung und

Dehnung des Verbi finiti nach aṅga s. P. 8, 1, 33. 8, 2, 96. — Die indischen

Lexicographen führen folgende Bedeutungen von aṅga auf: 1) = kṣipram

NIR. 5, 17. — 2) saṁbodhane AK. 3, 5, 7. TRIK. 3, 3, 54. 464. H. 1537.

an. 7, 19. MED. avj. 12. — 3) harṣe H. an. MED. — 4) und 5)

saṁgamāsūyayoḥ MED. — 6) punararthe AK. 3, 5, 19. TRIK. 3, 3, 464. H.

an.

aṅga m. 1) Name eines Kriegerstammes und des von ihm bewohnten

Landes (das Gebiet um Bhagalpur), meistens pl. TRIK. 3, 3, 53. H. 957.

an. 2, 30 (sg.). MED. g. 2. P. 2, 4, 62, Sch. 4, 2, 81, Sch. 125, Sch. VOP.

7, 14. gandhāribhyo mūjavadbhyo ‘ṅgebhyo magadhebhyaḥ AV. 5, 22, 14.

R. 1, 8, 11. vaṅgāṅgamagadhāḥ 2, 10, 35. anaṅga iti vikhyātastadā

prabhṛti rāghava.. sa cāṅgaviṣayaḥ śrīmānyatrāṅgaṁ sa (kāmaḥ)

mumoca ha. 1, 25, 13. 14. aṅgasyāṅgo ‘bhavaddeśaḥ MBH. 1, 4220. Vgl.

LIA. I, 143, N. 1. — 2) N. pr. ein von Udamaja, dem Nachkommen Atri’s,

geweihter König (auch Vairokana genannt) AIT. BR. 8, 22. Sohn Ūru’s und

Verfasser von ṚV. 10, 138. Sohn Ūru’s und der Āgneyi VP. 98. HARIV. 73.

ein Sohn Dīrghatama’s und der Sudeṣnā (Bali’s Gemahlin), Gebieter von

Anga, MBH. 1, 4217 fgg. VP. 444. HARIV. 1684. LIA. I, 557. aṅgaṁ

vṛhadratham MBH. 12, 981. — Wenn die in der Note bei aṅka

ausgesprochene Vermuthung gegründet sein sollte, hätten wir noch aṅga

m. in der Bedeutung «Vogel» anzuführen.

aṅga n. 1) «Glied des Körpers» AK. 2, 6, 2, 21. H. 566. an. 2, 29. MED. g.

2. aṅgādaṅgāllomno lomno jātaṁ parvaṇi parvaṇi ṚV. 10, 163, 6. AV. 1,

12, 2. u.s.w. NIR. 4, 3. aṅgānyavadyatyabhañjan (beim Thieropfer) KĀTY.

ŚR. 6, 7, 5. M. 3, 178. 4, 83. 8, 234. 279. hīnāṅga, atiriktāṅga 4, 141.

aṅgahīnatva 11, 50. am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ī R. 1, 9, 22. N. 1, 12. 3,

13. 11, 30. auch ā KĀŚ. zu P. 4, 1, 54. «das männliche Glied» M. 8, 374. —

2) «Körper» TRIK. 3, 3, 53. H. 563. an. 2, 29. MED. g. 2. avyaṅgāṅgī M. 3,

10. VID. 180,b. VET. 30, 17. BRAHMA-P. in LA. 59, 13. — 3) «Glied» oder

«Theil eines Ganzen»: (ātmā) saptāṅgaḥ MAṆD. UP. 3. svāmyamātyau

puraṁ rāṣṭraṁ koṣadaṇḍau suhṛttathā. sapta prakṛtayo hyetāḥ

saptāṅgaṁ rājyamucyate.. M. 9, 294. 296. 297. 7, 105. YĀJÑ. 1, 352.

RAGH. 1, 60. rathaṁ sarvāṅgabhūṣitam R. 6, 112, 22. 106, 22.

yajñaścetpratiruddhaḥ syādekenāṅgena yajvanaḥ M. 11, 11.

yasminkarmaṇi yāstu syuruktāḥ pratyaṅgadakṣiṇāḥ 8, 208.

pṛthvīpurakṣmābhṛdvanauṣadhimṛgādibhiḥ. nṛbrahmakṣatraviṭśūdraiḥ

sāṅgopāṅgaiḥ AK. 2, 1, 1. 2, 8, 2, 48. 3, 4, 25. 39. 224. H. 85.

piturguṇāṅgāni «die verschiedenen, mannichfaltigen Tugenden des

Vaters» R. 2, 77, 12. — 4) «ein unwesentlicher, attributärer Theil» (einer

Opferhandlung u. s. w.), upasarjanabhūte H. an. 2, 29. apradhāne MED.

g. 3. KĀTY. ŚR. 1, 2, 3. 4. 4, 1, 30. 16, 1, 1. im Gegens. zu pradhāna 1, 2,

18. MADHUS. in Ind. St. I, 15, 4—6. aṅga = pradhāna TRIK. 3, 3, 53. ist

aller Wahrscheinlichkeit nach nur ein Druckfehler. — 5) «Anhang, ein

ergänzendes Werk»: vedāḥ sarvāṅgāni KENOP. 33. Die 6 Anhänge des

Veda oder der Śruti sind: śikṣā, vyākaraṇa, chandas, nirukta, kalpa und

jyotiṣa AK. 1, 1, 5, 4. H. 250. 251. ṣaḍaṅgavid M. 3, 185. vedāḥ

sāṅgopāṅgāḥ N. (BOPP) 12, 17; vgl. ROTH im NIRUKTA XIV fgg.

dhanurvedaḥ sāṅgopāṅgopaniṣadaḥ sarahasyaḥ VIŚV. 5, 16.

sāṅgaśabdānuśāsana «die Wortlehre mit ihren Anhängen» (Lehre vom

Geschlecht, Wurzelverzeichniss) H. 1. Die Jaina’s theilen ihre heiligen

Schriften in Anga’s und Upānga’s, die sich zusammen auf 12 Werke

belaufen, H. 245; vgl. upāṅga. — 6) eine symbolische Bezeichnung der

Zahl «sechs» (vgl. u. 5) BHĀSK. im Verz. d. B. H. No. 844. — 7)

«Hilfsmittel» TRIK. 3, 3, 53. H. an. 2, 29. MED. g. 2.

aṅgāṅgibhāvamajñātvā kathaṁ sāmarthyanirṇayaḥ HIT. II, 141. niraṅga

72, 9. — 8) «Thema» (in der Grammatik) P. 1, 4, 13. — 9) «Geist (?)»:

aṅgaṁ manasi kāye cetyabhidhānāntaradarśanāt. yathā.

hiraṇyagarbhāṅgabhuvaṁ muniṁ haririti māghaḥ. ŚKDR. — Euphonische

Regeln P. 6, 1, 119.

aṅga adj. 1) «mit Gliedern versehen» PAT. zu P. 2, 3, 20. MED. g. 3. — 2)

«nahe, anstossend» H. an. 2, 19. MED. g. 3.

aṅga 2) aṅga kimasti kaścidvimardako nāmātrabhavataḥ DAŚAK. in

BENF. Chr. 192, 7. kimaṅga «wie viel mehr» Spr. 1106.

aṅga 1) m. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 361. Unter «den fünf Gliedern des

Körpers» sind «der Kopf, die Hände und die Füsse» gemeint MĀRK. P. 11,

3; vgl. upāṅga. — Z. 5 lies ī st. i. — 2) «Körper» (vgl. tanu, mūrti) in der

Astrol. Bez. «des 1ten Hauses, des Horoskops»: -viniścaya «Fixirung —,

Bestimmung des Horoskops» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 1, 9. Vgl. — mahāṅga.

aṅga 6) SŪRYAS. 8, 2.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

aṅga A King belonging to the Candra vaṁśa. (Lunar dynasty).

aṅga(m) The kingdom ruled by King Aṅga. Other details:

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

aṅga 1. aṅga, n.

1. A limb, Man. 3, 178.

2. The penis, Man. 8, 374.

3. A part, Man. 11, 11.

4. A supplementary part.

5. A division of Hindu learning, comprehending such sciences as are

considered dependent upon the Vedas; cf. aṅgavidyā.

6. An expedient.

7. The body.

— Comp. In comp. adj. the fem. ends generally in gī, sometimes also in

gā. An-, m. Kāma, the god of love. an-a-vadya- (vb. vad), adj., f. gī, of

faultless form. aṣṭāṅga, i. e. aṣṭan-, adj. consisting of eight parts.

uttama-, n. the head, Man, 1, 93. eka-,

I. n. one part only.

II. m. pl. body-guards. kāla-, adj. having a dark-blue blade, MBh. 4, 231.

kuṣṭha-, adj. leprous. kṛśa-, adj., f. gī, meagre. khaṭvā-, n. one of Śiva’s

weapons (a club with a skull at the top), also carried by devotees. catur-,

I. adj. consisting of four parts; with bala, a complete army, consisting of

chariots, elephants, horse, and foot.

II. n. 1. a complete army. 2. chess. citra-, m. a proper name. tanu-, f. gī,

a delicate woman. tanū-ja-, n. a wing. niraṅga, i. e. nis-, adj. deprived of

expedients. pañcāṅga, i. e. pañcan-, adj. consisting of five parts. makā-,

m. a camel. rakta-,

I. m. 1. a bug. 2. planet Mars.

II. n. 1. coral. 2. saffron. ratha-,

I. n. 1. any part of a carriage. 2. a wheel.

II. m. the ruddy goose, Anas casarca. vakra-, m. 1. the ruddy goose. 2. a

goose. vara-,

I. m. an elephant.

II. n. 1. an elegant body. 2. the head. 3. pudendum, male or female. vi-

citra-,

I. adj. 1. handsome. 2. having the body of various colours.

II. m. 1. a tiger. 2. a peacock. hīna- (vb. 2. hā),

I. adj. maimed, Man. 4, 141.

II. f. gī, an ant. hema-,

I. adj. golden, Rām. 3, 55, 32.

II. m. 1. a lion. 2. Brahman. 3. Garuḍa, a fabulous bird.

aṅga 2. aṅga (an old instr. sing. of the last, signifying ‘by my body’),

particle:

1. Of asseveration, Indeed, to be sure.

2. Of solicitation, invocation, Rām. 2, 97, 16.

3. Of interrogation, Daśak. in Chr. 192, 7.

4. Again, further, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1106.

aṅga 3. aṅga, m.

1. The name of a country, Bengal proper. and its inhabitants.

2. The name of a king.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

aṅga aṅgati v move.

aṅga [1] a. particle implying sollicitation, confirmation, or stress.

aṅga [2] m. N. of sev. men & of a country (Bengal), pl. its inhabitants.

aṅga [3] (adj. —° f. ī) limb, member, body (also aṅgaka n.); part, means

requisite, supplement (cf. vedāṅga), theme (g.).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

aṅga 1. aṅga, pel. 1. emphatic: just, only; especially; 2, exhortative: w.

voc. or impv.; 3. intr.: kim aṅga, how much more?

aṅga 2. aṅga, m. pl. No of a people and their country.

aṅga 3. aṅg-a, n. (a. -° f.ī limb, member, part, membrum virile; body;

constituent; secondary part; supplement (esp. the six of the Veda);

resource; base (gr.);

-ka, n. member, part; body.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

aṅga t ka pade . (aṅgayati ceṣṭayati aṅga + ṇic ac .) lakṣmaṇi . iti

kavikalpadrumaḥ .. kaṇṭhyavargatṛtīyopadhaḥ . padaṁ

saṅkhyāsaṁsthānaṁ . lakṣma cihnayuktakriyā . tathā ca . arthakriyaiva

dhātūnāṁ kartṛvyāpāralakṣmaṇā . ātmaniṣṭhaṁ kriyārthatvaṁ

dhātvartheṣvakriyātmasu .. iti bopadevaḥ . aṅgayati aṅgāpayati, iti

durgādāsaḥ ..

aṅga vya sambodhanaṁ . ityamaraḥ .. (rāmāyaṇe —

aṅgāvekṣasva saumitre kasyemāṁ manyase camūṁ . punararthaḥ .

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

aṅga cihnayuktakaraṇe adantacurādi ubhaya° sakarmakaḥ seṭ . aṅgaya—

ti te āñjiga—t ta . matāntare aṅgāpayati te .

असित — asita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899asita «a-sita» mfn. unbound

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («sita», «white», appears to have been

formed from this word, which is probably original, and not a compound of

«a» and «sita»; cf. «asura» and «sura»), dark-coloured, black &c.

asita m. the planet Saturn

asita m. a poisonous animal (said to be a kind of mouse)

asita m. N. of the lord of darkness and magic

asita m. of a descendant of Kaśyapa (composer of , named also Devala

([]) or Asita Devala ([

asita m. N. of a man (with the patron. Vārṣagaṇa)

asita m. of a son of Bharata

asita m. of a ṛiṣi

asita m. of a mountain

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («as») m. a black snake

asita m. a Mantra (saving from snakes)

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («ā») f. a girl attending in the women’s

apartments (whose hair is not whitened by age)

asita m. the indigo plant

asita m. N. of an Apsaras 12472

asita mf («ā»; Ved. «asiknī») n. («asiknī») f. «the dark one», the night

asita m. a girl attending in the women’s apartments

asita m. N. of a wife of Daksha

asita m. N. of the river Akesines (afterwards called Candra-bhāgā) in the

Paṇjāb («asiknī») x, 75, 5.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

asita a.

(1) Unbound(Ved).

(2) [na sitaḥ śubhraḥ] Not white, black, dark-blue, dark-coloured;

asitā moharajanī Śānti. 3. 4; Y. 3. 166; -locanā, -nayanā &c. —taḥ

(1) The dark or blue colour.

(2) The dark fortnight of a lunar month.

(3) N. of the planet Saturn.

(4) A black snake.

(5) N. of the sage devala.

(6) N. of a being presiding over darkness and magic. —tā

(1) The Indigo plant.

(2) A girl attending upon the harem (whose hair is not whitened by

age); see asiknī.

(3) The river Yamunā.

(4) N. of a daughter of Vīraṇa and wife of Daksha.

(5) N. of the river A kesines in the Punjab.

— Comp.

—aṁbujaṁ, —utpalaṁ the blue lotus.

—aciṁs m. fire.

—aśman, m.

—upalaḥ a dark-blue stone; lapis lazuli.

—keśā a woman having black hair.

—keśāṁta a. having black locks of hair.

—giriḥ, —nagaḥ ‘the blue mountain’; N. of a mountain.

—grīva a. having a black neck. (

—vaḥ) fire.

—ju a. (for -jānu) having black knees.

—nayanaṁ a. black-eyed; Me. 112.

—pakṣaḥ the dark fortnight; Pt. 1. 173.

—phalaṁ the sweet cocoanut.

—bhrū a. having black eye-lids.

—mṛgaḥ the black antelope.

—yavana = kālayavana q. v.; Śi. 15. 56.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

asita (3. a + sita von si) adj. «ungebunden» ŚAT. BR. 14, 6, 9, 28. 11, 6.

7, 2, 27 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 3, 9, 26. 4, 2, 4. 4, 21.

asita 1) adj. f. asitā, ved. asiknī P. 4, 1, 39, Vārtt. 1. 2. dieselbe Form

auch klass. KĀŚ. «dunkelfarbig, schwarz» (als m. «Schwärze») NIR. 9, 26.

AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 17. 1397. vasma ṚV. 4, 13, 4. (uṣasaḥ)

gūhantīrabhvamasitaṁ ruśadbhiḥ 51, 9. 1, 46, 10. tvacamasiknīm 9, 73,

5. viśa asiknīḥ («das dunkle Volk» heissen «die Geister des Dunkels») 7, 5,

3. naktaṁjātāsyoṣadhe rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca AV. 1, 23, 1. 5, 13, 8. 8, 7,

1. avyāmasiknyām 12, 2, 20. 1, 23, 3. 11, 2, 18. svasitāyatalocanā N. 12,

46. MEGH. 111. asitakeśāntā N. 16, 17. niśāsitā R. 2, 96, 19. ŚĀNTIŚ. 3,

4. anantā raśmayastasya — sitāsitāḥ karbunīlāḥ kapilāḥ pītalohitāḥ YĀJÑ.

3, 166. pakṣa «die dunkle, abnehmende Hälfte des Mondes» H. 147. — 2)

m. a) «der Planet Saturn» H. 120. HALĀY. im ŚKDR. HORĀŚ. in Z. f. d. K.

d. M. 4, 318. — b) N. pr. eines Herrschers des «Dunkels» und Zauberers:

asitasya te brahmaṇā kaśyapasya gayasya ca AV. 1, 14, 4. tāṁ

(keśavardhanīṁ) vītahavya ābharadasitasya gṛhebhyaḥ 6, 137, 1. asito

dhānvo rājetyāha tasyāsurā viśaḥ ŚĀT. BR. 13, 4, 3, 11. ĀŚV. ŚR. 10, 7. —

ein Kāśyapa, nach ṚV. ANUKR. neben Devala Verfasser der Lieder 9, 5—

24 (daher ein Asita Devala MBH. 1, 106. 2048. 2, 441. 1917 (debalaṁ

cāsitam). 2038. 3, 510. 8263. 9, 2854. BHAG. 10, 13. HARIV. 951). steht

im Geschlechte der Kāśyapa ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 14. — ein Vārṣagaṇa ŚAT. BR.

14, 9, 4, 33 = BṚH. ĀR. UP. 6, 5, 3. — ein Nachkomme Ikṣvāku’s, ein Sohn

Bharata’s R. 1, 70, 27. 2, 110, 15. — Auch die Buddhisten erwähnen einen

Ṛṣi Asita LALIT. 103. 110. 246. BURN. Intr. 141. 384. SCHIEFNER,

Lebensb. 248 (18). — c) N. pr. eines Berges MBH. 3, 8364. — 3) f. asitā.

a) = asiknī «b.» (s. unten) BHARATA zu AK. 2, 6, 1, 18 im ŚKDR. — b)

«die Indigo-Pflanze» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) N. pr. einer Apsaras VYĀḌI zu

H. 183. MBH. 1, 4819. HARIV. 12472. — 4) f. asiknī. a) «die Dunkle,

Nacht» NAIGH. 1, 7. asiknīmeti ruśatīmapājan ṚV. 10, 3, 1. asiknyāṁ

yajamāno na hotā 4, 17, 15. — b) «eine weibliche Dienerin von mittleren

Jahren (noch schwarz, noch nicht grau) im Harem» AK. 2, 6, 1, 18. H.

521. MED. n. 33. — c) N. pr. eine Tochter Vīraṇa’s und Gemahlin Daksha’s

HARIV. 120. fgg. VP. 117. — d) N. pr. eines Flusses im Pendshab,

Akesines (später candrabhāgā), MED. n. 33. (bheṣajaṁ) yatsindhau

yadasiknyām ṚV. 8, 20, 25. anders betont 10, 75, 5: asiknyā marudvṛdhe

vitastayā (śṛṇuhi). VP. 183. Vgl. ROTH, Zur L. u. G. d. W. 138. fg. —

Angeblich zusammeng. aus 3. a + sita «weiss», aber dieses letztere Wort

ist für die ältere Zeit nicht zu belegen und verdankt seinen Ursprung wohl

dem missverstandenen asita, wie man auch aus asura ein sura gebildet

hat.

asita m. «eine schwarze Schlange» AV. 3, 27, 1. 5, 13, 5. 6. 6, 56, 2. 72,

1. 7, 56, 1. 10, 4, 5. 13. 12, 3, 55. vielleicht VS. 24, 37. In AV. 6, 137, 2:

keśā naḍā iva vardhantāṁ śīrṣṇaste asitāḥ pari könnte eher asitāḥ die

richtige Betonung sein.

asita TS. 7, 4, 22, 1.

asita 1) asitekṣaṇā R. 3, 52, 40. -pakṣe Spr. 1191, v. l. — 2) a) VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 17, 25. BṚH. 2, 7. 11, 18. — b) N. pr. eines alten Weisen Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 310,a,24. Sohnes des Kaśyapa 56,b,38. PAÑCAV. BR. 14,11,18.

KĀṬH. 22,11. — c) KATHĀS. 111, 93. 95. 106. — d) «ein best. zu den

Mäusen gerechnetes giftiges Thier» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 309,a,19.

asita m. N. pr. eines Schlangendämons MBH. 1, 2188.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

asita 1 I One of the Ṛṭviks of the Sarpasatra of Janamejaya.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

asita [1] a. unbound.

asita [2] (f. asitā & asiknī) a. dark-coloured, black. m. N. of a cert. myth.

being & of sev. men; f. asiknī or asiknī N. of a river.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

asita 2. as-ita, a. (ā or -iknī) dark-coloured, black; m. N.;

-pakṣa, m. dark half of a month;

-pītaka, a. (ikā dark yellow;

-aś-man, m. sapphire;

-īkṣaṇa, a. black-eyed;

-utpala, n. blue lotus.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

asita pu° sitaḥ śubhraḥ virodhe na° ta° . 1 śubhravarṇabhinne

tadviruddhe kṛṣṇavarṇe . 2 tadvati tri° . 3 kṛṣṇapakṣe pu° . 4 nīloṣadhau

antaḥpuracāriṇyāmavṛddhāyāṁ 5 preṣyāyāñca strī ṅīp

kṛṣṇavarṇaparatayā knaśca asiknītyeva . asitagirinibhaṁ syāt kajjvalaṁ

sindhupātram puṣpadantaḥ tantumavavyayannasi tam ṛ° 4, 13, 4, 5

yamunāyāṁ tasyāḥ kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt tathātvam strī sitāsite yatra saridvare

śubhe kāśī° . asyāḥ strītve’pi chandasītyukteḥ na knaḥ tena ṅībapi na . 6

devale ṛṣibhedepu° . asitodevalovyāsaḥ svayañcaiva bravīṣi me gītā .

asitamuniśca himavataḥ ekaparṇāṁ nāma sutāmupayeme yathāha hari°

18 a° . tisraḥ kanyāstu menāyāṁ janayāmāsa śailarāṭ .

aparṇāmekaparṇāñca tṛtīyāmekapāṭalām . tapaścarantyaḥ

sumahadduścaraṁ devadānavaiḥ . lokān santāpayāmāsustāstisraḥ

sthāṇujaṅgamān . āhāramekaparṇena ekaparṇā samācarat .

pāṭalāpuṣpamekañca ādadhāvekapāṭalā . ekā tatra nirāhārā tāṁ mātā

pratyaṣedhayat . umā iti niṣedhantī mātṛsnehena duḥkhitā . sā tathoktā

tadāmātrā devī duścaracāriṇī . umetyevābhavat khyātā triṣu lokeṣu

sundarī tathaiva nāmnā teneha viśrutā yogadharmiṇī . evaṁ

trisraḥkumārīrvarṇayitvā . sarvāśca brahmavādinyaḥ

sarvāścaivoddhvairetasaḥ . umā tāsāṁ variṣṭhā ca jyeṣṭhā ca varavarṇinī

. mahāyogabalopetā mahādeva mupasthitā . asitasyaikaparṇā tu

devalasya mahātmanaḥ . patnī dattā tathā brahman! yogācāryāya

dhīmate . jaijīṣavyāya tu tathā viddhi tāmekapāṭalām . ete kanye

mahābhāge yogācāryamupasthite . 7 śanoca 8 apsarobhede strī asitā ca

subāhuśca suvṛttā mṛdukā tathā . hari° va° .

आविल — āvila Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899āvila mfn. (also written «ā-bila» q.v.) turbid (as a fluid), foul, not clear

mfn. confused

āvila mfn. (ifc.) polluted by or mixed with.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

āvila a. [āvilati dṛṣṭiṁ stṛṇāti vil stṛtau-ka Tv.]

(1) Turbid, foul, dirty, muddy; paṁkacchidaḥ phalasyeva

nikaṣeṇāvilaṁ payaḥ M. 2. 8; tasyāvilāṁbhaḥpariśuddhihetoḥ R. 13. 36.

(2) Impure, spoiled; Ki. 8. 37; fig. also; tvadīyaiścaritairanāvilaiḥ Ku.

5. 37.

(3) Dark-coloured, dark-blue, darkish; V. 5. 8.

(4) Dim, obscure; āvilāṁ mṛgalekhāṁ R. 8. 42.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

āvila adj. f. ā «trübe», von Flüssigkeiten AK. 1, 2, 3, 14. H. 1071. SUŚR. 1,

262, 1. RAGH. 13, 36. girindīṁ madaprasravaṇāvilām N. 13, 6.

antarvikṣobhitajalāvila (Meer) MBH. 1, 1216. vāṣpaphenajalāvila R. 2, 59,

29. von Augen SUŚR. 1, 121, 1. 256, 1. 2, 304, 6. sāsrāvilekṣaṇa MBH. 14,

1963. R. 2, 37, 10. 1, 17, 24. 4, 19, 10. RAGH. 18, 28. «trübe, glanzlos»:

candrarekhāmivāvilām R. 5, 18, 3. bibhradāvilāṁ mṛgalekhāmuṣasīva

candramāḥ RAGH. 8, 42. auf moralische Zustände übertr.: madāvilaḥ

(mohaḥ) ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 2. tvadīyaiścaritairanāvilaiḥ KUMĀRAS. 5, 37. — Vgl.

anāvila, paryāvila.

āvila , rudhirāvila «mit Blut besudelt» MBH. 5, 7277. kāsāśrulālāvila Spr.

5321. candanaṁ vapuṣi kuṅkumāvilam so v. a. «vermischt mit» 2192.

sthūlaśilāvilā «besäet mit» RĀJA-TAR. 1, 265. pralambamālāvila

(ātapatra) «bedeckt mit» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 73, 2. Zu ŚĀNTIŚ. 3, 2 (Z. 2

vom Ende) vgl. Spr. 1158.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

āvila āvila, adj., f. lā.

1. Turbid, Nal. 13, 7(6).

2. Without splendour, Rām. 5, 18, 3.

3. Stained, Chr. 40, 11; Foul, Śāutiś. 3, 2.

— Comp. an-, adj. 1. pure, Rām. 3, 76, 11. 2. healthy, Man. 7, 69. pari-,

adj. very turbid, Ragh. 7, 37.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

āvila a. turbid; disturbed by, covered or mixed with (—°).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

āvila āvila, a. turbid, dim; tainted by, filled with (-°).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

āvila tri° āvilati dṛṣṭiṁstṛṇāti vil—stṛtau ka . 1 kaluṣe aya bila bhedane

bilaprakṛtikatvāt vargya bamadhyaitirāyamu° samalakṣyata bibhradābi

(vi)lām tasyābi(vi)lāmbhaḥpariśuddhihetoḥ . nanandurānandajalāvi(bi)

lākṣāḥ, raghuḥ yathā tvadīyaiścaritairanāvi(bi)laiḥ kumā .

इंद्रः — iṁdraḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

iṁdraḥ [iṁd-ran; iṁdatīti iṁdraḥ; idi aiśvarye Malli.]

(1) The lord of gods.

(2) The god of rain, rain; cloud.

(3) A lord or ruler (as of men &c.); first or best (of any class of

objects), always as the last member of comp.; nareṁdraḥ a lord of men i.

e. a king; so mṛgeṁdraḥ a lion; gajeṁdraḥ the lord or chief of elephants;

so yogīṁdraḥ, kapīṁdraḥ.

(4) A prince, king.

(5) The pupil of the right eye.

(6) N. of the plant kuṭaja.

(7) Night.

(8) One of the divisions of bhāratavarṣa.

(9) N. of the 26th Yoga. (10) The human or animal soul.

(11) A vegetable poison.

(12) The Yoga star in the 26th Nakshatra.

(13) Greatness. —drā The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī. [Indra, the god of the

firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is

placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an

uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the

Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is

sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a

destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭaka, and in Rv. 10. 90. 13 he is

said to have sprung from the mouth of Purusha. He is of a ruddy or golden

colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden

chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the

thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the

demous of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi,

Vṛtra, Śambara, Namuchi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles,

and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his

worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain,

and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the

Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses

arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite

food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achievements

(cf. Rv. 10. 119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to

invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother;

a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the

deliverer and comforter of his servants. He is a wall of defence; his friend

is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly

those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts

of temporal blessings, as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence,

prosperous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra’s wife is

Indrani, who is invoked among the goddesses.

Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in

the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and

Dākṣāyaṇi or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahma, Viṣṇu and Maheśa

(though in some places Viṣṇu is regarded as his younger brother, cf. R.

14. 59, 15. 40), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is commonly

styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is

the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is

called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends

down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly

dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology

is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of

which is his seduction of Ahalya, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and

for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage

impressed upon him a 1000 marks resembling the female organ, and he

was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed

into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the

Rāmāyaṇa Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off

to Laṅkā by Rāvaṇa’s son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received

the title of ‘Indrajit.’ It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the

gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a

punishment for his seduction of Ahalya. He is also represented as being in

constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending

down nymphs to beguile their minds (see. Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is

said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut

off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories

are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, grandson of

Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that

he and Kṛṣṇa were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the

latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in

spite of Indra’s resistance. His wife is Indrani, the daughter of the demon

Puloman, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of

Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his

achievements, e. g. vṛtrahan, balabhid, pākaśāsana, gotrabhid,

puraṁdara, śatakratu, jiṣṇu, namucisūdana &c. (see Ak. I. 1. 44-47). The

Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvati; his garden, Nandana;

his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow,

and his sword, Paranja].

— Comp.

—agniḥ the fire produced from the contact of clouds; -dhūmaḥ

frost, snow; -devatā the 16th lunarmansion.

—anujaḥ, —avarajaḥ an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Narayaṇa.

—ariḥ an Asura or demon.

—avasānaḥ a desert.

—aśanaḥ 1. hemp (dried and chewed). —2. the shrub which bears

the seed used in jeweller’s weight, (guṁjāvṛkṣa) —āyudhaṁ Indra’s

weapon, the rainbow; iṁdrāyudhadyotitatoraṇāṁkaṁ R. 7. 4, 12. 79; K.

127. (

—dhaḥ) 1. N. of horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapinjala changed into a

horse). —2. a horse marked with black about the eyes. (

—dhā) a kind of leech.

—āsanaṁ 1. the throne of Indra. —2. a throne in general. —3. a

foot of five short syllables.

—ijyaḥ N. of bṛhaspati the preceptor of gods.

—īśvaraḥ one of the forms of Śiva-linga.

—utsavaḥ a festival honouring Indra.

—ṛṣabha a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an

epithet of the earth.

—karman m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra’s deeds).

—kīlaḥ 1. N. of the mountain maṁdara. —2. a rock. (

—laṁ) the banner of Indra.

—kuṁjaraḥ Indra’s elephant, Airāvata.

—kūṭaḥ N. of a mountain.

—kṛṣṭa a. ‘ploughed by Indra,’ growing exuberantly or in a wild

state. (

—ṣṭaḥ) a kind of corn produced by rain-water.

—ketuḥ Indra’s banner.

—kośaḥ —ṣaḥ, —ṣakaḥ 1. a couch, sofa. —2. a plat-form. —3. a

projection of the roof of a house. —4. a pin or bracket projecting from the

wall (nāgadaṁta). —giriḥ the maheṁdra mountain.

—guruḥ, ācāryaḥ the teacher of Indra; i. e. bṛhaspati. —gopaḥ, —

gopakaḥ [iṁdro gopo rakṣako’sya, varṣābhavatvāttasya] a kind of insect

of red or white colour; K. 100.

—caṁdanaṁ the white sandal wood.

—cāpaṁ, —dhanus n. 1. a rainbow; vidyutvaṁtaṁlalitavanitāḥ

seṁdracāpaṁ sacitrāḥ Me. 64; Śi. 7. 4. —2. the bow of Indra.

—chaṁdas n. [iṁdra iva sahasranetreṇa sahasragucchena

chādyate] a necklace consisting of 1000 strings.

—jananaṁ Indra’s birth.

—jananīya a. treating of Indra’s birth (as a work).

—jā a. Ved. born or arising from Indra.

—jālaṁ [iṁdrasya parameśvarasya jālaṁ māyeva] 1. the net of

Indra. —2. a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war. —3.

deception, cheating. —4. conjur ing, jugglery, magical tricks;

svapneṁdrajālasadṛśaḥ khalu jīvalokaḥ Śānti. 2. 2; K. 105.

—jālika a. [iṁdrajāla-ṭhan] deceptive, unreal, delusive. (

—kaḥ) a juggler, conjurer.

—jit m. ‘conqueror of Indra’, N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed

by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda, a son Rāvaṇa.

When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son

Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat,

Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which

he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to

Lanka. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release,

and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, ‘conqueror of Indra’; but the

victor refused to release his prisoner unless he were promised

immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he

strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is

represented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was

engaged in a sacrifice]. -haṁtṛ or vijayin m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa.

—jyeṣṭha a. Ved. led by Indra.

—tāpanaḥ the thundering of clouds.

—tūlaṁ, tūlakaṁ a flock of cotton.

—damanaḥ the son of Bāṇāsura.

—dāruḥ the tree Pinus Devadāru.

—druḥ, drumaḥ 1 the plant Terminalia Arjuna (arjuna). —2. the

plant kuṭaja. —dvīpaḥ —paṁ one of the 9 Dvīpas or divisions of the

continent (of India).

—dhvajaḥ a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra.

—nakṣatraṁ Indra’s lunar mansion phalgunī. —netraṁ 1. the eye of

Indra. —2. the number one thousand.

—nīlaḥ [iṁdra iva nīlaḥ śyāmaḥ] a sapphire; R. 13. 54; 16. 69; Me.

46, 77.

—nīlakaḥ an emerald.

—patnī Indra’s wife, śacī. —parṇī, —puṣpā N. of a medicinal plant.

—parvataḥ 1. the maheṁdra mountain. —2. a blue mountain.

—putrā N. of aditi. —purogama, —puraḥsara, —śreṣṭa a. led or

preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head.

—purohitaḥ N. of bṛhaspati. (—tā) the asterism Pushya.

—prasthaṁ N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the

Pāṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi);

iṁdraprasthagamastāvatkāri mā saṁtu cedayaḥ Śi. 2. 63.

—praharaṇaṁ Indra’s weapon, the thunderbolt.

—bheṣajaṁ dried ginger.

—makhaḥ a sacrifice in honour of Indra.

—mahaḥ 1. a festival in honour of Indra. —2. the rainy season; —

kāmukaḥ a dog.

—mādana a. animating or delighting Indra.

—medin a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra.

—yavaḥ, —vaṁ seed of the Kutaja tree.

—luptaḥ, —ptaṁ, —luptakaṁ 1. excessive baldness of the head. —2.

loss of beard.

—lokaḥ Indra’s world, Svarga or Paradise.

—lokeśaḥ 1. lord of the Indra’s world, i. e. Indra. —2. a guest (who,

if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host).

—vaṁśā, —vajrā N. of two metres, see Appendix.

—vallarī, —vallī N. of a plant (pārijāta) or of iṁdravāruṇī. —vastiḥ

[iṁdrasya ātmanaḥ vastiriva] the calf (of the leg).

—vātatama a. Ved. desired by Indra.

—vāyū (du) Indra and Vayu.

—vāruṇī, —vāruṇikā Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd (Mar. moṭhī

kaṁvaḍaLa). —vāh a. carrying Indra.

—vṛkṣaḥ the Devadaru tree.

—vṛddhā a kind of abscess.

—vaiḍūryaṁ a kind of precious stone.

—vrataṁ Indra’s rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who

is said to follow iṁdravrata when he distributes benefits as Indra pours

down rain); vārṣikāṁścaturo māsān yarthedropyabhivarṣati .

tathābhivarṣetsvaṁ rāṣṭraṁ kāmairiṁdravrataṁ caran … —śaktiḥ f.

Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified.

—śatruḥ 1. an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on

the last syllable), an epithet of prahlāda; R. 7. 35. —2. [iṁdraḥ śatruḥ

yasya] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of vṛtra (when the accent is

on the first syllable). (This refers to a. legend in the Śat. Br., where it is

said that Vṛtra’s father intended his son to become the destroyer of

Indra, and asked him to say iṁdraśatrurvadhasva &c., but who, through

mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra;

cf. Śik. 52:

—maṁtro hīnaḥ svarato varṇato vā mithyāprayukto na

tamarthamāha . sa vāgvajro yajamānaṁ hināsti yatheṁdraśatruḥ

svaratoparādhāt … —śalabhaḥ a kind of insect.

—saṁdhā connection or alliance with Indra.

—sārathiḥ. 1. N of Mātalī. —2. an epithet of Vāyu, driving in the

same carriage with Indra.

—sutaḥ, —sūnuḥ 1. N. of

(a) Jayanta;

(b) Arjuna;

(c) Vāli, the king of monkeys. —2. N. of the arjuna tree. —surasaḥ,

—surā a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications

(nirguṁḍī). —senā Indra’s missile or host. —senānīḥ the leader of Indra’s

armies, epithet of Kārtikeya. —stut m., —stomaḥ 1. praise of Indra, N. of a

particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies. —2. a sacrifice

in honour of Indra. —havaḥ invocation of Indra. —hastaḥ a kind of

medicament.

उत्पल — utpala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899utpala «ut-pala» n. (and m. , ( «pal» «to move» ; fr. «pal» = «paṭ», «to

burst open» , the blossom of the blue lotus (Nymphaea Caerulea) &c.

n. a seed of the Nymphaea

n. the plant Costus Speciosus

n. any water-lily

n. any flower

n. a particular hell ()

utpala «ut-pala» m. N. of a Nāga

utpala «ut-pala» m. of an astronomer

utpala «ut-pala» m. of a lexicographer

utpala «ut-pala» m. of several other men

utpala «ut-pala» (fr. «pala», «flesh», with 1. «ud» in the sense of «apart»),

fleshless, emaciated ; n. N. of a hell

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

utpala a. [utkrāṁtaḥ palaṁ māṁsaṁ] Fleshless, emaciated, lean. —lī A

kind of cake made with unwinnowed corn. —laṁ

(1) A blue lotus, any lotus or water-lily; navāvatāraṁ

kamalādivotpalaṁ R. 3. 36, 12. 86; Me. 26; nīlotpalapatradhārayā S. 1.

18; so rakta,-

(2) The plant Costus Speciosus.

(3) A plant in general.

— Comp.

—akṣa, —cakṣus a. lotuseyed.

—ābha a. lotus-like.

—gaṁdhikaṁ a variety of sandal of the colour of brass (which is

very fragrant).

—patraṁ 1. a lotus-leaf. —2. a wound caused by a female’s finger-

nail, nail-print. —3. a Tilaka or mark on the forehead made with sandal.

—4. a broad-bladed knife or lancet.

—patrakaṁ a broad-bladed knife or lancet.

—bhedyakaḥ a kind of bandage.

—mālā N. of a lexicon.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

utpala 1) n. a) «eine Nymphaea» (Pflanze) AK. 1, 2, 3, 36. TRIK. 1, 2, 32.

H. 1163 (nach dem Sch. und SIDDH. K. 251, «a», 4 auch m.). an. 3, 626

(= indīvara). MBH. 3, 433. SUŚR. 1, 29, 5. 41, 9. 141, 26. 145, 22. 220, 7.

223, 16. 226, 2. 2, 30, 7. RAGH. 3, 36. 12, 86. MEGH. 27.

kamalotpalamālinī MBH. 3, 11604. nalinīṁ prabhūtakamalotpalām 16093.

R. 4, 25, 15. 44, 29. sāśrunetrotpalābhiḥ (yuvatibhiḥ) AMAR. 2. 26.

karṇotpalatāṁ prapede RAGH. 7, 23. «Saamenkorn einer Nymphaea»

SUŚR. 2, 20, 15. Vgl. nīlotpala, raktotpala. Nach AK. 2, 4, 4, 14. H. an.

und MED. l. 62 auch «Costus speciosus» (kuṣṭha); nach MED. überdies

«jede Blume.» — b) N. einer Hölle (buddh.) BURN. Intr. 201. — 2) m. N.

pr. eines Mannes RĀJA-TAR. 4, 494. 707. 5, 127. 460. erbaut ein

Heiligthum utpalasvāmin 4, 694. ein Astronom Verz. d. B. H. No. 883. ein

Nāga Lot. de la b. l. 3. — 3) f. a) -lā N. pr. eines Flusses HARIV. LANGL. t.

1, p. 508. Vgl. utpalavatī. — b) -lī «eine Art Gebäck» (tuṣacarpaṭī) MED. l.

62. — 4) adj. «fleischlos» H. an. 3, 626. — In der ersten Bed. wohl von pal

= paṭ mit ud («bersten»), in der letzten ud + pala.

utpala 1) a) «die Blüthe der Nymphaea», nicht die Pflanze selbst, welche

utpalinī heisst. saṁpatsu mahatāṁ cittaṁ bhavatyutpalakomalam Spr.

3188. Vgl. mahotpala. — 2) Verfasser des Wörterbuchs Utpalamālā Verz.

d. Oxf. H. 126,a,11. ein Astronom, = bhaṭṭotpala 329,a, N. 780. 338,a,2.

KERN in Pref. zu VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6. fg. 61. fg.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

utpala utpala, i. e. probably ud-paṭ + a (with l for ṭ),

I. n. A blue lotus, Nymphaea caerulea, Bhartṛ. 2, 56.

II. m. A proper name, Rājat. 5, 127.

— Comp. nīla-, m. a blue lotus, Nymphaea cyanea Roxb., Rām. 4, 44, 91.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

utpala n. the blue lotus.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

utpala ut-pala, n. (blue) lotus at a later stage called kamala; m. N.: m.

id.;

-pura, n. N. of a town built by Utpala;

-vana, n. bed of lotuses;

-śāka, n. N. of a plant;

-akṣa, m. N. of a king;

-āpīḍa, m. N. of a king.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

utpala na° ud + pala—ac . 1 nīlapadme, 2 kumudādau, 3 kuṣṭhoṣaghau ca

. utkrāntaṁ palaṁ māsam atyā° samā° . 4 māṁsaśūnye tri° .

gaṇḍasvedāpanayanarujāklāntakarṇotpalānān megha° .

yatrotpaladalaklaivyamastrāṇyāpuḥ suradviṣām muhūrtakarṇotpalatāṁ

prapede navāvatāraṁ kamalādivotpalam raghuḥ

anyonyamutpīḍayadutpalā kṣyāḥ kumā° . tacca trividhaṁ nīlaṁ

raktaṁśvetañca dhruvaṁsa nīlotpalapatradhārayā śaku° .

कर्ण — karṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899karṇa m. («kṛt» ; 1. «kṝ» , the ear («api karṇe», behind the ear or back,

from behind [cf. «apikarṇa»]; «karṇe», [in dram.] into the ear, in a low

voice, aside ; «karṇaṁ» «dā», to give ear to, listen to ; «karṇam ā-gam»,

to come to one’s ear, become known to

m. the handle or ear of a vessel &c.

m. the helm or rudder of a ship

karṇa m. (in geom.) the hypothenuse of a triangle or the diagonal of a

tetragon &c.

m. the diameter of a circle, Sūryas

karṇa m. (in prosody) a spondee

m. Cassia Fistula

m. Calotropis Gigantea

m. N. of a king of Aṅga (and elder brother by the mother’s side of the

Pāṇḍu princes, being the son of the god Sūrya by Pṛithā or Kuntī, before

her marriage with Pāṇḍu; afraid of the censure of her relatives, Kuntī

deserted the child and exposed it in the river, where it was found by a

charioteer named Adhi-ratha and nurtured by his wife Rādhā; hence

Karṇa is sometimes called Sūta-putra or Sūta-ja, sometimes Rādheya,

though named by his foster-parents Vasu-ṣeṇa) &c.

m. N. of several other men

karṇa m. (mfn. «karṇa»), eared, furnished with ears or long ears

m. furnished with chaff (as grain)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

karṇa a. Ved.

(1) Having long ears.

(2) Furnished with chaff (as grain). —rṇaḥ

(1) The ear; aho khalabhujaṁgasya viparītavadhakramaḥ . karṇe

lagati cānyasya prāṇairanyo viyujyate .. Pt. 1. 305, 304 also; karṇaṁ dā

to listen; karṇamāgam to come to the ear, become known; R. 1. 9; karṇe

kṛ to put round the ear; Ch. P. 10; karṇe kathayati whispers in the ear; cf.

ṣaṭkarṇa, catuṣkarṇa &c. also.

(2) The handle or ear of a vessel.

(3) The helm or rudder of a ship.

(4) The hypotenuse of a triangle.

(5) (In prosody) A spondee.

(6) N. of a celebrated warrior on the side of the Kauravas mentioned

in the Mahabhārata. [He was the son of Kuntī begotten on her by the god

Sun while she was yet a virgin residing at her father’s house (see Kuntī).

When the child was born, Kunti, afraid of the censure of her relatives and

also of public scandal, threw the boy into the river where he was found by

Adhiratha, charioteer of Dhṛtarāṣṭra and given over to his wife Rādhā

who brought him up like her own child; whence Karṇa is often called

Sūtaputra, Rādheya &c. Karṇa, when grown up, was made king of Anga

by Duryodhana, and became by virtue of his many generous acts a type

of charity. On one occasion Indra (whose care it was to favour his son

Arjuna) disguised himself as a Brāhmaṇa and cajoled him out of his divine

armour and ear-rings, and gave him in return a charmed javelin. With a

desire to make himself proficient in the science of war, he, calling himself

a Brāhmaṇa went to Paraśurāma and learnt that art from him. But his

secret did not long remain concealed. On one occasion when Paraśurāma

had fallen asleep with his head resting on Karṇa’s lap, a worm (supposed

by some to be the form assumed by Indra himself to defeat Karṇa’s

object) began to eat into his lap and made a deep rent in it; but as Karṇa

showed not the least sign of pain, his real character was discovered by

his preceptor who cursed him that the art he had learnt would avail him

not in times of need. On another occasion he was cursed by a Brāhmaṇa

(whose cow he had unwittingly slain in chase) that the earth would eat

up the wheel of his chariot in the hour of trial. Even with such

disadvantages as these, he acquitted himself most valiantly in the great

war between the Pāṇḍavas and Kauravas, while acting as generalissimo

of the Kaurava forces after Bhīṣma and Droṇa had fallen. He maintained

the field against the Pāṇḍavas for three days, but on the last day he was

slain by Arjuna while the wheel of his chariot had sunk down into the

earth. Karṇa was the most intimate friend of Duryodhana, and with

Śakuni joined him in all the various schemes and plots that were devised

from time to time for the destruction of the Pāṇḍavas.]

— Comp.

—aṁjaliḥ the auditory passage of the outer ear.

—anujaḥ Yudhiṣṭhira.

—aṁtika a. close to the ear; svanasi mṛdu karṇāṁtikacaraḥ S. 1.

24.

—aṁduḥ —dū f. an ornament for the ear, ear-ring.

—arpaṇaṁ giving ear, listening.

—āsphālaḥ the flapping of the elephant’s ears.

—iṁduḥ f. a semicircular ear-ring.

—uttaṁsaḥ an ear-ornament or merely an ornament (according to

some authorities). (Mammaṭa says that here karṇa means

karṇāsthitatva; cf. also his remark ad loc:

—karṇāvataṁsādipade karṇādidhvaninirmitaḥ .

saṁnidhānārthabodhārthaṁ sthiteṣvetatsamarthanaṁ .. K. P. 7).

—upakarṇikā rumour; (lit. ‘from ear to ear’).

—ūrṇaḥ a kind of deer.

—kīṭā —ṭī] 1. a worm with many feet and of a reddish colour. —2. a

small centipede.

—kṣveḍaḥ (in medic.) a constant noise in the ear.

—gūthaṁ ear-wax. (—thaḥ) —gūthakaḥ hardening of the wax of the

ear.

—gocara a. audible

—grāhaḥ a helmsman.

—japa a. (also karṇejapa) a secret traducer, talebearer, informer.

—japaḥ —jāpaḥ slandering, tale-bearing, calumniating.

—jalūkā a small centipede.

—jāhaṁ the root of the ear; api karṇajāhaviniveśitānanaḥ Māl. 5. 8.

—jit m. ‘conqueror of Karṇa’, epithet of Arjuna, the third Pāṇḍava

prince.

—jvaraḥ pain to the ear; U. 5. 6.

—tālaḥ the flapping of the elephant’s ears, the noise made by it;

vistāritaḥ kuṁjarakarṇatālaiḥ R. 7. 39, 9. 71; Śi. 17. 37.

—darpaṇaḥ an ear-ring.

—duduṁbhiḥ = karṇakīṭā. —dhāraḥ a helmsman, a pilot;

akarṇadhārā jaladhau viplaveteha nauriva H. 3. 2; avinayanadīkarṇadhāra

karṇa Ve. 4.

—dhāriṇī a female elephant.

—pathaḥ the range of hearing.

—paraṁparā from ear to ear, hearsay; iti karṇapaṁraparaya .

śrutaṁ Ratn. 1.

—parvan n. the eighth (i. e. Karṇa) section of the Mahābhārata.

—pākaḥ inflammation of the outer ear.

—pāliḥ —lī f. 1. the lobe of the ear. —2. the outer edge of the ear. (

—lī) an ornament of the ear.

—pāśaḥ a beautiful ear; U. 6. 27.

—puṭaṁ the auditory passage of the ear.

—pūraḥ 1. an ornament (of flowers &c.) worn round the ear, an

ear-ring; idaṁ ca karatalaṁ kimiti karṇapūratāmāropitaṁ K. 60. —2. the

Aśoka tree. —3. the Śirīṣa tree. —4. the blue lotus.

—pūrakaḥ 1. an earring. —2. the Kadamba tree. —3. the Aśoka

tree. —4. the blue lotus.

—praṇādaḥ, —pratināhaḥ a disease of the ear.

—prāṁtaḥ the lobe of the ear.

—phalaḥ a kind of fish.

—bhūṣaṇaṁ, —bhūṣā an ear-ornament.

—mūlaṁ the root of the ear; R. 12. 2.

—moṭī a form of Durgā.

—yoni a. having the ear as a source.

—latā-latikā the lobe of the ear.

—vaṁśaḥ a raised platform or dais of bamboo.

—varjita a. earless. (

—taḥ) a snake.

—vivaraṁ, —chidraṁ,-puraṁ,-raṁbhraṁ the auditory passage of

the ear.

—viṣ f. ear-wax.

—viṣaṁ ‘poisoning the ear’, slandering, backbiting.

—vedhaḥ piercing the ears to put ear-rings on.

—vedhanī,-vedhanikā an instrument for piercing the ear.

—veṣṭaḥ, —veṣṭanaṁ an ear-ring.

—śaṣkulī the outer part of the ear (leading to the auditory

passage); N. 2. 8.

—śūlaḥ, —laṁ ear-ache.

—śrava a. audible, loud; karṇaśrave’nile Ms. 4. 102.

—śrāvaḥ, —saṁśravaḥ ‘running of the ear’, discharge of pus or

ichorous matter from the ear.

—sūḥ f. Kuntī, mother of Karṇa.

—hīma a. earless (

—naḥ) a snake.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

karṇa m. Uṇ. 3, 10. ŚĀNT. 2, 6. 1) «Ohr» NIR. 1, 9. AK. 2, 6, 2, 45. TRIK.

2, 6, 31. 3, 3, 124. H. 574. an. 2, 134. MED. ṇ. 4. eṣṭā narā nicetārā ca

karṇaiḥ ṚV. 1, 184, 2. 2, 39, 6. 4, 23, 8. śrāvayedasya karṇā vājayadhyai

29, 3. 6. 9, 6. 10, 106, 9. AV. 10, 2, 6. karṇagṛhya «am Ohr fassend» ṚV.

8, 59, 15. karṇagṛhīta TS. 6, 1, 7, 6. karṇatas «aus dem Ohre weg» AV. 9,

8, 3. bhadrāya karṇaḥ krośatu KAUŚ. 58. M. 8, 125. 234. SUŚR. 1, 337, 7.

PAÑCAT. 167, 15. MEGH.45. 68. 101. ŚĀK. 8. karṇaśirīṣa «eine am Ohr

befestigte Śir.-Blume» 29. karṇe «in’s Ohr» (als scenische Bemerk.)

MṚCCH. 63, 20. ceṭyāḥ karṇe 89, 17. 18. 20. MĀLAV. 45, 18.

karṇāvapidhāya ŚAT. BR. 14, 8, 10, 1. M. 2, 200. MṚCCH. 123, 16.

karṇaṁ dā «sein Ohr hinhalten, hinhorchen» 163, 21. ŚĀK. 8, 21. 18, 8.

27, 10. 44, 7. 48, 22. 59, 2. 30. karṇamāgam «zu Jmdes Ohren kommen»

RAGH. 1, 9. karṇe ‘paraṁ spṛśati hantyaparaṁ samūlam PAÑCAT. I, 339.

karṇe lagati (bhujaṁgaḥ) cānyasya prāṇairanyo viyujyate 340. tacchrutvā

mārjāro bhūmiṁ spṛṣṭvā karṇau spṛśati (als Zeichen, dass sie das

Gesagte nicht hören wolle) HIT. 19, 20. karṇanāsā f. sg. «Ohren und

Nase» R. 3, 24, 22. ṣaṭkarṇo («woran sechs Ohren Theil genommen

haben») bhidyate mantraścatuṣkarṇaḥ sthiro bhavet. dvikarṇasya tu

mantrasya brahmāpyantaṁ na gacchati.. VET. 3, 10. 11. Adj. compp. auf

karṇa sind paroxytona, wenn das vorangehende Wort eine Farbe oder ein

am Ohr angebrachtes Merkmal (beim Viehe; der Auslaut eines solchen

Wortes häufig verlängert P. 6, 3, 115) ist; so auch bei Vergleichungen und

wenn das comp. ein nomen appell. oder propr. ist P. 6, 2, 112. 113.

śuklakarṇa, śaṅkukarṇa, gokarṇa, maṇikarṇa Sch. Das f. der adj. compp.

geht bald auf ā, bald auf ī aus P. 4, 1, 55, 64. śaṅkukarṇā (go) MBH. 1,

6662. (rākṣasīḥ) trikarṇīḥ śaṅkukarṇīśca lambakarṇīḥ — ekakarṇīśca R. 5,

17, 24. Vgl. āviddhakarṇā, -karṇī, ākhukarṇī, pūtikarṇa, plīhākarṇa,

vikarṇa, hiraṇyakarṇa. — 2) Irrig scheint die Trennung api karṇe zu sein

statt apikarṇe «hinter den Ohren» d. i. «im Rücken, von hinten, hinterher»

in den Stellen: śvā nvasya jambhiṣadapi karṇe varāhayuḥ ṚV. 10, 86, 4. ā

vāmatyā api karṇe vahantu 5, 31, 9. sudītayo vo adruho ‘pi karṇe

tarasvinaḥ samṛkvabhiḥ 8, 86, 12. Vgl. apikarṇa (wo das Citat in 6, 48, 16

zu verbessern ist). — 3) «Handhabe» oder «eine andere Hervorragung auf

beiden Seiten eines Gefässes u.s.w.»: ubhā karṇā hiraṇyayā ṚV. 8, 61, 12.

karṇasahitāḥ (iṣṭakāḥ) KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 6, 3; vgl. MAHĪDH. zu VS. 13, 54. —

4) «Steuerruder»: hatakarṇeva naurjale R. 6, 23, 30. Vgl. karṇagrāha,

karṇadhāra. — 5) N. einer Pflanze, = suvarṇāli MED. «Cassia Fistula Lin.»

und «Calotropis gigantea» WILS. — 6) «Spondeus» COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II,

151. — 7) «Hypotenuse, Diagonale eines Tetragons» COLEBR. Alg. 59.

106. Misc. Ess. II, 403. fgg. — 8) N. pr. eines Königs von Añga und eines

der Führer der Kuruiden, eines Sohnes der Kuntī (vor ihrer Verheirathung

mit Pāṇḍu) und des Sonnengottes. Als Adoptivsohn von Sūta Adhiratha

heisst er auch sūtaputra und sūtaja. TRIK. 2, 8, 19. 3, 3, 124. H. 711. H.

an. MED. MBH. 1, 2427. 2764. fgg. 4411. fgg. 5379. fgg. 3, 16098. fgg. 5,

5301. fgg. 15, 826. fgg. BHAG. 11, 26. HARIV. 1709. 4058. BHĀG. P. 9,

23, 13. VP. 437. 446. Ursprung der Namen Vaikartana und Karṇa MBH. 1,

2783. 4411. Unter den Söhnen Dhṛtarāṣṭra’s MBH. 1, 2730. 4542. ein

Sohn Viśvajit’s HARIV. 1704. im Gefolge Śiva’s VYĀḌI zu H. 210. Bei den

Buddhisten ein Sohn Mahāsaṁmata’s und König in Potāla LALIT. 411

(SCHIEEFNER, Lebensb. 2322: karṇika).

karṇa adj. «auritus, geöhrt, langohrig»: gardabha VS. 24, 40. śvāvidh AV.

5, 13, 9. karṇāstrayo yāmāḥ TS. 5, 6, 15, 1. VS. 24, 3. «geöhrt» von

Getraidekörnern heisst viell. so. v. a. «mit Spelzen versehen»:

karṇāṁścākarṇāṁśca taṇḍulānvicinuyāt TS. 1, 8, 9, 3. Zum adj. ist

vermuthlich auch zu ziehen: ukṣante aśvāṁ atyāṁ ivājiṣu nadasya

karṇaisturayanta āśubhiḥ ṚV. 2, 34, 3.

karṇa 1) karṇagṛhya KĀṬH. 23, 10. — 3) paśavo vā etasyāḥ karṇaḥ KĀṬH.

21, 9; vgl. paśavo vai karṇakāḥ ŚAT. BR. 9, 2, 3, 40. Füge «Oehr, Oese»

hinzu; auch am Joch Comm. zu TS. 1, 427, 5. — 4) akarṇā naurivāmbhasi

R. GORR. 2, 82, 6. — 5) es ist wohl suvarṇālu gemeint. — 7) SŪRYAS. 2,

41. 51. GOLĀDHY. 5, 16. 36. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 8, 5, 11. — 8) N. pr.

eines Fürsten, Sohnes des Rāmacandra und Vaters des Ratnasena,

Inschr. im Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 5, Śl. 8. Vaters des Viśokadeva

Verz. d.Oxf. H. 280,b,1.

karṇa 1) Sp. 122, Z. 5 lies karṇamārgam. — 7) «Durchmesser» SŪRYAS. 1,

59. 12, 84. ardha- «Halbmesser» 2, 61. 13, 5. karṇārdha dass. 3, 41.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

karṇa 1 I The eldest son of Kuntī. Though he was the brother of the

Pāṇḍavas he joined sides with the Kauravas and became the King of

Aṅga. So the name of Karṇa comes in the genealogy of the Aṅga royal

family.

karṇa 2 II A son of Dhrtarāṣṭra. Bhīmasena killed this Karṇa. (Chapter

67, Bhīṣma Parva).

karṇa 3 III Younger brother of Ghaṇṭa. See under Ghaṇṭākarṇa.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

karṇa karṇa, m.

1. The ear, Man. 8, 125; with dā, To listen, Śāk. 8, 21.

2. A rudder, Rām. 6, 23, 30.

3. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2427.

— Comp. When the latter part of a comp. adj. the f. ends in ṇā and ṇī.

Aśva-, m. a timber tree, Vatica robusta, Rām. 1, 26, 15. utkarṇa, i. e. ud-,

adj. with the ears erect, Ragh. (Calc. ed. 15, 11. kumbha-, m. 1. a name

of Śiva, MBh. 12, 10350. 2. the name of a Rākṣasa, Rām. 1, 3, 34. go-, m.

1. a kind of deer, Antelope picta, Rām. 2, 103, 41. 2. a kind of arrow,

MBh. 8, 4668. 3. a span from the tip of the thumb to that of the little

finger, MBh. 2, 2324. 4. the name of a holy place, Rām. 1, 42, 13. 5. a

name of Śiva, Kathās. 22, 218. catuṣkarṇa, i. e. catur-, adj. heard only by

four ears, Pañc, i. d. 112. tri-, adj., f. ṇī, having three ears, Rām. 5, 18,

24. dadhi-, m. a proper name, Pañc. 165, 9. lamba-, m. 1. a goat. 2. an

elephant. 3. a Rākṣasa. vi-, adj. earless. śaṅku-,

I. adj., f. ṇā, having ears like a javelin, MBh. 1, 6662; ṇī, Rām. 5, 18, 24.

II. m. 1. an ass. 2. a proper name, Pañc. 87, 12. ṣaṭkarṇa, i. e. ṣaṣ-, adj.

heard by six ears, Lass. 3, 10. stabdha- (vb. stambh), adj. having the

ears erect. hastikarṇa, i. e. hastin-, m. 1. the castor oil tree. 2. the Butea

frondosa. 3. a demigod. 4. the name of a district, Rājat. 5, 32.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

karṇa [1] m. (adj. —° f. ā & ī) ear (lit. & fig.), rudder; N. of a hero etc.

karṇa [2] karṇa a. having (long) ears.

karṇa a. having (long) ears.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

karṇa karṇa, m. (-° a., f. ā, ī) ear; handle; rudder; N. of several men, esp.

of a son of Kuntī; a. having care or handles; long-eared (also ā);

-kuvalayam, n. lotus attached to the ear;

-cāmara, n. whisk adorning the ears of elephants;

-jāpa, m. tale-bearing;

-tā, f. condition, of an ear;

-tāla, m. flapping of elephant’s ears (-°);

-dhāra, m. helmsman; sailor: -tā, f. helmsmanship;

-nīlotpala, n. blue lotus attached to the ear;

-pa, m. N.;

-pattraka, m. flap of the ear (tragus);

-patha, m. ear-shot, hearing: -m, ā-yā, or upa+i, come to the ears: —

atithi, m. = come to the ears;

-paraṁparā, f. passing from ear to ear, gossip;

-pāśa, m. beautiful ear;

-pūra, m. n. ear ornament, esp. flowers: -pūraka, m. N. of a chattering

servant;

-pūrī-kṛ, turn into an ear ornament;

-bhaṅga, m. curve of the ears;

-bhūṣana, n. ear ornament;

-mūla, n. root of the ear (where it is attached to the head);

-vaṁśa, m. flat projecting bamboo roof;

-vat, a. having ears;

-viṣ, f. ear-wax;

-viṣa, n. poison for the ears;

-veṣṭa, m. ear-ring: *-na, n. id.;

-śirīṣa, n. Śirīṣa flower attached to the ear;

-śrava, a. audible;

-su-bhaga, a. pleasant to the ear.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

karṇa bhedane adantacurādi° ubha° saka° seṭ . karṇayati te acakarṇat ta

. karṇayām—babhūva āsa . cakāra cakre . karṇayitā karṇayiṣyati .

karṇanam karṇaḥ karṇitaḥ karṇayitum . karṇayan karṇayamānaḥ .

karṇayitvā ākarṇya karṇī . karṇyate akarṇi akarṇiṣātām akarṇayiṣātām

ā + karṇa—śravaṇe . ākarṇayannutsukahaṁsanādān bhaṭṭiḥ .

mithastadākarṇanasajjakarṇayā devākarṇaya suśrutena carakasyoktena

jāne’svilam . adastadā’karṇiphalāḍhyajīvilam iti ca naiṣa° . ākarṇya

samprati rutaṁ caraṇāyudhānām sā° da° .

karṇa pu° . karṇyate ākarṇyate’nena karṇa karaṇe ac kīryante śabdā

vāyunā’tra kṝ—nan vā . 1 śrotre śabdajñānasādhane indriyabhede

tadādhāre 2 golake ca . śrotrañca karṇaśaṣukalyavacchinnanabhorūpamiti

naiyāyikādayaḥ . sātvikākāśasūkṣmāṁśa iti vedāntinaḥ sāṁkhyādayaśca

svīcakruḥ . tatrādyamate śabdotpattideśe śrotrasya gamanābhāvena

anyatrotpannaśabdagrahaṇāsambhavaḥ . tathā hi ākāśasyaikatve’pi

upādhibhedena bhedāt yadīyakarṇaśaṣkulīpradeśe

śabdasamavāyastasyaiva śrāvaṇam nānyasya, tataśca

vīcitaraṅganyāyena kadambakorakakanyāyena vā śabdotpattāvapi

śabdotpattideśasya śrotuśca vibhinnadeśasthatayā na śabdopalabdhiḥ

syāt . atastattaddeśasthasya śīghraṁ dhāvamānasya vāyoḥ

saṁyogavibhāgādayaḥ śrotuḥ śabdādabhivyañjakāḥ . tadetat

śaṅkāpūrvakam mīmāṁsābhāṣye samarthitam yathā .

yadi śabdaṁ saṁyogavibhāgā evābhivyañjanti na kurvanti,

ākāśaviṣayatvācchabdasya, ākāśasyaikatvāt, ya evāparatra śrotrākāśaḥ,

sa eva deśāntareṣvapīti srughnasyaiḥ saṁyogavibhāgairabhivyaktaḥ

pāṭakiputre’pyupalabhyeta? . yasya punaḥ kurvanti, tasya vāyavīyāḥ

saṁyogavibhāgā vāyvāśritatvādvāyuṣveva kariṣyanti . yathā, tantavaḥ

tantuṣveva paṭaṁ, tasya pāṭaliputreṣvanupalalambhī yuktaḥ,

srughnasthatvātteṣām . yasyāpyabhivyañjanti, tasyāpyeṣa na doṣaḥ, dūre

satyāḥ karṇaśaṣkalyāḥ anupakārakāḥ saṁyogavibhāgāḥ . tena dūre

yacchrotraṁ tena nopalamyate iti . naidadevaṁ, aprāptāścet

saṁyogavibhāgāḥ śrotrasyopakuryuḥ sannikṛṣṭaviprakṛṣṭadeśasthau

yugapacchabdamupalabheyātām na ca yugapadupalabhete .

tasmānnāprāptāḥ upakurvanti, na cedupakurvanti, tasmādanimittaṁ

śabdopalambhane saṁyogavibhāgau iti . naitadevaṁ, abhighātena hi

preritāḥ vāyavastimitāni vāyvantarāṇi pratibādhamānāḥ sarvyatodikkān

saṁyogavibhāgān utpādayanti, yāvadvegamabhipratiṣṭhante . te ca

(saṁyogavibhāgāḥ) vāyorapratyakṣatvāt nopalabhyante . anuparateṣveva

teṣu śabdaḥ upalabhyate, noparateṣu . ato na doṣaḥ . ata eva cānuvātaṁ

dūrādupalabhyate śabdaḥ . vedāntyādimate śabdasya

pañcamūtaguṇatayā śabdādhāraṁ vāyunā jhaṭiti kaṇṇadeśe yathāvegaṁ

dhāvamānena karṇaprāpaṇasambhava stena śabdopalambhaḥ . tanmate

śravaṇendriyasya prāpyakāritvoktirapyetatpareti bodhyam .

karṇasyāviṣṭhātṛdevaśca dik iti karaṇādhiṣaśabde uktam . karṇagrāhyāśca

śabdāstadbhedāstaddharmāśca karṇekṛtaṁ kanakapatramanālapantyā

cogapa° . mithastadākarṇa nasajjakarṇayā naiṣa° tadguṇaiḥ

karṇamāgatya cāpalāya praṇoditaḥ raghuḥ śravaṇendriyasya

sūkṣmatve’pi tadādhārābhiprāyeṇa avalambitakarṇaśaṣkulīkalasīkaṁ

racayannavocata naiṣa° vākyam . 3 suvarṇālīvṛkṣe medi° . trikoṇādikṣetre

4 bhujakoṭisaṁyojakarekhābhede tadrekhāmānajñānopāyaśca līlā° uktaḥ

yathā iṣṭādbāho yaḥ syāttatspardhinyāṁ diśītarobāhuḥ . tryasre caturasre

vā sā koṭiḥ kīrtitā tajjñaiḥ . tatkṛtyoryogapadaṁ karṇo,

doḥkarṇavargayorvivarāt . mūlaṁ koṭiḥ, koṭiśrutikṛtyorantarāt padaṁ

bāhuḥ iti udā° diṅmātramatrocyate bhujaḥ 4 koṭiḥ 3 anayorvargaḥ 16, 9,

tayoryogaḥ 25 tasya mūlam 5 tathāca caturhastabāhuke trihastakoṭike

kṣetre karṇamānam pañca hastāḥ . adhikaṁ kṣetravyavahāraśabde

vakṣyate . asya ca bhujakoṭibhedanāt kṛtidvārā

tayorvargavyāpanāccakarṇatvam . 5 kuṭile ca vyāghāraṇavat prāṇabhṛtaḥ

karṇasahitāḥ kātyā° 17, 6, 0 . karṇena akṣṇayā sahitāḥ saṁgra° vyā°

akṣṇayā kauṭilyena iti kātyā° 5, 4, 15 sū° vyā° karkaḥ . kuntyāḥ

kanyāvasthāyāṁ sūryāt jāte svanāmakhyāte 6 vasuṣeṇe tadutpattikathā

yathā śūronāma yaduśreṣṭovamudevapitā’bhavat . tasya kanyā pṛthā

nāma rūpeṇāsadṛśī bhuvi . pituḥ svasrīyaputrāya so’napatyāya vīryavān .

agramagra pratijñāya svasyāpatyasya vaitadā . agrajāteti tāṁ kanyāṁ

śūro’nugrahakāṅkṣayā . adadat kuntibhojāya sa tāṁ duhitaraṁ tadā . sā

niyuktā piturgeha brāhmaṇātithipūjane . ugramparyacaradghoraṁ

brāhmaṇaṁ śa si tavratam . nigūḍhaniścayaṁ dharmavantaṁ

durvāsasaṁ viduḥ . tamugraṁ śaṁsitātmānaṁ sarvayatnairatoṣayat .

tuṣṭo’bhicārasaṁyuktamāca cakṣe yathāvidhi . uvācacaināṁ bhagavān

prīto’smi subhage! tava . yaṁ yaṁ devaṁ tvametena

mantreṇāvāhayiṣyasi . tasya tasya prasādāttva devi . putrān janiṣyasi .

evamuktā ca sā bālā tadā kautūhalānvitā . kanyā satī

devamarkamājuhāva yaśasvinī . prakāśakartā bhagavāṁstasyāṁ

garbhaṁ daghau tadā . ajījanat sutaṁ tasyāṁ sarvaśastrabhṛtāṁparam .

sakuṇḍalaṁ sakavacaṁ devagarbhaṁ śriyānvitam . divākarasamaṁ

dāptyā cārusaṁrvāṅgabhūṣitam . nigūhamānā jātaṁ vai

bandhupakṣabhayāt tadā . utsasarja jale kuntī taṅkumāraṁ yaśasvinam .

tamutsṛṣṭaṁ jale garbhaṁ rādhābhartā mahāyaśāḥ . rādhāyāḥ

kalpayāmāsa putraṁ so’dhirathistadā . cakraturnāmadheyañca tasya

bālasya tāvubhau . dampatī vasuṣeṇeti dikṣu sarvākhu viśrutam . sa

vardhamāno balavān sarvāstreṣūttamo ‘bhavat . vedāṅgāni ca sarvāṇi

samāpa jayatāṁvaraḥ . yasmin kāle japannāste ghīmān satyaparākramaḥ

. nādeyaṁ brāhmaṇeṣvāsīttasmin kāle mahātmanaḥ . tamindro

brāhmaṇobhūtvā putrārthebhūtabhāvanaḥ . yayāce kuṇḍale vīraṁ

kavacañca sahāṅgajam . utkṛtya karṇohyadadat kavacaṁ kuṇḍale tathā .

śaktiṁ śakrodadau tasmai vismitaścedamabravīt . devāsuramanuṣyāṇāṁ

gandharvoragarakṣasām . yasmin kṣepsyasi durdharva . sa ekona

bhaviṣyati . ṣurā nāma ca tasyāsīdvasuṣeṇa iti kṣitau . tato vaikartanaḥ

karṇaḥ karmaṇā tena so’bhavat . āmuktakavacovīroyastu jajñe

mahāyaśāḥ . sa karṇa iti vikhyātaḥ pṛthāyāḥ prathamaḥ sutaḥ . sa tu

sūtakule vīro vavṛdhe rājasattama . karṇaṁ naranaraśreṣṭhaṁ

sarvaśastrabhṛtāṁ varam . duryodhanasya sacivaṁ mitraṁ

śatruvināśanam . divākarasya taṁ viddhi rājannaṁ śamanuttamam .

tasyāṅgadeśāṣipatāprāptiḥ aṅgādhipaśabde uktā . karṇo’styasya

prāśastyena arśa° ac . 7 lambakarṇe tri° . khaḍgovaiśvadevaḥ śvā kṛṣṇaḥ

karṇogardabhaḥ yaju° 24, 40 . karṇo lamvakarṇaḥ vedadī° . 8 aritre ca

pu° karṇaḥ śrotramaritrañceti durgaḥ . karṇadhāraḥ . hatakarṇeva

naurjale rāmā° .

काल — kāla Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kāla mf («ī» ) n. (fr. 3. «kal»?), black, of a dark colour, dark-blue &c.

kāla m. a black or dark-blue colour

kāla m. the black part of the eye

kāla m. the Indian cuckoo

kāla m. the poisonous serpent Coluber Nāga (= «kālasarpa»)

kāla m. the plant Cassia Sophora

kāla m. a red kind of Plumbago

kāla m. the resin of the plant Shorea robusta

kāla m. the planet Saturn

kāla m. N. of śiva

kāla m. of Rudra

kāla m. of a son of Hrada 189

kāla m. of the prince Kāla-yavana

kāla m. of a brother of king Prasena-jit

kāla m. of a future Buddha

kāla m. of an author of Mantras (= Aśva-ghosha)

kāla m. of a Nāga-rāja

kāla m. of a Rakshas

kāla m. of an enemy of śiva

kāla m. of a mountain

kāla m. of one of the nine treasures

kāla m. a mystical N. of the letter «m»

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ā») f. N. of several plants (Indigofera tinctoria ; Piper

longum ; (perhaps) Ipomoea atropurpurea ; Nigella indica ; Rubia

Munjista ; Ruellia longifolia ; Physalis flexuosa ; Bignonia suaveolens

kāla m. the fruit of the Kālā g. «harītaky-ādi»

kāla m. N. of a «śakti»

kāla m. of a daughter of Daksha (the mother of the Kāleyas or

Kālakeyas, a family of Asuras)

kāla m. N. of Durgā

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. black colour, ink or blacking

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. abuse, censure, defamation

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. a row or succession of black clouds

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. night

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. a worm or animalcule generated in the acetous

fermentation of milk (= «kṣīra-kīṭa» or «kṣāra-kīṭa»)

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. the plant Kālāṇjanī

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. Ipomoea Turpethum

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. a kind of clay

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. Bignonia suaveolens

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. one of the seven tongues or flames of fire

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. a form of Durgā

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. one of the Mātṛis or divine mothers

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. N. of a female evil spirit (mother of the

Kālakeyas) 11552

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. one of the sixteen Vidyā-devīs

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. N. of Satyavatī, wife of king śāntanu and mother

of Vyāsa or Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana (after her marriage she had a son Vicitra-

vīrya, whose widows were married by Kṛiṣṇa-dvaipāyana, and bore to him

Dhṛita-rāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu ; according to other legends Kālī is the wife of

Bhīmasena and mother of Sarvagata

kāla mf («ī» ) n. («ī») f. (with or without «gaṅgā») N. of a river

kāla n. a black kind of Agallochum

kāla n. a kind of perfume («kakkolaka»)

kāla n. iron

kāla m. (3. «kal», «to calculate or enumerate»), [ifc. f. «ā» , a fixed or

right point of time, a space of time, time (in general) &c.

m. the proper time or season for (gen. dat. loc., in comp., inf., or Pot.

with «yad» e.g. «kālaḥ prasthānasya» or «-nāya» or «-ne», time for

departure; «kriyā-kāla», time for action ; «nāyaṁ kālo vilambitum», this is

not the time to delay ; «kālo yad bhuṇjīta bhavān», it is time for you to

eat &c.

m. occasion, circumstance

m. season &c.

m. meal-time (twice a day, hence «ubhau kālau», «in the morning and

in the evening» ; «ṣaṣṭhe kāle», «in the evening of the third day» ;

«ṣaṣṭhānna-kāla», «one who eats only at the sixth meal-time, i.e. who

passes five meals without eating and has no meal till the evening of the

third day» ; or without «anna» e.g. «caturtha-kālam», «at the fourth meal-

time i.e. at the evening of the second day»

m. hour (hence «ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ», «at the sixth hour of the day, i.e.

at noon»

m. a period of time, time of the world (= «yuga»)

m. measure of time, prosody

m. a section, part

m. the end

m. death by age

m. time (as leading to events, the causes of which are imperceptible

to the mind of man), destiny, fate &c.

m. time (as destroying all things), death, time of death (often

personified and represented with the attributes of Yama, regent of the

dead, or even identified with him: hence «kālam-i» or «kālaṁ-kṛ», «to die»

&c.; «kāla» in this sense is frequently connected with «antaka, mṛtyu» e.g.

«abhy-adhāvata prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ», «e attacked the people like Time

the destroyer» ; cf. «kālāntaka; kāla» personified is also a Devarshi in

Indra’s court, and a son of Dhruva

kāla m. («am») acc. ind. for a certain time (e.g. «mahāntaṁ kālam», for a

long time

kāla m. «nitya-k-«, constantly, always

kāla m. «dīrgha-k-«, during a long time

kāla m. («ena») instr. ind. in the course of time &c.

m. with «gacchatā» id.

kāla m. «dīrgheṇa kālena», during a long time

m. after a long time

kāla m. «kālena mahatā» or «bahunā» id.

kāla m. («āt») abl. ind. in the course of time

kāla m. «kālasya dīrghasya» or «mahataḥ» id. &c.

kāla m. «kasya-cit kālasya», after some time

kāla m. («e») loc. ind. in time, seasonably (cf. «a-kāle»)

kāla m. «kāle gacchati», in the course of time

kāla m. «kāle yāte», after some time

kāla m. «kāle kāle», always in time

kāla m. ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘calen-doe’: Hib. ‘ceal’, «death and

everything terrible.»])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kāla a. (lī f.)

(1) Black, of a dark or dark-blue colour.

(2) Injuring, hurting. —laḥ

(1) The black or dark-blue colour.

(2) Time (in general); vilaṁbitaphalaiḥ kālaṁ nināya sa manorathaiḥ

R. 1. 33; tasminkāle at that time; kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati

dhīmatāṁ H. 1.

(1) the wise pass their time &c.

(3) Fit or opportune time (to do a thing), proper time or occasion;

(with gen., loc., dat., or inf.); R. 3. 12, 4. 6, 12. 69; parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī

Mk. 10. 60.

(4) A period or portion of time (as the hours or watches of a day);

ṣaṣṭhe kāle divasasya V. 2. 1; Ms. 5. 153.

(5) The weather.

(6) Time considered as one of the nine dravyas by the Vaiśeṣikas.

(7) The Supreme spirit regarded as the destroyer of the universe,

being a personification of the destructive principle; kālaḥ kālyā

bhuvanaphalake kraḍiti prāṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39.

(8)

(a) Yama, the god of death; kaḥ kālasya na gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt.

1. 146.

(b) Death, time of death.

(9) Fate, destiny. (10) The black part of the eye.

(11) The (Indian) cuckoo.

(12) The planet Saturn.

(13) N. of Śiva.

(14) A measure of time (in music or prosody).

(15) A person who distils and sells spirituous liquor.

(16) A section, or part

(17) A red kind of plumbago.

(18) Resin, pitch

(19) N. of an enemy of Śiva. (20) (with the Jainas) One of the nine

treasures.

(21) A mystical name for the letter m. —lā

(1) N. of several plants.

(2) N. of a daughter of Daksha.

(3) An epithet of Durgā. —lī

(1) Blackness.

(2) Ink, black ink.

(3) An epithet of Pārvatī, Śiva’s wife.

(4) A row of black clouds.

(5) A woman with a dark complexion.

(6) N. of Satyavatī, mother of Vyāsa.

(7) Night.

(8) Censure, blame.

(9) One of the seven tongues of Fire. (10) A form of Durgā;

kālītanayaḥ a buffalo.

(11) One of the Mātṛs or divine mothers.

(12) N. of a wife of Bhīma.

(13) A sister of Yama.

(14) A kind of learning (mahāviḍyā).

(15) A small shrub used as a purgative. —laṁ

(1) Iron.

(2) A kind of perfume.

— Comp.

—ayasaṁ iron.

—akṣarikaḥ a scholar, one who can read and decipher.

—agaru n. a kind of sandal tree, black kind of aloe; Bv. 1. 70, R. 4.

81. (—n.) the wood of that tree; Rs. 4. 5; 5. 5.

—agniḥ, —analaḥ 1. the destructive fire at the end of the world. —2.

an epithet of Rudra. —3. a kind of bead (rudrākṣa). —aṁga a. having a

dark-blue body (as a sword with a dark-blue edge).

—ajinaṁ the hide of a black antelope.

—aṁjanaṁ a sort of collyrium; Ku. 7. 20, 82. (

—nī) a small shrub used as a purgative.

—aṁḍajaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo.

—atikramaḥ —maṇaṁ delay, being late; Pt. 1. 154.

—atipātaḥ, —atirekaḥ loss of time, delay; Māl 2.

—atīta a. elapsed, passed by.

—atyayaḥ 1. delay, lapse of time. —2. loss by lapse of time.

—adhyakṣaḥ 1. ‘presiding over time’, epithet of the sun. —2. the

Supreme soul.

—anunādin m. 1. a bee. —2. a sparrow. —3. the Chātaka bird.

—anusārakaḥ 1. Tagara tree. —2. yellow sandal.

—anusāriḥ, —anusārin, —anusārivā, —anusāryaḥ, —ryakaḥ benzoin.

—aṁtakaḥ time, regarded as the god of death, and the destroyer

of every thing.

—aṁtaraṁ 1. an interval. —2. a period of time. —3. another time or

opportunity. -āvṛta a. hidden or concealed in the womb of time. -kṣama a.

able to bear delay; akālakṣamā devyāḥ śarīrāvasthā K. 263; S. 4. -prekṣin

Pt. 3. 172. -viṣaḥ an animal venomous only when enraged, as a rat.

—abhraḥ a dark, watery cloud.

—avadhiḥ appointed time.

—avabodhaḥ knowledge of time and circumstances; Mal. 3. 11.

—aśuddhiḥ f.,

—aśaucaṁ period of mourning, ceremonial impurity caused by the

birth of a child or death of a relation in the family; see aśauca. —ākṛṣṭa a.

1. led to death. —2. produced or brought by time.

—ātmaka a. depending on time or destiny.

—ātman m. the Supreme spirit.

—āyasaṁ iron.

—upta a. sown in due season.

—kaṁjaṁ a blue lotus.

—kaṭaṁkaṭaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—kaṁṭhaḥ 1. a peacock. —2. a sparrow. —3. a wagtail. —4. a

gallinule. —5. an epithet of Śiva; U. 6.

—kaṁṭhakaḥ —kaṁṭakaḥ a gallinule.

—kaṁḍakaḥ a water-snake.

—karaṇaṁ appointing or fixing time.

—karṇikā, —karṇī misfortune.

—karman n. death.

—kalāyaḥ dark pulse.

—kalpa a. fatal, deadly.

—kālaḥ Supreme being.

—kīlaḥ noise.

—kuṁṭhaḥ Yama.

—kuṣṭhaḥ a myrrh.

—kūṭaḥ, —ṭaṁ

(a) a deadly poison; S. 6.

(b) the poison churned out of the ocean and drunk by Śiva; adyāpi

nojjhati haraḥ kila kālakūṭaṁ Ch. P. 50. —kṛt m. 1. the sun. —2. a

peacock. —3. Supreme spirit. —kṛta 1. produced by time. —2. fixed,

appointed. —3. lent or deposited. —4. done for a long time. (—taḥ) the

sun. —kramaḥ lapse of time, course of time; kālakrameṇa in course or

process of time; Ku. 1. 19. —kriyā 1. fixing a time. —2. death. —kṣepaḥ 1.

delay, loss of time; Me. 22; maraṇe kālakṣepaṁ mākuru Pt. 1. —2.

passing the time. —khaṁjaṁ, —khaṁjanaṁ, —khaṁḍaṁ the liver. —

gaṁgā the river Yamunā. —grāṁthiḥ a year. —ghātin a. killing by degrees

or slowly (as a poison) —cakraṁ 1. the wheel of time (time being

represented as a wheel always moving). —2. a cycle. —3. (hence fig.) the

wheel of fortune, the vicissitudes of life. (—kraḥ) an epithet of the sun. —

cihnaṁ a symptom of approaching death. codita a. summoned by the

angel of death. —jyeṣṭha a. senior in years, grown up; U. 5. 12. —jña a.

knowing the proPer time or occasion (of any action); atyārūḍho hi

nārīṇāmakālajño manobhavaḥ R. 12. 33; Śi. 2. 83. (—jñaḥ) 1. an

astrologer. —2. a cock. —jñānin m. an epithet of Śiva. —trayaṁ the three

times; the past, the present, and the future; -darśī K. 46. —daṁḍaḥ

death. —damanī an epithet of Durgā. —dharmaḥ, —dharman m. 1. the line

of conduct suitable to any particular time. —2. the law or rule of time. —3.

effects proper to the time. —4. fated time, death; na punarjīvitaḥ

kaścitkāladharmamupāgataḥ Mb.; parītāḥ kāladharmaṇā &c. —dhāraṇā

prolongation of time. —naraḥ (in astrology) the figure of a man’s body. —

nāthaḥ, —nidhiḥ Śiva. —niyogaḥ decree of fate or destiny; laṁdhyatena

khalu kālaniyogaḥ Ki. 9. 13. —nirūpaṇaṁ determination of time,

chronology. —nemiḥ 1. the rim of the wheel of time. —2. N. of a demon,

uncle of Rāvaṇa, deputed by him to kill Hanūmat. —3. N. of a demon with

100 hands killed by Viṣṇu. -ariḥ, ripuḥ, haraḥ, han m. epithets of Kṛṣṇa.

—pakva a. ripened by time, i. e. spontaneously; Ms. 6. 17, 21; Y. 3. 49.

—parivāsaḥ standing for a time so as to become stale. —pāśaḥ the noose

of Yama or death. —pāśikaḥ a hangman. —pṛṣṭhaṁ 1. a species of

antelope. —2. a heron. (—kaṁ) 1. N. of the bow of Karṇa; Ve. 4. —2. a

bow in general. —prabhātaṁ autumn or Śarad; (the two months following

the rainy season considered as the best time). —bhakṣaḥ an epithet of

Śiva. —bhṛt m. the sun. —bhairavaḥ an epithet of Śiva. —mānaṁ a

measure of time. —mukhaḥ a species of ape. —meṣī f. the Mañjiṣṭha

plant. —yavanaḥ a king of Yavanas and enemy of Kṛṣṇa and an invincible

foe of the Yadavas. Kṛṣṇa, finding it impossible to vanquish him on the

field of battle, cunningly decoyed him to the cave where Muchakunda was

sleeping who burnt him down. —yāpaḥ, —yāpanaṁ procrastination, delay,

putting off. —yogaḥ fate, destiny. -taḥ according to the requirements of

the time; Pt. 1. 184. —yogin m. an epithet of Śiva. —rātriḥ, —rātrī f. 1. a

dark night. —2. a sister of Yama. —3. the Amāvasyā on which lamps are

lighted (in the Divālī holidays). —4. the night of destruction at the end of

the world (identified with Durgā). —5. a particular night in the life of man,

on the 7th day of the 7th month of the 77th year. —lohaṁ —lauhaṁ steel.

—viprakarṣaḥ prolongation of time. —vṛddhiḥ f. periodical interest

(payable monthly, quarterly, or at stated times); Ms. 8. 153. —velā the

time of Saturn, i. e. a particular time of the day (half a watch every day)

at which any religious act is improper. —saṁkarṣā a girl 9 years old

personating Durga at a festival. —saṁrodhaḥ 1. keeping back for a long

time; Ms. 8. 143. —2. lapse of a long period of time. —sadṛśa a.

opportune, timely. —saṁpanna a. dated, bearing a date. —sarpaḥ the

black and most poisonous variety of the snake. —sāraḥ the black

antelope. (—raṁ) a yellow sort of sandal wood. —sūtraṁ, —sūtrakaṁ 1.

thread of time or death. —2. N. of a particular hell; Y. 3. 222; Ms. 4. 88.

—skaṁdaḥ the Tamāla tree. —svarūpa a. terrible as death, (deathlike in

form). —haraḥ an epithet of Śiva. —haraṇaṁ loss of time, delay; S. 3; U.

5; Mv. 4. 41. —hāniḥ f. delay; R. 13. 16.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kāla 1) adj. f. ī P. 4, 1, 42. «blauschwarz, schwarz»; als m. «die

blauschwarze Farbe, Schwärze» AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 382. H. 1397.

an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. P. 5, 4, 33. (rathe) kālāśvayukte R. 6, 67, 2. kālāḥ

kāñcanasaṁnāhāstasmiṁstamasi rākṣasāḥ. samadṛśyanta 19, 5. kālāni

bhūtvā māṁsāni śīryante yasya dehinaḥ SUŚR. 1, 299, 19. kālajīmūta R.

3, 55, 13. kālamegha 4, 10, 26. 6, 79, 13. MBH. 1, 7184. VET. 4, 20.

kālabāla und kālabāla ŚĀNT. 4, 4. MBH. 1, 1236. tasyāḥ — dīrdhaveṇī —

dadṛśe svasitā snigdhā kālī vyālīva mūrdhani 3, 16191. kālī strī

pāṇḍurairdantaiḥ 16, 57. timirābhyāhatāṁ kālīmaprakāśāṁ niśāmiva R. 2,

114, 2. pramadā 5, 27, 17. — 2) m. a) «das Schwarze im Auge» SUŚR. 2,

336, 20. Vgl. kālaka. — b) «der indische Kuckuck» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c)

= kālasarpa VET. 16, 13. — d) «Cassia Sophora Lin.» (s. kāsamarda). — e)

«eine Art Plumbago» (raktacitraka). — f) «das Harz der Shorea robusta»

(rāla) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — g) «der Planet Saturn» (vgl. nīlavāsas) DĪPIKĀ

im ŚKDR. — h) ein Bein. Śiva’s H. an. H. ś. 45. MED.; vgl. kālakaṇṭha,

mahākāla und kālī Durgā. = Rudra BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 12. — i) N. pr. eines

Sohnes von Hrada HARIV. 189. eines Fürsten (kālayavana) BHĀG. P. 3, 3,

10. eines Bruders des Königs Prasenajit BURN. Intr. 173. eines künftigen

Buddha Lot. de la b. l. 126. eines Nāgarāja VYUTP. 85. eines Rakshas R.

6, 69, 12. eines Feindes von Śiva (s. kālāsuhṛd). — k) N. pr. eines Berges

R. 4, 44, 21. — l) N. eines der 9 Schätze bei den Jaina H. 193, Sch. — m)

myst. Bez. des «Buchstabens m» Ind. St. 2, 316. — 3) f. kālā a) N.

verschiedener Pflanzen: «Indigofera tinctoria Lin.» AK. 2, 4, 3, 13. H. an.

MED.; «Piper longum Lin.» AK. 2, 4, 3, 15; eine der «Ipomoea Turpethum»

nahe verwandte Pflanze, viell. «Ipomoea atropurpurea Chois.» AK. 2, 4, 3,

27. H. an. MED. SUŚR. 1, 131, 19. 2, 106, 19. 528, 16; «Nigella indica

Roxb.» AK. 2, 9, 37; «Rubia Munjista» (mañjiṣṭhā, kālameṣikā) «Roxb.» H.

an. (lies jiṅgyām). MED.; «Ruellia longifolia» (kulika) RATNAM. im ŚKDR.;

«Physalis flexuosa Lin.» (aśvagandhā) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; «Bignonia

suaveolens Roxb.» (pāṭalā) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. Nach dem gaṇa

harītakyādi zu P. 4, 3, 167 ist kālā auch «die Frucht der» Kālā. — b) N. pr.

einer Tochter des Daksha, der Mutter der Kāleya oder Kālakeya MBH. 1,

2520. 2542. HARIV. 11521. 11552. 12465. PADMA-P. in VP. 122, N. 19.

Vgl. kālakā. — c) ein Bein. der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32, Sch.; vgl. kālī. — 4) f.

kālī a) = kālikā «schwarze Farbe, Tinte» H. an. MED. — b)

«Anschwärzung, üble Nachrede» H. an. — c) «Nacht» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

d) «eine schwarz aufziehende Wolkenmasse» H. an. HĀR. 71. — e) «ein

best. in Milch vorkommendes Thierchen», = kṣīrakīṭa H. an. = kṣārakīṭa

(sic) MED. — f) N. verschiedener Pflanzen: a) = kālāñjanī; b) «Cajanus

indicus Spreng.» (tuvarī); g) «Ipomoea Turpethum» (trivṛt) RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR.; d) «Bignonia suaveolens Roxb.» AK. 2, 4, 2, 35, Sch. — g) N. einer

der sieben Zungen Agni’s JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. MUṆḌ. UP. 1, 2, 4.

GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — h) eine Form der Durgā AK. 1, 1, 1, 32. H. 203.

H. an. MED. MBH. 4, 195. HARIV. 10239. KUMĀRAS. 7, 39. DEV. 9, 27.

itthaṁ cemau rajanidivasau dolayandvāvivākṣau kālaḥ kālyā

bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Hier wie bei kāla als

Bein. von Śiva hat man mit dem Begriff «der Schwärze» wohl auch den

«der Alles zerstörenden Zeit» vor Augen gehabt. Vgl. Ind. St. 1, 286. 287.

mahākālī und bhadrakālī. — i) N. einer der göttlichen Mütter H. an. MED.

— k) N. pr. einer Unholdin (vgl. kālakā), der Mutter der Kālakeya, HARIV.

11552. — l) N. einer der 16 Vidyādevī H. 239. — m) Bein. der Satyavatī,

der Gemahlin Śāntanu’s und Mutter Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana’s TRIK. 2, 8, 10.

LIA. I, 629, N. 1. MBH. 1, 2209. 4244. BENF. Chr. 6, 1. Mutter

Vicitravīrya’s, mit dessen Gemahlin Kṛṣṇadvaipāyana die drei Kinder

Dhṛtarāṣṭra, Pāṇḍu und Vidura zeugt HARIV. 1825. fg. Gemahlin

Bhīmasena’s und Mutter Sarvagata’s BHĀG. P. 9, 22, 30. — n) mit oder

ohne Beis. von gaṅgā N. eines Flusses LIA. I, 50. 56. 441. fg. — 4) n. a)

«eine dunkle Art Sandelholz» (kālīyaka) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) «ein

best. Parfum» (kakkolaka) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «Eisen» (vgl. kālāyasa)

VĀCASP. bei BHAR. zu AK. ŚKDR.

kāla m. 1) «ein bestimmter» oder «richtiger Zeitpunkt; Zeit» überh. AK. 1,

1, 3, 1. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 1, 1, 103. H. 126. an. 2, 478. MED. l. 7. Im

ṚV. nur an einer Stelle: uta prahāmatidīvyā jayāti kṛtaṁ yacchvaghnī

vicinoti kāle 10, 42, 9. AV. 19, 53 und 54 sind Lieder, welche von Macht

und Wesen der Zeit handeln, deren Begriff an den der «Weltordnung» oder

des «Schicksals» streift (vgl. unter 2.). Einigermaassen gebräuchlich wird

das Wort (st. des alten ṛtu) erst in den BRĀHMAṆA: sa eṣa sviṣṭakṛtaḥ

kālaḥ ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 3, 3. 3, 8, 3, 36. yadi kāle yadyanākāle ‘thaivāśnanti

2, 4, 2, 4. juhoti kāla eva 4, 5, 1, 16. KĀTY. ŚR. 10, 5, 14. 25, 7, 2.

ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 15. M. 2, 80. 3, 105. 7, 164. 204. N. 2, 17. 25, 1. R. 1,

77, 13. 2, 40, 30. 3, 4, 7. SUŚR. 1, 124, 3. PAÑCAT. I, 253. 254. ŚĀK. 151.

RAGH. 3, 12. 12, 69. kāle kāle MBH. 1, 1680. RAGH. 4, 6. svakāle M. 4,

93. prāpte kāle 9, 307. kṣetre kālopapādite 36. kāloptāni vījāni 38.

kālayuktaṁ vacaḥ R. 5, 46, 2. parjanyaḥ kālavarṣī MṚCCH. 178, 10.

PAÑCAT. 149, 14. nainaṁ purā kālātprāṇo jahāti ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 11

(vgl. AIT. BR. 8, 25, wo āyuṣaḥ st. kālāt). kālameva pratīkṣeta M. 6, 45.

kālamanveṣayantau PAÑCAT. 182, 24. kālavid R. 4, 32, 13. kālaṁ

gacchati «er gelangt zum Endpunkt» (beim coitus) CHĀND. UP. 2, 13, 1.

«die zu Etwas bestimmte —, geeignete Zeit»; die Ergänz. im gen., dat.,

loc., im comp. vorang., im inf. oder im potent. mit yad (P. 3, 3, 167. 168):

saṁpratiṣṭhāmahe kālaḥ prasthānasya R. 2, 56, 2. tasya kālo ‘yamāgataḥ

«dazu ist jetzt die Zeit gekommen» VIŚV. 12, 9. eṣa dvaidhībhāvasya

kālaḥ PAÑCAT. 155, 9. 143, 12. VID. 241. nāyaṁ vaktavyasya kālaḥ

PAÑCAT. 194, 23. na rāma kālaḥ paridevanāya MBH. 3, 10259. na kālo ‘sti

vilambane R. 6, 8, 45. dakṣiṇākāla KĀTY. ŚR. 17, 2, 21 (vgl. dakṣiṇānāṁ

kāle ŚAT. BR. 7, 2, 2, 21). karmakāla R. 1, 65, 34. kriyākāla SUŚR. 1, 5,

13. paṇakālamamanyata N. 7, 8. VIKR. 32, 15. 64, 18. nāyaṁ kālo

vilambitum N. 20, 11. DRAUP. 3, 7. R. 6, 93, 23. kālo yadbhuñjīta bhavān

P. 3, 3, 168, Sch. — kālamāsādya «in Berücksichtigung der Zeitumstände»:

kālamāsādya kāryaṁ ca daṇḍaṁ rājā prakalpayet M. 8, 324. 9, 293.

skandhenāpi vahecchatruṁ kālamāsādya buddhimān PAÑCAT. III, 247.

kālamāsādya kaṁcana «nach einer Weile»: yathā kāṣṭhaṁ ca kāṣṭhaṁ ca

sameyātāṁ mahārṇave. sametya ca vyapeyātāṁ kālamāsādya kaṁcana..

R. 2, 105, 24. — kālasaṁkhyāṁ na vedmi PAÑCAT. 242, 19. kālaṁ

kālavibhaktīśca M. 1, 24. evaṁ sarvaṁ sa sṛṣṭvedaṁ māṁ

cācintyaparākramaḥ. ātmanyantardadhe bhūyaḥ kālaṁ kālena pīḍayan 51.

kālasyānavasthitatvāt KĀTY. ŚR. 18, 6, 31. kālāvasthā SUŚR. 1, 113, 14.

151, 21. aitasmātkālāt ŚAT. BR. 4, 2, 4, 5. ūrdhvaṁ tu kālādetasmāt M.

9, 90. etasminneva kāle N. 2, 12. anyeṣvapi tu kāleṣu M. 7, 183. sarveṣu

kāleṣu R. 1, 46, 11. viṣame kāle 2, 88, 15. kāle śubhe prāpte N. 5, 1.

tasminnatisukhe kāle DAŚ. 1, 19. deśakālau «der rechte Ort und die

rechte Zeit, Zeit und Ort» M. 3, 126. 7, 10. 16. 64. 8, 126. 156. 157. deśe

ca kāle ca 233. HIT. I, 14. deśakālajña N. 8, 12. kālaṁ kar «eine Zeit

festsetzen»: kālaśca kriyatāmasya svapne jāgaraṇe tathā R. 6, 38, 29.

Eine andere Bed. von kālaṁ kar wird u. 3 besprochen werden. trikālajña

R. 1, 1, 8. iṣṭapañcakālajña MBH. 12, 12797. agnau juhvadubhau

kālāvubhau kālāvupaspṛśan «bei Sonnenauf — und Niedergang» 1, 4623.

ṣaṣṭhe kāle ‘hnaḥ «zur 6ten Stunde am Tage» d. i. «um Mittagszeit» VIKR.

20. ṣaṣṭhānnakāla «der nur die sechste Esszeit hat» d. i. «der 5

Mahlzeiten vorübergehen lässt und erst am Abend des 3ten Tages seine

Mahlzeit hält»; davon nom. abstr. ṣaṣṭhānnakālatā M. 11, 200.

Gewöhnlich mit Weglassung von anna «Speise»: caturthakālam «zur

vierten Esszeit» d. i. «am Abend des zweiten Tages» 109. ṣaṣṭhe kāle «am

Abend des dritten Tages» MBH. 13, 5175. 14, 1663. 1665.

kadāciddvādaśe kāle kadācidapi ṣoḍaśe. āhāramakarodrājā mūlāni ca

phalāni ca.. 1, 8118. Vgl. caturthakālika und aṣṭamakālika adjj. «der erst

am Abend des zweiten» und «vierten Tages seine Mahlzeit hält» M. 6, 19.

ṛtukāla «die Zeit der monatlichen Reinigung» NIR. 1, 19. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 3,

13, 47. M. 5, 153. āpatkāle 2, 241. mantrakāle 7, 149. niśā- N. 15, 14.

pradoṣa- HIT. 22, 1. śīta-, uṣṇa- I, 186. śiśukāla «die Kinderjahre»

PAÑCAT. 192, 3. kiyānkālastavaivaṁ sthitasya saṁjātaḥ «wie viel Zeit ist

verflossen, seitdem du stehst?» 242, 14. evaṁ tasya tāṁ nityaṁ

sevamānasya kālo yāti 45, 10. kāvyaśāstravinodena kālo gacchati

dhīmatām HIT. Pr. 48. athaivaṁ gacchati kāle PAÑCAT. 34, 14. gacchatā

kālena «im Verlauf der Zeit, nach einiger Zeit» 47, 6. 76, 10. 224, 7. kāle

gacchati dass. VID. 61. evaṁ tena saha sakalāṁ rātriṁ

yāvadvigrahaparasya kālo vrajati PAÑCAT. 117, 9. 163, 22. tasya ca kṛṣiṁ

kurvatastadaiva niṣphalaḥ kālo ‘tivartate «die Zeit, welche er auf das

Bebauen des Ackers verwendet, geht ihm fruchtlos dahin» 174, 9.

tasyaivaṁ vartamānasya kālaḥ samabhivartsyati. agniṁ śuśrūṣamāṇasya

pitaraṁ ca yaśasvinam.. R. 1, 8, 10. sa ca vakabālakān — sadaiva

bhakṣayankālaṁ nayati PAÑCAT. 98, 10. sadaikasthānavihāriṇau kālaṁ

nayataḥ 43, 2. bhakṣaṇapānaviharaṇakriyābhiḥ kālo neyaḥ 25, 10. HIT.

37, 20. RAGH. 1, 33. kālaṁ yāpayati PAÑCAT. 183, 24. kva cāyaṁ

vihṛtastvayā. kālaḥ MBH. 1, 7. nityakālam «stets» M. 2, 58. 73.

dīrghakālam «eine lange Zeit hindurch» 8, 145. SUND. 1, 10. CĀT. 1.

mahāntaṁ kālam dass. PAÑCAT. 114, 24. dīrgheṇa kālena dass. SUND. 1,

8. «nach langer Zeit» R. 1, 45, 40. kālena mahatā dass. VIŚV. 10, 10.

kālena bahunā ŚṚÑGĀRAT. 8. kenacittvatha kālena «nach einiger Zeit»

VIŚV. 5, 13. kālena «im Verlauf der Zeit, mit der Zeit» M. 9, 246. MBH. 3,

8843. BHAG. 4, 38. R. 4, 15, 34. PAÑCAT. 32, 24. KATHĀS. 4, 20. 6, 21.

VID. 16. 184. 193. dīrghasya kālasya «nach langer Zeit» N. 18, 1. M. 8,

216. R. 3, 4, 37. 4, 8, 49. kālasya mahataḥ dass. 1, 17, 12.

kasyacitkālasya «nach einiger Zeit» ŚĀK. 110, 15. kasyacittvatha kālasya

MBH. 1, 5299. HARIV. 6386. R. 1, 26, 25. kālāt «im Verlauf der Zeit, mit

der Zeit» M. 8, 251. kālatas dass. KATHĀS. 6, 101. — 2) Ereignisse, deren

Ursachen sich dem Verstande entziehen, werden, da sie im Verlauf der

«Zeit» geschehen, als unmittelbare Wirkungen «der thätig gedachten Zeit»

aufgefasst. Schon oben u. 1. haben wir zweier Lieder des AV. gedacht, in

denen der Begriff der «Zeit» an den der «Weltordnung» oder des

«Schicksals» streift. na kartā kasyacitkaścinniyoge nāpi ceśvaraḥ.

svabhāve vartate kālaḥ kasya kālaḥ parāyaṇaḥ.. R. 4, 24, 5. fgg. SUŚR. 1,

18, 18. BHARTṚ. 3, 43. Verz. d. B. H. No. 948. sarve kālena sṛjyante

hriyante ca punaḥ punaḥ MBH. 13, 56. kālasyāhaṁ vaśānugaḥ 51. R. 6,

12, 1. pracodito ‘haṁ kālena pannaga tvāmacūcudam MBH. 13, 50. ayaṁ

rāmastvayaṁ rāma iti kālena coditāḥ. anyo ‘nyaṁ samare jaghnuḥ R. 3,

31, 47. kālacodita 1, 1, 50. 3, 8, 8. ARJ. 10, 31. DRAUP. 8, 4. — 3) «die

Alles zu Ende führende, vernichtende Zeit; Tod», sowohl der, welcher nur

das einzelne Individuum trifft, als auch der, welcher am Ende der Welt

Alles zerstört. Nach SUŚR. 1, 122, 11 «der Tod der durch die Zeit, durch’s

Alter kommt»: tatraikaḥ kālasaṁjñastu śeṣāstvāgantavaḥ smṛtāḥ

(mṛtyavaḥ). Sehr häufig personificirt mit den Attributen Jama’s und mit

diesem bisweilen auch identificirt. AK. 1, 1, 1, 54. 3, 4, 26, 196. TRIK. 3,

3, 382. H. 323. 184. H. an. MED. kālameyivān «er starb» BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 2.

kālaṁ kar «sterben» MBH. 14, 1784. R. 2, 64, 52; vgl. kālakarman und

kālakriyā. kālasamāyukta «gestorben» 6, 93, 23. kālasya nayane yuktā

yamasya puruṣāśca ye MBH. 2, 343. so ‘yaṁ vyaktaṁ bhavatāṁ

kālahetuḥ 2096. sa hi meghācalaprakhyaḥ kālaḥ puruṣavigrahaḥ.

varāyudhadharaḥ śrīmānutpapāta vihāyasā.. R. 5, 89, 45. kālo hi

vyasanaprasāritabhujo gṛhṇāti dūrādapi PAÑCAT. II, 21. upetya muniveṣo

‘tha kālaḥ provāca rāghavam RAGH. 15, 92. pitṝṇāṁ (patiṁ)

sarvanidhanaṁ kālaṁ vaiśvānaraṁ prabhum HARIV. 12492. kālāyāḥ

kālakalpastu gaṇaḥ paramadāruṇaḥ 12465. prahrādastu — yuyudhe saha

kālena raṇe kāla iva sthitaḥ 13191. (nivātakavacāḥ) kālarūpāḥ MBH. 3,

12107. ARJ. 7, 5. svaṁ rūpaṁ kālarūpābhaṁ bheje vaiśravaṇānujaḥ R. 3,

55, 3. kālarūpin 4, 59, 20. kālopamau yuddhe 1, 22, 24. RĀJA-TAR. 1,

289. kālamivolvaṇam 5, 148. nidrayā kālarūpiṇyā HARIV. 3237.

śūnyamāsījjagatsarvaṁ kāleneva hataṁ tadā SUND. 2, 18.

saṁjihīrṣurdurādharṣaṁ kālo lokakṣaye yathā R. 6, 70, 35. kālasya

kālaśca bhavetsa rāmaḥ saṁkṣipya lokāṁśca sṛjedathānyān 3, 43, 42.

mṛtyurdaṇḍaṁ sapāśaṁ ca kālaḥ śaktimagṛhṇata HARIV. 12146.

khaḍgadaṇḍaṁ dhanuṣpāśaṁ śaraughajaṭharaṁ prabhum.

rāmakālamakālena na kālayitumarhasi.. R. 3, 41, 26. kālapāśa 1, 21, 13.

29, 9. 3, 31, 16. 35, 73. 45, 19. 5, 47, 35. VIŚV. 6, 8. 9, 18. MṚCCH. 163,

7. HIT. 21, 11. kāladaṇḍa MBH. 1, 984. R. 3, 35, 43. VIŚV. 6, 2. kālāstra

11. kālamudgara R. 3, 54, 10. kālajihva MBH. 1, 2932. kālaviṣa 3, 10884.

kālāgninā yathā pūrvaṁ trailokyaṁ dahyate ‘khilam VIŚV. 15, 16. 6, 19.

MBH. 3, 10393. kālāgnisadṛśaḥ krodhe R. 1, 1, 19. kālāgnimiva duḥsaham

74, 17. 4, 33, 32. 50, 9; vgl. kālānala. In Verbindung mit antaka (vgl.

kālāntaka) und mṛtyu «Tod»: antakaścābhaddogdhā kālo lokaprakālanaḥ

HARIV. 374. abhyadhāvata saṁkruddhaḥ prajāḥ kāla ivāntakaḥ R. 3, 7, 9.

mṛtyukālasama 4, 37, 20. kālamṛtyuyugāntābha 31, 17. yathā yamo yathā

mṛtyuryathā kālo yathā vidhiḥ hantāsmi rākṣasānadya 3, 69, 20. kāla und

mṛtyu in Jama’s sabhā MBH. 2, 340. Kāla (kann hier wie im Folgenden

auch als Personif. der «Zeit» oder des «Schicksals» aufgefasst werden) als

Devarshi in Indra’s sabhā 295. Kāla ein Sohn Dhruva’s, «des

Polarsterns»: dhruvasya putro bhagavānkālo lokaprakālanaḥ (vgl. oben

HARIV. 374) 1, 2585. HARIV. 154. VP. 120. kāla = māṭhara im Gefolge

des Sonnengottes VYĀḌI zu H. 103. — 4) «Zeitalter, Weltalter» (= yuga):

tūrye kāle RĀJA-TAR. 5, 73. — 5) «Zeit» so v. a. «Zeitmaass; Prosodie»:

ekādaśidvādaśinorlaghāvaṣṭamamakṣaram (plabate). udaye saṁhitākāle

ṚV. PRĀT. 8, 21. hrasvo dīrghaḥ pluta iti kālato niyamā ṛci ŚIKṢĀ 11. AV.

PRĀT. 2, 39. P. 1, 1, 70. 2, 27. — 6) «Abtheilung, Abschnitt» VS. PRĀT. 3,

4. 5. — Vgl. akāla, ākāla, ekakālam, yathākālam.

kāla 1) KATHĀS. 64, 118. — 2) i) ein Sohn Vasu’s (vgl. kālin) Verz. d. Oxf.

H. 80,b,40. Verfasser von Mantra 101,b,16. = aśvaghoṣa WASSILJEW 35.

45. 58. 75. 200. — 4) f) b) nicht «Cajanus indicus», sondern «eine best.

Lehmart.» — h) N. der Dākṣāyaṇī auf dem Berge Kālañjara Verz. d. Oxf. H.

39,b,4. ein Aṁśa der Prakṛti 23,b,1. WILSON, Sel. Works 1,246.

kāla 1) yathaiva śṛṅgaṁ goḥ kāle vardhamānasya vardhate «mit der Zeit,

allmählich» Spr. 4802. paritoṣakālāḥ «Zeit» so v. a. «Gelegenheit» 3012.

brāhmaṇastriṣu kāleṣu śastraṁ gṛhṇanna duṣyati. ātmatrāṇe varṇadoṣe

durdamyaniyameṣu ca.. MBH. 12, 2950. — 3) mṛtyukālau R. 7, 22, 22. —

5) ṚV. PRĀT. 6, 9. 11. 11, 1. 16. varṇāpattīnāṁ trayaḥ kālā bhavanti

mātrārdhamātrāṇumātropalakṣitāḥ Schol. zu VS. PRĀT. 4, 146. — 7) in

den Verbindungen pada-, krama-, saṁhitā- so v. a. pāṭha Schol. zu AV.

PRĀT. 4, 123. fg.

kāla 1) kālena «von Zeit zu Zeit, dann und wann» (Gegens. pade pade)

Spr. (II) 6900. «zu spät» 6007.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kāla 1 (yama) I (YAMA)>span class=»red»>* The god of Death.

When the life span of each living being allotted by Brahmā is at an end

Yama sends his agents and takes the soul to Yamapurī (the city of

Yama). From there, the holy souls are sent to Vaikuṇṭha (Heaven, the

abode of Viṣṇu) and the sinful souls to Hell.

kāla 2 II A Maharṣi. Mahābhārata, Sabhā Parva, Chapter 7, Verse 14,

refers to this sage as offering worship to Indra, in Indra’s assembly.

kāla See under the word Kālamāna.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kāla 1. kāla, m.

1. Due season, Man. 2, 80; instr. kālena, In due season, Man. 9, 246.

2. Time, Man, 1, 24; 7, 183; instr. kālena, and abl. kālāt, In the long

run, Pañc. 32, 24; Man. 8, 251; gen. dīrghasya kālasya, After a long time,

Nal. 18, 1; kasya cit kālasya, After some time, Śāk. 110, 15.

3. Mealtime; there are two meal-times a day, therefore, ṣaṣṭha kāla,

The sixth meal-time = the evening of the third day, MBh. 13, 5175; Rām.

3, 31, 47.

4. A period, Rājat. 5, 73.

5. Death, Bhāg. P. 9, 9, 2.

6. Time personified, fate, MBh. 13, 56; Rām. 6, 70, 35; endowed with

the attributes of Yama, the regent of the dead, Rām. 1, 21, 13; 3, 35, 43,

etc.

— Comp. a-, m. unseasonableness, Sund. 2, 31; loc. le, unseasonably,

Man. 3, 105. ādi-, m. beginning of time, Rām. 3, 20, 6. ṛtu-, m. 1.

seasonable time, MBh. 3, 14763. 2. time approved for sexual intercourse,

Man. 3, 45. eka-kāla + m, adv. once, Man. 6, 55. kārya-, m. time of

action, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1809. kṛta-,

I. m. appointed time, Yājñ. 2, 184.

II. adj. having waited a certain time, MBh. 2, 1875. caturtha-kāla + m,

adv. at the fourth meal-time, i. e. on the evening of every second day,

Man. 11, 109. tad-kāla + m, adv. instantly, Pañc. 192, 6. tāvatkāla + m, i.

e. tāvant-, adv. such a long time, MBh. 3, 16889. tri-, n. 1. past, future,

and present time, Bhāg. P. 5, 23, 8. 2. morning, noon, and evening, MBh.

13, 6607. duṣkāla, i. e. dus-, m. the formidable, all-destroying, time, Rām.

2, 33, 21; a name of Śiva, MBh. 12, 10418. nitya-kāla + m, adv.

continually, Man. 2, 58. purva(n)-, m. the periodic change of the moon.

prāpta-kāla + m (vb. āp with pra), adv. in due season, Pañc. 16, 6. a-

prāpta-kāla + m, adv. Out of due season, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 173. yathā-kāla

+ m, adv. At the proper time, Man. 2, 39. sa-kāla + m, adv. Betimes,

early in the morning. sūrya-, m. day.

kāla 2. kāla (cf. kalaṅka),

I. adj., f. lī, Dark blue, black, Rām. 6, 67, 2; MBh. 16, 57.

II. m.

1. A black and poisonous snake, Coluber naga, Lass. 16, 13.

2. The black in the eye, Suśr. 2, 336, 20.

3. A name of Rudra, Bhāg. P. 3, 12, 12.

4. A proper name, Hariv. 189.

5. The name of a mountain, Rām. 4, 44, 21.

III. f. lā.

1. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 131, 19, etc.

2. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2520.

3. The name of a female demon, Hariv. 11552.

IV. f. lī.

1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 195.

2. A surname of Satyāvatī, Chr. 6, 1.

— Comp. bhadra-kālī, f. 1. a name of Durgā. 2. a fragrant grass, Cyperus.

mahā-,

I. m. a name of Śiva.

II. f. lī, Durgā.

— Cf. [greek] etc., under kalaṅka.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kāla f. ī1 dark-blue, black, m. the black part of the eye, E. of Rudra-Śiva;

N. of sev. kings etc., also = kālasarpa q.v.; f. ī E. of Durga etc.

kāla [2] m. time, esp. the right or proper time (w. gen., dat., loc., inf., or

—°); opportunity, case; season, mealtime (twice a day); the half of a day,

hour, age, era, measure of time, prosody; time as ruler or destroyer of

the world, i.e. destiny, fate; end; death or the god of death. —paraḥ kālaḥ

high time (w. inf.). kālaṁ kṛ appoint a time for (loc.). kālena in course of

time (also -gacchatā; kālāt or kālatas), at times; kālena dīrgheṇa bahunā,

or mahatā (also gen.) after a long time. kasya citkālasya after some time.

kāla & kāle in time, at the right or appointed time; (also kāle gacchati) in

course of time, little by little. kāle kāle always in time or at the right time.

kasmiṁścitkāle one day. — ubhau kālau morning and evening. ṣaṣṭhe kāle

on the sixth half-day i.e. after three days; pancaśate kāle after 250 days.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kāla 1. kāla, a. (ī) dark blue, black; m. the black in the eye; ep. of Śiva.

kāla 2. kāla, m. due season, appointed or right time (for d., g., lc., inf., —

°); time; opportunity; season; meal-time (of which there are two day);

half a day; hour; age, era; measure, prosody; Time, fate; death, god of

death; -°, at the right time; in time, gradually;

paraḥ kālaḥ, high time (w. inf.);

kālaṁ kṛ, fix a time for (lc.);

kālam āsādya, according to circumstances; in. kālena, in due season;

in course of time: -gacchatā, as time goes on, in course of time;

dīrgheṇa-, mahatā -or bahunā-, after a long time;

kenacit-, after some time;

tena-, at that time; ab. kālāt, in the long run, in course of time;

kālatas, id.; with regard to time; g. dīrghasya or mahataḥ kālasya,

after a long time;

kasya -cit-, after some time; lc. kāle, at the right or appointed time,

opportunely; in time = gradually; — prāpte, when the time has come;

-gacchati, in course of time; -yāte, after the lapse of some time;

-kaśmiṁś cit-, one day;

kāle kāle, always at the right time;

ṣaṣṭhe —, at the end of the third day: —‘hnaḥ, at the sixth hour of the

day, i. e. at noon;

pañ- caśate-, = after 250 days;

ubhau kālau, morning and evening.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

kāla t ka kālopadeśe . iti karikalpadrumaḥ . (adantacurāṁ—paraṁ—

sakaṁ—seṭ .) yathā acakālat kālamiyattayā gaṇakaḥ . etāvatī veleti

kathitavānityarthaḥ . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kāla kālopadeśe (iyattayā kālaniścayārthopradeśe) ada° cu° ubha° saka°

seṭ . kālayati te avakālat—ta, kalayām—babhūva—āsa—cakāra—cakre .

kālayiṣyati—te

kāla pu° īṣadalati ala—ac koḥ kā° . 1 kṛṣṇabarṇe tasya varṇeṣu

īṣadbhūṣakatvāt tathātvam . astyarthe arśa ādyac . 2 tadvarṇayukte tri° .

3 lauhe na° vācaspatiḥ . dhātuṣu tasya kṛṣṇatvāt tathātvam . 4 kakkole

na° rājani° 5 kāloyake gandhadravyabhede na° śabdaca° .

tayaurgrandhadravyeṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam . 6 kokile puṁstrī° rājani°

tasya pakṣiṣu kṛṣṇatvāttathātvam striyāṁ ṅīṣ . 7 rāle 8 raktacitrake 9 ka

samarde (kālaka sendā) vṛkṣe ca pu° rājani° . 10 śanigrahe medi°

kṛṣṇatvāttasya tathātvam . kalayatisarvaṁ cu° kala—ac

kālasamayavelāsviti pā° nirdeśāt ni° upadhārdardhaḥ . 11 yamarāje 12

mahākāle śive medi° . 13 parameśvare kālo’smi lokakṣayakṛtpravṛddhaḥ

kālaḥ kalayatāmaham iti ca gītā ṛtuḥ sudarśanaḥ kālaḥ parameṣṭhī

parigrahaḥ viṣṇusa° . trayīmayo’yaṁ bhagavāna kālātmā kālakṛdvibhuḥ

sū° si° . svanāmakhyāte paratvāparatvadhīhetau nyāyādimatasiddhe 1 4

dravyabhede . tannirūpaṇaṁ kaṇādasūtre upaskaravṛttau ca yathā

aparasminnaparaṁ yugapat ciraṁ kṣipramiti kālaliṅgāni ka° sū° .

itiśabdo jñānaprakāraparaḥ pratyekamabhimambadhyate

tathācāparamiti pratyayo yugapaditipratyayaḥ ciramitipratyayaḥ

kṣipramitipatyayaḥ kālaliṅgānītyarthaḥ aparasminnaparamityanena

parasmit paramityapi draṣṭavyaṁ, tenāyamarthaḥ—

bahutaratapanaparispandāntaritajanmani sthāpire yuvānamavadhiṁ kṛtvā

‘paratvamutpadyate taccāparatvamasamavāyikāraṇasāpekṣam, na ca

rūpādyasamavāyikāraṇaṁ vyabhicārāt trayāṇāṁ gandhādīnāṁ vāyau

paratvādyanutpādakatvāt sparśasyāpyuṣṇādibhedena bhinnasya

pratyekaṁ vyabhicārāt na cāvacchinnaparimāṇaṁ tathā tasya

vijātīyānārambhakatvāt tapanaparispandānāñca vyadhikaraṇatvāt

tadaṣacchinnadravyasaṁyoga evāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ pariśiṣyate tacca

dravya piṇḍamārtaṇḍobhayasaṁyuktaṁ vibhu syāt ākāśasya

tatsvābhāvyakalpane kvacidapi bheryabhidhātāt sarvabherīṣu

śabdotpattiprasaṅgaḥ . tathāca kālasyaiva mārtaṇḍasaṁyuktasya piṇḍena

saṁyogo’paratvāsamavāyikāraṇaṁ kāla eva mārtaṇḍakriyopanāyakaḥ

ātmanaśca dravyāntaradharmeṣu dravyāntarāvacchedāya

svapratyāsattyatiriktasannikarṣāpekṣatvāt anyathā vārāṇasīsthena

mahārajanāruṇimnā pāṭaliputre’pi sphaṭikamaṇerāruṇyaprasaṅgāt .

kālasya tu tatsvabhāvatayaiva kalpanādayamadoṣaḥ . kālenāpi

rāgasaṁkramaḥ kathaṁ na iti cet niyatakriyopanāyakatvenaiva

tatsiddheḥ evaṁ sthaviramavadhiṁ kṛtvā yūni paratotpattirnirūpaṇīyā .

yugapaditi yugapajjāyante yugapattiṣṭhanti yugavat kurvanti ityādi—

pratyayānāñca ekasmin kāle ekasyāṁ sūryagatau ekasmin

sūryagatvavacchinnakāle ityarthaḥ, na cāprāptā e sūryagatayo

viśeṣaṇatāmanubhavanti . na ca svarūpapratyayāsannāeva tāḥ

tasmādetāvṛśaviśiṣṭapratyayānyathānupapattyā viśeṣaṇa prāpakaṁ yad

dravyaṁ sa kālaḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ .

nanu sidhyatu kālaḥ, sa tu nityo dravyaṁ veti na pramāṇamata āha .

dravyatvamityatve vāyunā vyākhyāte ka° sū° .

yathā vāyuparamāṇorguṇavattvāddravyatvam adravyadravyatvācca

nityatvaṁ tathā kālasyāpītyarthaḥ upa° .

tathāpi santu bahavaḥ kālā ityata āha .

tattvambhāvena ka° sū° .

vyākhyātamiti bipariṇatenānvayaḥ . cirādiprayayānāṁ kālaliṅgānāṁ

sarvatrāviśeṣādanekatve’pyāratmanāmiva viśeṣaliṅgābhāvāt

sattāvadekatvaṁ kālasyetyarthaḥ .

nanvevaṁkṣaṇalavamuhūrteyāmadivasāhorātrapakṣamāsartvayanasaṁva

tsarādibhedena bhūyāṁsaḥ kālāstat kathamekaḥ iti cenna

bhedabhānasya upādhinibandhanatvāt yathā eka eva

sphaṭikamaṇirjavātāpiñjādyupādhyaparāgeṇa bhinna iva bhāsate tathaika

eva kālaḥ

sūryaspandādyavacchedabhedenatattatkāryāvacchedakabhedena ca

bhinna iva bhāsat ityayupagamāt tathāca kālopādhyavyāpakaḥ

kālopādhiḥ, svādheyakādācitkābhāvapratiyogyanādhāraḥ kālo vā kṣaṇaḥ

pratikṣaṇaṁ kasyacidutpatteḥ kasyacidvināśādetadadhyavaseyam .

kṣaṇadvayañca lavaṁ ityādyāgamaprasiddham . nanu

tathāpyatītānāgatavartamānabhedena kālatrayastu, śradhūyate hi

trekālyamupāvartate traikālyāsiddhiḥ ityādīti cenna traikālyavyavahārāt

yena hi vastunā yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya vartamānaḥ

yatprāgabhāvena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasya bhaviṣyatkālaḥ

yatpradhvaṁ sena yaḥ kālo’vacchidyate sa tasyātītakālaḥ

tathācāvacchedakatritvādhīnaḥ kālatritvavyavahāraḥ upaskaravṛttiḥ!

idānīṁ sarvotpattimatāṁ kālaḥ kāraṇamityāha .

nityaṣvabhāvādanityeṣu bhāvāt kāraṇe kālākhyeti ka° sū° . itiśabdo

hetau itihetoḥ kāraṇe—sarvotpattimatkāraṇe kālaḥ ityākhyā . hetumāha

nityeṣvabhāvāt anityeṣu bhāvāditi nityeṣu ākāśādiṣu yugapajjātaḥ

ciraṁjātaḥ kṣipraṁ jātaḥ idānīṁ jātaḥ divā jātaḥ rātrau jāta

ityādipratyayasyābhāvāt anityeṣu ghaṭapaṭādiṣu

yaugapadyādipratyayānāṁ bhāvāt anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ kāraṇaṁ kāla

ityathaḥ . na kevalaṁ yaugapadyādipratyayabalāt kālasya

sarvotpattimannimittakāraṇatvam api tu puṣpaphalādīnāṁ

haimantikavāsantikaprāvṛṣeṇyādisajñābalādeva tadadhyavaseyam upa° .

bhāṣāmuktāvalyośca saṅkṣepeṇa tannirṇayo yathā

janyānāṁ janakaḥ kālojagatāmāśrayomataḥ .

parāparatvadhīhetuḥ kṣaṇādiḥ syādupādhitaḥ bhāṣā .

kālaṁ nirūpayati janyānāmiti tatra pramāṇaṁ darśayitumāha

jagatāmiti tathāhi idānīṁ ghaṭaityādipratītiḥ sūryaparispandādikaṁ yadi

viṣayīkaroti tadā sūryaparispandādinā ghaṭādeḥ sambandhovācyaḥ sa ca

saṁyogādirna sambhavatīti kālaeva tatsambandhaghaṭakaḥ kalpyate

itthañca tasyāśrayatvamapi samyak . pramāṇāntaraṁ darśayati

parāparatveti paratvāparatvabuddherasādhāraṇaṁ nimittaṁ ka laeva

paratvāparatvayorasamavāyikāraṇasaṁyogāśrayolāghavādatiriktaḥ

kalpyataiti bhāvaḥ . nanvekatya kālasya siddhau

kṣaṇadinamāsavarṣādisamayabhedona syādataāha kṣaṇādiriti

kālastveko’pi upādhibhedāt kṣaṇādivyāhāraviṣayaḥ . upādhistu

svajanyavibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnaṁ kamma,

pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnavibhāgovā

pūrbasaṁyogāvacchinnauttarasaṁyogaprāgabhāvo vā

uttarasaṁyāgāvacchinnaṁ karma vā . nacottarasaṁyogānantaraṁ

kṣaṇavyavahārī na syāditi vācyaṁ karmāntarasattvāditi . mahāpralaye

kṣaṇādivyavahāroyadyapi, tadā’nāyattyā dhvaṁ senopapādanāyaḥ .

dinādivyavahārastu tattatkṣaṇakūṭaireveti muktābalī .

tārkikaśiromaṇinā raghunāthaśiromaṇinā ca

padārthanirūpaṇaprakaraṇe tatra dikkālau neśvarādatiricyete iti vadatā

vibhurūpasyaikasya kālasya khaṇḍanaṁ kṛvam .

raghudevarāmabhadrābhyāṁ tadvivṛtaṁ tataḥ saṁkṣipya

padārthatattvasāre ca jayanārāyaṇatarkapañcānanena darśitaṁ yathā

dikkālau neśvarādatiriktau prācyāṁ ghaṭa idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ

ityādivyavahārasya īśvarātmakavibhuviṣayakatvenaivograpatteḥ, naca

tayorbhinnaviṣayakatvamanubhavasiddhamiti vācyaṁ tathā sati prācyāṁ

ghaṭaḥ pratīcyāṁ ghaṭaḥ idānīṁ ghaṭaḥ tadānīṁ ghaṭa ityāderapi

bhinnabhinnaviṣayakatvānubhavāt kāladiśorapi bahutvāṅgokāraprasaṅgāt,

tathā ca upādhibhedādekayā diśā ekena kālena ca yathā bhavatāṁ

bahūnāṁ vyavahārāṇa apaprattistathā’smākamapi

ekeneśvareṇāgamānumānāpyāṁ siddhena sarveṣāmeva

tādṛśavyavahāṇāsupadhibhedāduṣapatti sambhavati, suryakriyādau

svasaṁyukteśvarasaṁyogitapanāśritatvādisambandhena ghaṭādeḥ

sattvasambhavena tatsambandhaghaṭakatayā’pyati raktakālādyasiddheḥ .

ayavā kṣaṇā evātiriktāḥ idānāmityādivyavahāraviṣayāḥ,

vibhāgaprāgabhāvāvacchinnakarmaṇaḥ kṣaṇatvāsambhavāt

bhābikarmāntarajanyavibhāgāntaraprāgabhāvāvacchinnasya karmaṇaḥ

kṣaṇacatu yādisthāyitvena tādṛśasyopā dhitvāmambhavāt naca vibhāge

svajanyatvaṁ viśeṣaṇīyam, svavānanugamādanangaptāpatteḥ,

vibhāgajananādidaśāyāmupādhyantarasya vācyatayā

tāvatāpyananugamācca, evañcopādhīnāmatiriktānāṁ

kṣaṇikapadārpamvarūpāṇāṁ kṣaṇānāmavaśyābhyupeyatayā tere .

tādṛśāḥ sarve vyavahārā upapādanīyāḥ kimatiriktena kāleveti .

sāṁkhyamate tasya kāśalarbhāvaḥ na pṛthakatattvāntaratvaṁ

tadetatsāṁkhyasūtrabhāṣyayordarśitam

khaṇḍadikkālayoḥ sṛṣṭimāha bhā° .

dikkālābākāśādibhyaḥ sāṁ° sū° .

nityau yau dikkālautāvākāśaprakṛtibhūtau pakṛterguṇaviśeṣaveva . ato

dikkālayorvibhatvopapattiḥ . ākāśavat savagataśca nitya itya

diśrutyaktaṁ vibhutvaṁ cākāśasyopapannam . yau tu khaṇḍadikkālau tau

tu tacadupādhisayogādākāśādatpadyete ityathaḥ

ādaśabdenopādhigrahaṇāditi . yadyapi tattadupādhiviśiṣṭākāśameba

khaṇḍadikka lau tathāpi ṣiśiṣṭasyātiriktatābhyupagamavādena

vaiśeṣikanaye śrotrasya kāryatāvat tatkābhāpamatroktam pra° bhā° .

atapadaṁ darśayiṣyamāṇamādhavagranthe ca vācaspatimatena

kālakhaṇḍanaṁ tu nityapibhukālakhaṇḍanaparaṁ tathāhi upādhibhidyate

na tu tadvāniti sā° sū° upādhibhedeca dharmibhedāsambhavasya

vyāsthāpanāt dharmiṇaḥ kālasya ekatvena upādhinā bhedāsambhavāt

upādhinā nā’nāgatādi bhedavyavahārasambhavaḥ tathā ca kriyādereva

upādhibhūtasyānāgatādivyavahāropapādakatayā tasyaiva kālatvam .

ataeva kriyaiva kāla ityabhiyuktoktiḥ . kālamādhavīye ca mādhavena

śaṅkāpūrvakaṁ kālaścetthaṁ nyarūpi

nanu nāyamudyamaḥ saphalaḥ kālasya gaganakusumāyamānatvāta

tadetatparamarahasyamabhijānānaḥ kapilamahāmunistattvāni

nirvivektukāmaḥ kālamupekṣyānyānyeva pañcaviṁśatitattvāni viveca

mūlaprakṛtiravikṛtirmahadādyāḥ prakṛtivichatayaḥ sapta . ṣāḍaśakastu

vikārā na prakṛtina vikṛtiḥ puruṣaḥ iti . na caiteṣveva

tattveṣakālamyāntarbhāvo muninā vivajita iti śaṅūnīyam

tvadabhimatamya kālamya pañcaviṁśatitattvānāṁ cānyādṛśāni lakṣaṇāni

. satvarajastamoguṇānāṁ sāmyāvasthā

malaprakṛtirmadahaṅkārapañcataktātrākhyānāṁ svaptānāṁ

prakṛtivikṛtīnām madhyetdhyavasāyaheturmattattvava

abhimānaheturahaṅkāraḥ . śabdasparśaruparasagandhātmakāni

pañcatanyātrāṇi pṛthivyādipañcamahābhūtānāṁmekādaśendiyāṇāñca

ṣoḍaśavikārāṇāṁ lakṣaṇāni prasiddhāni . apra kṛtiravikṛtiḥ

puruṣaścidātmakaḥ . na hyevaṁlakṣaṇakeṣ tattveṣu kālamyāntarbhāvaḥ

sambha vyate nāpi ṣaḍvaṁśaṁ tattvāntaraṁ muniranubhanyate . kathaṁ

tarhi munipraṇītāni tattvāni āryābhiḥ saṁgṛhṇāna īśvarakṛṣṇau

bahiḥkaraṇāntaḥkarane vicinvan kālaṁ vyājahāra? sāṁpratakālaṁ bāhya

trikālamābhyantara karaṇamiti . paraprasiddhyāparo bodhanīya iti

nyāyenāyaṁ vyavahāro na tu sasiddhāntābhipāyeṇeti vadāmaḥ . ata

evaitadvaco vyācakṣāṇā vācaspatimiśrāstattvakaumuhyāmevamāhuḥ

kālastu vaiśeṣikābhibhata eko nānāgatātītādi bhedaṁ pravartayitumarhati

. tasmādayaṁ yairupādhibhedairatītānāgatādibhedabhāvaṁ pratipadyate

santu taevopādhayo vyavahārahetavaḥ kṛtamantargaḍunā kāleneti

sāṁkhyācaryāḥ . tasvānna kālarūpatattvāntarābhyupagama iti .

athocyeta—bhūtakālo vartamānakāloṁ bhaviṣyatkāla iti evaṁ triṣvapi

bhūtādiṣvanugataḥ kālapratyaya ekamanugataṁ

kālatvamantareṇānupapanna iti tanna padārthapratyayavadupapatteḥ

yathā bhavanmate dravyapadārtho guṇapadārtha iti ṣaṭsu bhāveṣu

caturṣvabhāveṣvanugataḥ padārthapratyaya ekamanugata

padārthaśabdavācyaṁ tattvāntaramantareṇāpyupapannaḥ . tathā

kālaprayogo’pi kuto nopapadyeta! . tasmānnistattvaṁ kāla nirṇetuṁ

mahānayamudyamaḥ prekṣāvacchiromaṇermādhavācāryasya na

kathañcidapyapapanna ityevaṁ prāpte brūmaḥ āyuṣmataśce tasyevaṁ

nirūḍhakālatattve yaḥ pradvaṣaḥ sa kasya hetoḥ? itivaktavyam . ki

kapilamahāmuninā nirākṛtatvāt? 1 kiṁvā

sāṁkhyaśāstrapraṇoteṣutattveṣu asaṁgṛhītatvāt? 2 uta lakṣaṇābhāvāt? 3

āhosvitpramāṇā bhāvān? 4 athavā prayojanāmāvāt? 5, athavā

tattvagatapañcaviṁśatisaṁ khyābhyāsapāṭavenābhyasitāt

śraddhājāḍyāt? 6, na prathamaḥ kālanirākaraṇasūtrasya muninā

praṇītasyānupalambhāt . na dvitīyaḥ atiprasaṅgāt ṛgvedaproktānā

jyotiṣṭomādīnāmāyurvedadhanurvedagāndharvavedaproktānāsaitradhapas

trasvarādīnāṁ māsaṁgṛhītatvena teṣvapi bhāvataḥ pradveṣaḥ phana

vāryeta? . aya teṣāṁ viṣaśaṣyā’maṁgrahe’pi

sukhaduḥkhamohātmakatvena guṇatrayāntargatatvādastyevārthāt

saṁgrahaiyacyate tarhi kālasyāpyasau na daṇḍavārita iti buddhiṁ

samādhatasva . kālasya guṇavayapariṇāmatve sāvayavatvama nityatā ca

ghaṭāderiva prasajyeteti cet? nityaniraptayava kālatattvābhiniveśavato

vaiśeṣikādeḥ patatvayaṁ vajraprahāraḥ śirasi . vedavādināṁ tu na kāpi

kṣatiḥ . kālasyotapattisāvayatvayoḥ pratyakṣaśrutāvapalabhyamānatvāta

. taittiroyaśa khāyāṁ nārāyaṇīye kālotpattirāmnāyate sarve nimeṣajijñire

vidytaḥ puruṣādadhi kalāmuhūrtā kāṣṭhāścāhorātrāśca sarvaśaḥ .

ardhasāmā māmā ṛtavaḥ saṁvatsaraśca kalpattāmiti tamyāmeva

śāsvayāmāruṇakrtukacayana brāhmaṇe māvayavatvaṁ śrūyate uktoveṣo

vāsāṁsi ca ka lābayavānāmitaḥ pratīcyeṣiti . itosmādanuvākātpranocyeṣ

adhastaneṣu anuvākeṣa kālāvayavānāmṛtnāṁ dhyātavyo beṣa uktaḥ

vastrāṇi coktānītyathaḥ . nityatvaniravayavatvābhidhāyino

vaiśeṣikādiśāstrasya amṛtā devatā iti

badāpekṣikanityatāyāmantardhānaśaktyupetayakṣarākṣasādivat

saṁṛrśayogyāvayavaśvanyatāthā ca tātparye varṇanīyam .

atha manyase mahatā tapasā śivamārādhya tatprasāda

labbasarvajñatvapadaḥ kaṇādamunirvedavātparyaṁ mamyagvettīti ved

syaiva mandamatipratītādarthādarthāntaraṁ netavyasiti . evamapi yasya

prasādādayaṁ sarvaṁjñatāmalabhata saeva śivo mukhyaḥ sarvajña iti

tanmatānusāreṇa kaṇādamatasyaivātyathānayanamatyantamucitam .

śivo hi śaiveṣu āgameṣu ṣaṭatriṁ śattattvāni nirūpayat

kālavattvasyotpattimaṅgīncakāra . nikhilaśaivāgamasāramāryābhiḥ

saṁgṛhṇāno bhojarājaḥ śuddhāni pañca tattvaḥni

śivaśaktisadāśiveśvaravidyākhyāni nirdiśyetarāṇi

nirdiśanmāyākāryatvoktipūrvakameva kālaṁ niradikṣat puṁso jagataḥ

kṛtaye māyātastattva pañcakaṁ bhavati . kālo niyatiśca tathā kalā ca

vidyā ca rāgaśca iti tāni māyāsahitānyekādaśa tattvāni

sāṁkhyaprasiddhapañcaviṁśatitattvāni coddiśya vivṛṇvannidamāha

nānāvidhaśaktimayī sā janayati kālatattvamevādau . bhāvi

bhavadbhūtamayaṁ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti . taṭṭīkākāra itthaṁ

vyācakhyau . nanveṣa kālo naiyāyikādibhinityo’bhyapagataḥ ata āha

māvibhavadbhūtamayamiti . bhūtādi rūpeṇa trividhatvāt

acetanatvenāsyānityataṁ siddhamiti bhāvaḥ . kena ka ryeṇāsya

siddharataāha kalayavi jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti .

cirakṣiprādipratyayopādhidvāreṇa kalayatyākṣipatatyartha’iti . ittha

pratyakṣaśrutisahakṛtaśaitāptamaiḥ kaṇādaśāstrasya bādhe sati

uttaramāmāṁsāgataḍitīyādhyāyaprathamādhikaraṇanyāyo’nugṛhyate

tasya ca nyāyasya saṁgrāhakau ślokau sāṁkhyasmṛtyaḥsti saṅkoco na

vā yedasamanvaye . dharme vedaḥ sāvakāśaḥ saṅkocyo’navakāśayā .

pratyakṣaśrutimūlābhirmanvādismṛtibhi smṛtiḥ amūlākāpilo bādhyā na

saṅkoca’nayā tataḥ iti . ayamarthaḥ . ṛgvedadi bharagnihotrādidharmo

brahmaṇo jagatkartṛtvaṁ ca prati pādyate . sāṁkhyasmṛtyādistu

padhānasya jagatkāraṇatva pratipāṭayati tatra tayā smṛtyā vedasya

saṅkoco’sti . veti saṁśaye smṛterjagatkāraṇatvamantareṇānavakāśatvāt

prābalya vedasya tu dharme’pi caritārthacāddaurbalyam . tataḥ

smṛtyanusāreṇa vedaḥ samkucita iti pūrvaḥ pakṣaḥ .

pratyakṣaśrutibhirbahva bhiranugṛhītābahvyo manvādimṛtayo

brahmakāraṇatāmācakṣate sāṁkhyasmṛtistvekā mūlahīnā ceti

durbalatvāt saiva bādhyā ato nāsti vedasya saṅkoca iti siddhānta iti . atha

tārkikatvābhimānagrahagṛhītaḥ sana paravaśa evaṁ brūṣe

bhūtādonāmaupādhikānāṁ kālaviśeṣāṇāmevotpattirna tu nirupādhikasya

mukhyasya kālasyeti tarhi kapardikānveṣaṇāya

pravṛttaścintāmaṇimalabhatetyevaṁvāsiṣṭarāmāyaṇa

proktasyābhāṇakamya tvameva viṣayo’bhūḥ . yataḥ

sādharyavaidharmyajñānāya dravya dīnyanviṣyan

parabrahmatattvamavāgamaḥ . vyavahārahetūnāṁ

bhūtādikālaviśeṣāṇāmādhāraḥ svayaṁ vyāhārātīto nityo niracayavo

mukhyoyaḥ kālaḥ sa paramātmaiva . tathāca śvetāśvatarā āmananti . yaḥ

kālakālo guṇī sarvavidya iti . āstāṁ nityatvānityatvasāvayavatvacintā .

sarvathāpyasti sāṁkhyatattveṣu ārthikaḥ kālasargrahaḥ

sākṣātsaṁgrahābhāvastu jyotiṣṭomādivat

prakṛtipuruṣavivekānupayogādityavagantavyam . tṛtīyacaturthapakṣau tu

bhavato vaiśeṣikaparicayagandho’pi nāstīti prakaṭayataḥ . vaiśeṣika

grantheṣu sarveṣvapi kālaprakaraṇeṣu tallakṣaṇasya

tatsādhakānumānasya ca papañcitvāt pramāṇāntarāṇi tu kālasādhakāni

śrutyaivopanyastāni tathā ca taittirīyā āruṇaketuke mantramāmananti

smṛtiḥ pratyakṣamaitihyam anumānaścatuṣṭayam . etairādityamaṇḍalai

sarvaireva vidhāsyate iti . tatra smṛti anumeyaśrutimūlaṁ

manvādiśāstraṁ prayakṣaṁ śrotragrāhyo ‘kṛtrimo vedākhyo’kṣararāśiḥ,

yogipratyakṣamaupaniṣadābhimataṁ sākṣipratyakṣaṁ vā .

aitihyamitihāsapurāṇādike jyotiḥśāstrasyāpyatrāntarbhāvo draṣṭavyaḥ .

anumīyate svamūlabhūtaṁ smṛtivākyamanenetyenumānaḥ

śiṣṭācārastasya ca smṛtyanumāpakatvaṁ .

bhaṭṭācāryarvispaṣṭamabhihitam . ācā rācca smṛtiṁ jñātvā smṛteśca

śrutikalpanamiti, tadevaṁ smṛtyādīnāṁ catuṣṭayaṁ saphalam,

etaiścaturbhiḥ sarvairapyādityamaṇḍalaṁ pramīyata iti mantrasyārthaḥ .

nanu smṛtyādīni maṇḍalasādhakatvenātropanyastāni na tu

kālasādhakatveneti cet maivaṁ maṇḍalasya

sārvajanīnapratyakṣasiddhatvena tatra smṛtyādyanupayogāt,

kālavivakṣayevātra kālanirvāhakamaṇḍale tānyupanyastāni, tathā ca

maṇḍaladvārā kālaḥ pramīyate . kālavivakṣā cottaramantreṣvatisphuṭā

tatrānantaro mantraevamāmnāyate, sūryo marīcimādatte

sarvasmādbhuvanādadhi, tasyāḥ pākaviśeṣeṇa smṛtaṁ kālaviśeṣaṇamiti

tasyāyamarthaḥ . bhuvanagataṁ

sarvabhūtajātamadhikṛtyarasavīryapākādibhistattadanugrahasamarthaṁ

marīciṁ sūryaṁ svīkaroti tatkṛtena bhūtapākabhedena nimeṣādiḥ

parārdhaparyantaḥ kālavibhedo’smābhiravagato bhavatīti . kālaprati

pādakāni ca smṛtyādītyudāharāmaḥ . tatra manuḥ kālaṁ kālavibhaktiñceti

sṛṣṭiprakaraṇe kālaṁ vyavajahāra . yājñavalkyo’pi, śrāddhakālaḥ

prakīrtitaḥ iti . evamanyāsvapi smṛtiṣūdāhāryam . śrutiṣvapi kṛtaṁ svapne

vicinoti kālaḥ iti bahvṛcāḥ . ahameva kālonāhaṁ kālasyeti taittirīyāḥ . kā

ca sandhyā kaśca sandhyāyāḥ kāla iti sāmagāḥ . yogaśāstre’pi

saṁyamaviśeṣāddhāraṇādhyānasamādhitrayarūpādyogino’tītādikālaṁ

pratyakṣataḥ paśyantīti abhihitam tathā ca pātañjalabhūtram

pariṇāmatrayasaṁyamādatītānāgatādijñānamiti . sāṁkṣipratakṣamapi,

ahamasminakāle nivasāmi, ityanubhavastāvatsārvajanīnaḥ . na cāsau

bāhyendriyakṛtaḥ kālasya rūpādihīnatvāt . nāpi

mānasastārkikaistadanaṅgīkārāt . nāpyanumānādijanyaḥ

aparokṣapratyayatvāt . ataḥ

sāmagryabhāva’pyaparokṣadarśanātsākṣipratyakṣametadityaupaniṣadām

anyante . itihāse’pi mahābhārate praharau ghaṭikānyūnau praharau

ghaṭikādhikau . sa kālaḥ kutapojñeya pitṝṇāṁ, dattamakṣayamiti .

purāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavānkālo’santā’jaraḥ paraḥ iti śiṣṭāśca

paurṇamāsyākhyakāle svasvakalocitān devaviśeṣebhyaḥ

kṣīradadhyādisamarpyaṇādikāndharmaviśeṣānbhānuvārādikālaviśeṣe ca

samācaranti . tadevamanekapramāṇapramite kāle

pramāṇābhāvarūpaścaturthaḥ pakṣaḥ kathamāśaṅkyeta? . nāpi

prayojanābhāvāditi pañcamaḥ pakṣo yujyate . tārkikaistāṣat

sarvotpattinimittakāraṇatvamuddhoṣitam . loke

kṛṣyādyupayogaḥḥkālaviśeṣya kṛṣīvalādibhirvyavahriyate .

gṛhapraveśaprayāṇādyupayogo jyotiḥśāstraprasiddhaḥ .

śrautasmārtakarnopayogastu pradarśayiṣyate . tasmāt

sāṁkhyaśraddhājāḍyakṛtasrava pradveṣa ityayaṁ ṣaṣṭaḥ pakṣaḥ

pariśipyate . tathāca pāpā tmanaḥ svasya budbyaparādhaṁ puṇyātmani

mādhavācārye samāro payan kayā vā śikṣayā na daṇḍyo’si . tadevaṁ

kālasyapratyā khyātumaśakyatvānnirṇayodyamaḥ saphala iti sthitam .

nanu katarakālo’tra nirṇīyate . kiṁ kevalaḥ kālaḥ kiṁ vā kālakālaḥ . nanu

kimityaprasiddhabhāṣayā bhīṣayasi, na bhīṣayāmyahaṁ kiñcāstyeva

kalayitavyabhedātkāladvaividhyam . yena

prāṇidehādayo’tītavartamānādirūpeṇa kalayitavyāḥ sa kevalaḥ kālaḥ . sa

ca tattvaprakāśavacanena pūrvam udāhṛtaḥ kalayati jagadeṣa kālo’taḥ iti

. tādṛśo’pi kāryotpattisthitivināśakāriṇā yena kalayitavyaḥ sa kālakāla iti .

sa ca vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇedaśitaḥ kāle pi kalyte yeneti śrutiśca bhavati sa

viśvakṛdviśvavidātma yonirjñaḥ kālakālo guṇī sarvavidyaḥ

pradhānakṣatrajñaḥ iti guṇī sasāramokṣasthitibandhaheturiti ca

kūrmapurāṇe’pi anādireṣa bhagavān kālo’nanto’jaraḥ paraḥ . sarvagatvāt

svatantratvāt sarvātmatvānmaheśvaraḥ . brahmāṇo bahavo rudrā anye

nārāyaṇādayaḥ . ekohi bhagavānīśaḥ kālaḥ kaviriti smṛtaḥ .

brahmanārāyaṇeśānāṁ trayāṇāṁ prākṛtolayaḥ . procyate kālayogena

punareva ca sambhavaḥ . paraṁ brahma ca bhūtāni vāsudevo’pi śaṅkaraḥ

. kālenaiva ca sṛjyante saeva grasate punaḥ . tasmāt kālatmakaṁ viśvaṁ

sa eva parameśvaraḥ iti . viṣṇudharmottare’pi . anādinidhanaḥ kālo

rudraḥ saṅkarṣaṇaḥ smṛtaṁ . kalanātsarvabhutānāṁ sa kālaḥ parikīrtitaḥ

. karṣaṇāt sarvabhūtānāṁ sa tu saṅkaṣaṇaḥ smṛtaḥ .

sarvabhūtaśamitvācca sa rudraḥ parikīrtitaḥ anādinidhanatvana sa mahān

parameśvara iti jyotiḥśa stre’pi bhūtānāmantakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ

kalanātmakā iti . tatraivaṁ sati dvayormadhye kālakālotra na nirṇetaka

tasya dharmānuṣṭhāneṣvahetutvema heyatvādanupādeyatvācca .

yastvitaro māsapakṣatithyādirūpaḥ so’pi jyotiḥśāstre samyaṅnirṇīta iti

kṛtamanayā kālanirṇayapravṛttyeti prāpte brūmaḥ umayamapyatra

nirṇetavyaṁ kālakālasya jagadīśvarasya sarveṣu karmārambheṣu

anusmartavyatvāt ataeva śiṣṭāḥ puṇyāhavācanādāvīśvaramanusmaranti .

sarveṣu kāleṣu samasta deśeṣvaśeṣakāryeṣu tayeśvareśvaraḥ .

sarvaiḥsvarūpairbhagavānanādimānmamāstu māṅgalyavivṛddhaye hariḥ .

yasya smṛtyā ca nāmoktyā tapoyajñakriyādiṣu . nyūnaṁ saṁpūrṇatāṁ

yāti sadyovande tamacyutamiti . māsādirūpabhedasya tu svarūpeṇa

jyotiṣe nirṇītatve’pi śrautasmārtakarmaviśeṣeṇa saha kālasyāṅgāṅgibhāvī

nirṇetavyaḥ . yadyapyasau hemādiprabhṛtiṣu grantheṣu

nirṇītastathāpyanekatra viprakīrṇasyaikatra saṁgrahārthamatra yatnaḥ

kriyate . tadevaṁ cikīrṣitasya granyasya kālarūpo viṣayaḥ

saṁgraharūpaṁ prayojanaṁ cāstīti ayaṁ grantha ārabhyate . nityo

janyaśca kālau dvau tayorādyaḥ pareśvaraḥ . so’vāṅamanasagamyo’pi

dehī bhaktānukampayā nityakālasya parameśvaratve pramāṇaṁ

pūrvamevopanyastam . parameśvarasya cāvāṅmanasagocaratve sarve

vedāntāstadanusārismṛtipurāṇāni tattvavidanubhavaśca pramāṇam .

bhaktānugrāhimūrtisvīkāraśca ta lavakārākhye sāmavedaśākhāviśeṣe

kasyāṁ cidākhyāyikāyāmāmnāyate tasyāṁ hyāstyāyikāyāmevamuktam—

agnivāyvi ndrādayo devā īśvarānugṛhītāḥ sarvatra vijayamānāḥ

svakīyameva tatsāmarthyamityamimanyante sma . tān

bodhāyitumavāṅmanasagamyaṁ parameva brahma pūjyāṁ

cakṣurgamyāṁ kāñcinmūrtiṁ dhārayitvā prādurbabhūva . tayā saha

vādaṁ kṛtvāpi rājasacittāvagnivāyū tadbrahmatattvaṁ naiva bubudhāte

indrastu sātvika cittobubudhe iti . vāsiṣṭharāmāyaṇe’pi śukropākhyāne

śukraṁ mṛtamavalokya tatpitā bhṛguḥ kruddho mārayitāraṁ kālaṁ

śapnumudyata tadānīṁ kālo’nugrahītumīdṛśena rūpeṇāvirbabhūveti

paṭhyate athākalitarūpo’sau kālaḥ kavalitaprajaḥ . ādhibhautikamāsthāya

vapurmunimupāyayau . bahupāśadharaḥ śrīmān kuṇḍalī kavacānvitaḥ .

ṛtuṣaṭkamayodāravaktraṣaṭkasamanvitaḥ .

māsadvādaśakoddāsabhujadvādaśakodbhaṭaḥ . svākārasamayā bahvyā

vṛtaḥ kiṅkarasenaya . sa upetya praṇamyādau kupitaṁ taṁ mahāmunim .

kalpakṣubdhāvdhigambhīraṁ sāntvapūrvamuvāca h . tvamatyantatapā

vipra! vayaṁ niyatiprālakā tena saṁpūjyase pūjya . sādho! netaravīkṣayā

. mā tapaḥ kṣapayā’buddha! kalpakālamahānalaiḥ . yo na dagdho’smi me

tasya kiṁ tvaṁ śapena dhakṣyasi? . saṁsārāvalayo grastā

nigīrṇārudrakoṭayaḥ . bhuktāni viṣṇuvṛndāni kena śaptā vayaṁ mune! .

bhoktāro hivayaṁ brahman bhojanaṁ yuṣmadādayaḥ . svayaṁ niyatireṣā

hi nāvayoretadokṣitamiti . na ca bhaktānujighṛkṣayā svekṛtā

mūrtirīdṛśyeveti kaścinniyamosti sarvātmakasya parameśvarasya

bhaktacittapriyāyāḥ sarvasyā api mūrte svakīyatvāt ataeva

bhagavadgītāyām yo yo yāṁ yāṁ tanu bhaktaḥ śraddhayārcitumicchati .

tasya tasyācalāṁ śraddhāṁ tāmeva vidadhāmyaham . sa tayā śraddhayā

yuktastasyā rādhanamīhate . labhate ca tataḥ kāmān mayaiva vihitān

hitāniti . viṣṇurudrādivat acetanamūrtayo’pi

tattatphalaviśaṣārthibhirośvaratvenopāsyāḥ . tadetadṛgvede

samāmnāyate . etaṁ hyeva bahvyaca mahatyukthe mīmāṁsa

ntaetamagnāvadhvaryava, etaṁ mahāvratecchandogā, etamasyām

(pṛthivyām) etaṁ divyetaṁ vāyāvetamākāśa etamoṣadhīṣvetaṁ

vanaspatiṣvetaṁ chandasyetaṁ nakṣatreṣvetaṁ sarveṣu bhūteṣviti

vājasaneyino’pi maṇḍalabrāhmaṇe tametamagnimadhvaryava upāsata

ityāramya paṭhanti viṣamiti sarpāḥ, sarpa iti sarpavidaḥ, urgiti devaḥ,

rayiriti manuṣyāḥ, māyetyamurāḥ, svadheti pitaro, devajana iti

devajanavido rūpamiti gandharvā, gandhaityapsarasastaṁ

yathāyathopāsate tadeva bhavatīti . taittirīyāśca paṭhanti kṣema iti vāci,

yogakṣemam iti prāṇāpānayorityādi . parabrahmaṇyāropitaṁ

yadyāvajjagadrūpam asti tena sarveṇaḥpyupāsanayā parameśvaro

rūpavānbhavatītihiraṇmayādhikaraṇatejomayādhikaraṇayoḥ prapañcitam .

evaṁ ca sati yo yadā yatkarmārabhate sa tadā tatkarmopayuktāṁ

kālātmakasyeścarasya mūrtimiṣṭadevaṁtārūpeṇānusmaret . ata eva

mantraśāstreṣu nānāvidhāni dhyānānyupadiṣṭāni .

loke’pyāvidvadāgopālāṅganaṁ sarvo’pi jana ekaikāṁ devatāṁ svecchayā

pūjayati tadetadbhagavānāha yajante sātvikādevān yakṣarakṣāṁsi

rājasāḥ pretān bhūtagaṇāṁścānthe yajante tāmasā janāḥ iti tasma

dārabhyamāṇakarmaphalapradonijeṣṭadevatārūponityaḥ kālaḥ

karmārambheṣu anusmartavya iti siddham .

atha janyaṁ kālaṁ nirūpayāmaḥ . nanu kālasya janyatve sati kathaṁ

pralaye kālavyavahāraḥ . pralayatvasya janyānadhikaraṇatvarūpatvāt .

pralayo’tītaḥ pralayobhāvīti kālanityatvavādinastavāpi samodoṣaḥ .

nityasya kālasya tapanaparisyandādyupādhibhiḥ paricchede satyetāvān

kāla iti kāleyattā varṇayitavyā . na ca pralaye tadupādhayaḥ santi .

atastava kathaṁ pralayakāle iyattānirṇayaḥ . atha

satkāryavādābhyupagamenopādhayo’pi vāsanā rūpeṇa santi tarhi kāle’pi

tatsamānaṁ, na caitāvatā nityatāprāptiḥ upādhiṣu tadanaṅgīkarāt . atha

manyase iyattārahite’pi pralayakāle sṛṣṭikāleyattāvāsanāvaśādiyattā

vyavahriyate . tatropādhyāyatvādirdṛṣṭāntaḥ . yathā kaścinmāṇavakaḥ

triṁśadvarṣavayaskādadhyetumupakramya

saṁvatsaramadhītyāsmadupādhyāya ekatriṁśadvarṣavayaska

ityadhyayanarahite’pyatote vayasyvapādhyāyatvaṁ vyavaharati .

tadvadiyattāvyavahāraḥ . evaṁ tarhyanena nyāyena kālarahitapralaye

kālavyavahāraḥ kiṁ na syāt? . kālarahitaṁ ca pralayādikaṁ vastvastoti

māṇḍūkyādiśrutayo’bhyupra gacchanti . tathā ca śrūyate,

yaccānyattrikālātītaṁ tadapyoṅkāra eveti . prābhākarāścāpūrvasya

kālatrayāsaṁsṛṣṭāṅkāñcidavasthābhāhuḥ . tasmātkālaḥ sukhena

janyatāṁ sa ca sāmānyaviśeṣābhyāndvividhaḥ . tasya

cobhayavidhasyeśvarākhyānnityātkālādutpattiṁ manurāha kālaṁ

kālavibhaktiñca nakṣatrāṇi grahāṁstathā . sṛṣṭiṁ sasarja caivemāṁ

sraṣṭumicchannimāḥ prajāḥ iti . tatra yaḥ sāmānyakālaḥ sa

viśeṣānugatatvāttadapekṣayā nityograhagatyādibhiranumeyo

bhūtotpattinimittakāraṇamiti tārkikajyautiṣikādayaḥ pratipedire . tatra

jyautiṣikā evamāhuḥ prabhavaviratibhadhyajñānabandhyā nitāntaṁ

viditaparamatattvā yatra te yogino’pi . tamahamiha nimittaṁ

viśvajanmātyayānāmanumitamabhivande bhagrahaiḥ kālamīśam .

yugavarṣamāsadivasāḥ samaṁ pravṛttāstu caitraśuklādeḥ .

kālo’yamanādyanto graharbharanumīyate kṣetra iti kālaviśeṣeṣu ca

saṁvatsaraḥ prādhānabhūtaḥ . anye sarve guṇabhūtāḥ .

tathācāruṇaketuke samāmnāyate nada va prabhavā kācidakṣayyā

syandate yathā . tāṁ nadyobhisamāyanti saha, sā na nivartate . evaṁ

nānāsamutthānāḥ kālāḥ saṁvatsaraṁ śritāḥ . aṇuśaśca

mahāntaścasarvesamavayanti tam . sa taiḥ sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭa ūhaḥ

sanna nivartate iti . ayamarthaḥ . bhāgīrathīgodāvaryādikā nadīva kālaḥ

kutaścidutpattisthānādutpadyate . taccotpattisthānaṁ sāṁkhyoktaṁ

prakṛtiḥ śivāgamoktamāyā vā śrutismṛtyuditā nityakālātmaka īśvaro vā

bhaviṣyati . yathā tāṁ gaṅgādikāṁ mahānadī manyāṁ

svalpanadyo’bhitaḥ praviśanti sā ca praviṣṭairnadyantaraiḥ saha vistīrṇā

pravahatpravāhā satī na kadācit śuṣyati . evaṁ nānāvidharūpaiḥ

samutpannāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁvatsarākhyaṁ pradhānaṁ kālamāśritāḥ .

tatra nimeṣādyā ayanaparyantāḥ kālabhedāḥ saṁsatsarādaṇavo,

yugādyāḥ parārdhaparyantāḥ saṁvatsarānmahāntaste sarve taṁ

saṁvatsaraṁ samyak praviśanti . aṇū nāmavayavatvena praveśaḥ .

mahatāntu saṁvatsarāvṛttiniṣpādyānāmadhyakṣaḥ saṁvatsaraiti tatra

praveśo’bhidhīyate . tathāca yedāṅgajyotiṣagranthe paṭhyate

pañcasaṁyatsaramayaṁ yugādhyakṣaṁ prajāpatim .

dinartvayanamāsāṅga praṇamya śirasā sthita iti . sa ca

saṁvatsarasteraṇubhirmahadbhiśca sarvaiḥ samāviṣṭo’tidīrghaḥ

sannasmin jagati ta cchidyata iti . nanvaṇutvaṁ nimeṣe paryavasitaṁ

mahattvotu parārdhe tathā ca tayoranyatarasya prādhānyamucitam .

tatra kathaṁ saṁvatsarasya prādhānyam? iti cet īśvareṇa prathamaṁ

sṛṣṭatvāditi brūmaḥ . tathā ca vājasaneyinaḥ samāmananti so’kāmayata

dvitīyoma ātmājāyeteti sa manasā vācā mithunaṁ samabhavadyattadreta

āsīt sa saṁvatsaro’bhavaditi . tasmātsaṁvatsaraḥ pradhānam, ataeva

vayaṁ saṁvatsarabhāramya kālaviśeṣaṁ nirṇayāmaḥ . tatra

saṁvatsaro’yanamṛturmāsaḥ pakṣaḥ tithirnakṣatraṁ yoga ityevaṁ vidhāḥ

karmakālāḥ . yadyapi purāṇaṣu mṛtyumārkaṇḍeyādīnāṁ

yugādikalpādiparimitaṁ tapaḥ smaryate tathāpi śatasaṁvatsarāyuṣo

manuṣyānadhikṛtya dharmaśāstrapravṛtteḥ yugādinirṇayonoyayuktaḥ .

śāstrāṇāṁ manuṣyādhikāratvaṁ cāsmābhiḥ pārāśarasmṛtivyākhyāne

manuṣyāṇāṁ hitaṁ dharmam ityasminvacane prapañcitam . yetu kalau

pañca vivarjayet ityādayomanuṣyadharmāsteṣvapi na yugādikaṁ

nirṇetavya saṁdehābhāvāt . na ca śatāyuṣāmadhikāre kathaṁ

sahasrasaṁvatsarasatraśrutiriti śaṅkanīyam tatra

saṁvatsaraśabdodivasapara iti ṣaṣṭhādhyāye sapnamapādenirṇītatvāt .

ye’pi caturdaśasavatsarāvṛttisādhyā anantavratādayasteṣvapi na

saṁvatsarādhikaḥ kaścitkālo nirṇetavyo’sti . ataḥ

saṁvatsaramārabhyāvāṁñca eva nirṇetavyāḥ karmāṅakālāḥ . na ca

kālasya karmāṅgatve vivaditavyam sāyaṁ buhoti prātarjahotītiḥ śruteḥ

tattatkarmaṇastāvadapūrvaviṣayatvāt (apūrvajanakatvāt,

prādhānyamabhyugamya tathā ca kālasya guṇatvenānvayaḥ pariśiṣyate

ataeva gargaḥ tithinakṣatravārādi sādhanaṁ puṇyapāpayoḥ .

pradhānaguṇabhāvena svātasthyeṇa na te kṣamāḥ iti .

tasmādaṅgabhūteṣa nirṇeyeṣa kāleṣvavayavitvena

saṁvatsarasyābhyarhitatvādalpavaktavyatayā sūcīkaṭāhanyāyānusāreṇa

ca saeva ādau nirṇīyataitisthitam . sū° si° raṅga° kālavibhāgaścetthaṁ

pradarśitaḥ

lokānāmamakṛtkālaḥ kālo’nyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ . sa dvidhā

sthūlasūkṣmatvānmūrtaścāmūrta ucyate sū° si° . kālo dvidhā tatraikaḥ

kālo’khaṇḍadaṇḍāyamānaḥ śāstrāntarapramāṇasiddhaḥ . lokānāṁ

jīvānāmupalakṣaṇādacetanānāmapi . antakṛdvināśakaḥ . yadyapi

kālasteṣāmutpattisthitikārakastathāpi vināśasyānantatvāt

kālatvapratipādanāya cāntakṛdityuktam .

antakṛdityanenaivotpattisthitikṛdityaktamanyathā nāśakatvāsambhavāt .

ataeva kālaḥ sṛjati bhūtāni kālaḥ saṁharati prajāḥ ityādyuktaṁ

granthāntare . anyo dvitīyaḥ kālaḥ khaṇḍakālaḥ . kalanātmako

jñānaviṣayasvarūpaḥ . jñātuṁśakyaityarthaḥ . sa dvitīyaḥ kalanātmakaḥ

kālo’pi dvidhā bhedadvayātmakaḥ . tadāha sthūlasūkṣmatvāditi

mahattvāṇutvābhyām . mūrtaḥ—iyattāvacchinnaparimāṇaḥ .

amūrtastadbhinnaḥ kālatattva vidbhiḥ kathyate . cakāro hetukrameṇa

mūrtāmūrtakramārthakaḥ . tena mahān mūrtakālo’ṇṛramūrtaḥ kāla

ityarthaḥ . athoktaṁ bhedadvayaṁ svarūpeṇa pradarśayan

prathamabhedaṁ pratipipādayiṣustadavāntarabhedeṣu bhedadvayamāha

raṅganāthaḥ . prāṇādiḥ kathito mūrtastruṭyādyo’mūrtasañjñakaḥ .

ṣaḍabhiḥ prāṇairvināḍī syāt tatṣaṣṭhyā nāḍikā smṛtā sū° si° .

prāṇaḥ svasthasukhāsīnasya śvāsocchāsāntarvartī kālo

daśagurvakṣaroccāryamāṇa ādiryasyaitādṛśaḥ prāṇanāntargato mūrtaḥ

kāla uktaḥ . truṭirādyā yasyaitādṛśaḥ kāla eva

prāṇāntargatastraṭitatparādiko’mūrtasañjñaḥ . athāmūrtasya

mūrtādibhūtasya vyadhahārāyogyatvenāpradhānatayānantaroddiṣṭasya

bheda pratipādanamupekṣya mūrtakālasya vyavahārayogyatvena

pradhānatayā prathamoddiṣṭabhedān vivakṣuḥ prathamaṁ

palaghaṭyāvāha . ṣaḍbhiriti . ṣaḍabhiḥprāṇairasubhiḥ pānīyapalaṁ bhavati

palānāṁ ṣaṣṭhyā caṭikoktā kālatattvajñaiḥ . atha dinamāsādikamāha

raṅga° .

nāḍīṣaṣṭyā tu nākṣatramahorātraṁ prakīrtitam . tattriṁśatā

bhavenmāsaḥ sāvano’rkodayaignathā .

aindavastithibhistadvat saṅkrāntyā saura ucyate .

māsairdvādaśabhirvarṣaṁ divyaṁ tadaharucyate .

surāsurāṇāmanyo’nyamahorātraṁ viparyavāt . tatṣaṣṭiḥ ṣaḍguṇā 360

divyaṁ varṣamāsurameśa ca .

taddvādaśa sahasrāṇi caturyugamudāhṛttam . sūryābdasaṅkhyayā

dvitrisāgarairayutāhataiḥ 4320000 .

sandhyāsandhyāṁśasahitaṁ vijñeyaṁ taccaturyugam . kṛtādīnāṁ

vyavastheyaṁ dharmapādavyavasthāyā . yugasya daśamo

bhāgaścatustridvyekasaṅguṇaḥ . kramāt kṛtayugādīnāṁ, ṣaṣṭhāṁśāḥ

sandhayaḥ svakāḥ .

yugānāṁ saptatiḥ saikā manvantaramihocyate . kṛtābdasaṅkhya

1728000 stasthānte sandhiḥ proktojalaplavaḥ .

sasandhayaste manavaḥ kalpe jñenyāścaturdaśa . kṛtapramāṇaḥ

kalpādau sandhiḥ pañcadaśaḥ smṛtaḥ .

ityaṁ yugasahasreṇa bhūtasahārakārakaḥ . kalpo brāhmamahaḥ

proktaṁ śarvarī tasya tāvatī .

paramāyuḥ śataṁ tasya tayā’horātnasaṅkhyayā . āyuṣordhamitaṁ

tasya śeṣe kalpoyamādimaḥ sū° si° . aharādikālabhedāḥ (ahan) śabde

uktāḥ .

si° śi° tu nimeṣatatparatruṭirūpāḥ sūkṣmāḥ kālāvayavāḥ darśitāḥ

tasya vākyaṁ 1788 pṛ° darśitam . sa ca kālastrividhaḥ

vartamānabhūtabhaviṣyadbhedāt tatra bhūtabhaviṣyat kālāvapi

pratyekaṁ dvidhā adyatanānadyatanabhedāt tadbhedenaiva

lakāraviśeṣaṁ pāṇiniranuśaśāsa .

so’yaṁ kālaḥ ṣaḍindriyavedyaḥ iti mīmāṁsakā manyante na so’sti

pratyayoloke yatra kālo na bhāsate iti teṣāmukteḥ . vedāntinastu tasya

sākṣipratyayabhāsyatvamaṅgīcakruḥ tatra pramāṇaṁ kālamā°

anupadameva darśitam . so’yaṁ kālaḥ

deśavṛttaravyāpyavṛttitāniyāmakaḥ . tathāhi yaḥ padārthaḥ

svādhikaraṇavṛttyabhāvapratiyogī so’vyāpyavṛttiriti bhaṇyate

tattānirvāhakaśca kālodeśaśca . kvaciddeśe sthitasya tādṛśapadārthasya

kālabhedena tatraivādhikaraṇe’bhāvastiṣṭhati yathā jñānāśraye ātmani

suṣuptikāle icchādiviśeṣaguṇāntarakāle ca jñānābhāvaḥ . yathā vā

guṇavati janyadravye utpattikāle guṇābhāvaḥ śyāmale apakve ghaṭe

raktatvābhāvaḥ raktatvasya pākīttaraṁ jāyamānatvāt . kālasattva ca

deśo’pi tathā . yathā ātmani jñānakāle śarārāvacchedena jñānaṁ,

ghaṭādyavacchedena tadabhāvaḥ . tathā vṛrkṣa kapisaṁyogakāle’pi mūle

tadabhāvaḥ . kālena kṛtasambandhaśca kālikasambandhaḥ tena

sambandhena sarveṣu janyabhāveṣu janyabhāvānāṁ vṛttimattā nityeṣu

gu kālikasambandhena na kasyāpi sattvam

nityānuyogikakālikatambanyānupagamāt iti naiyāyikāḥ . tasya ca

pauruṣaṁ daivasampāyā kāle phalati pārthiva! . trayametanmanuvyasya

piṇḍitaṁ syāt phalāvaham ityukteḥ kāryamātre nimittakāraṇatā . yadyapi

kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge dṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante

naivākāle kathañcaneti śāstrāntareṇa tattatkālānāmeva

yattatkāryotpattau hetutā ‘dhigatā tathāpi yadviśeṣayoḥ

kāryakāraṇabhāvastatsāmānyayorapīti nyāyāt sāmānyataḥ kāryamātraṁ

prati kālasāmānyasya hetutvam . kālaḥ krīḍati gacchatyāyustadapi na

muñcatyāśāvāyuḥ mohamu° . kāle bhavaḥ ṭhañ . kālika kālabhave tri°

samāsapratyayabidhau pratiṣedho vaktavyaḥ bā° ukteḥ

tadantavidhiparibhāṣāyāḥ apravṛtteḥ kālāntaśabdānnāsya pravṛttiḥ tena

tadanta śabdāt khaeva sādhuḥ samānakānīnaḥ prākkālīna ityādi

bhūriprayogāt . si° kau°

samānakālonaprākkālonaśabdayoraprāmāṇikatoktiḥ prauḍhoktireva

udāhṛtavārtikasya jāgarūkatvāt iti gauḍāāhuḥ . pratīcyāstu

kaumudīkāraśraddhāvaśāt ṭhañvidhāyakasūte

kālasāmānyatadviśeṣaparyāyāṇāṁ grahaṇāt samānakālaprākkālayorapi

kālaviśeṣatvena tataḥ ṭhañeva pravṛttirna khasyeti bhāṣyādiprayogastu

ārṣatvāt samādheyaḥ iti manyante . kālena nirvṛttaḥ ṭhañ kālika

kālasādhye tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . kartustātkālikī śuddhiriti smṛtiḥ tatra

tatkālaśabdasyaiva ṭhañaḥ prakṛtitvāt tena na pūrvoktavārtikasaṅkocaḥ

ataeva tatra tacchabdasyaivādyacovṛddhiḥ tena nivṛttamityadhikārāt

prakṛtimātrasyaiva grahaṇāt na kālatvena tatraprakṛtitā . kāle sādhuḥ

puṣyan pacyamāno vā aṇ . kāla—kāle sādhau kāle yikaśa māne kāle

pacyamāne ca tri° . atra sūtre kālaviśeṣasyaiva grahaṇaṁ na svarūpasya

tena na tato’ṇ ityanye . kālaḥ prāpto’sya yat . kālya prāptakāle śītādau

tri° kālodevatā’sya kālebhyobhavavat pā° ṭhañ . kālika kāla devatāke

havirādau striyāṁ ṅīp . 15 tattatkarmocitakāle varamekāhutiḥ kāle nākāle

lakṣakoṭayaḥ tri° ta° . akāle’pyatha vā kāle gaṅgāṁ prāpya saridvarām

prā° ta° . kāle kālakṛto naśyet phalabhogyo na naśyati yā° smṛ° .

ardhayāmaśabde 376 pṛ° darśite ravyādivāreṣu kālavelākhye 16

divāniśorardhayāmabhede yātrāyāṁ maraṇaṁ kāle vaidhavyaṁ

pāṇipīḍane . brate brahmabadhaḥ proktaḥ sarvaṁ karma tatastajet jyo°

ta° tasya sarvakarmasu varjyatāmāha 17 sāṁkhyīkte meghāsvye

vivekasākṣātakārāntarāye tuṣṭibhede yathā ādhyātmikyaścatasraḥ

prakṛtyupādānakālabhāgyākhyāḥ . bāhyāviṣayoparamāt pañca, nava

tuṣṭayobhavanti sā° kā0

yā tu pravrajyāpi na sadyonirvāṇadeti saiva kālaparipākamapekṣya

siddhinte vidhāsyati alamuttaptatayā tavetyapadeśe yā tuṣṭiḥ sā kālākhyā

megha (1) ucyate kau° . vivṛtañjaitadasmābhiḥ . pravrajyāmātrasya

vivekakhyātihetutve prabrajyāgrahaṇamātreṇa vivekakhyātyāpattirūpam

upadeśe asattavaprayojakaṁ dūṣaṇam sahakāryantarāpekṣākalpanāt

pariharannupadeśāntaraṁ darśayati na sadyo nirvāṇadeti . sadyaḥ,

grahaṇamātrāt na tu kālarūpasahakāryantarāpekṣaṇāta na nirvāṇadā

vivekakhyātijananadvārā na muktidetyarthaḥ . tathā ca

kṛṣervṛṣṭisamāyoge vṛśyante phalasiddhayaḥ . tāstu kāle pradṛśyante

naivākāle kathañcana iti śāstreṇa kāryamātraṁ prati kālasya sahakāritāyā

anvayavyatirekābhyāṁ ca prasiddhatvāt kālasyaiva taddhetutvamastu

kṛtaṁ dhyānābhyasādineti samuditārthaḥ .

kālasyasādhanatāsādhakaśāstreṇa kṛṣyādeḥ pradhāna phalahetutvaṁ

tatra kālasya sahakāritāmātraṁ pratipāditaṁ na tu tanmātrasya

hetutvamevañca kālasya sādhāraṇakāraṇatvam asādhāraṇakāraṇatvantu

kṛṣyādereva evañca prakṛte’pi vivekakhyātiṁ prati

dhyānābhyāsāderevārādpakārakatvāt asādhāraṇahetutvaṁ, kālasya

sādhāraṇahetutvamityasyāsadudhadeśatva miti bodhyam iti .

varsavācikālaśabdasya striyāṁ janapadā° ni° ṅīṣ . kālī kākālī

kāmadhurā kāśītalavāhino gaṅgā . bidagdha mu° samānapraśnottaram .

18 hiṁsake tri° tataḥ striyāṁ na ṅīṣ . kālāt vaṇṇaścet vārtikokteḥ .

kālānyā si° kau° . kālasyeyam aṇ ṅīp kālasya patnī ṅīṣ vā . kālī kālaśaktau

śivakāntāyāñca strī . adhikaṁ kālīśabde vakṣyate . 19 mṛtyau medi°

sarvasyāgrahaṇānāttasya tathātvam . aśumāṁśca tapastepe

gaṅgānayanakāmyayā . kālaṁ mahāntaṁ nāśaknīt tataḥ kālena

saṁsthitaḥ . dilīpastatsutastadbadaśaktaḥ kālameyikān bhāga° 9 9 2 3 1

kālaṁ mṛtyum śrīdharaḥ .

varṇavācakāt tasya bhāva ityarthe imanic kāliman pu° tal kālatā strī,

tva kālatva na° . kṛṣṇavarṇe . tatra yame upetya muniveśo’tha kālaḥ

provāca rāghavam raghuḥ . yamaparatve 20 dvitvasaṁkhyāyāṁ 21

tatsaṁkhyānvite ca bharaṇyāyamadaivatatvāt tasyāśca

aśvinyādinakṣatracakre dvitīyatvāt lakṣitalakṣaṇayā tatparatvam .

śivaparatve 22 ṣaṭsaṁkhyāyāṁ 23 tadanvate ca śivadaivatārdrāyā

aśvinyādiṣu ṣaṣṭhatvāduktarītyā tathātvam . ṛṇidhanicakraśabde 1428 pṛ°

darśitaṁ ṣaṭkālakāletyādi vākyam udā° kālasya velā ravitaḥ

śarākṣikālānalāgāmbudhayo gajendū jyo° ta° .

candrādigrahāṇāṁ dṛṣṭiyogyatāprāpakakālātmake 24 aṁśabhede ca .

sa ca si° śi° darśito yathā

dasrendavaḥ 12 śaulabhuvaśca 17 śakrā 14 rudrāḥ 11 khacandrā 10

stithayaḥ 15 krameṇa . candrāditaḥ kālalavā niruktāḥ

jñaśukrayorvakragayordvihīnāḥ si° śi° .

candrādīnāmene 12 . 17 . 14 . 11 10 . 15 . kālāṁśā jñeyāḥ .

budhaśukrayostu vakragatayordvihīnā 12 . 8 dvivarjitā jñeyāḥ .

atropapattiḥ . kālāṁśā iti kālātmakā aṁśāḥ ṣaḍbhira śairekā ghaṭikā .

ekasyāṁśasya daśa pānīyapalāni . atraitaduktaṁ bhavati . candrasya kila

dvādaśa 12 kālāṁśāḥ . arkasyāstamayādudayādvā

ghaṭikādvayādhike’ntare candro dṛṣṭiyogyo bhavati . tadūne

tatprabhācchāditatvādadṛśyaḥ . atastasya dvādaśa kālāṁśāḥ . evaṁ

bhaumasya saptadaśa 17 ṣaḍaṁśonāstisro ghaṭikāḥ 2 . 50 ityarthaḥ .

ebamanyeṣāṁ yathāpaṭhitāsteṣāṁ vimbasya sthūlasūkṣmatāvaśāt

nyūnādhikatā . ata eva budhaśukrayorvakragatayorvimbasya

sthūlatvāddvihīnāḥ . atropalabdhireva vāsanā prami0

yatrodayo vāstamayo’vagamyastaddigbhavo dṛkkhacaro raviśca .

astodayāsannadine kadācit sādhyastu paścāt taraṇiḥ saṣaḍbhaḥ si° śi° .

iha kendrabhāgairgrahasyodayo’stamayo vā yasmin dina

āyātastasyāsanne kasmiṁściddine taṁ grahaṁ raviṁ ca sphuṭaṁ kṛtvā

yasyāṁ diśi grahodayo’stamayo vā taddigbhavo dṛggrahaḥ kāryaḥ . yadi

prācyāṁ tadaudayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvodayalagnaṁ sādhyam . yadi ca

pratīcyāṁ tadāstamayikaṁ grahaṁ kṛtvāstalagnaṁ sādhyamityarthaḥ .

yadā pratīcyāṁ, tadāraviḥ saṣaḍbhaśca kāryaḥ .

idānīmiṣṭakālāṁśānayanamāha prami° .

dṛkkhecarārkāntarajātanāḍyo rasāhatāḥ kālalavāḥ syuriṣṭāḥ si° śi° .

dṛggrahārkayorantaraghaṭikāḥ sādhyāstā rasa 6 hatā iṣṭāḥ kālāṁśā

bhavanti . atha tairudayāstayorgataiṣyāḥ nāḍyaḥ prami° .

uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭāḥ kheṭodayo gamyagatastadā syāt .

ato’nyathā vā’stamayo’vagamyaḥ prokteṣṭakālāṁśaviyogaliptāḥ .

khābhrāṣṭabhū 1800 ghnādyucarodayāptāḥ

kheṭārkabhukyantarabhājitāśca . vakre tu bhuktyaikyahṛtā

avāptāstadantarāle divasā gataiṣyāḥ . tātkālikābhyāṁ ravidṛggrahābhyāṁ

muhuḥ kṛtāste sphuṭatāṁ prayānti si° śi° .

evaṁ ya iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāste proktebhyo yadi svalpā bhavanti tadā

grahasyodayo gamyaḥ . yadyadhikāstadā gata iti veditavyam .

ato’nyathāstamaya iti . atha proktāuktebhyoyadīṣṭāḥ svalpāstadā

grahasyāstamayogatoyadyadhikastadā gamya iti . atha

proktānāmiṣṭakālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstā aṣṭādaśaśatai 1800

rguṇyā dṛggrahākrāntasya rāśeḥ svadeśodayāsubhirbhājyāḥ .

phalakalānāṁ grahārkabhuktyantareṇa vakrage grahe bhuktiyogena

bhāge gṛhīte yallabdhaṁ te gatā eṣyā vādivasā bhavantyudaye

vāstamaye vā . tairdivasaistātkālikau dṛggrahārkau

kṛtvaivamasakṛtkarmaṇā samyak tatkālajñānaṁ bhavati .

atropapattiḥ . iṣṭakālāṁśasādhane lagnavāsanaiva . proktānāṁ

kālāṁśānāmanantarvartī graho dṛśyo bhavati . ato yāvadiṣṭā

nyūnāstāvadadṛśyaḥ . udaye vilokyamāne udeṣyati . aste

bilokyamāne’staṁ gata ityarthājjñāyate . iṣṭā yadyadhikāstadā

proktebhyo vilokyamāne’staṁgate bahirbhūtādgraho’dṛśya udaye

vilokyamāna uditaḥ astaṁ yāsyatītyarthājjñāyate . atha teṣāṁ

prokteṣṭānāṁ kālāṁśānāṁ ca yā antare kalāstāsāṁ kṣetraliptīnāṁ

karaṇāyānupātaḥ . yāvatyaḥ kālakalāstāvanta evāsavo bhavanti . atha

yadi dṛggrahodayāsubhiraṣṭādaśaśatāni 1800 kṣetraliptā labhyante tadā

tadantarakalāsubhiḥ kimiti . phalaṁ kṣaitraliptāḥ . tā

grahārkabhuktyantareṇa bhājyāḥ . bhuktyantaraṁ hi

kṣetraliptāntarātmakamataḥ sajātīyakaraṇāya kṣetraliptīkaraṇam .

bhuktyantareṇaiko divaso labhyata iti yuktamuktam . vakre tu bhuktiyoga

eva bhuktyantaram . dūrāntare sthūlakālo bhavatītyasakṛtkarma

sūkṣmārtham . atra viśeṣamāha . prami0

prāgdṛggarhaścedadhiko raveḥ syādūno’tha vā paścimadṛggrahaśca .

prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ kalābhiḥ sādhyastadānīṁ divasāgataiṣyāḥ . tathā

yadīṣṭakālāṁśāḥ proktebhyo’bhyadhikāstadā . vyatyayaścagataiṣyatve

jñeyo’hnāṁ sudhiyā khalu si° śi0

yadi prāgdṛggraho raveradhiko bhavati . atha vā paścimadṛggraho

nyūno bhavati tadāye iṣṭakālāṁśā ānītāsteṣāṁ proktānāṁ ca

yogakalābhirdivasāḥ sādhyāḥ . nāntarakalābhiḥ tathā

prāgdṛggrahe’rkādadhike sati paścāddṛggrahe vā nyūne ya iṣṭakālāṁśā

āgatāste ca yadi proktebhyo’dhikāntarāḥ tadā prokteṣṭakālāṁśayuteḥ

kalābhirye divasāḥ sādhitāsteṣāṁ divasānāṁ gataiṣyatve viparyayojñeyaḥ

.

atropapattiḥ . yo grahaḥprācyāmudeti pratitiṣṭhati vā asau raverūnaḥ

san praścimāyām adhikaḥ san prācyāṁ diśi proktakālāṁśairūnaḥ san

dṛśyatāmeti . tāvadbhireva paścimā yāmadhikaḥsan . ato raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ

prācyāṁ proktakālāṁśāḥ pratīcyāmagrataḥ . prācyāmūne grahe ya

iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveḥ pṛṣṭhataḥ . ataḥ pṛṣṭhagataireva

proktakālāṁśaisteṣāmantaraṁ kartuṁ yujyate . atha prācyāṁ

raveradhike dṛggrahe ya iṣṭakālāṁśāḥ sādhyante te raveragrato bhavanti

. ato’gragatānāṁ pṛṣṭhagatānāñca kālāṁśānāṁ yoge kṛtesatyantaraṁ

kṛtaṁ bhavati tathā uktebhya ūnābhyadhikā yadīṣṭā iti

yadgatagamyalakṣaṇamuktaṁ tat sajātīyānāmeva . yadā punareke

pṛṣṭhagatā eke’gragatāstadā tadgatagamyalakṣaṇaṁ vyatyayena bhavati

. ata uktaṁ vyatyayaśca gataiṣyatva ityādi . atra sudhiyeti

viśeṣaṇādubuddhimataidadanuktamapi jñāyate prami° . vyavahāre

vādiprativādinoḥ pratijñātārthasāghanāya rājñādeye 25 avasararūpe

samayabhede ca tatkālaviśeṣaḥ smṛtau darśito yathā pratyarthī labhate

kālaṁ tryahaṁ saptāhameva ca . arthī tu prārthayan kālaṁ tatkṣaṇādeva

hīyate . pratyarthino’pi kvacidviṣayena kālo deyaḥ

kvaciccārthipratyarthinoricchayā kālodeyaḥ yathāha yājña°

sāhasasteyapāruṣyago’bhiśāpātyaye striyām . vivādayet sadyaeva

kālo’nyatrecchayā smṛtaḥ .

samayarūpakālasya vaiśeṣikamate

saṁyogavibhāgapṛthaktvasaṁkhyāparimāṇarūpā pañca guṇāḥ . bhīmo

bhīmasenavat uttarapadalopaḥ . kāladaṇḍarūpe 26 yoge kāladaṇḍaśabde

udā° . vāraviśeṣe digbhedena jyotiṣokte yātrādau niṣiddhe 27 yogabhede

. sa ca yogaḥ mu° ci° uktaḥ . kauverīto vaiparītyena kālo’rkādye vāre

sammukhe tasya pāśaḥ . rātrāvetau vaiparītyena gamyau yātrā yuddhe

saṁmukhau varjanīyau . ayamaryaḥ . ravāvuttarasyāṁ kālaḥ, some

vāyavyāṁ, bhaume paścimāyām, budhe nairṛtyām, gurau dakṣiṇasyām,

śukre āgneyyāṁ, śanau pūrvasyām . ravāvuttarataḥ kālaḥ some

vāyavyabhāgake . bhaume tu paścime bhāge budhe nairṛtabhāgake . jīve

ca yāmyadigbhāge śukre cāgneyakoṇake . śanau tu pūrvadigbhāge

kālacakraṁ prakīrtitam . svarodaye yatrasthastatrakālaḥ syāt pāśastasya

tu sammukhaḥ . dakṣiṇasthaḥ śubhaḥ kālaḥ pāśo vāmadigāśrayaḥ .

yātrāyāṁ samare śreṣṭhastato’nyatra na śobhavaḥ . rātrau ca

vaiparītyena yathā ravau rātrau dakṣiṇasyāṁ kālaḥ uttarasyāṁ pāśa

ityādikrameṇetyūhyam . 28 kalāye (maṭara) śimbībhede, vaija° .

vikasatkalāyakusumam māghavyā° kālakusumamiti malli°

dhruvanāmakavasoḥ 29 putrabhede pu° . dhruvasya putro bhagavān kālo

lokaprakālanaḥ harivaṁ° 3 a° .

कालक — kālaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kālaka mfn. ( 5-4, 33) dark-blue, black

mfn. freckled (? or «dark», as with anger)

kālaka m. a freckle (? «black colour»)

kālaka m. the black part of the eye

kālaka m. a water-snake

kālaka m. a kind of grain

kālaka m. (in alg.) the second unknown quantity, Bījag.

kālaka m. N. of a Rakshas

kālaka m. of an Asura

kālaka m. pl. N. of a people

kālaka m. of a dynasty

kālaka mfn. («kālakā») f. a kind of bird

kālaka m. (g. «sthūlādi») N. of a female evil spirit (mother of the

Kālakeyas; daughter of Daksha ; also of Vaiśvānara & &c.

kālaka mfn. («kālikā») f. blackness or black colour

kālaka m. ink or blacking

kālaka m. a dark spot, rust

kālaka m. a fault or flaw in gold

kālaka m. change of complexion

kālaka m. the liver on

kālaka m. a particular blood-vessel in the ear

kālaka m. the line of hair extending from the pudenda to the navel

kālaka m. a multitude of clouds

kālaka m. snow

kālaka m. fog

kālaka m. the female of the bird Aṅgāraka

kālaka m. a female crow

kālaka m. the female of the bird Turdus macrourus (commonly «śyāmā»)

kālaka m. a scorpion

kālaka m. a small worm or animalcule formed by the fermentation of milk

kālaka m. N. of several plants (Vṛiścika-pattra, Valeriana Jaṭāmāṁsī, a

kind of Terminalia, a branch of Trichosanthes dioeca)

kālaka m. a kind of fragrant earth

kālaka m. a N. or form of Durgā

kālaka m. a girl of four years old who personates the goddess Durgā at a

festival held in honour of that deity

kālaka m. a kind of female genius 9532

kālaka m. one of the mothers in Skanda’s retinue

kālaka m. N. of a Vidyādharī cviii, 177

kālaka m. of a Kiṁnarī

kālaka m. of a Yoginī

kālaka m. of an attendant of the fourth Arhat

kālaka m. of a river

kālaka n. a worm-hole (in wood)

kālaka n. the liver

kālaka n. N. of a pot-herb

kālaka mf («ikā») n. to be paid monthly (as interest, «vṛddhi»).

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kālaka a. Black, dark-blue. —kaḥ

(1) A mole, freckle, mark.

(2) A water-snake.

(3) The black part of the eye.

(4) A kind of grain. —kā Ved.

(1) A kind of bird.

(2) A daughter of Daksha. —kaṁ

(1) The liver.

(2) An unknown quantity (in alg.).

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kālaka (von 1. kāla) 1) adj. «dunkelblau» (wenn die Farbe vorübergehend

ist, nicht constant am Gegenstande haftet), «dunkelblau gefärbt» P. 5, 4,

33. kālakaṁ mukhaṁ kopena, kālakaḥ paṭaḥ Sch. Neben nīlaka COLEBR.

Alg. 228. — 2) m. a) «Leberfleck am Körper, Sommersprosse» AK. 2, 6, 1,

49. H. 618. — b) «das Schwarze im Auge» SUŚR. 2, 304, 2. — c)

«Wasserschlange» (alagarda) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — d) «eine Getraideart»

SUŚR. 1, 73, 5. — e) N. pr. eines Rakshas R. 3, 29, 30 (kālakākhya,

welches auch ungetrennt als N. pr. gefasst werden könnte). eines Asura

HARIV. 2286. 14289. pl. N. eines Dānava-Geschlechts (s. kālakañja,

kālakeya) VP. 148, N. 9 (kūlaka, im Index aber kālaka). — f) N. pr. eines

Gebirges (?) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 14, 19 in Verz. d. B. H. 241. — 3) f. kālakā

a) «ein best. Vogel» VS. 24, 35. — b) N. pr. einer Unholdin (vgl. kālā,

kālikā), der Mutter der Kālakeya, gaṇa sthūlādi zu P. 5, 4, 3. MBH. 3,

12203. einer Tochter Daksha’s R. 3, 20, 12. 14. 17. Vaiśvānara’s ( = kāla

HARIV. 12492) HARIV. 208. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 33. — 4) n. a) «Leber» H. 604.

— b) Name einer Pflanze (s. kālaśāka) BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. — Vgl.

tilakālaka.

kālaka 4) c) «Wurmstich im Holze» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 79, 32. 35. 37.

kālaka 2) a) hierher wohl das erste kālaka in kālakā yeṣāṁ te kālakāḥ

PAT. a. a. O.6,58,b. — e) N. pr. eines Volkes MĀRK. P. 58, 32.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kālaka An Asura born to Kālikā by Kaśyapa. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Araṇya

Kāṇḍa, Chapter 14).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kālaka kāla + ka,

I. m.

1. The black in the eye, Suśr. 2, 304, 2.

2. A sort of grain, Suśr. 1, 73, 5.

3. The name of a Rākṣasa, or demon, Rām. 3, 29, 30; of an Asura,

Hariv. 2286.

II. f. kā, The name of a female demon, MBh. 3, 12203.

— Comp. tila-, m. a mole, a dark spot on the body, Suśr. 1, 31, 18.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kālaka [1] a. dark-blue, black. m. mole, freckle, a sort of grain. f. kālakā a

kind of bird; kālikā black spot, E. of Durgā.

kālaka [2] (f. kālikā) monthly.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kālaka kāla-ka, a. dark blue, black;

-kañja, m. pl. N. of a tribe of Asuras;

-kaṇṭhaka, m. sparrow;

-karman, n. death;

-kāṅkṣin, a. waiting or impatient for the right moment;

-kārita, pp. temporary;

-kūṭa, m. kind of poison (esp. that produced at the churning of the

ocean);

-kṛta, pp. produced by time; temporary;

-krama, m. course of time: in., ab. in course of time;

-kṣepa, m. waste of time, delay; d. to gain time;

-ṁkṛ, waste time (w. lc.);

-gaṇḍikā, f. N. of a river;

-gupta, (pp.) m. N. of a Vaisya.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kālaka na° kāla—svārthe ka kalayati raktatāṁ kala—nodane ṇvul vā . 1

kālaśāke bhāvapra° tasya kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt tathātvam . 2 yakṛti hemaca° .

nikhiladeharaktaprerakatvāt tasya tathātvam . yathoktaṁ bhāvapra° .

yadā raso yakṛt yāti tatra rañjakapittataḥ . rāgaṁ pākaṁca saṁprāpya sa

bhavedraktasaṁjñakaḥ . yakṛt plīhā ca raktasya mukhyasthānaṁ tayoḥ

sthitam . anyatra saṁsthitavatāṁ raktānāṁ poṣakaṁ bhavet iti ca .

dehasthe kṛṣṇavarṇe (jaḍula) 3 cihnabhede jatuke pu° amaraḥ 4

alagardhe jalavyāle (kālaḍhoḍā) sarpe pu° strī śabdara° . anitye varṇe

tena rakte cārthe kālācca pa° kan . kālaka kālavarṇena rakte 5 paṭādau

tri° tasya varṇasyānityatvāt rāgeṇa raktatayā’nityatvācca tathātvam .

striyāṁ ṭāp . kālikā śāṭī si° kau° . vījagaṇitokte 6 avyaktarāśisaṁ

jñābhede pu° avyaktaśabde 467 pṛ° vivṛtiḥ .

कृष्ण — kṛṣṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. black, dark, dark-blue (opposed to «śveta, śukla,

rohita», and «aruṇa») &c.

mf («ā») n. wicked, evil

kṛṣṇa m. (with or without «pakṣa») the dark half of the lunar month from

full to new moon

kṛṣṇa m. the fourth or Kali-yuga

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («kṛṣṇas») m. black (the colour) or dark-blue (which is

often confounded with black by the Hindūs)

kṛṣṇa m. the antelope

kṛṣṇa m. a kind of animal feeding on carrion («kṛṣṇa»)

kṛṣṇa m. the Indian cuckoo or Kokila (cf.

kṛṣṇa m. a crow

kṛṣṇa m. Carissa Carandas

kṛṣṇa m. N. of one of the poets of the (descended from Aṅgiras)

kṛṣṇa m. (a son of Devakī and pupil of Ghora āṅgirasa)

kṛṣṇa m. N. of a celebrated Avatār of the god Viṣṇu, or sometimes

identified with Viṣṇu himself ([ v, 2563; xiv, 1589 ff. 2359 &c.]) as

distinct from his ten Avatārs or incarnations (in the earlier legends he

appears as a great hero and teacher [; in the more recent he is deified,

and is often represented as a young and amorous shepherd with flowing

hair and a flute in his hand; the following are a few particulars of his birth

and history as related in 3304 ff. and in the Purāṇas &c.: Vasu-deva, who

was a descendant of Yadu and Yayāti, had two wives, Rohiṇī and Devakī;

the latter had eight sons of whom the eighth was Kṛiṣṇa; Kaṁsa, king of

Mathurā and cousin of Devakī, was informed by a prediction that one of

these sons would kill him; he therefore kept Vasu-deva and his wife in

confinement, and slew their first six children; the seventh was Balarāma

who was saved by being abstracted from the womb of Devakī and

transferred to that of Rohiṇī; the eighth was Kṛiṣṇa who was born with

black skin and a peculiar mark on his breast; his father Vasu-deva

managed to escape from Mathurā with the child, and favoured by the

gods found a herdsman named Nanda whose wife Yaśo-dā had just been

delivered of a son which Vasu-deva conveyed to Devakī after substituting

his own in its place. Nanda with his wife Yaśo-dā took the infant Kṛiṣṇa

and settled first in Gokula or Vraja, and afterwards in Vṛindāvana, where

Kṛiṣṇa and Bala-rāma grew up together, roaming in the woods and joining

in the sports of the herdsmen’s sons; Kṛiṣṇa as a youth contested the

sovereignty of Indra, and was victorious over that god, who descended

from heaven to praise Kṛiṣṇa, and made him lord over the cattle [ 3787

ff.; 7456 ff. ; Kṛiṣṇa is described as sporting constantly with the Gopīs or

shepherdesses [ 4078 ff.; 8301 ff. of whom a thousand became his

wives, though only eight are specified, Rādhā being the favourite [ 6694

ff.; 9177 ff. ; Kṛiṣṇa built and fortified a city called Dvārakā in Gujarāt,

and thither transported the inhabitants of Mathurā after killing Kaṁsa;

Kṛiṣṇa had various wives besides the Gopīs, and by Rukmiṇī had a son

Pradyumna who is usually identified with Kāma-deva; with Jains, Kṛiṣṇa is

one of the nine black Vasu-devas; with Buddhists he is the chief of the

black demons, who are the enemies of Buddha and the white demons)

kṛṣṇa m. N. of an attendant in Skanda’s retinue

kṛṣṇa m. of an Asura 12936 on

kṛṣṇa m. of a king of the Nāgas

kṛṣṇa m. of Arjuna (the most renowned of the Pāṇḍu princes, so named

apparently from his colour as a child)

kṛṣṇa m. of Vyāsa 11089

kṛṣṇa m. of Hārita see «-hārita»

kṛṣṇa m. of a son of śuka by Pīvarī (teacher of the Yoga) 980 ff.

kṛṣṇa m. of a pupil of Bharad-vāja

kṛṣṇa m. of Havir-dhāna 83

kṛṣṇa m. of a son of Arjuna 1892

kṛṣṇa m. of an adopted son of A-samaṇjas, 2039

kṛṣṇa m. of a chief of the Andhras

kṛṣṇa m. of the author of a on the

kṛṣṇa m. of a poet

kṛṣṇa m. of the author of a on the Dayā-bhāga

kṛṣṇa m. of the son of Keśavārka and grandson of Jayāditya

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Tāna-bhaṭṭa and uncle of Raṅga-nātha

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Dāmodara and uncle of Malhaṇa

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Prabhūjika and uncle of Vidyā-dhara

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Madana

kṛṣṇa m. of the grammarian Rāma-candra

kṛṣṇa m. of the son of Vāruṇendra and father of Lakṣmaṇa

kṛṣṇa m. of the father of Hīra-bhaṭṭa (author of the called Carakabhāṣya,

and of the work Sāhitya-sudhā-samudra)

kṛṣṇa m. N. of a hell

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («au») m. du. Kṛiṣṇa and Arjuna

kṛṣṇa m. pl. N. of the śūdras in śālmala-dvīpa

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («ā») f. a kind of leech

kṛṣṇa m. a kind of venomous insect

kṛṣṇa m. N. of several plants (Piper longum ; the Indigo plant ; a grape ;

a Punar-navā with dark blossoms ; Gmelina arborea ; Nigella indica ;

Sinapis ramosa ; Vernonia anthelminthica ; = «kākolī» ; a sort of Sārivā

kṛṣṇa m. a kind of perfume (= «parpaṭī»)

kṛṣṇa m. N. of Draupadī

kṛṣṇa m. of Durgā

kṛṣṇa m. of one of the seven tongues of fire

kṛṣṇa m. of one of the mothers in Skanda’s retinue

kṛṣṇa m. of a Yoginī

kṛṣṇa m. (with or without «gaṅgā») N. of the river Kistna

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («ī») f. night

kṛṣṇa mf («ā») n. («am») n. blackness, darkness, i, 123, 1 and 9

kṛṣṇa m. the black part of the eye

kṛṣṇa m. the black spots in the moon

kṛṣṇa m. a kind of demon or spirit of darkness

kṛṣṇa m. black pepper

kṛṣṇa m. black Agallochum

kṛṣṇa m. iron

kṛṣṇa m. lead

kṛṣṇa m. antimony

kṛṣṇa m. blue vitriol

kṛṣṇa m. ([cf. «kārṣṇa», &c.; cf. also Russ. ‘cernyi’, «black.»])

kṛṣṇa Nom. P. «-ṣṇati», to behave or act like Kṛiṣṇa

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

kṛṣṇa a. [kṛṣ-nak]

(1) Black, dark, dark-blue.

(2) Wicked, evil. —ṣṇaḥ

(1) The black colour.

(2) The black antelope.

(3) A crow.

(4) The (Indian) cuckoo.

(5) The dark half of a lunar month (from full to new moon).

(6) The Kali age.

(7) Viṣṇu in his eighth incarnation, born as the son of Vasudeva and

Devakī. [Kṛṣṇa is the most celebrated hero of Indian mythology and the

most popular of all the deities. Though the real son of Vasudeva and

Devakī and thus a cousin of Kamsa, he was, for all practical purposes, the

son of Nanda and Yaśodā by whom he was brought up and in whose

house he spent his childhood. It was here that his divine character began

to be gradually discovered, when he easily crushed the most redoubtable

demons, such as Baka, Pūtanā &c., that were sent to kill him by Kamsa,

and performed many other feats of surprising strength. The chief

companions of his youth were the Gopis or wives of the cowherds of

Gokula, among whom Rādhā was his special favourite; (cf. Jayadeva’s

Gitagovinda). He killed Kamsa, Naraka, Keśin, Ariṣṭa and a host of other

powerful demons. He was a particular friend of Arjuna, to whom he acted

as charioteer in the great war, and his staunch support of the cause of

the Pāṇḍavas was the main cause of the overthrow of the Kauravas. On

several critical occasions, it was Kṛṣṇa’s assistance and inventive mind

that stood the Pāṇḍavas in good stead. After the general destruction of

the Yādavas at Prabhāsa, he was killed unintentionally by a hunter named

Jaras who shot him with an arrow mistaking him at a distance for a deer.

He had more than 16000 wives, but Rukmiṇi and Satyabhāma, (as also

Rādhā) were his favourites. He is said to have been of dark-blue or

cloud-like colour; cf. bahiriva malinataraṁ tava kṛṣṇa manopi bhaviṣyati

nūna Gīt. 8. His son was Pradyumna].

(8) N. of Vyāsa, the reputed author of the Mahābhārata.

(9) N. of Arjuna. (10) Aloe wood.

(11) The Supreme spirit.

(12) Black pepper.

(13) Iron. —ṣṇā

(1) N. of Draupadī, wife of the Pāṇḍavas; Ki. 1. 26.

(2) N. of a river in the Deccan that joins the sea at Masulipattam.

(3) A kind of poisonous insect.

(4) N. of several plants.

(5) A grape.

(6) A kind of perfume.

(7) An epithet of Durgā.

(8) One of the 7 tongues of fire. —ṣṇī A dark night. —ṣṇaṁ

(1) Blackness, darkness (moral also).

(2) Iron.

(3) Antimony.

(4) The black part of the eye.

(5) Black pepper.

(6) Lead.

(7) An inauspicious act.

(8) Money acquired by gambling.

— Comp.

—aguru n. a kind of sandal-wood.

—acalaḥ an epithet of the mountain Raivataka.

—ajinaṁ the skin of the black antelope.

—adhvan, —arcis m. an epithet of fire; cf. kṛṣṇavartman. —ayas n.,

—ayasaṁ, —āmiṣaṁ iron, crude or black iron.

—aṣṭamī, janmāṣṭamī the 8th day of the dark half of Śrāvaṇa when

Kṛṣṇa was born; also called gokulāṣṭamī. —āvāsaḥ the holy fig-tree.

—udaraḥ a kind of snake.

—kaṁdaṁ a red lotus.

—karman a. of black deeds, criminal, wicked, depraved, guilty,

sinful.

—kākaḥ a raven.

—kāyaḥ a buffalo.

—kāṣṭhaṁ a kind of sandal-wood, agallochum.

—kohalaḥ a gambler.

—gaṁgā the river kṛṣṇaveṇī. —gati fire: āyodhate kṛṣṇagatiṁ

sahāyaṁ R. 6. 42.

—garbhāḥ (f. pl.) 1. the pregnant wives of the demon Kṛṣṇa. —2.

waters in the interiors of the clouds.

—godhā a kind of poisonous insect.

—grīvaḥ N. of Śiva.

—caṁcukaḥ a kind of pea.

—caṁdraḥ N. of Vasndeva.

—cara a. what formerly belonged to Kṛṣṇa.

—cūrṇaṁ rust of iron.

—tāmraṁ a kind of sandal wood.

—tāraḥ 1. a species of antelope. —2. an antelope (in general).

—dehaḥ a bee.

—dhanaṁ money got by foul means.

—dvaipāyanaḥ N. of Vyāsa: tamahamarāgamakṛṣṇa

kṛṣṇadvaipāyanaṁ vaṁde Ve. 1. 4.

—pakṣaḥ the dark half of a lunar month. —2. an epithet of Arjuna.

—padī a female with black feet.

—paviḥ an epithet of Agni.

—piṁgala a. dark-brown. (

—lā) N. of Durgā.

—mṛgaḥ the black antelope; śṛṁge kṛṣṇamṛgasya vāmanayanaṁ

kaṁḍūyamānāṁ mṛgīṁ S. 6. 16.

—mukhaḥ, —vaktraḥ, —vadanaḥ the blackfaced monkey.

—yajurvedaḥ the Taittirīya or black Yajurveda.

—yāmaḥ an epithet of Agni.

—raktaḥ dark-red colour.

—rūpya= -cara q. v.

—lavaṇaṁ 1. a kind of black salt. —2. a factitious salt.

—lohaḥ the loadstone.

—varṇaḥ 1. black colour. —2. N. of Rahu. —3. a Śūdra.

—vartman m. 1. fire; R. 11. 42; Ms. 2. 94. —2. N. of Rāhu. —3. a

low man, profligate, black-guard.

—viṣāṇā Ved. the horns of the black antelope.

—veṇī N. of a river.

—śakuniḥ a crow.

—śāraḥ, —sāraḥ, —sāraṁgaḥ the spotted antelope; kṛṣṇasāre

dadaccakṣustvayi cādhijyakārmuke S. 1. 6, V. 4. 31.

—śṛṁgaḥ a buffalo.

—sakhaḥ, —sārathiḥ an epithet of Arjuna. (

—khī) cummin seed.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṛṣṇa 1) adj. f. ā oxyt. Uṇ. 3, 4. ŚĀNT. 1, 12. «schwarz, dunkel» (Gegens.

śveta, śukla; rohita, aruṇa) AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. TRIK. 3, 3, 123. H. 1397. 17.

an. 2, 136. MED. ṇ. 8. nabhaḥ ṚV. 8, 85, 14. tamaḥ AV. 5, 3, 11. rātriḥ

13, 3, 26. rajaḥ ṚV. 1, 35, 2. 4. 9. ema 58, 4. tvak 130, 8. 9, 41, 1.

abhvam 1, 140, 5. 92, 5. lomāni ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 2. śakuna 14, 1, 1, 31.

ṚV. 10, 16, 6. AV. 7, 64, 1. Kuh ŚAT. BR. 2, 2, 4, 15. 9, 2, 3, 30. Pferd

LĀṬY. 3, 1. Kleid ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 5, 17. Schuhe KĀTY. ŚR. 22, 4, 21.

anyadrocate kṛṣṇamanyat ṚV. 3, 55, 11. (oṣadhe) rāme kṛṣṇe asikni ca

AV. 1, 23, 1. 8, 7, 1. ṚV. 8, 41, 10. 82, 13. VS. 24, 1. 10. 40. AV. 5, 23, 4.

TS. 5, 2, 4, 2. 3, 1, 4. 4, 9, 3. kṛṣṇā asedhadapa sadmano jāḥ ṚV. 6, 47,

21. 8, 62, 18. yasyāṁ kṛṣṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁhite ahorātre vihite

bhūmyāmadhi AV. 12, 1, 52. kṛṣṇaṁ ca varṇamaruṇaṁ ca saṁ dhuḥ ṚV.

1, 73, 7. KĀTY. ŚR. 7, 3, 23. puruṣaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ piṅgākṣaḥ ŚAT. BR. 11, 6, 1,

7. 13. (ṛtvik) anatikṛṣṇo ‘natiśvetaḥ (Sch.: = nātibālo nātivṛddhaḥ) LĀṬY.

in Ind. St. 1, 51. lohitakṛṣṇavarṇā (v. l. lohitaśuklakṛṣṇā) ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4,

5. tila SUŚR. 1, 377, 13. asau sukṛṣṇo vihagaḥ kokilaḥ R. 2, 52, 2. VET. 4,

8. H. 49. kṛṣṇanetra «schwarzäugig», ein Beiw. Śiva’s MBH. 14, 200.

kṛṣṇavāsa 13,882. kṛṣṇavāsas R. 2, 69, 14. kṛṣṇa mit und ohne pakṣa

«die dunkle Monatshälfte, die Zeit vom Vollmond bis zum Neumond» AK.

1, 1, 3, 12. M. 1, 66. 6, 20. 11, 216. YĀJÑ. 3, 324. BHAG. 8, 25. SUŚR. 1,

19, 6. kṛṣṇacaturdaśī «der 14te Tag der dunklen Monatshälfte» TRIK. 1, 1,

107. KATHĀS. 25, 180. VET. 3, 15. «schwarz» in moralischem Sinne so v.

a. «böse» (s. kṛṣṇakarman). kṛṣṇīkaroti, kṛṣṇībhavati, kṛṣṇīsyāt VOP. 7,

82. — 2) m. a) «die schwarze Farbe» AK. TRIK. H. H. an. — b) parox. «die

schwarze Antilope» (in einigen Veda — Stellen ist ein anderes,

aasfressendes Thier gemeint): kṛṣṇo mṛgasaṁyoge (ādyudātto bhavati)

VS. PRĀT. 2, 25. ŚĀNT. 1, 12. ākhare kṛṣṇā iṣirā anartiṣuḥ ṚV. 10, 94, 5.

VS. 2, 1. 24, 36. TS. 5, 2, 6, 5. 6, 1, 3, 1. śune kroṣṭre mā śarīrāṇi

kartamaliklavebhyo gṛdhrebhyo ye ca kṛṣṇā (die Betonung wird wohl zu

ändern sein) aviṣyavaḥ AV. 11, 2, 2. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 4, 1. 3, 2, 1, 28.

BHĀG. P. 3, 10, 20. 8, 2, 20. Vgl. kṛṣṇamṛga, kṛṣṇaviṣāṇā, kṛṣṇājina. — c)

«Krähe» H. an. MED. — d) «der indische Kuckuck» H. an. VIŚVA im ŚKDR.

Vgl. R. 2, 52, 2. — e) N. eines Strauchs, «Carissa Carandas Lin.»

(karamardaka), ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — f) «die dunkle Monatshälfte» (s. u.

1.) am Ende. — g) «das vierte» Juga (kali) H. an. — h) N. pr. oxyt. oder

parox. ŚĀNT. 2, 13. parox. ṚV. 8, 74, 3. 4 (nach der ANUKR. ein

Āñgirasa). KAUṢ. BR. 30, 9 in Ind. St. 1, 190. 3, 214 (Kāṇva und

Āñgirasa). kṛṣṇo devakīputraḥ ein Schüler des ghora āṅgirasaḥ CHĀND.

UP. 3, 17, 6. Der im MBH. verherrlichte Held und treue Bundesgenosse

der Pāṇḍava, der Yādava Kṛṣṇa, ist gleichfalls ein Sohn der Devakī von

Vasudeva. Er verbringt seine Jugend, um den Nachstellungen Kaṁsa’s zu

entgehen, beim Hirten Nanda und dessen Frau Yaśodā und gilt für deren

Sohn. Hieraus hat man schliessen wollen, dass Kṛṣṇa in der älteren Sage

der wirkliche Sohn des Kuhhirten und seiner Frau gewesen sei, wogegen

aber zu bemerken ist, dass eine spätere Anknüpfung an die in einer

älteren Schrift auftretende Devakī Kṛṣṇa keinen besondern Glanz

verliehen hätte, und dass hierdurch die natürliche Verbindung mit dem in

der CHĀND. UP. erwähnten Lehrer Kṛṣṇa ohne Noth zerrissen würde.

Kṛṣṇa ist in der älteren Sage ein vergötterter Held und Lehrer (vgl. die

BHAGAVADGĪTĀ), in der jüngeren tritt neben dem siegreichen Helden

auch der dem Liebesgenuss überaus ergebene junge Hirt hervor. Schon

im MBH. wird Kṛṣṇa als Gottheit betrachtet und mit Viṣṇu identificirt, so

z. B. 14, 1589. 1591. kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdo ṇaśca nirvṛttivācakaḥ.

viṣṇustadbhāvayogācca kṛṣṇo bhavati sāttvataḥ.. 5, 2563. HARIV. 2359.

fgg. Vgl. hierüber LIA. I, 488. Seine Geburt wird erzählt HARIV. 3304. fgg.

VP. 502. fgg. hat Tausende von Frauen, unter denen acht besonders

hervorgehoben werden, HARIV. 6694. fgg. 9177. fgg. VP. 427. fg. 573. fg.

578. 590. seine Liebesspiele mit den Hirtinnen HARIV. 4078. fgg. 8301.

fgg. VP. 531. GĪT. sein Kampf mit Indra HARIV. 3787. fgg. 7456. fgg. VP.

522. fgg. 584. fgg. Indra von Kṛṣṇa besiegt, weiht seinen Nebenbuhler

zum König der Kühe: ahaṁ kilendro devānāṁ tvaṁ gavāmindratāṁ

gataḥ.. govinda iti lokāstvāṁ stoṣyanti bhuvi śāśvatam. mamopari

yathendrastvaṁ sthāpito gobhirīśvaraḥ.. upendra iti kṛṣṇa tvāṁ gāsyanti

divi devatāḥ. HARIV. 4004. fgg. Kṛṣṇa ist der Vater Pradjumna’s oder des

Liebesgottes; dieser heisst daher: kṛṣṇaja 9322. kṛṣṇanandana 9331.

kṛṣṇasūnu 9324. WEBER hat die Ansicht ausgesprochen, dass eine

Bekanntschaft mit Christus und dem Christenthum stark auf die

Entwickelung der Sage von Kṛṣṇa eingewirkt habe, eine Ansicht, die an

LASSEN einen entschiedenen Gegner gefunden hat. Ind. St. 1, 400. 2,

398. fgg. 409. fg. ZdmG.VI, 92. fgg. LIA. II, 1106. fgg. Die Lexicographen

führen kṛṣṇa als Beinamen von viṣṇu auf, AK. 1, 1, 1, 13. TRIK. 1, 1, 31.

3, 3, 123. H. 215. H. an. MED. Im System der Jaina ist Kṛṣṇa einer der

neun «schwarzen» Vāsudeva H. 697. Bei den Buddhisten erscheint Kṛṣṇa

als Haupt der «schwarzen» Dämonen, welche als Gegner von Buddha und

der «weissen» Dämonen auftreten, LALIT. 147. 287. 289. 325. Einen

andern Charakter trägt Kṛṣṇa ebend. 127. 166. — Den Namen Kṛṣṇa

führen ferner: ein König der Nāga MBH. 2, 360. BURN. Intr. 269. — ein

Asura HARIV. 12936. SĀY. zu ṚV. 1, 101, 1. — Arjuna, der Sohn Pāṇḍu’s,

H. an. MED. kṛṣṇa ityeva daśamaṁ nāma cakre pitā mama.

kṛṣṇāvadātasya sataḥ priyatvādbālakasya vai.. MBH. 4, 1389. Der du.

kṛṣṇau bezeichnet den Gott Kṛṣṇa und Arjuna 1, 8287. 3, 8279. — Vyāsa

TRIK. 3, 3, 123. H. an. MED. MBH. 1, 60. dvaipāyanena kṛṣṇena (vgl.

kṛṣṇadvaiyāyana) 2, 2573. yo vyasya vedāṁścaturo bhagavānṛṣiḥ. loke

vyāsatvamāpede kārṣṇyātkṛṣṇatvameva ca.. 1, 4236. HARIV. 11089. —

Kṛṣṇa Hārīta Ind. St. 1, 391, N. — ein Sohn Śuka’s von der Pīvarī, ein

Lehrer des Joga, HARIV. 980. fg. — ein Schüler Bharadvāja’s KATHĀS. 7,

15. — Kṛṣṇa Dāśārha LIA. I, Anh. XXVIII. — ein Sohn Havirdhāna’s HARIV.

83. VP. 106. BHĀG. P. 4, 24, 8. — ein Sohn Arjuna’s HARIV. 1892. — ein

Adoptivsohn von Asamañjas 2039. — ein Fürst der Andhra VP. 472. —

verschiedene Autoren, namentlich Scholiasten COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II,

452. fg. Verz. d. B. H. No. 109 u.s.w. — śrīkṛṣṇa ebend. No. 739 u.s.w. —

i) Name einer Hölle VP. 207. 209. — 3) f. kṛṣṇā a) (sc. śatapadī) «ein

best. giftiges Insect» SUŚR. 2, 290, 3. — b) N. verschiedener Pflanzen:

«Piper longum Lin.» AK. 2, 4, 3, 15. TRIK. 3, 3, 124. H. 421. H. an. MED.

HĀR. 261 (masc.); «die Indigopflanze; der Weinstock mit dunklen

Trauben» H. an. MED. = nīlapunarnavā; gambhārī; kṛṣṇajīraka;

sārivāviśeṣa; rājasarṣapa RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = somarājī; kākolī JAṬĀDH.

im ŚKDR. — SUŚR. 1, 162, 16. 2, 88, 1. 206, 5. 222, 12. 322, 12. 439, 19.

504, 5. 506, 7. kṛṣṇāvījam 330, 16. — c) «ein best. Parfum» (s. parpaṭī)

BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. — d) ein Bein. der Draupadi TRIK. 2, 8, 18. 3, 3,

124. H. 710. H. an. MED. MBH. 3, 10. DRAUP. 3, 5. ARJ. 3, 1. LIA. I, 641.

fg. — e) ein Bein. der Durgā H. ś. 47. MBH. 4, 184. Vgl. kālī. — f) N. einer

der sieben Zungen des Feuers H. 1099, Sch. Vgl. kālī. — g) N. pr. eines

Flusses, = kṛṣṇasamudbhavā, kṛṣṇagaṅgā, kṛṣṇaveṇyā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

VP. 184. kṛṣṇā gaṅgā MBH. 13, 4888. Vgl. LIA. I, 167 und kṛṣṇagaṅgā. —

4) f. kṛṣṇī «die Nacht»: riṇakti kṛṣṇīraruṣāya panthām ṚV. 7, 71, 1. — 5) n.

a) «Schwärze, Dunkelheit»: śukrā kṛṣṇādajaniṣṭa ṚV. 1, 123, 9. 1. 10,

127, 7. — b) «das Schwarze im Auge» ŚAT. BR. 10, 5, 2, 7. 12, 8, 2, 26.

13, 4, 2, 3. 14, 5, 2, 3. SUŚR. 1, 10, 18. 2, 303, 13. 311, 12. — c)

«Dunkelwesen» (von Dämonen): pañcāśatkṛṣṇā ni vapaḥ sahasrā ṚV. 4,

16, 13. — d) «schwarzer Pfeffer» AK. 2, 9, 36. TRIK. H. 419. H. an. MED.

— e) «schwarzes Aloeholz» RATNAM. im ŚKDR. — f) «Eisen» TRIK. H. an.

MED. — g) «Blei» H. ś. 159. — h) «Spiessglanz» H. 1051. — i) «blauer

Vitriol» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. kārṣṇa, kārṣṇāyana, kārṣṇi, kārṣṇya.

kṛṣṇa 2) h) N. pr. eines Wesens im Gefolge Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2559. — 3)

f) HALĀY. 1, 68. — g) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 10,a, N. 1. 16,b,16. 102,a, No. 158.

-revāsaṁgama 65,b,42. HALL 75. — h) N. pr. einer der Mütter im Gefolge

Skanda’s MBH. 9, 2640. — 5) b) «das Schwarze im Monde» TBR. 1, 2, 1, 2.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

kṛṣṇa (ŚRĪ KṚṢṆA). Born in the Yādava dynasty as the son of Vasudeva

and Devakī, Śrī Kṛṣṇa was the ninth of the ten incarnations of Mahāviṣṇu.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

kṛṣṇa kṛṣṇa, i. e. kṛṣ + na (the origin of the signification is dubious).

I. adj., f. ṇā.

1. Black, or dark blue, Rām. 3, 55, 5.

2. With or without pakṣa, m. The dark half of a month, from the full

moon to that of the new moon, Man. 1, 66; 6, 20.

II. m.

1. kṛṣṇa, The most celebrated incarnation of Viṣṇu, MBh. 14, 1589.

2. The black antelope, Bhāg. P. 3, 10, 20.

III. f. ṇā.

1. A name of Durgā, MBh. 4, 184.

2. The name of several plants, Suśr. 1, 162, 16.

— Comp. ati-, adj. very black, Pañc. 104, 15.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kṛṣṇa a. black, dark. —m. (±pakṣa) the dark half month, the black

antelope (mostly kṛṣṇa); N. of an ancient hero and teacher, later as the

god Kṛṣṇa identified with Viṣṇu; du. kṛṣṇau = Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna. f. kṛṣṇā

a. black kind of leech. N. of sev. plants, E. of Durgā and Draupadī; f. kṛṣṇī

night. n. blackness, darkness.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kṛṣṇa kṛṣ-ṇa, n. black; dark; w. pakṣa, dark half of the month (from full

new moon); m. (kṛṣṇa) black antelope; N. of a god (incarnation of Viṣṇu):

du. Kṛṣṇa and Arjuna;

ā, f. kind of leech; N. of several plants; ep. of Draupadī, and of Durgā;

n. blackness, darkness.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṛṣṇa pu° kṛṣa—nak . bhagavato’vatārabhede vāsudeve 1 devakīnandane .

kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdaḥ ṇaśca nirvṛtivācakaḥ . tayoraikyaṁ paraṁ

brahma kṛṣṇaityabhidhīyate ityukte 2 parabrahmaṇi, 3 vedavyāse, 4

arjune madhyamapāṇḍave ca . kṛṣṇavarṇatvāt 5 kokile, viśvaḥ 6 kāke,

medi° karamardake (karamacā) 7 vṛkṣe, śabdara° 8 nīle, varṇe 9 tadvati

tri° amaraḥ 10 kālāguruṇi rājani° . 11 aśubhakarmaṇi ca na° . kṛṣṇakarmā

amaraḥ 12 draupadyāṁ, 13 nīlīvṛkṣe, 14 pippalyāṁ, 15 drākṣāyāṁ, strī

medi° 16 nīlapunarnavāyām, 17 kṛṣṇajīrake, 18 gāmmāryā 19 kaṭukāyām,

20 sāvirābhede 21 rājasarṣape, rājani° 22 parpaṭyāṁ, bhāvapra° . 23

kākolyāṁ, 24 somarājyāñca strī ṭāp jaṭā° kṛṣṇavarṇatvācca tāsāṁ

tathātvam 25 dhanamede na° kṛṣṇadhanaśabdī vivṛtiḥ . 26 nīlāñjane, 27

lauhe, 28 marice ca pu° jaṭādharaḥ . tatra bhagavadavatāraviśeṣaḥ atha

bhādrapade māsi kṛṣṇāṣṭamyāṁ kalau yuge . aṣṭāviṁśatime jātaḥ

kṛṣṇo’sau devakīsutaḥ brahmapu° . vasudevadevakyau ca kaśyapāditī .

tau ca varuṇasya goharaṇāt brahmaṇaḥ śāpena gopālatvamāpatuḥ .

yathāha harivaṁ° 56 a° ityambupatinā prokto varuṇenāhamacyuta! .

gavāṁ kāraṇatattvajñaḥ kaśyape śāpamutsṛjam . yenāṁśena hṛtā gāvaḥ

kaśyapena mahātmanā . sa tenāṁśena jagatīṁ gatvā gopatvameṣyati .

yā ca sā surabhirnāma aditiśca surāraṇī . ubhe te tasya vai bhārye saha

tenaiva yāsyataḥ . tābhyāṁ saha sa gopatve kaśyapo bhuvi raṁsyate .

tadasya kaśyapasyāṁśastejasā kaśyapopamaḥ vasudeva iti khyāto goṣu

tiṣṭhati bhūtale . girirgovardhano nāma mathurāyāstvadūrataḥ . tatrāsau

goṣvabhirataḥ kaṁsasya karadāyakaḥ . tasyabhāryādvayañcaiva aditiḥ

surabhistathā . devakī rohiṇī caiva vasudevasya dhīmataḥ . tatrāvatara

lokānāṁ bhavāya madhusūdana! . jayāśīrvacanaistvete vardhayanti

divaukasaḥ . ātmānamātmanā hi tvamavatārya mahītale . devakīṁ

rohiṇīñcaiva garbhābhyāṁ paritoṣaya . tatratvaṁ śiśurevādau

gopālakṛtalakṣaṇaḥ . vardhayasva mahābāho! purā traivikrame yathā ..

chādayitvātmanātmānaṁ māyayā goparūpayā . gopakanyāsahasrāṇi

ramayaṁścara medinīm . gāśca te rakṣitā viṣṇo! vanāni paridhāvataḥ .

vanamālāparikṣiptaṁ dhanyā drakṣyanti te vapuḥ . viṣṇo!

padmapalāśākṣa! gopālavasatiṅgate . bāle tvayi mahābāho . loko

bālatvameṣyati . tvadbhaktāḥ puṇḍarīkākṣa! tava cittavaśānugāḥ . goṣu

gopā bhaviṣyanti sahāyāḥ satatantava . vane cārayato gāstu goṣṭheṣu

paridhāvataḥ . majjato yamunāyāntu ratimāpsyanti te bhṛśam . jīvitaṁ

vasudevasya bhaviṣyati sujīvitam . yastvayā tāta ityuktaḥ sa putra iti

vakṣyati . atha vā kasyaṁ putratvaṁ gacchethāḥ kaśyapādṛte . kā vā

dhārayituṁ śaktā viṣṇo! tvāmaditiṁ vinā . yogenātmasamutthena

gacchatva vijayāya vai iti viṣṇuṁ prati brahmoktiḥ . tābhyāṁ

tasyotpattikathā ca tatra 60 a° yathā yadarthaṁ sapta te garbhāḥ

kaṁsena vinipātitāḥ . tantu garbhaṁ prayatnena rarakṣustasya rakṣiṇaḥ .

sa tatra garbhavasatau vasatyātmecchayā hariḥ . samadhatta yaśodā’pi

garbhaṁ tadahareva tu . viṣṇoḥ śarīrajāṁ nidrāṁ viṣṇornirdeśakāriṇīm

garbhakāle tvasaṁpūrṇe aṣṭame māsi te striyau . devakī ca yaśodā ca

suṣuvāte samaṁ tadā . yāmeva rajanīṁ viṣṇurjajñe vṛṣṇikulaṁ prabhuḥ .

tāmeva rajanīṁ kanyā yaśodāto vyajāyata . nandagopasya bhāryaikā

vasudevasya cāparā . tulyakālaṁ hi garbhiṇyau yaśodā devakī tathā .

devakyajanayadviṣṇuṁ yaśodā tāntu kanyakām . muhūrte’bhijite prāpte

sārdharātre vibhūṣite . sāgarāḥ samakampanta celuśca dharaṇīdharāḥ .

jajvaluścāgnayaḥ śāntā jāyamāne janārdane . śivāḥ saṁpravavurvātāḥ

praśāntamabhavadrajaḥ . jyotīṁṣi vyatyakāśanta jāyamāne janārdane .

abhijinnāma nakṣatraṁ jayantī nāma śarvarī . muhūrto vijayo nāma yatra

jāto janārdanaḥ . avyaktaḥ śāśvataḥ kṛṣṇo harirnārāyaṇaḥ prabhuḥ .

jāyate bhagavāṁstatra nayanairmohayan jagat . tato’natidūre

vasudevastu taṁ rātrau jātaṁ puttramadhokṣajam . śrīvatsalakṣaṇaṁ

dṛṣṭvā yutaṁ divyaiśca lakṣaṇaiḥ . uvāca vasudevastaṁ rūpaṁ saṁhara

vai prabho! . bhīto’haṁ deva! kaṁsasya tasmādevaṁ vadāmyaham .

mama puttrā hatāstena tava jyeṣṭhā’mbujekṣaṇa! . vaiśampāyana upāca

. vasudevavacaḥ śrutvā rūpaṁ saṁharadacyutaḥ . anujñāpya pitṛtvena

nandagopagṛhaṁ naya . vasudevastu saṁgṛhya dārakaṁ kṣiprameva ca .

yaśodāyā gṛhaṁ rātrau viveśa sutavatsalaḥ . yaśodāyāstvavijñātastatra

nikṣipya dārakam . gṛhītvā dārikāṁ tāñca devakīśayane nyasat . parivarte

kṛte tābhyāṁ garbhābhyāṁ bhayaviklavaḥ . vasudevaḥ kṛtārtho vai

nirjagāma niveśanāt . yathā rūpeṇa tasyāvirbhāvastathā rūpaṁ bhāga°

103 a° vaṇṇitam

devakyāṁ devarūpiṇyāṁ viṣṇuḥ sarvaguhāśayaḥ . āvirāsīdyathā

prācyāṁ diśīnduriva puṣkalaḥ . tamadbhutaṁ bālakamambujekṣaṇaṁ

caturbhujaṁ śaṅkhagadādyudāyudham .

śrīvatsalakṣmaṁgalaśobhikaustubhaṁ pītāmbaraṁ

sāndrapayodasaubhagam . mahārghavaidūryakirīṭakuṇḍalatviṣā

pariṣvaktasahasrakuntalam .

uhṛāmakāñcyaṅgadakaṅkaṇādibhirvirocamānaṁ vasudeva aikṣata .

savismayītphullavilocano hariṁ sutaṁ vilokyānakadundubhistadā .

kṛṣṇāvatārotsavasambhramo’spṛśanmudā dvijebhyo’yutamāplutogavām .

ityāvirbhārva varṇayitvā

janma te mayyasau pāpomā vidyānmadhusūdana! . samudvije

bhavaddhetoḥ kaṁsādahamadhīradhīḥ . upasaṁhara viśvātma

nnadorūpamalaukikam . śaṅkhacakragadāpadmaśriyā juṣṭaṁ caturbhujam

. viśvaṁ yadetat svatanau niśānte yathāvakāśaṁ puruṣaḥ paro bhavān .

vibharti, so’yaṁ mama garbhajo’bhū daho nṛlokasya viḍambanaṁ tat .

itthaṁ devakyāḥ prārthane tāṁ sāntvayitvā tasya prākṛtarūpadhāraṇaṁ

tatraivoktaṁ yathā ityuktvā tāṁ haristūṣṇṇīṁ bhagavānātmamāyayā .

pitroḥ saṁpaśyatoreva babhūva prākṛtaḥ śiśuḥ . evañca

caturbhujarūpeṇotpattāvapi prākṛtarūpatvoktyā tasmādanantaraṁ

dvibhujatvamiti vaiṣṇavā manyante . gītāyāntu tenaiva rūpeṇa

caturbhujena sahasrabāho! bhava viśvamūrte! iti bhāratayuddhakāle

tasya caturbhujatvakīrtanāt caturbhujatva mevāsīt

śaṅkhacakrādyāyudhaśūnyatvena prākṛtatvamiti tu yuktamutpaśyāmaḥ .

tasyedānīṁ janmasamayonirūpyate prāguktabrahmapu° kalau

jātatvābhidhānāt kaliyugaevāsya prādurbhāvaḥ . yadi ca

ekaikamanvantare bahavaḥ kalayaḥ sambhavanti tathāpi

vartamānavaivasvatamanvantare aṣṭāviṁśatime mahāyuge yaḥ

kalistatraivābhirmūtaḥ . tatrāpi jyotirnibandhe uccasthāḥ

śaśibhaumacāndriśanayo lagnaṁ vṛṣolābhago jīvaḥ siṁhatulāliṣu

kramavaśāt pūṣośanorāhavaḥ . naiśīthaḥ samayā’ṣṭamī budhadinaṁ

bāhmarkṣamatra kṣaṇe śrīkṛṣṇābhidhamambujekṣaṇamabhūdāviḥ paraṁ

brahma tat grahāṇāṁ viśeṣarāśyavasthānakāle tasyāvirbhāvokteḥ

tādṛśasamayasya ca kaleḥ 647 varṣeṣu gataṣu sambhavaḥ kalau tataḥ

pūrvaṁ tādṛśasamayāsambhavāt . rājataraṁṅgiṇyāṁ ca śateṣu ṣaṭsu

sārdheṣu tryadhikeṣu ca bhūtale . kalergateṣu varṣāṇāma bhayan

kurupāṇḍavāḥ ityanena kaleḥ 653 varṣeṣu gateṣu tatsamakālīnayoḥ

kurupāṇḍavayorutpattiruktā atastasyāpi tatkālotpattikatvam .

tadavatāracaritaṁ ca harivaṁ° 42 a° varṇitaṁ yathā

aparaḥ keśavasyāyaṁ prādurbhāvo mahātmanaḥ . vikhyāto māthure

kalpe sarvalokahitāya vai . yatra śālvañca maindañca kaṁsaṁ

dvividameva ca . ariṣṭaṁ vṛṣabhaṁ keśiṁ pūtanāṁ daityadārikām .

nāgaṁ kubalayāpīḍaṁ cānūraṁ muṣṭikaṁ tathā .

daityānmānuṣadehasthān sūdayāmāma vīryavān . chinnaṁ

bāhusahasrañca vāṇasyādbhutakarmaṇaḥ . narakaśca hataḥ saṅkhye

yavanaśca sahābalaḥ . hṛtāni ca mahīpānāṁ sarvaratnāni tejasā .

durāccārāśca nihatāḥ pārthivā ye mahītale . tasya ca kṛṣṇanāmatā

gargeṇa tathā nāmakaraṇāt yathāha bhāga° 10 . 8 . 9 āsan

vaṇṇāstrayohyasya grahṇato’nuyugaṁ tanūḥ . śukloraktastathā’pīta

idānīṁ kṛṣṇatāṁ gataḥ iti apītaḥ śyāma ityarthaḥ bhāga° 11 a°

yugāvatāre dvāpare śyāmamūrtitvokteḥ yathā kṛte śuklaścaturbāhurjaṭilo

balkalāmbaraḥ . kṛṣṇājinopavītākṣān bibhraddaṇḍakamaṇḍalū . tretāyāṁ

raktavarṇo’sau caturbāhustrimekhalaḥ . hiraṇyakeśastrayyātmā

sruksruvādyu palakṣaṇaḥ . dvāpare bhagavān śyāmaḥ pītavāsā

nijāyudhaḥ . śrīvatsādibhiraṅkaiśca lakṣaṇairupalakṣitaḥ .

nānātantravidhānena kalāvapi yathā śṛṇu . kṛṣṇavarṇaṁ tviṣā’kṛṣṇaṁ

sāṅgopāṅgāstrapārṣadaḥ . yajñai saṁkīrtanaprāyairyajantīha

sumedhasaḥ . asya tannāmanirbacanaṁ ca bhā° u° 69 a°

kṛṣirbhūvācakaḥ śabdoṇaśca nirvṛtivācakaḥ . viṣṇustadbhāvayogācca

kṛṣṇobhavati sātvataḥ kalpabhede’pi vaivasvatamanoraṣṭāviṁśatime yuge

yuge tasyābhi bhāṁvaḥ ataeva chā° u° kalpabhedādiprāyeṇaiva

taddhaitat ghora āṅgirasaḥ kṛṣṇāya devakīputrāyoktvovāca ityuktam .

vastutastasya bhagavadavatārāt bhinnatvameva tasya

ghorāṅgirasaśiṣyatvokteḥ . parameśvarasya tathātvāsambhavāt .

atastannāmni 29 aparasninneva kṛṣṇaśabdasya vṛttiḥ . kṛṣṇeti maṅgalaṁ

nāma yasya vāci pravartate . masmībhavanti rājendra!

mahāpātakakoṭayaḥ purā° . arjunasya tannāmanirvacanaṁ bhā° vi° 44 a°

. kṛṣṇa ityeva daśamaṁ nāma cakre pitā mama . kṛṣṇāvadātasya sataḥ

priyatvāt bālakasya ca . vyāsasya kārṣṇyāttathātvam yovyasya

vedāṁścaturastapasā bhagavānṛṣiḥ . loke vyāsatvamāpade kārṣṇyāt

kṛṣṇatvameva ca bhā° ā° 105 a° . kṛṣṇasyedam aṇ kārṣṇa

tatsambandhini tri° kārṣṇaṁ vedamimaṁ vidvān śrāvayitvārthamaśnute

bhā° ā° 1 a° ukte . apatye tu iñ . kārṣṇi tadapatye puṁstrī .

candrahrāsakaraprathamādipañcadaśakalākriyārūpe

pratipadādidarśāntātmakapañcadaśatithyātmake 30 kālabhede

ardhamāse candravṛddhikaraḥ śuklaḥ kṛṣṇaścandrakṣayātmakaḥ ti° ta°

ṣaṭtri° . indukalākṣayaprakāraḥ induśabde 611 pṛ° uktaḥ . tadupalakṣite

31 pitṛyāne śuklakṛṣṇe gatī hyete jagatāṁ śāśvate mate . ekayā

yātyanāvṛttimanyayā vartate punaḥ gītā . pitṛyāne ca yathā

kṛṣṇapakṣasaṁbandhastathā ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° darśitam .

dhūmorātristathā kṛṣṇaḥ ṣaṇmāsā dakṣiṇāyanam gītā .

kṛṣṇapakṣābhimānini pitṛyānasthe karmiṇāmativāhake īśvaraniyojite 32

devabhede ātivāhikaśabda vivṛtiḥ . 33 dyūtādyupārjite dhane na°

kṛṣṇadhanaśabde arthaśabde ca vivṛtiḥ . kṛṣṇasya bhāvaḥ ṣyañ . kārṣṇya

tadbhāve na° kārṣṇyāt kṛṣṇatvameva ca bhā° ā° 105 a° . imanic .

kṛṣṇiman tadbhāve pu° kṛṣṇimānaṁ dadhānena . tal, kṛṣṇatā strī, tva

kṛṣṇala, na0, kṛṣṇavarṇe . kṛṣṇā’pi śuddheradhikaṁ vidhātṛbhiḥ māvaḥ .

abhivṛṣya marucchasyān kṛṣṇameghastirodadhe raghuḥ . 34

netragate’śabhede akṣiśabde vivṛtiḥ . 35 kṛṣṇasāramṛge puṁstrī° eṇaḥ

kṛṣṇaḥ sa kīrtitaḥ chando° pa° . kṛṣṇājinam

कृष्णवर्ण — kṛṣṇavarṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899kṛṣṇavarṇa «kṛṣṇa-varṇa» mfn. of a black colour, dark-blue

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

kṛṣṇavarṇa (kṛṣṇa + varṇa) adj. «von schwarzer Farbe, schwarz» H. 1238.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

kṛṣṇavarṇa a. black-coloured.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

kṛṣṇavarṇa kṛṣṇa-varṇa, a. black-coloured;

-vartman, m. fire (black-tracked): (a) -vāla, a. black-tailed;

-śakti, m. N.;

-sarpa, m. kind of black snake;

-sāra, a. chiefly black, spotted black and white; m. spotted antelope;

(a) -sāraṅga, a.; m. f.; id..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

kṛṣṇavarṇa pu° kṛṣṇo varṇo’sya . 1 rāhau grahe . rāhoḥ chāyārūpatvena

tamorūpatyāt tathātvāropāt tathātvam kṛṣṇaḥ aśuddhī varṇaḥ . 2 śūdre

pu° . karma° . kāle varṇe pu° kṛṣṇavarṇavati tri° . kṛṣṇavarṇaṁ

tvipā’kṛṣṇam bhāgava° 11 ska° .

गो — go Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899go «gaus» (acc. «gām» instr. «gavā» dat. «gave», gen. abl. «gos» loc.

«gavi»; du. «gāvā» [Ved.], «gāvau»; pl. nom. «gāvas» acc. «gās» [rarely

«gāvas» ii] instr. «gobhis» dat. abl. «gobhyas», gen. «gavām» [once at the

end of a Pāda at the end of Pādas only cf. «gonām» loc. «goṣu») m. an ox

f. a cow, (pl.) cattle, kine, herd of cattle &c. (in comp. before vowels [cf.

«gav, gava», qq. vv.; cf. also «gavām, gavi, gāṁ» ss.vv.; «gavāṁ vrata» N.

of a Sāman; «gavāṁ tīrtha» see «go t-; goṣu-gam», to set out for a battle

[to conquer cows] ; «anything coming from or belonging to an ox or cow»,

milk (generally pl.), flesh (only pl. ; «fat» ( x, 27, 22 ; = «go-ṣṭoma» (q.v.)

(see also «go-āyus»); (pl.) «the herds of the sky», the stars ; (m. [also f.

rays of light (regarded as the herds of the sky, for which Indra fights with

Vṛitra) 2943 &c.; m. the sign Taurus xl f. ; the sun (cf. «-putra») ; the

moon ; a kind of medicinal plant («ṛṣabha») ; a singer, praiser (fr. «gai») ;

«a goer», horse (fr. 1. «gā») on ; N. of two ṛiṣis of the (with the patr.

āṅgirasa [ xvi] and Māyūka); N. of a man (who with Pushkara is said to

be the «balādhyakṣa» of the sons and grandsons of Varuṇa) (cf. ; m. or f.

(?) the sun’s ray called Suṣumṇa ; water f. pl., xi, 7, 50); an organ of

sense ; the eye 70; a billion ; mf. the sky ; the thunderbolt on ; the hairs

of the body ; f. an offering in the shape of a cow (= «dhenu» q.v.) ; a

region of the sky ; ( i, 1) the earth (as the milk-cow of kings) &c.;

(hence) the number «nine» ; = «go-vīthī» on ; a mother (cf. ; ( i, 11)

speech, Sarasvatī (goddess of speech) ; voice, note (fr. «gai») ; N. of

Gaurī ; of the wife [or of a daughter-in-law of śuka (a daughter of the

manes called Sukālas) 986 ; N. of a daughter of Kakut-stha and wife of

Yayāti ; ([cf. [characters]; Lat. ‘bos’; Old Germ. ‘chuo’; Mod. Germ. ‘Kuh’;

Eng. ‘cow’; Lett. ‘gohw’; cf. also [characters]; Goth. ‘gavi’ and Mod.

Germ. ‘Gau’.])

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

go m. f. (Nom. gauḥ) [gacchatyanena, gam karaṇe ḍo Tv.]

(1) Cattle, kine (pl.).

(2) Anything coming from a cow; such as milk, flesh, leather &c.

(3) The stars.

(4) The sky.

(5) The thunder-bolt of Indra.

(6) A ray of light.

(7) A diamond.

(8) Heaven.

(9) An arrow. —f.

(1) A cow; jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvī R. 2. 3; kṣīriṇyaḥ saṁtu gāvaḥ

Mk. 10. 60.

(2) The earth; dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya R. 1. 26; gāmāttasārāṁ

raghurapyavekṣya 5. 26, 11. 36; Bg. 15. 13; seko’nugṛhṇātu gāṁ Mu. 3.

2; Me. 30.

(3) Speech, words; raghorudārāmapi gāṁ niśamya R. 5. 12, 2. 59; Ki.

4. 20.

(4) The goddess of speech, Sarasvatī.

(5) A mother.

(6) A quarter of the compass.

(7) Water (pl.).

(8) The eye.

(9) A region of the sky. —m.

(1) A bull, an ox; asaṁjātakiṇaskaṁdhaḥ sukhaṁ svapiti gaurgaḍiḥ K.

P. 10; Ms. 4. 72; cf. jaradgava.

(2) The hair of the body.

(3) An organ of sense.

(4) The sign Taurus of the zodiac.

(5) The sun.

(6) The number ‘nine’ (in math.).

(7) The moon.

(8) A singer.

(9) A billion. (10) A cowsacrifice.

(11) A house.

— Comp.

—kaṁṭakaḥ, —kaṁ 1. a road or spot trodden down by oxen and

thus made impassable. —2. the cow’s hoof. —3. the print of a cow’s hoof.

—karṇa a. having cow’s ears. (

—rṇaḥ) 1. a cow’s ear. —2. a mule. —3. a snake. —4. a span (from

the tip of the thumb to that of the ring-finger). —5. N. of a place of

pilgrimage in the south, sacred to Śiva; śritagokarṇaniketamīśvaraṁ R. 8.

33. —6. a kind of deer. —7. a kind of arrow.

—kirāṭā-kirāṭikā the Sārikā bird.

—kilaḥ, —kīlaḥ 1. a plough. —2. a pestle.

—kulaṁ 1. a herd of kine; vṛṣṭivyākulagokulāvanarasāduddhṛtya

govardhanaṁ Gīt. 4; gākulasya tṛṣārtasya Mb. —2. a cow-house. —3. N. of

a village (where Kṛṣṇa was brought up).

—kulika a. 1. one who does not help a cow in the mud. —2.

squint-eyed.

—kulodbhavā an epithet of Durgā.

—kṛtaṁ cow-dung.

—kṣīraṁ cow’s milk.

—kṣuraṁ —rakaṁ a cow’s-hoof.

—khā a nail.

—gṛṣṭiḥ a young cow which has had only one calf.

—goyugaṁ a pair of oxen.

—goṣṭhaṁ a cow-pen, cattle-shed.

—graṁthiḥ 1. dried cowdung. —2. a cow-house.

—grahaḥ capture of cattle.

—grāsaḥ the ceremony of offering a morsel (of grass) to a cow

when performing an expiatory rite.

—ghātaḥ, —ghātakaḥ, —ghātin m. a cow-killer.

—ghṛtaṁ 1. rain-water. —2. clarified butter coming from a cow.

—ghna a. 1. destructive to cows. —2. one who has killed a cow. —

3. one for whom a cow is killed, a guest.

—caṁdanaṁ a kind of sandal-wood.

—cara a. 1. grazed over by cattle. —2. frequenting, dwelling,

resorting to, haunting; pitṛsadmagocaraḥ Ku. 5. 77. —3. within the scope,

power, or range of; avāṅmanasagocaraṁ R. 10. 15; so buddhi-, dṛṣṭi-,

śravaṇa- &c. —4. moving on earth. —5. accessible to, attainable. —6.

circulating, having a particular meaning, prevalent. (

—raḥ) 1. the range of cattle, pasturage; upāratāḥ

paścimarātrigocarāt Ki. 4. 10. —2.

(a) a district, department, province, sphere.

(b) an abode, dwelling-place. —3. range of the organs of sense, an

object of sense; śravaṇagocare tiṣṭha be within ear-shot; nayanagocaraṁ

yā to become visible. —4. scope, range, in general; harturyāti na gocaraṁ

Bh. 2. 16. —5. (fig.) grip, hold, power, influence, control; kaḥ kālasya na

gocarāṁtaragataḥ Pt. 1. 146; gocarībhūtamakṣṇoḥ U. 6. 26; Māl. 5. 24;

api nāma manāgavatīrṇo’si ratiramaṇabāṇagocaraṁ Māl. 1. —6. horizon.

—7. the range of the planets from the Lagna or from each other. (gocarīkṛ

to place within the range (of sight), make current.). —carman n. 1. a

cow’s hide. —2. a particular measuse of surface thus defined by Vasiṣṭha:

—daśahastena vaṁśena daśavaṁśān samaṁtataḥ . paṁca cābhyadhikān

dadyādetadgocarma cocyate … -vasanaḥ an epithet of Śiva. —cārakaḥ

cowherd. —cāraṇaṁ the tending or feeding of cows. —ja a. born in the

earth (rice &c). —jaraḥ an old ox or bull. —jalaṁ the urine of a bull or

cow. —jāgarikaṁ auspiciousness, happiness. (—kaḥ) a preparer of food,

baker. —jāta a born in the heaven (gods). —tallajaḥ an excellent bull or

cow. —tīrthaṁ a cowhouse. —traṁ [gāṁ bhūrmi trāyate trai-ka] 1. a

cowpen. —2. a stable in general. —3. a family, race, lineage; gotreṇa

māṭharo’smi Sk.; so kauśikagotrāḥ, vasiṣṭhagotrāḥ &c.; Ms. 3. 109, 9.

141. —4. a name, appellation; jagāda gotraskhalite ca kā na taṁ N. 1. 30;

S. 6. 4; see -skhalita below; madgotrāṁkaṁ viracitapadaṁ

geyamudgātukāmā Me. 86. —5. a multitude. —6. increase. —7. a forest.

—8. a field. —9. a road. —10. possessions, wealth. —11. an umbrella, a

parasol. —12. knowledge of futurity. —13. a genus, class, species. —14. a

caste, tribe, caste according to families. (—traḥ) a mountain. (—trā) 1. a

multitude of cows. —2. the earth. -kartṛ, —kārin m. the founder of a

family. -kīlā the earth. -ja a. born in the same family, gentile, a relation;

Y. 2. 135. -paṭaḥ a genealogical table, pedigree. -pravaraḥ the oldest

member or founder of a family. -bhida m. an epithet of Indra; hṛdi kṣato

gotrabhidapyamarṣaṇaḥ R. 3. 53, 6. 73; Ku. 2. 52. -skhalanaṁ, -skhalitaṁ

blundering or mistaking in calling (one) by his name, calling by a wrong

name; smarasi smara mekhalāguṇairuta gātraskhaliteṣu baṁdhanaṁ Ku.

4. 8. —da a. giving cows. (—daḥ) brain. (—dā) N. of the river Godāvarī. —

datra a. Ved. giving cows. (—traḥ) an epithet of Indra. (—traṁ) a crown

(protecting the head). —daṁta a. armed with a coat of mail. (—taṁ) 1.

yellow orpiment. —2. a white fossil substance. —dānaṁ 1. the gift of a

cow. —2. the ceremony of tonsure or cutting the hair; athāsya

godānavidheranaṁtaraṁ R. 3. 33; (see Mallinātha’s explanation of the

word); kṛtagodānamaṁgalāḥ U. 1; (Ram. explains the word differently).

—3. the part of the head close to the right ear. —dāya a. intending to give

cows. —dāraṇaṁ 1. a plough. —2. a spade, hoe. —dāvarī N. of a river in

the south. —duh m., —duhaḥ ‘cow-milker’ a cowherd. —dohaḥ 1. the

milking of cows. —2. the milk of cows. —3. the time of milking cows. —

dohanaṁ 1. the time of milking cows. —2. the milking of cows. —dohanī a

milk-pail. —dravaḥ the urine of a bull or cow. —dhanaṁ 1. a herd or

multitude of cows, cattle. —2. possession of cows. (—naḥ) a broadpointed

arrow. —dharaḥ a mountain. —dharmaḥ the law of cattle, rules relating to

cattle. —dhuptaḥ, —dhūptaḥ 1. wheat. —2. the orange. -cūrṇaṁ wheat-

flour; -saṁbhavaṁ a sour paste. —dhūliḥ ‘dust of the cows,’ the time of

sunset or evening twilight (so called because cows, which generally

return home at about sunset, raise up clouds of dust by their treading on

the earth). —dhenuḥ a milch-cow with a calf. —dhraḥ a mountain. —

naṁdā an epithet of the wife of Śiva. —naṁdī the female of the Sārasa

bird. —nardaḥ 1. the (Indian) crane. —2. an epithet of Śiva (bellowing like

a bull). —3. N. of a country. —nardīyaḥ an epithet of Patanjali, author of

the Mahābhāṣya. —nasaḥ, —nāsaḥ 1. a kind of snake. —2. a kind of gem.

—nasā the mouth of a cow. —nāthaḥ 1. a bull. —2. an owner of land. —3. a

herdsman. —4. an owner of kine. —nāyaḥ a cowherd. —nāsā the

projecting snout of a cow or ox. —nāsaṁ a kind of gem. —niṣyaṁdaḥ

cow’s urine. —paḥ 1. a cowherd (considered as belonging to a mixed

tribe); gopaveśasya viṣṇoḥ Me. 15. —2. the chief of a cowpen. —3. the

superintendent of a village. —4. a king. —5. a protector, guardian. -anasī

the wood of a thatch. -āṭavikā a cowherd. -kanyā 1. the daughter of a

cowherd. —2. a nymph of Vṛndāvana. -adhyakṣaḥ, -iṁdraḥ, -īśaḥ the chief

of herdsmen, an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dalaḥ the betel-nut tree. -bhadraṁ the

fibrous root of a water-lily. -rasaḥ gum myrrh -vadhūḥ f. a cowherd’s wife.

-vadhūṭī a young cowherdess, a young wife of a cowherd;

gopavadhūṭīdukūlacaurāya Bhāṣā P. 1. (—pakaḥ) 1. the superintendent of

a district. —2. myrrh. (—pikā) 1. a cowherdess. —2. protectress. (—pī) a

cowherd’s wife (especially applied to the cowherdesses of Vṛndāvana, the

companions of Kṛṣṇa in his juvenile sports). —2. a milk-maid. —3. a

protectress. —4. Nature, elementary nature. —patiḥ 1. an owner of cows.

—2. a bull. —3. a leader, chief. —4. the sun. —5. Indra. —6. N. of Kṛṣṇa —7.

N. of Śiva. —8. N. of Varuṇa. —9. a king. —paśuḥ a sacrificial cow. —pāḥ

m. Ved. 1. a herdsman. —2. protector, or guardian. 1. —pānasī a curved

beam which supports a thatch. —pālaḥ 1. a cowherd. —2. a king. —3. an

epithet of Śiva. —4. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. -dhānī a cow-pen, cow-shed, —

pālakaḥ 1. a cowherd. —2. a king. —3. an epithet of Śiva; also of Kṛṣṇa.

—pāliḥ an epithet of Śiva. —pālikā, —pālī the wife of a cowherd. —pittaṁ

bile of cows, ox-bile (from which the yellow pigment gorocanā is

prepared; Pt. 1. 94.). —pītaḥ a species of wagtail. —pīthaḥ protec tion.

(—thaṁ) a holy place, a place of pilgrimage. —pucchaṁ a cow’s tail. (—

cchaḥ) 1. a sort of monkey. —2. a sort of necklace consisting of two or

four or thirty-four strings. —puṭikaṁ the head of Śiva’s bull —putraḥ 1. a

young bull. —2. an epithet of Karṇa. —puraṁ 1. a town-gate; Māl. 9. 1. —

2. a principal gate; Ki. 5. 5. —3. the ornamental gate-way of a temple. —

purīṣaṁ cowdung. —prakāḍaṁ an excellent cow or bull. —pracāraḥ

pasture-ground, pasturage for cattle; Y. 2. 166. —prata(tā)raḥ 1. a ford

for cattle. —2. a place of pilgrimage on the Sarayū. —praveśaḥ the time

when cows return home, sunset or evening-twilight. —phaṇā 1. a

bandage hollowed out so as to fit the chin or nose &c. —2. a sling. —bālaḥ

the hair of cows. —bhuj m. a king. —bhṛt m. a mountain. —makṣikā a

gadfly. —magha a. granting cattle or cows. —maṁḍalaṁ 1. the globe. —2.

a multitude of cows. —mataṁ = gavyūti q, v. —matallikā a tractable cow,

an excellent cow. —mathaḥ a cowherd. —mahiṣadā N. of one of the Mātṛs

attending on kārtikeya. —māṁsaṁ beef. —māyu 1. a kind of frog. —2. a

jackal anuhuṁkurute ghanadhvaniṁ na hi gomāyurutāni kesarī Śi. 16. 25.

—3. bile of a cow. —4. N. of a Gandharva. —mukhaḥ, —mukhaṁ

[gormukhamiva mukhamasya] a kind of musical instrument; Bg. 1. 13.

(—khaḥ) 1. a crocodile, shark. —2. a hole of a particular shape in a wall

made by thieves. (—khaṁ) 1. a house built unevenly. —2. spreading

unguents, smearing. (—khaṁ, —khī) a cloth-bag of the shape of a gnomon

containing a rosary, the beads of which are counted by the hand thrust

inside. (—khī) the chasm in the Himālaya mountains through which the

Ganges flows. —mūḍha a. stupid as a bull. —mūtraṁ cow’s urine. —

mūtrikā 1. an artificial verse, the second of which repeats nearly all the

syllables of the first (Malli. thus defines it: —vaṁrṇānāmekarūpatvaṁ

yadyekāṁtaramardhayoḥ gomūtriketi tatprāhurduṣkaraṁ tadvido viduḥ ..

see Śi. 19. 46). —2. a form of calculation. —mṛgaḥ a kind of ox (gavaya).

—medaḥ a gem brought from the Himālaya and Indus, described as of

four different colours: —white, paleyellow, red, and dark-blue. —medakaḥ

1. see gomeda. —2. a kind of poison (kākola). —3. smearing the body with

unguents. —medhaḥ, —yajñaḥ a cowsacrifice. —yānaṁ a carriage drawn

by oxen. —yukta a. drawn by oxen. —yutaṁ a cattle-station. —rakṣaḥ 1. a

cowherd. —2. keeping or tending cattle. —3. the orange. —4. an epithet of

Śiva. -jaṁbū f. wheat. —raṁkuḥ 1. a water-fowl. —2. a prisoner. —3. a

naked man, a mendicant wandering about without clothes. —4. a chanter.

—ravaṁ saffron. —rasaḥ cow’s milk. —2. curds. —3. buttermilk. —4. the

flavour of a sentence, ko raso gorasaṁ vinā Udb. -jaṁ buttermilk. —rājaḥ

an excellent bull. —rāṭikā, —rāṭī the Sārikā bird. —rutaṁ a measure of

distance equal to two Krośas. —rūpaṁ the form of a cow. (—paḥ) N. of

Śiva. —rocaṁ yellow orpiment. —rocanā a bright yellow pigment prepared

from the urine or bile of a cow, or found in the head of a cow. —lavaṇaṁ

a measure of salt given to a cow. —lāṁgu (gū) laḥ a kind of monkey with

a dark body, red cheeks. and a tail like that of a cow; Mal. 9. 30. —lokaḥ a

part of heaven, cowworld. —lomī a prostitute. —vatsaḥ a calf. -ādin m. a

wolf. —vardhanaḥ a celebrated hill in vṛṁdāvana the country about

Mathurā. (This hill was lifted up and supported by Kṛṣṇa upon one finger

for seven days to shelter the cowherds from a storm of rain sent by Indra

to test Kṛṣṇa’s divinity.’) -dharaḥ, -dhārin m. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa. —vaśā a

barren cow. —vāṭaṁ, —vāsaḥ a cow-pen. —vāsana a. covered with an

ox-hide. —vikartaḥ, —vikrartṛ m. 1. the killer of a cow. —2. a husbandman.

—vitataḥ a horse-sacrifice having many cows. —viṁdaḥ 1. a cowkeeper, a

chief herdsman. —2. N. of Kṛṣṇa. —3. Bṛnaspati. -dvādaśī the twelfth day

in the light half of the month of phalguna. —viṣ f., —viṣṭhā cowdung. —

visargaḥ day-break (when cows are let loose to graze in forests). —vīthiḥ

f. N. of that portion of the moon’s path which contains the asterisms

bhādrapadā, revatī and aśvinī, or according to some, hasta, citrā and

svātī. —vīryaṁ the price received for milk. —vṛṁdaṁ a drove of cattle. —

vṛṁdārakaḥ an excellent bull or cow. —vṛṣaḥ, —vṛṣabhaḥ an excellent bull.

-dhvajaḥ an epithet of Śiva. —vaidyaḥ a quack doctor. —vrajaḥ 1. a cow-

pen. —2. a herd of cows. —3. a place where cattle graze. —vrata, —vratin

a. one who imitates a cow in frugality. —śakṛt n. cowdung. —śataṁ a

present of a hundred cows to a Brāhmaṇa. —śālaṁ, —lā a cow-stall. —

śīrṣaḥ, —rṣaṁ a kind of sandal. —ṣaḍgavaṁ three pairs of kine. —ṣan, —ṣā

a. Ved. acquiring or bestowing cows. —ṣā (sā) tiḥ 1. acquiring cattle. —2.

giving cattle. —ṣṭomaḥ a kind of sacrificelasting for one day. —saṁkhyaḥ a

cowherd. —sadṛkṣaḥ a species of ox (gavaya). —sargaḥ the time at which

cows are usually let loose, day-break; see govisarga. —savaḥ a kind of

cow-sacrifice (not performed in the Kali age). —sahasraṁ a kind of

present (mahādāna). (—srī) N. of two holidays on the fifteenth day of the

dark half of kārtika and jyeṣṭha. —sūtrikā a rope fastened at both ends

having separate halters for each ox or cow. —stanaḥ 1. the udder of a

cow. —2. a cluster of blossoms, nosegay &c. —3. a pearl-necklace of four

strings. —stanā, —nī a bunch of grapes. —sthānaṁ, —kaṁ a cow-pen. —

svāmin m. 1. an owner of cows. —2. a religious mendicant. —3. an

honorary title affixed to proper names; (e. g. vopadevagosvāmin). —hatyā

cow-slaughter. —hallaṁ (sometimes written hannaṁ) cowdung. —hita a.

cherishing or protecting kine. (—taḥ) N. of Viṣṇu.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

go m. f. SIDDH.K.251,a,5 v. u. gaus, gām, gavā, gave, gos, gavi; gāvau;

gāvas, gās und bisweilen auch gāvas (TBR. 3, 1, 2, 12. TAITT. UP. 1, 4,

2. MBH. 4, 1506. R. 2, 32, 38), gobhis, gobhyas, gavām und gonām

(dieses nur am Ende eines Pāda im Veda P. 7, 1, 57; gavām am Pāda-

Ende ṚV. 4, 1, 19), goṣu P. 6, 1, 93. 7, 1, 90. VOP. 3, 68. 69. Verhalten

des o vor Vocalen im comp. P. 6, 1, 122. fgg. VOP. 2, 18. Am Ende eines

comp. zu gu (vgl. 1. gu) geschwächt. 1) «Rind, Stier, Kuh»; pl. «Rinder,

Kühe, Rinderheerden» (f. P. 1, 2, 73, Sch.) AK. 2, 9, 60. 66. 3, 4, 3, 26.

25, 167. TRIK. 3, 3, 59. H. 1257. 1265. an. 1, 6. MED. g. 1. HĀR. 79. Uṇ.

2, 66, Sch. gavāṁ gotram ṚV. 2, 23, 18. sākaṁ gāvaḥ suvate pacyate

yavaḥ 1, 135, 8. yadi no gāṁ haṁsi yadyaśvaṁ yadi pūruṣam AV. 1, 16,

4. sthirau gāvau bhavatām ṚV. 3, 53, 7. 5, 27, 1. aśvāvati prathamo goṣu

gacchati 1, 83, 1. 8, 60, 5. puruṣo ‘jo ‘viko gauraśva iti pañca paśavaḥ

ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 9, 23, 4. ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 3, 13. 3, 1, 2, 13. 4, 5, 5, 10. 14, 1, 1,

32. gāva ukṣaṇaḥ ṚV. 1, 168, 2. VS. 21, 20. AV. 3, 11, 8. gāvo dhenavaḥ

ṚV. 1, 173, 1. 6, 45, 28. 10, 95, 6. VS. 21, 19. sarve te goṣu jīvinaḥ R. 1,

9, 61. gavāṁ ca yānaṁ pṛṣṭhena M. 4, 72. anargheyā mahārāja dvijā

varṇeṣu cottamāḥ. gāvaśca MBH. 13, 2689. fgg. kaliścaiva vṛṣo bhūtvā

gavām N. 7, 6. paṅke gauriva sīdati M. 4, 191. 8, 21. HIT. Pr. 23.

gaurandhā M. 3, 141. yathā gaurgavi cāphalā 2, 158. gohiraṇya n. sg.

«Kühe und Gold» MBH. 2, 1833. gobrāhmaṇa n. sg. «eine Kuh und ein

Brahman» 13, 3350. HARIV. 3157. fg. M. 5, 95. 11, 79.

hastigo’śvoṣṭradamaka 3, 162. gavāmayaḥ (MBH. 3, 8176. 13, 5177.

7128) und gavāmayanam (MBH. 3, 8080) N. einer Festfeier; s. u. ayana

und ZdmG.IX, LXXII. gavāṁ medhaḥ (vgl. gomedha) MBH. 13, 5378.

gavāṁ vratam N. eines Sāman Ind. St. 3, 215. gavāṁ tīrtham BHĀG. P. 3,

1, 22; Vgl. gotīrtha. Eine grosse Anzahl von Zusammensetzungen mit go

verlieren mit der Zeit ihre ursprüngliche enge, auf das «Rind» oder, die

«Kuh» bezügliche Bedeutung und nehmen eine allgemeine an; so z. B.

gaviṣ, gaviṣa, gaviṣṭi, gaveṣ, gaveṣaṇa, gavy, gup, gocara, gotra, gopā,

gopītha, gopīthya, goyuga, goṣṭha, ṣaṅgava u. s. w. — 2) m. «das

Sternbild des Stiers» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 39 (38), 7. 40 (39), 3. BṚH. 11, 4.

17, 2. 18, 1. L. JĀT. 13, 1. — 3) «was vom Rinde» oder «von der Kuh

kommt» (s. NIR. 2, 5), namentlich: a) «Milch», meist pl.: gobhiḥ śrīṇīta

matsaram ṚV. 9, 46, 4. 71, 5. gobhiraktam 4, 27, 5. gorna seke 1, 181, 8.

33, 10. 151, 8. 153, 4. 2, 30, 7. — b) «Fleisch»: agnervarma pari

gobhirvyayasva ṚV. 10, 16, 7. — c) «Haut, Rindsleder, daraus

geschnittene Riemen u.s.w.»: aṁśuṁ duhanto adhyāsate gavi ṚV. 10, 94,

9. gobhiḥ saṁnaddho asi 6, 47, 26. 75, 11. 8, 48, 5.

asmadryakśuśucānasya yamyā āśurna raśmiṁ tuvyojasaṁ goḥ 4, 22, 8.

tvamāyasaṁ prati vartayo gordivo aśmānam «du schleudertest aus dem

Riemen (funda) das eherne Geschoss» 1, 121. 9. — d) «Sehne»: vṛkṣe

vṛkṣe niyatā mīmayadgauḥ ṚV. 10, 27, 22. AV. 1, 2, 3. — 4) go, abgekürzt

für goṣṭoma (s. d.), heisst ein Opfertag im Abhiplava: jyotirgaurāyuriti

trīṇyahāni gaurāyurjyotiri trīṇi AIT. BR. 4, 15. ŚAT. BR. 13, 5, 4, 3.

goāyuṣī 12, 1, 2, 2. KĀTY. ŚR. 23, 1, 26. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 1. 11, 1. LĀṬY. 4, 7,

1. MAŚ. 2, 9. 3, 1 in Verz. d. B. H. 72. go = gomedhayajña BHĀNUD. bei

einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. m. = kratubheda Uṇ., Sch. — 5) pl. «die Heerde

am Himmel, die Gestirne»: tā vāṁ vāstūnyuśmasi gamadhyai yatra gāvo

bhūriśṛṅgā ayāsaḥ ṚV. 1, 154, 6. vi raśmibhiḥ sasṛje sūryo gāḥ «mit ihren

Strahlen hat die Sonne die Gestirne verscheucht» 7, 36, 1. — 6) «Himmel»

NAIGH. 1, 4. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 87. H. an. masc. TRIK. MED. (lies: svarga

st. sarga). m. f. Uṇ., Sch. Diese Bed. wurde. wenn sie nur sonst

nachzuweisen wäre, recht gut passen zur folgenden Stelle: indraḥ

pṛthivyai varṣīyāngostu mātrā na vidyate VS. 23, 48. — 7) «die Sonne»

NIR. 2, 6. 14. masc. Uṇ., Sch. BHĀNUD. bei einem Sch. zu AK. ŚKDR. Vgl.

goputra. — 8) m. «der Mond» VIŚVA im ŚKDR. — 9) pl. «die Lichtstrahlen

(die Rinderheerde des Himmels», um welche Indra mit Vṛtra kämpft)

NAIGH. 1, 5. NIR. 2, 6. 14, 25. AK. 3, 4, 3, 26. H. 99. H. an. masc. TRIK.

MED. m. = kiraṇa, m. f. = raśmi Uṇ., Sch. gobhirbhāsayase mahīm MBH.

3, 182. tvamevaikastapase jātavedo nānyastaptā vidyate goṣu deva 1,

8414. gavāṁ sūryo guruḥ smṛtaḥ HARIV. 2943. tejomayairgobhirivodito

‘rkaḥ (dīptimavāpa) R. 1, 7, 18. 4, 40, 64. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 21. gogaṇaiḥ 4,

16, 14. sg. «der Strahl» Suṣumṇa NIR. 2, 6. — 10) «Donnerkeil» AK. H. an.

SĀY. zu ṚV. 5, 30, 7. masc. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 11)

«Weltgegend» AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch. — 12) «die milchende

Kuh der Fürsten, die Erde» NAIGH. 1, 1. AK. H. 936. H. an. fem. TRIK.

MED. Uṇ., Sch. nādharmaścarito loke sadyaḥ phalati gauriva M. 4, 172.

khaṁ saṁniveśayetkheṣu ceṣṭanasparśane ‘nilam. paktidṛṣṭyoḥ paraṁ

tejaḥ snehe ‘po gāṁ ca mūrtiṣu.. 12. 120. imāṁ sāgarāpāṅgīṁ gām MBH.

1, 2468. 3, 1281. 15828. taṁ janāḥ kathayantīha yāvadbhavati gauriyam

13, 3168. BHAG. 15, 13. R. 1, 41, 18. 44, 19. MṚCCH. 173, 17. MEGH. 31.

(rājā) dudoha gāṁ sa yajñāya śasyāya maghavā divam RAGH. 1, 26; vgl.

payodharībhūtacatuḥsamudrāṁ jugopa gorūpadharāmivorvīm 2, 3 und

kasmāddadhāra gorūpaṁ dharitrī bahurūpiṇī. yāṁ dudoha pṛthustatra ko

vatso dohanaṁ ca kim.. BHĀG. P. 4, 17, 3. — 1, 10, 3. 4, 17, 7. Vgl. auch

dhenu. — 13) «Wasser» AK. H. an. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. f. pl. TRIK. MED. m. n.

(also gu) BHĀNUD. im ŚKDR. gaviṣṭho gāṁ gatastadā BHĀG. P. 1, 10, 36.

— 14) «Pfeil» AK. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 15) «Auge» AK.

H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. m. f. Uṇ., Sch. — 16) «das Haar auf dem Körper»,

m. f. Uṇ., Sch. m. n. (also gu) BHĀNUD. Vgl. 2. godāna. — 17) f. «Mutter»

EKĀKṢARAK. im ŚKDR. Vgl. prajāpatirditiścaiva gāvo viśvasya mātaraḥ

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 47, 68. — 18) m. «eine best. Arzeneipflanze» (ṛṣabha)

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 19) «Rede, die Göttin der Rede» (Sarasvatī) NAIGH.

1, 11. NIR. 6, 2. AK. H. 241. H. an. fem. TRIK. MED. Uṇ., Sch.

janmaprabhṛti matyāṁ te vedmi gāṁ brahmavādinīm MBH. 1, 72.

tasyārdhyamāsanaṁ caiva gāṁ cāvedya 3, 16696. yo ‘satsevī vṛthācāro

ca śrotā suhṛdāṁ satām. parānvṛṇīte svāndveṣṭi taṁ gaustyajati

bhārata.. 5, 4149. tatheti gāmuktavate RAGH. 2, 59. raghorudārāmapi

gāṁ niśamya 5, 12. Diese und die folgende Bed. hat man wohl in Folge

der Herleitung von gā «singen» angenommen. — 20) «Lobsänger» NAIGH.

3, 16. — 21) «Gänger, Ross» (von gam oder gā «gehen») SĀY. zu ṚV. 1,

121, 9. 4, 22, 8. — 22) «Billion»: yadā daśabhirakṣitairyajate ‘tha

gaurbhavati (akṣita = «100,000 Millionen») PAÑCAV. BR. 17, 14. — 23) N.

pr. a) m. eines Ṛṣi: gorāṅgirasasya sāma LĀṬY. 6, 11, 3. Ind. St. 3, 215.

(vāruṇaśca tathā mantrī) putrapautraiḥ parivṛto gonāmnā puṣkareṇa ca

MBH. 2, 381. — b) f. der Gemahlin Śuka’s, einer Tochter der Manen

Sukāla HARIV. 986. der Schwiegertochter Śuka’s BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 25. einer

Tochter Kakutstha’s und Gemahlin Yayāti’s HARIV. 1601.

go 4) WEBER, Nax. 2, 282. — 9) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 1. Spr. 2842 (zugleich

«Kuh»). BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 13) f. pl. BHĀG. P. 11, 7, 50. — 15) Spr.

2842. «Sinnesorgan» überh. BHĀG. P. 7, 5, 30. — 19) Spr. 2373 (zugleich

«Kuh»). — 23) a) gorāṅgirasasya sāma PAÑCAV. BR. 16, 7, 7.

gormāyūkasya Ind. St. 3, 459. Zu MBH. 2, 381 vgl. R. 7, 23, 28; nach dem

Comm. sind Go und Pushkara balādhyakṣau der Söhne und Enkel

Varuṇa’s. — b) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 39,b,43. — 24) Bez. «der Zahl neun»

WEBER, JYOT. 101. Nax. 2, 382.

go 24) (Nachträge) SŪRYAS. 1, 42. 2, 36. 3, 44. wegen «der neun Erden.»

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

go (gau) (GAU) A wife of sage Pulastya. Vaiśravaṇa was born of her.

The son left his father and went to Brahmā. (Śloka 12, Chapter 274, Vana

Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

go go,

I. m.

1. A bull; f. A cow, Man. 3, 141; pl. Bulls and cows, cattle, Man. 4, 72.

2. m. pl. Rays of light, Rājat. 5, 1.

II. f. The earth, Rām. 1, 41, 18.

III. m. and f. Water, Bhāg. P. 1, 10, 36.

IV. f. Speech, Ragh. 5, 12.

V. The deity of speech, MBh. 5, 4149.

VI. m. The name of a Ṛṣi, MBh. 2, 381.

VII. f. A proper name, Bhāg. P. 9, 21, 25.

— Cf. [greek] Lat. bos, ceva; OHG. ko; AS. cū; probably also [greek]

Goth. gavi, gauja.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

go m. bull, ox, ox-hide, leather, sinew; pl. cattle, herds, the stars or rays

of light (as the herds of the sky); pieces of flesh, cow-milk (also sgl.). —f.

cow, the earth (as the milch cow of kings); speech and Sarasvati, the

goddess of speech.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

go go, ox, bull; cow’s milk (gnly. pl.); ox-hide; thong: pl. host of heaven,

stars; rays; f. cow; earth; speech.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

go puṁstrī gacchatyanena gama—karaṇe ḍo . 1 svanāmakhyāte

paśubhede vṛṣasya yānasādhanatvāt strīgavyāśca dānadvārā

svargagatisādhanatvācca tathātvam . gatisādhanatayā tasya

tathārthatvayogena yaugikatve’pi yogarūḍhatvam . etena darṣaṇakṛtā

vyutpattilabhyasya mukhyārthatve gauḥ śete ityatrāpi lakṣaṇā syāt

gamerḍoḥ iti vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi prayogāt iti

yaduktaṁ tat grāmādikameva gamerḍoḥ ityūṇādipratyayasya

kartṛvācakatvāniyamāt tābhyāmanyatroṇādayaḥ pā° sūtre ūṇādīnāṁ

apādānasaṁpradānabhinnārthatvaniyamāt atra

karaṇārthakaḍopratyayena vyutpāditasya gośabdasya śayanakāle’pi

gatisādhanasvarūpayogyavācakatvāt phalopadhāyakatvaniyame

yānāsanaśayanādīnāmapi gatiśayanādivigamakāle

tacchabdavācyatānupapatteḥ . gamyate jñāyate anena karaṇe, śīghraṁ

gacchati kartari vā ḍo . 2 raśmau kiraṇe tasya śīghra gāmitvāt

cākṣuṣajñānahetutvācca tathātvam sūryādikiraṇa saṁparkaṁ vinā

cākṣuṣajñānāsambhavāt raśmerjñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . 3 vajre 4

hīrake tasyāpi kaṭhinadravye’pi gatimattvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 5

svarge karmibhi rgamyamānatvāt tasya tathātvam medi° . 6 candre

viśvaḥ karmibhistallokagamanāttasya tathātvam 7 sūrye 8 gomedhayajñe

bhānudīkṣitaḥ . sūryasya śīghragatikatvāt arcirādiṣvadhiṣṭhātṛtayā

ātivāhikatvāt tathātvam . saṁvatsarādādityamādityāccandramasam chā°

u° . ātivāhikaśabde 651 pṛ° dṛśyam 9 ṛṣabhanāmauṣadhe rājani° . tasya

gonāmakatvāt tathātvam . karaṇe ḍo . 10 betre strī tasya

cākṣuṣajñānasādhanatvāt tathātvam . kartari ḍo . 11 vāṇe strī tasya

śīghragtikatvāt tathātvam . karmaṇi ḍo . 12 diśi strī diśāṁ palāyanakāle

gamyamānatvāttayātvam . 13 vāci strī tasyāḥ jñānahetutvāt tathātvam .

ādhāreḍo . 14 bhuvi strī tasyāḥ gamanādhāratvāt tathātvam 15 jale ca

strība° va° kecit tasya nimnagatitvāt 16 paśumātre amaraḥ 17 mātari 18

lomani bhānudīkṣitaḥ . 19 vṛṣarāśau 20 navasaṁkhyāyām

gorbhūmernavakhaṇḍātmakatvāt ākāśe sadāgatimadgrahāṇāṁ

navatvādvā tatsaṁkhyāsāmyāt tathātvam . 21 pulastyabhāryāyāṁ

gavijātaśabde 2566 pṛ° dṛśyam . jñānahetutvāt 22 indriye gocaraḥ .

padāntasthitasyopasarjanasya samā° hrasvaḥ śītaguḥ sahasraguḥ . asya

uttarapadasthatve tatpuruṣe ṣac samā° . puṁsi paramagavaḥ striyāṁ

ṣittvāt ṅīṣ dugdhagavī goḥ purīṣaṁ mayaṭ . gomaya (govara) khyāte

padārthe na° gaurvidyate’sya mini gomin . matup . gomat goviśiṣṭe

gosvāmini ca tri° striyāṁ ṅīp . goḥsthāne goṣṭhac gogoṣṭha gosthāne na°

gomāṁsaguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomāṁsaṁ tu guru snigdhaṁ

pittaśleṣmavivardhanam . vṛṁhaṇaṁ vātahṛt balyamapathyaṁ

pīnasapraṇut . goridaṁ yat āntoyi pratyaye pā° avādeśaḥ . gavya

godugdhādau bhāvapra° tadguṇādyuktaṁ yathā gavyaṁ dugdhaṁ

viśeṣeṇa madhuraṁ rasapākayoḥ . śītalaṁ stanyapṛt snigdhaṁ

vātapittāsranāśanam . doṣadhātubalasrotaḥkiñcitkledakaraṁ guru .

jarāsamastarogāṇāṁ śāntikṛt sevināṁ sadā . kṣīravargaśabde 2377 pṛ°

vivṛtiḥ . gavyadadhiguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā gavyaṁ davi viśeṣeṇa

svādvamlañca rucipradam . pabitraṁ dīpanaṁ hṛdyaṁ puṣṭikṛt

pavanāpaham . uktaṁ dadhnāmaśeṣāṇāṁ madhye gavyaṁ guṇādhikam

tannavanītaguṇāḥ tatroktā yathā navanītaṁ kṣitaṁ gavyaṁ vṛṣyaṁ

varṇabalāgnikṛt . saṁgrāhi vātapittāsṛkkṣayārśo’rditakāsahṛt . taddhitaṁ

vālake vṛddhe viśeṣādamṛtaṁ śiśoḥ tadghṛtaguṇāḥ bhāvapra° uktā yathā

gavyaṁ ghṛtaṁ viśeṣeṇa cakṣuṣyaṁ vṛṣyamagnikṛt . svādupākakaraṁ

śītaṁ vātapittakaphāpaham . medhālāvaṇyakāntyojastejovṛddhikaraṁ

param . alakṣmīpāparakṣoghnaṁ vayasaḥ sthāpakaṁ guru . balyaṁ

pavitramāyuṣyaṁ sumaṅgalyaṁ rasāyanam . sugandhaṁ rocanaṁ cāru

sarvājyeṣu guṇādhikam . tanmūtraguṇā bhāvapra° uktā yathā gomūtraṁ

kaṭu tīkṣṇoṣṇaṁ kṣāraṁ tiktaṁ kaṣāyakam . laghvagnidīpanaṁ medhyaṁ

pittakṛtkaphavātahṛt . śūlagulmodarānāha kaṇḍvakṣimukharogajit .

kilāsagadavātāmavastiruk kuṣṭhanāśanam . kāsaśvāsāpahaṁ

śothakāmalāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṇḍūkilāsagadaśūlamukhākṣirogān

gulmātisāramarudāmayamūtrarodhān . kāsaṁ sakuṣṭhajaṭhara

krimipāṇḍurogān gomutramekamapi pītamapākaroti . sarveṣvapi ca

mūtreṣu gomūtraṁ guṇato’dhikam . ato’viśeṣāt kathane mūtraṁ

gomūtramucyate . plīhodaraśvāsa kāsaśothavarcāgrahāpaham .

śūlagulmarujānāhakāmaṁlāpāṇḍurogahṛt . kaṣāyaṁ tiktatīkṣṇañca

pūraṇāt karṇaśūlanut . tatra saurabhyām paṅke gauriva sīdati bhā° vi°

191 . yathā gaurgavi cāphalā manuḥ goghnavat vihitaḥ kalpaḥ prā° ta°

viśvā° . vāci pannagagavīgumpheṣu cājāgarīt malli°

preyodūtapataṅgapuṅgavagabīhaiyaṅgavīnaṁ rasāt naiṣa° netrādiṣu

gomadhyamadhye! mṛgagodhare! he sahasragobhūṣaṇakiṅkarāṇām .

nādena gobhṛcchikhareṣu mattā nṛtyanti gokarṇaśarīrabhakṣāḥ cauraḥ .

gāmāttasārāṁ raghurapyavekṣya raghuḥ kṣiptāvarodhāṅganamutpathena

gām māghaḥ . hitādau yat . gavya gauhitaudau bhuvi padānte

gośabdasya atipare pararūpaṁ go’graṁ prakṛtivadbhāvaśca go agraṁ

acipare vā avaṅa gavāgram . aśvaśabde pare gavāśvādi° dvandva

ekavadbhāvaḥ . gavāśvam .

देवहूती — devahūtī Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975devahūtī A daughter of Svāyambhuva Manu, the son of Brahmā. The

Manu had two sons called Priyavrata and Uttānapāda and three

daughters named Ākūti, Devahūti and Prasūti. Ākūti was married by

Ruciprajāpati and Devahūti by Kardamaprajāpati and Prasūti to

Dakṣprajāpati. Kapila, the mighty exponent of the Sāṅkhya system of

philosophy and great ascetic was the son born to Kardama by Devahūti.

Kapila taught his mother the world famous Kapila Śāstra,

(Devibhāgavata, Aṣṭama Skandha) and when the teaching was over he

bade farewell to her and took to forest life. And, his mother performed a

yajña on the lines advised by her son, on the banks of river Sarasvatī.

Because she took three baths daily her hairs became a mixture of black

and blue in colour and she got emaciated due to fasting. She wore the

bark of trees. Devahūti, who realised all the principles and the truth

became blind to all external objects like gardens, maids, mansions etc.

Thus immersed in meditation she in course of time attained siddhi

(realisation). The particular spot on the banks of Sarasvatī where she

attained Siddhi is called Siddhapada.

नील — nīla Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīla mf («ā» or «ī»; cf. ) n. of a dark colour, (esp.) dark-blue or dark-green

or black &c. &c.

nīla dyed with indigo 2

nīla m. the sapphire (with «maṇi»

nīla m. the Indian fig-tree (= «vaṭa»)

nīla m. = «nīla-vṛkṣa»

nīla m. a species of bird the blue or hill Maina

nīla m. an ox or bull of a dark colour

nīla m. one of the 9 Nidhis or divine treasures of Kubera

nīla m. N. of a man g. «tikādi»

nīla m. of the prince of Māhiṣmatī

nīla m. of a son of Yadu

nīla m. of a son of Aja-mīḍha

nīla m. of a son of Bhuvana-rāja

nīla m. of an historian of Kaśmīra

nīla m. of sev. authors (also «-bhaṭṭa»)

nīla m. N. of Maṇjuśrī

nīla m. of a Nāga

nīla m. of one of the monkey-chiefs attending on Rāma (said to be a son

of Agni) &c.

nīla m. the mountain Nīla or the blue mountain (immediately north of

Ilāvṛita or the central division; cf. «nīlādri»)

nīla («ā») f. the indigo plant (Indigofera Tinctoria) (cf. «nīlī»)

nīla («ā») f. a species of Boerhavia with blue blossoms

nīla («ā») f. black cumin

nīla («ā») f. a species of blue fly

nīla («ā») f. (du.) the two arteries in front of the neck

nīla («ā») f. a black and blue mark on the skin

nīla («ā») f. N. of a goddess

nīla («ā») f. (in music) of a Rāgiṇi (personified as wife of Mallāra)

nīla («ā») f. of a river (v.l. «nālā»)

nīla («ī») f. the indigo plant or dye &c. Blyxa Octandra.

nīla («ī») f. m. a species of blue fly

nīla («ī») f. m. a kind of disease

nīla («ī») f. m. N. of the wife of Aja-mīḍha (v.l. «nalinī» and «nīlinī»)

nīla n. dark (the colour), darkness

nīla n. any dark substance

nīla n. = «tālī-pattra» and «tālīśa»

nīla n. indigo iii. 38

nīla n. black salt

nīla n. blue vitriol

nīla n. antimony

nīla n. poison

nīla n. a partic. position in dancing

nīla n. a kind of metre

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nīla a. (lā-lī f.; the former in relation to clothes &c., the latter in relation

to animals, plants &c.)

(1) Blue, dark-blue; nīlasnigdhaḥ śrayati śikharaṁ nūtanastoyavāhaḥ

U. 1. 33.

(2) Dyed with indigo. —laḥ 1 The dark-blue or black colour.

(2) Sapphire.

(3) The Indian fig tree.

(4) N. of a monkey-chief in the army of Rāma.

(5) ‘The blue mountain’, N. of one of the principal ranges of

mountains.

(6) A kind of bird, the blue Mainā.

(7) An ox of a dark-blue colour.

(8) One of the nine treasures of Kubera; see navanidhi.

(9) A mark. (10) An auspicious sound or proclamation. —lā

(1) The indigo plant.

(2) A Ragiṇī. —le f. du.

(1)

(1) The two arteries in front of the neck.

(2) A black and blue mark on the skin; (for other senses see nīlī.) —

laṁ

(1) Black-salt.

(2) Blue vitriol.

(3) Antimony.

(4) Poison.

(5) Indigo, indigo dye.

(6) Darkness.

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ a goose.

—aṁgaḥ the Sārasa bird.

—aṁjanaṁ 1. antimony. —2. blue vitriol.

—aṁjanā-aṁjasā lightn ing.

—abjaṁ-aṁbujaṁ, —aṁbujanman n., utpalaṁ the blue lotus.

—abhraḥ a dark cloud.

—aṁbara a. dressed in dark blue clothes. (

—raḥ) 1. a demon. goblin. —2. the planet Saturn. —3. an epithet of

Balarāma.

—aruṇaḥ early dawn, the first dawn of day.

—aśman m. a sapphire.

—upalaḥ the blue stone, lapis lazuli.

—kaṁṭhaḥ 1. a peacock; Māl. 9. 30; Me. 79. —2. an epithet of Śiva.

—3. a kind of gallinule. —4. a blue-necked jay. —5. a wag-tail. —6. a

sparrow. —7. a bee. (

—ṭhaṁ) a radish. -akṣa = rudrākṣa q. v.

—keśī the indigo plant.

—grīvaḥ an epithet of Siva.

—chadaḥ 1. the date-tree. —2. an epithat of Garuḍa.

—jaṁ blue steel.

—taruḥ the cocoanut tree.

—tālaḥ, —dhvajaḥ the Tamāla tree.

—paṁkaḥ, —kaṁ darkness.

—paṭalaṁ 1. a dark mass, a black coating or covering. —2. a dark

film over the eye of a blind man; Pt. 5.

—patraḥ the pomegranate tree. (—traṁ) —padmaṁ the blue

water-lily.

—picchaḥ a falcon.

—puṣpikā 1. the indigo plant. —2. linseed.

—bhaḥ 1. the moon. —2. a cloud. —3. a bee.

—maṇiḥ, —ratnaṁ 1. the sapphire; nepathyocitanīlaratnaṁ Git. 5;

Bv. 2. 42. —2. an epithet of Kṛṣṇa; also nīlamādhavaḥ. —mīlikaḥ a fire-fly.

—mṛttikā 1. iron pyrites. —2. black earth.

—rājiḥ f. a line of darkness, dark mass, thick darkness,;

niśāśaśāṁkakṣatanīlarājayaḥ Rs. 1. 2.

—lohita a. dark-blue, purple. (

—taḥ) 1. a purple colour. —2. an epithet of Śiva; S. 7. 35; Ku. 2. 57.

—varṇa a. dark-blue, bluish. (

—rṇaṁ) a radish.

—vasana-vāsas a. dressed in darkblue clothes; see nīlāṁbara. —

vṛṁtakaṁ cotton.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nīla 1) adj. f. ā und ī (nach P. 4, 1, 42 ī in anderer Verbindung als mit

Kleidern, nach dem Vārtt. zu diesem Sūtra in Verbindung mit Pflanzen und

lebenden Wesen) «dunkelfarbig»; namentlich «blau, dunkelblau,

schwarzblau» AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1397. an. 2, 495 (wo nīlo va- zu lesen

ist). HALĀY. 4, 49. n. «das Dunkle, Schatten» AV. 14, 2, 48.

nīlamasyodaraṁ lohitaṁ pṛṣṭham 15, 1, 7. 8. nāsya nīlaṁ na haro vyeti

TS. 3, 1, 1, 2. śuklam, nīlam ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 2, 12. 1, 20. CHĀND. UP. 1,

6, 5. 8, 6, 1. KAUṢ. UP. in Ind. St. 1, 410. nīlatoyamadhyasthā vidyullekhā

TAITT. ĀR. 10, 13. 1, 9, 1. KAUŚ. 18. 93. dhenu 126. vṛṣa (vgl. nīlaṣaṇḍa

und unten u. 2, d) M. 11, 136. YĀJÑ. 3, 271. pataṁga ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 4.

nāga R. 5, 18, 11. makṣikā AK. 2, 5, 26. kānana R. 2, 55, 8. 3, 11, 2.

nīlābhirvanarājibhiḥ 5, 54, 3. śādvalāni 9, 5. nadī nīlā 4, 44, 81.

samudrasya salilam 5, 7, 16. jalasrāva SUŚR. 2, 305, 7. MEGH. 42.

vaidūrya R. 2, 91, 29. maṇi 3, 58, 26. kuṣṭha SUŚR. 2, 68, 8. śoṇita 1, 45,

3. megha HIḌ. 4, 29. 1, 37. N. 16, 13. R. 3, 28, 19. 58, 25. PRAB. 95, 1.

VET. in LA. 5, 9. DAŚAK. in BENF. Chr. 186, 14. netra DHŪRTAS. 91, 14.

pakṣman BHARTṚ. 1, 59. mūrdhajāḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 74, 4. BHĀG. P. 2,

2, 11. nīlāṅga R. 3, 58, 26. 1, 58, 10. (śivam)

kaṇṭhaprabhāsaṅgaviśeṣanīlāṁ kṛṣṇatvacaṁ granthimatiṁ dadhānam

KUMĀRAS. 3, 46. nīlāṁ patākām MBH. 4, 1738. mahānīla (dhvaja) INDR.

1, 8. nīlavastraprāyaścitta VĀRĀHA-P. in Verz. d. B. H. No. 485. nīlā jhiṇṭī

AK. 2, 4, 2, 55. HALĀY. 2, 50. ānīlamukhaṁ stanadvayam RAGH. 3, 8.

«mit Indigo gefärbt» P. 4, 2, 2, Vārtt. 2. MED. l. 29. — 2) m. a) «Sapphir»

H. an.; vgl. nīlaṁ maṇim R. 3, 58, 26 und nīlamaṇi. — b) «der indische

Feigenbaum» (vaṭa) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — c) «ein best. Vogel, the blue or

hill Maina» WILS. nach ŚABDAR. — d) = nīlavṛṣa «ein dunkelfarbiger Stier»

Verz. d. B. H. No. 1227. — e) N. eines der 9 Schätze Kuvera’s TRIK. 1, 1,

79. H. 193. H. an. MED. — f) N. pr. eines Mannes gaṇa tikādi zu P. 4, 1,

154. Fürst von Māhiṣmati MBH. 1, 2697. 6990. 2, 1124. 3, 15250. 5, 79.

592. anūpādhipatiścaiva nīlaḥ 6, 4153. HARIV. 8019. nīlaṁ cāpi

nadīsutam 8098. ein Sohn Jadu’s 1843. VP. 416, N. 2. Ajamīḍha’s 453.

BHĀG. P. 9, 21, 30. Bhuvanarāja’s RĀJA-TAR. 7, 253. — LIA. II, 955. fg.

Geschichtschreiber von Kāśmīra RĀJA-TAR. 1, 14.16. — g) Bein.

Mañjuśrī’s TRIK. 1, 1, 21. — h) N. pr. eines Nāga MBH. 1, 1552. RĀJA-

TAR. 1, 28. 182. fg. — i) N. pr. eines Affen im Gefolge Rāma’s, eines

Sohnes des Feuergottes, H. an. MED. MBH. 3, 16287. R. 1, 16, 14. 4, 13,

4. 31, 29. 41, 3. 6, 2, 29. 22, 2. BHĀG. P. 9, 10, 19. — k) N. pr. eines

Gebirges H. 947, Sch. H. an. MED. antarā niṣadhaṁ nīlaṁ ca videhāḥ H.

1538, Sch. MBH.3,12918.6,198. 247. 13,1700. 7658. 14,1174. HARIV.

9736. 11447. VP. 167. 180, N. 3. BHĀG. P.5,16,8. 19,16. Verz. d. Oxf. H.

148,b,16. Vgl. nīlādri. — 3) f. ā und ī P. 4, 1, 42, Vārtt. 3. a) nīlā a) «die

Indigopflanze» H. an. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.; vgl. nīlī. — b) «eine blaublühende

Boerhavia» (nīlapunarnavā) ebend. — g) «eine blaue Fliegenart» nach den

Erklärern zu AK. 2, 5, 26, während das Wort dort offenbar adj. ist; vgl.

nīlī. — d) du. «die beiden hervortretenden Schlagadern vorn am Halse»:

grīvādhamanyau (u. dhamani 2 am Ende ist aus Unachtsamkeit nach

dieser Stelle dhamani mit grīvā gleichgesetzt) prāgnīle H. 587. — e)

«Flecken» (als Krankheit?) H. an. — z) die Gemahlin des Rāga Mallāra

BṚHADDHARMA-P. 44 im ŚKDR. — b) nīlī a) «die Indigopflanze» AK. 2, 4,

3, 13. 3, 4, 14, 82. MED. M. 10, 89. SUŚR. 1, 162, 14. 163, 2. 2, 25, 14.

151, 19. 285, 12. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 76, 5. -rasa PAÑCAT. 62, 24. -varṇa 63,

1. — b) «Blyxa Saivala» (śaivala) H. 1167; vgl. jalanīlī. — g) «eine blaue

Fliegenart» COLEBR. und LOIS. zu AK. 2, 5, 26. — d) «eine best.

Krankheit», = rugbheda MED.; vgl. nīlīroga, nīlikā. — e) N. pr. der

Gemahlin Ajamīḍha’s MBH. 1, 3722. HARIV. 1756; vgl. nalinī und nīlinī. —

4) n. a) «Indigo» YĀJÑ. 3, 38. Diese Bed. geben ŚKDR. und WILS. nach

MED., aber hier heisst es nīlaṁ nīlīrakte; s. u. 1 am Ende. — b)

«schwarzes Salz» (kācalavaṇa). — c) «blauer Vitriol» (tuttha). — d)

«Antimonium» (sauvīrāñjana). — e) «Gift.» — f) = tālīśapattra RĀJAN. im

ŚKDR. — g) «eine best. Stellung beim Tanze»,

nṛtyāṅgāṣṭottaraśatakaraṇāntargatakaraṇaviśeṣaḥ SAṁGĪTAD. im ŚKDR.

— h) «ein best. Metrum, metrical sequence»COLEBR. Misc. Ess. II, 162

(XI, 6). Das Geschlecht ist nicht angegeben, doch ist das n.

wahrscheinlicher. — Nach H. an. giebt WILSON für das n. auch die

Bedeutung «a mark, a characteristick sign» und «a medical plant,

apparently distinct from the Indigofera.» Beide Bedeutungen kommen

aber dem f. nīlā zu. Die ganze Stelle lautet: nīlavarṇe (lies nīlo va-)

maṇau śaile nidhivānarabhedayoḥ. nīlauṣadhyāṁ (d. i. nīlā o-) lāñchane

ca.. — Vgl. kāṁsya-, kākanīlā.

nīla 2) b) nīlaṁ vanaspatim Spr. 3605. — h) Verz. d. Oxf. H. 348,b, No.

818. — 3) a) greek N. pr. einer Göttin WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 145. — b) a)

auch «Indigo» Spr. 4955. -vastra «ein mit Indigo gefärbtes Gewand» Verz.

d. Oxf. H. 282,b,2 v. u. — Vgl. mahā-.

nīla , nāsya pāpaṁ cakruṣo (so lesen wir) mukhānnīlaṁ vyeti (wohl so zu

lesen) KAUṢ. UP. 3, 1; vgl. TS. 3, 1, 1, 2.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

nīla I. A prominent nāga born to Kaśyapa Prajāpati of Kadrū. (Ādi Parva,

Chapter 35, Verse 7).

nīla 2 II

nīla 3 III A monkey-chief, who was a dependant of Śrī Rāma. He was

Agni’s son. ‘Nīla, son of Pāvaka (fire) shone forth like agni (fire). He stood

foremost among the monkeys in the matter of effulgence, reputation and

prowess’. (Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa, Bālakāṇḍa, Canto 17).

nīla 4 IV A warrior who fought on the Pāṇḍava side. He was king of

Anūpadeśa. He fought against Durjaya and Aśvatthāmā and was killed by

Aśvatthāmā. (Droṇa Parva, Chapter 31, Verse 25).

nīla 5 V A famous king in nothern Pāñcāla. The Purāṇas refer to sixteen

famous kings of this royal dynasty from Nīla to Pṛṣata.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

nīla nīla, i. e. niś + la,

I. adj., f. lā and lī, Black or dark-blue, Man. 11, 136.

II. m.

1. A proper name, MBh. 1, 2697.

2. The name of a mountain, 6, 198.

III. f. lī,

1. The indigo plant, Man. 10, 89.

2. A proper name, MBh. 1, 3722.

IV. n. Indigo, the dye, Yājñ. 3, 38.

— Comp. ā-, adj. blackish, Kir. 5, 31. indra-, m. a sapphire, Megh. 47.

kāṁsya-, m. the name of a monkey, Rām. 4, 39, 23. makā-, m. 1. the

sapphire. 2. one of the Nāgas. rāja(n)-, n. the emerald.

— Cf. Lat. niger for nigro = niś + ra.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

nīla a. dark-coloured, esp. dark-blue or black. —m. sapphire; N. of a

serpent-demon, sev. men, etc.; f. nīlā a woman’s name, nīlī indigo (plant

or dye); n. dark colour or substance, indigo.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

nīla nīla, a. swarthy, black; esp. dark blue; m. sapphire; Indian fig-tree;

N.; n. indigo;

-kaṇṭha, a. blue-necked; m. peacock; ep. of Śiva; N., esp. of a

commentator on the Mahābhādrata;

-giri, m. Blue Mountain, N. of a mountain-range (Nīlgiri);

-jā, f. ep. of the river Vitastā;

-tā. f. blueness; dark-blue colour;

-nicolin, a. wearing a dark cloak;

-nīraja, n. blue lotus;

-pakṣman, n. feathered with black eyelashes;

-paṭa, m. dark garment;

-paṭala, n. dark film (on a blind eye);

-pura, n. N. of a town;

-purāṇa, n. T. of a Purāṇa;

-bhāṇḍa-svāmin, m. indigo-vat proprietor;

-bhū, f. N. of a river, -maṇi, m. sapphire;

-ratna, n. id.;

-rāji, f. dark streak, darkness;

-lohita, a. dark-blue and red, dark red;

-vat, a. blackish, dark;

-varṇa, a. blue-coloured: -śṛgāla-vat, ad. like the blue jackal;

-vasana, n. blue cloth;

-vṛṣa, m. dark-coloured bull;

-saṁ-dhāna-bhāṇḍa, n. vat for preparing indigo;

-saroruha, n. blue lotus;

-aṁśuka, n. blue garment;

-aṅga, a. dark-bodies;

-abja, n. blue lotus;

-abhra-saṁvṛta, pp. obscured by dark clouds;

-ambhoja, n. blue lotus.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

nīla pu° nīla—aca . svanāmakhyāte varṇe 1 śyāmavarṇe 2 tadvati tri°

amaraḥ . 3 parvatabhede 4 vānarabhede ca medi° . 5 nīlyoṣadhau 6

nidhibhede 7 lāñchane ca pu° hemaca° . 8 maṅkalaghoṣe trikā° 9

vaṭavṛkṣe rājani° . nīlaparvataśca ramyakavarṣasya sīmāparvataḥ

yathoktaṁ bhāga° 5169 ślo° uttarottareṇelāvṛtaṁ nīlaḥ śvetaḥ

śṛṅgavāniti trayoramyakahiraṇmayakurūṇāṁ varmāṇāṁ maryādāgirayaḥ

prāgāyatā ubhayataḥ kṣārodābadhayodvisāhasravṛthava ekaikaśaḥ

pūrvasmāt pūrvasmāduttarottareṇa daśāṁśādhikāṁśena dairghya eva

hrasanti . bhāratavarṣadakṣiṇasthe svanāmakhyāte 10 girau ca 11

indranīlamaṇau śanituṣṭyarthaṁ dhārye deye ca maṇibhede .

tasyotpattyādiparīkṣā garuḍapu° uktā yathā tatraiva

siṁhalavadhūkarapallavāgravyālūnabālalavanīkusuma pravāle . deśe

papāta ditijasya nitāntakāntaṁ protphulla nīrajasamadyuti netrayugmam

. tatpratyayādubhayaśobhana vīcībhāsā vistāriṇī

ūlanidherupakacchabhūmiḥ . prodbhinnaketakavanapratibaddhalekhā

sāndrendranīlamaṇiratnavatī vibhāti .

tatrāsitābjahalabhṛdvasanāsibhṛṅgaśārṅgāyudhābhaharakaṇṭhakalāyapuṣ

paiḥ . śukletaraiśca kusumairgiri karṇikāyāstasmin bhavanti maṇayaḥ

sadṛśāvabhāmaḥ . anye prasannapayasaḥ payasāṁ nidhāturambutviṣaḥ

śikhigala pratimāstathānye . nīlīrasaprabhavabudvudabhāśca kecit

kecittathā samadakokilakaṇṭhabhāsaḥ . ekaprakārā vispaṣṭa

tarṇaśobhāvabhāsinaḥ . jāyante maṇayastasminnindranīlā mahāguṇāḥ .

mṛtpāṣāṇaśilāvajrakarkarābhāsasaṁyutāḥ . avbhrikāpaṭalacchāyā

varṇadoṣaiśca dūṣitāḥ . tata eva hi jāyante maṇayastatra bhūrayaḥ .

śāstrasambodhita dhiyastān praśaṁsanti sūrayaḥ . dhāryamāṇasya ye

dṛṣṭāḥ padmarāgamaṇerguṇāḥ . dhāraṇādindranīlasya tānevāpnoti

mānavaḥ . yathā ca padmarāgāṇāṁ jātu kartṛbhayaṁ bhavet .

indranīleṣvapi tathā draṣṭavyamaviśeṣataḥ . parīkṣāpratyayairyauśca

padmarāgaḥ parīkṣyate . taeva pratyayā dṛṣṭā indranīlamaṇerapi .

yāvantañca kramedagniṁ padmarāgaḥ prayogataḥ . indranīlamaṇistasmāt

krameta sumahattaram . tathāpi na parīkṣārthaṁ guṇānāmativṛddhaye .

maṇiragnau samādheyaḥ kathañcidapi kaścana . magnimātrā’parijñāne

dāhadoṣaiśca dūṣitaḥ . so’narthāya bhavedbhartuḥ kartuḥ kārayitustathā .

śyāmotpalakaravīrasphaṭikādyā iha budhaiḥ savaidūryāḥ . kathitā vijātaya

ime sadṛśā maṇinendranīlena . gurubhāvakaṭhinabhānāścaiteṣāṁ

nityameva vijñeyāḥ . kācādyāyāvaduttaravivardhamānā viśeṣeṇa .

indranīlo yadā kaścit vibharti tāmravarṇatām . rakṣaṇīyau tathā tāmrau

karavīrotpalābubhau . yasya madhyagatā bhāti nīlasyendrāyudhaprabhā .

tadindranīlamityāhurmahārdhaṁ bhuvi durlabham . yastu varṇasya

bhūyasvāt kṣīre śata guṇe sthitaḥ . nīlatāṁ tannayet sarvaṁ mahānīlaḥ

sa ucyate . yat padmarāgasya mahāguṇasya mūlyaṁ bhavenmāṣa

samunmitasya . tadindranīlasya mahāguṇasya savarṇasaṁkhyātulitasya

mūlyam 12 nāgabhede pu° nīlānīlau tathā nāgau kalmāṣaśavalau tathā

bhā° ā° 35 a° . krodhavaśagaṇāṁśajāte dvāparayugīye 13 nṛpabhede

gaṇaḥ krodhavaśo nāma yaste rājan! prakīrtitaḥ . tataḥ saṁjajñire vīrāḥ

kṣitāviha narādhipāḥ ityuprakrame krathovikṣitraḥ surathaḥ śrīmān

nīlaśca bhūmipaḥ bhā° ā° 670 uktam . 14 ajamīḍhasya nīlyaparanāmnyāṁ

nīlinyāṁ jāte putrabhede ajamīḍhasya nīlinī nāma ṣatnī tasyāṁ

nīlanaṁjñaḥ putro’bhavat viṣṇupu° 4 aṁśe 19 a° . ajamīḍhasya 15

patnībhede strī ṅīp . ajamīḍhasya patnyastu tisro vai yaśasānvitā . nīlī ca

keśinī caiva dhūminī ca varāṅganā harivaṁ° 22 a° vānarabhedaśca

rāmasenāntargataḥ nalanīlāṅgadakrāthasundadvividapālitā . yayau

sumahatī senā rāghavasyārthasiddhaye bhā° va° 282 a° . nīla +

oṣadhijātau ṅīp . 16 nīlyoṣadhau strī nīlyā raktam an . nīla 17 nīlīrakte tri°

18 yamabhede pu° vaivasvatāya kālāya nīlāya parameṣṭhine

yamatarpaṇamantraḥ . 19 kālikāśaktibhede strī nīlā ghanā valākā ca

mātrā mudrā mitā ca mām kālīkavacam . 20 kācalavaṇe 21 tālīśapatre 22

viṣe śabdārthaci° . 23 nṛtyāṅgāṣṭottaraśatakaraṇāntargatakaraṇe

saṁgītadā° . nīlavastradhāraṇādiniṣedhaḥ mitākṣarāyām yathā

nīlīraktaṁ yadā vastraṁ vrāhmaṇo’ṅreṣu dhārayet . ahorātroṣito

bhūtvā pañcagavyena śudhyati romakūpe yadā gacchedraso nīlyāstu

kasyacit . trivarṇeṣu ca sāmānyantaptakṛcchraṁ viśodhanam . pālanaṁ

vikrayaścaiva tadvṛttyā copajīvanam . pātanañca bhavedvipre tribhiḥ

kṛcchrairvyapohati . nīlīdāru yadā bhindyādbrāhmaṇasya śarīrataḥ .

śoṇitaṁ dṛśyate yatra dvijaścāndrāyaṇañcaret . strīṇāṁ

krīḍārthasambhone śayanīye na duptyati smṛtiḥ bhṛguṇāpyuktam

strīkrīḍāśayane nīlī brāhmaṇasya na duṣyati . nṛpasya vṛddhau vaiśyasya

parvavarjaṁ vighāraṇam tathā vastraviśeṣakṛtaśca pratiprasavaḥ

kambale pradṛsūtre ca nīlīrāgo na duṣyati iti smaraṇāt . nīlīraktaṁ yadā

vastra vipraḥ svāṅgeṣu dhārayet . tantusanta tisaṁkhyāke vaset sa

narake dhruvam . skānde kāśīkhaṇḍe nīlīraktaṁ tu yadvastraṁ

dūratastadvivarjayet . strīṇāṁ krīḍārthasaṁyoge śayanīye ga duṣyati .

mṛte bhartari yā nārī nīlīvastraṁ tu ghārayet . bhartāgre narakaṁ yāti sā

nārī tadanantaram . kambale paṭṭasūtre ca nīlīdomo na vidyate . śūdre

viśeṣaḥ brāhmaṇasya sitaṁ vastraṁ nṛpate raktamulvaṇam . pītaṁ

vaiśyasya śūdrasya nīlaṁ malavadiṣyate . nīlaṁ malavat kṛṣṇamiti vithā°

pā° katicit nīlavastūni kavikalpalatāyāṁ darśitāni yathā śukaḥ śaivālaṁ

dūrvā bālatṛṇaṁ budhagrahaḥ vaṁśāṅkuraḥ marakata indranīlamaṇiḥ . 24

mātrāvṛttabhede na° tālapayodharanāyakatomarayajradharam

pāṇiyutañca vidhāya bhāminī vṛttavaram . nīlamidam

phaṇināyakapiṅgalasaṁlapitam paṇḍitamaṇḍalikāsukhadaṁ sakhi!

karṇagatam pariśīlaya nīlanicolam gītago° . śukrāṅganīlopalanirmitānām

māghaḥ kaṇṭhaprabhāsaṅgaviśeṣanīlāṁ kṛṣṇakhacaṁ granthimatīṁ

dadhānam kumā° . nīlaśyāmalakālānāmīṣadbhedāt ekaparyāyatā amare

paryāyatayā teṣāmukteḥ . 25 diggajabhede nīrājanaśabde dṛśyam .

नीलक — nīlaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlaka mfn. blue (esp. as N. of the third unknown quantity or of its

square)

nīlaka m. Terminalia Tomentosa

nīlaka m. a male bee

nīlaka m. Antilope Picta

nīlaka m. a dark-coloured horse

nīlaka m. a partic. medicinal plant

nīlaka m. the indigo plant

nīlaka m. Nyctanthes Arbor Tristis

nīlaka m. Vitex Negundo

nīlaka m. a kind of malady (black and blue marks in the face)

nīlaka m. a partic. disease of the lens of the eye (also «-likā-kāca», m.)

nīlaka m. N. of a river

nīlaka n. blue steel

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nīlaka (von nīla) 1) adj. «blau», als Bez. «der dritten unbekannten Grösse,

ihres Quadrats u.s.w.» COLEBR. Alg. 139. 228. — 2) m. a) N. eines

Baumes, «Terminalia tomentosa W. u. A.» (asana) RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b)

«eine Bienenart(?)»: yathā madhukarīṁ dhyāyannīlakastanmayo bhavet.

taddhyānācca tathā nārīgarbhaḥ syāttu naropamaḥ.. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 74,

4. — c) «eine Antilopenart, A. picta» RĀJAN. bei WILS. — d) «ein

dunkelfarbiges Pferd, Rappe» H. 1239. — 3) f. nīlikā a) «eine best. stark

wuchernde Wasserpflanze»: (jvaram) apāṁ tu nīlikāṁ vidyāt MBH. 12,

10260 = HARIV. 10558. = śephālikā «Nyctanthes arbor tristis» AK. 2, 4, 2,

51. MED. k. 111. HALĀY. 3, 61. = nīlī «die Indigopflanze» MED. =

nīlasinduvāra RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — «eine best. Arzeneipflanze» SUŚR. 1,

183, 17. 2, 68, 16. — b) «eine best. Krankheit, das Erscheinen blauer

Flecken im Gesicht» MED. SUŚR. 1, 90, 13. 2, 120, 11. — c) = nīlikākāca

SUŚR. 2, 344, 19. — d) N. pr. eines Flusses MBH. 13, 7654. — 4) n. a)

«schwarzes Salz» (kācalavaṇa). — b) «blauer Stahl» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. —

c) «blauer Vitriol» RĀJAN. bei WILS. — Vgl. kaṇṭhanīlaka, janinīlikā.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

nīlaka na° nīla + khārthe saṁjñāyāṁ kan vā . 1 kācalavaṇaṁ 2 vartalohe

3 asanavṛkṣe rājani° . nīlena varṇeca kāyati kai—ka . 4 bhramare

kīṭabhede pu° . yathā madhukarīṁ dhyāyan nīlakastanmayo bhavet vṛha°

saṁ° 75 a° pāṭhāntaram . vījagaṇitokte 5 avyaktarāśisaṁjñābhede pu°

yāvattāvat kālako nīlako’nyovarṇaḥ pīto lohitaścaivamādyāḥ vījaga0

नीलकम् — nīlakam Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

nīlakam

(1) Black salt.

(2) Blue steel.

(3) Blue vitriol. —kaḥ

(1) A darkcoloured horse.

(2) (In alg.) The third unknown quantity (corresponding to z of

European Algebra).

नीलता — nīlatā Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlatā «nīla-tā» f. blueness, a dark colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nīlatā (von nīla) f. «blaue —, dunkle Farbe» SUŚR.1,305,11. KĀM.

NĪTIS.7,16. VĀYU-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 48,b,21.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

nīlatā nīla + tā, f. Dark-blue colour, Kām. Nītis. 7, 16.

नीलति — nīlati Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

nīlati Den. P.

(1) To be of a darkblue colour.

(2) To dye blue.

नीललोहित — nīlalohita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlalohita «nīla-lohita» mfn. dark-blue and red, purple, dark-red &c. &c.

nīlalohita «nīla-lohita» m. N. of śiva

nīlalohita «nīla-lohita» m. N. of a Kalpa (see s.v.)

nīlalohita «nīla-lohita» m. a mixture of blue and red, a purple colour

nīlalohita «nīla-lohita» m. N. of a goddess (the wife of śiva)

nīlalohita «nīla-lohita» m. «-tākṣa» m. «having dark-red eyes», śiva

nīlalohita «nīla-lohita» m. «-tāntevāsin» m. śiva’s pupil i.e. Paraśu-rāma

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nīlalohita (nīla + lo-) 1) adj. «schwarzblau und roth, dunkelroth» ṚV. 10,

85, 28. VS. 16, 47. AV. 4, 17, 4. -tenāmūnabhyavatanomi 8, 8, 24. KAUŚ.

16. 32. 40. 48. 83. von Rudra-Śiva (auch subst.) AK. 1, 1, 1, 28. H. 198.

HALĀY. 1, 13. VP. 58, N. 2. BHĀG. P. 3, 12, 7. 15. 4, 6, 41. MBH. 13.

1084. KUMĀRAS. 2, 57. ŚĀK. 194. BRAHMA-P. in LA. 53, 12. nīlalohitākṣa

von Śiva ŚIV. — 2) m. N. eines Kalpa; s. u. kalpa 2,d. — 3) f. ā a) «eine

best. Pflanze» (s. bhūmijambu) ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) N. einer Göttin

BRAHMA-P. in Verz. d. Oxf. H. 19,a,39. Śiva’s Gemahlin ŚKDR.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

nīlalohita a. blue-red, E. of Śiva.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

nīlalohita pu° varṇāvarṇana pā° karma° . kaṇṭhena nīle keśeṣu

lohitavarṇayukte 1 śive amaraḥ . aṁśāyute niṣikasya nīlalohitatisaḥ kṛpā°

drāpe anyasaspate daridra! nīlalohita! yaju° 16 . 47 prajārthaṁ

varayāmāsa nīlalohitasaṁjñitam bhā° ānu° 16 a° . 2 niśritanīlalohitavarṇe

3 tadyute tri° . 4 bhūbhijabyāṁ strī śabdaca° .

नीलवर्ण — nīlavarṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlavarṇa «nīla-varṇa» mfn. blue-coloured, blue

nīlavarṇa «nīla-varṇa» m. or n. a radish

nīlavarṇa «nīla-varṇa» m. Grewia Asiatica

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nīlavarṇa (nīla + va-) 1) adj. «blaufarbig, blau» HIT. III, 57. — 2) m. oder

n. a) «Grewia orientalis Lin.» — b) «Rettig» NIGH. PR.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

nīlavarṇa a. blue-coloured.

नीलाय — nīlāya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlāya Nom. P. ā. «-yati» and «-te», to begin to become blue or dark-

coloured (cf.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

nīlāya nīlā-ya, den. Ā. begin to be dark or blue.

नीलिमन् — nīliman Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīliman m. blueness, blackness, darkness

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nīliman m. Blue colour, darkness, blueness; Māl. 5. 6.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nīliman (von nīla) m. «eine dunkle Farbe, Schwärze» GĪT. 8, 3. Schol. zu

KAUṢ. UP. in Ind. St. 1, 410, 6.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

nīliman nīliman, i. e. nīla + iman, m. Blackness, Gīt. 8, 3.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

nīliman m. blackness, dark colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

nīliman pu° nīlasya bhāvaḥ imanic . nīlavarṇe

kañjakamalinavilocanacumbanaviracitanīlimarūpas gītayo0

नीली — nīlī Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlī f. of «nīla» q.v.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

nīlī

(1) The indigo plant; tatra nīlīrasaparipūrṇaṁ mahābhāṁḍamāsīt Pt.

1; eko grahastu mīnānāṁ nīlīmadyapayoryathā Pt. 1. 260.

(2) A species of blue fly.

(3) A kind of disease.

— Comp.

—rāga a. firm in attachment. (

—gaḥ) 1. affection as unchangeable as the colour of indigo,

unalterable or unswerving attachment. —2. a firm and constant friend.

—saṁdhānaṁ fermentation of indigo. -bhāṁḍaṁ an indigo vat.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

nīlī Second wife of King Ajamīḍha. Two sons called Duṣyanta and

Parameṣṭhī were born to the king of Nīlī. (Ādi Parva, Chapter 94, Verse

32).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

nīlī strī, (nīlo niṣpādyatvenāstyasyāḥ iti . nīla + ac tato ṅīṣ .) vṛkṣabhedaḥ

. nīlera gācha iti bhāṣā .. tatparyāyaḥ . kālā 2 klītakikā 3 grāmīṇā 4

madhuparṇikā 5 rañjanī 6 śrīphalī 7 tutthā 8 tūṇī 9 dolā 10 nīlinī 11 .

ityamaraḥ . 2 . 4 . 94 .. nīlā 12 tūlī 13 droṇī 14 melā 15 . iti bharataḥ ..

nīlapatrī 16 rājñī 17 nīlikā 18 nīlapuṣpī 19 kālī 20 śyāmā 21 śodhanī 22

śrīphalā 23 grāmyā 24 bhadrā 25 bhāravāhī 26 mocā 27 kṛṣṇā 28

vyañjanakeśī 29 mahāphalā 30 asitā 31 klītanī 32 keśī 33 cāraṭikā 34

gandhapuṣpā 35 śyāmalikā 36 raṅgapatrī 37 mahābalā 38 sthiraraṅgā 39

raṅgapuṣpī 40 dūlī 41 dūlikā 42 droṇikā 43 . iti śabdaratnāvalī .. asyā

guṇāḥ . kaṭutvam . tiktatvam . uṣṇatvam . keśyatvam .

kāsakaphamarudviṣodaravyādhigulmajantuvraṇanāśitvañca . iti

rājanirghaṇṭaḥ .. nīlikārogaḥ . iti medinī . le, 29 ..

नीलीवर्ण — nīlīvarṇa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nīlīvarṇa «nīlī-varṇa» mfn. having the colour of indigo «-śṛgāla-vat» ind.

like the blue jackal

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

nīlīvarṇa a. having the colour of indigo.

नैल्य — nailya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899nailya n. (fr. «nīla») dark-blue (the colour)

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

nailya (von nīla) n. «die dunkelblaue Farbe» RĀMATARKAVĀGĪŚA zu VOP.

ŚKDR. (śivasya) kaṇṭhe nailyam HARIV. 7592.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

nailya nailya, i. e. nīla + ya, n. Darkblue (the colour).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

nailya nail-ya, n. dark-blue colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

nailya na° nīlasya bhāvaḥ ṣyañ . nīlavarṇe nilakaṇṭhaśabde udā° .

नैल्यम् — nailyam Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

nailyam Blueness, dark-blue colour.

परुष — paruṣa Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899paruṣa mf («ā») n. (older f. «paruṣṇī») knotty (as reed)

mf («ā») n. spotted, variegated, dirty-coloured &c. &c.

mf («ā») n. hard, stiff, rugged, rough, uneven, shaggy &c.

mf («ā») n. intertwined with creepers (as a tree)

mf («ā») n. piercing, keen, sharp, violent, harsh, severe, unkind («am»

ind.)

paruṣa m. a reed

paruṣa m. an arrow

paruṣa m. Grewia Asiatica or Xylocarpus Granatum

paruṣa mf («ā») n. («paruṣa») m. N. of a demon

paruṣa mf («ā») n. («ā») f. a kind of riddle

paruṣa m. («-ṣṇī») f. N. of one of the rivers of the Panjāb now called Rāvī

paruṣa n. harsh and contumelious speech, abuse &c.

paruṣa n. the fruit of Grewia Asiatica or Xylocarpus Granatum

paruṣa n. a species of Barleria with blue flowers

paruṣa see under «paru».

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

paruṣa a. [pṝ-uṣan]

(1) Hard, rough, rugged, stiff (opp. mṛdu or ślakṣṇa); paruṣaṁ carma,

paruṣā mālā &c.

(2) Harsh, abusive, severe, unkind, cruel, stern (as words); (vāk)

aparuṣā paruṣākṣaramīritā R. 9. 8; Pt. 1. 50; said also of a person;

snigdhe yatparuṣāsi Gīt. 9; Y. 1. 310.

(3) Harsh or disagreeable to the ear (as a sound &c.); tena

vajraparuṣasvanaṁ dhanuḥ R. 11. 46; Me. 61.

(4) Rough, coarse, rough to the touch, shaggy (as hair);

śuddhasnānātparuṣamalakaṁ Me. 91.

(5) Sharp, violent, strong, keen, piercing (wind &c.);

paruṣapavanavegotkṣiptasaṁśuṣkaparṇaḥ Rs. 1. 22; 2. 28.

(6) Gross.

(7) Dirty.

(8) Spotted, variegated.

(9) Ved. Knotted. —ṣaṁ A harsh or abusive speech, abuse.

— Comp.

—akṣara a. using harsh or abusive language; Pt. 1. 50

—itara a. other than rough, soft, mild; R. 5. 68.

—ukti, f. vacanaṁ abusive or harsh language.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

paruṣa (von parus) UṆĀDIS. 4, 75. 1) adj. f. ā, in der älteren Sprache

paruṣṇī. a) «knotig», von Rohrpflanzen: paruṣṇī śīpālā AV. 6, 12, 3. — b)

«fleckig, bunt, ungleichfarbig, schmutzig»; = karbura H. an. 3, 738. MED.

sh. 39. ukṣaṇaḥ ṚV. 5, 27, 5. paruṣe gavi 6, 56, 3; vgl. NIR. 2, 6.

tvametadadhārayaḥ kṛṣṇāsu rohiṇīṣu ca. paruṣṇīṣu ruśatpayaḥ ṚV. 8, 82,

13. (takmā) yaḥ paruṣaḥ pāruṣeyo ‘vadhvaṁsa ivāruṇaḥ AV. 5, 22, 3.

śoṇita SUŚR. 1, 45, 2. 85, 18. 260, 1. asitavicitranīlaparuṣaḥ (dinakṛt)

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 39. śītakara 4, 29. rogānkaroti paruṣaḥ (agastyaḥ)

kapilastvavṛṣṭim 12, 21. 17, 11. -vigraha HARIV. 12141.

saṁmārjanavihīnāni paruṣāṇi (kuṭumbibhavanāni) R. 2, 71, 34. tamasā

saṁvṛte loke ghoreṇa paruṣeṇa ca MBH. 3, 12145. cāṇḍāla R. 1, 58, 10.

paruṣarajo’ruṇīkṛtatanu (dinakṛt) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 38. -ghana VIKR.

142. tadaṅgarajasā paruṣībhavanti (v. l. für malinībhavanti) ŚĀK. 176. —

c) «rauh, uneben»; = śukta, karkaśa, rūkṣa, asnigdha AK. 3, 4, 14, 85. H.

1386. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 4, 98. (gatim) prayāti paruṣāṁ ghorām MBH.

13, 5443. ghanāśmaparuṣe deśe RĀJA-TAR. 4, 308. -carman PAÑCAT.

21, 13. jihvā VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 53. «struppig», von Haaren:

śuddhasnānātparuṣamalakam MEGH. 88. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 67, 83.

śmaśrubhiḥ 57. von Bäumen KATHĀS. 2, 4 (BROCKHAUS fasst hier das

Wort als N. eines best. Baumes). — d) «rauh, stechend», von Winden R. 6,

16, 4. 31, 38. 70, 51. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 26, 4 (su-). ṚT. 1, 22. adv.:

paruṣaṁ pavano vavau HARIV. 9420. von der Sonnengluth:

atiśayaparuṣābhirgrīṣmavahneḥ śikhābhiḥ ṚT. 2, 28. — e) «rauh», von

Tönen: vajraparuṣasvanaṁ dhanuḥ RAGH. 11, 46.

śravaṇaparuṣairgarjitaiḥ MEGH. 62. garjanti paruṣaṁ (adv.) meghāḥ

HARIV. 9295. bhinnabhairavadīnārtaparuṣakṣāmajarjarāḥ svarāḥ VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 85, 36. śakuniḥ rauti paruṣaravaḥ 52, 106. «rauh, hart, barsch»,

von Reden AK. 1, 1, 5, 19. H. 269. H. an. MED. vāc, vākya, ukti, gir MBH.

1, 7090. R. 3, 35, 56. Spr. 1425. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 52, 104. 77, 7. -vacana

adj. BṚH. 22 (21), 17. paruṣāṇi «rauhe, harte, barsche Reden» MBH. 3,

15689. 7, 5659. Spr. 465. bhavanaṁ devasya viśveśiturno

dauvārikanirdayoktiparuṣam 1550. tāmuvāca tato vīraḥ paruṣam (acc.

neutr. oder adv.) R. 1, 1, 80. na paruṣaṁ vaktavyā nāpi tāḍanīyāste

(turagāḥ) VARĀH. BṚH. S. 43, 7. PAÑCAT. ed. orn. 34, 8. -vaṇdinī 7.

paruṣataramidamāha PAÑCAT. 89, 2. mṛduparuṣaguṇau yojanīyau

svakāle «Milde und Strenge (Barschheit») Spr. 1314. «barsch, grob, roh»,

von Personen YĀJÑ. 1, 309 (a-). 3, 135. BHARTṚ. 2, 39. GĪT. 9, 10. — 2)

m. a) «Rohr»: paruṣānamūnparuṣāhvaḥ kṛṇotu. kṣipraṁ śara iva

bhajyantām «er mache sie zu Rohren» d. h. «zerbrechlich wie diese» AV.

8, 8, 4. — b) «Pfeil»: upotaparuṣā adhijyadhanvanaḥ ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 22,

20. LĀṬY. 8, 5, 7. — c) = parūṣa; s. u. 5,b. — 3) f. paruṣā Bez. «einer Art

Räthsel» Verz. d. Oxf. H. 204,a,28. — 4) f. paruṣṇī a) N. pr. eines Flusses

des Pendshab, welcher später Irāvatī, heut zu Tage Ravi heisst («die

Knotige», d. h. «an Ausbuchtungen» oder «Krümmungen Reiche», NIR. 9,

26 oder «die Rohrige, arundinosa») ṚV. 7, 18, 8. 9. satyamittvā mahenadi

paruṣṇyava dediśam 8, 63, 15. 10, 75, 5. Vgl. paroṣṇī. — b) viell. «Wolke

(die Knotige, Geballte» oder «die Bunte)»: uta sma te (marutaḥ)

paruṣṇyāmūrṇā vasata śundhyuvaḥ ṚV. 5, 52, 9. (indraḥ) śriye

paruṣṇīmuṣamāṇa ūrṇāṁ yasyāḥ parvāṇi sakhyāya vivye 4, 22, 2. — 5) n.

a) «eine blaublühende Barleria» ŚABDAC. im ŚKDR. — b) = parūṣa n.

BHĀVAPR. im ŚKDR. Nach ŚABDAC. und ŚABDAM. bei WILSON als m.

auch N. des Baumes selbst. — Vgl. pāruṣya.

paruṣa 1) b) «schmutzig»: bhinnaiśca paruṣaiḥ (= karkaśaiḥ NĪLAK.)

pādaiḥ savraṇaiḥ śoṇitokṣitaiḥ MBH. 3, 16862.

paruṣa 2) b) lies -dhanvānaḥ.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

paruṣa A Rākṣasa (demon). He was one among the twelve demons who

supported Khara when the latter fought against Śrī Rāma. (Sarga 26,

Araṇya Kāṇḍa, Vālmīki Rāmāyaṇa).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

paruṣa paruṣa, i. e. parus + a, adj., f. ṣā.

1. Knotty, huge, Vikr. d. 142.

2. Variegated, spotted.

3. Soiled, Rām. 2, 71, 34.

4. Rough, rugged, Rājat. 4, 308.

5. Harsh, MBh. 1, 7090.

6. Severe, Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 1314.

7. Coarse, Yājñ. 1, 309.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

paruṣa (f. old paruṣṇī) knotty (reed), bristly, shaggy (hair); spotted,

many-coloured, dirty; piercing, keen, rough, harsh. —m. reed, arrow; f.

paruṣṇī cloud, N. of a river; n. sgl. & pl. harsh language.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

paruṣa par-uṣ-a, a. (ā, V. paruṣṇī) knotty (reed); spotted, variegated;

dirty; rough, rugged; spotted, variegated; dirty; rough rugged; diṣevelled,

shaggy; rough (wind), scorching (fire, sun); harsh (tone); severe, hard,

rude, abusive (speech, person); n. sg., pl. contumelious speech, abuse:

-vacana, n. harsh or contumelious speech; a. speaking harshly or rudely;

-vādin, a. id.;

-akṣara, a. rough, harsh (of speeches or persons): -m, ad. rudely,

harshly.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

paruṣa na° pṝ—uṣan . 1 niṣṭhuravacane 2 nīsījhiṇṭyām amaraḥ 3

phalabhede parūṣake māvapra° .

मणिः — maṇiḥ Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :1890

maṇiḥ [maṇ-in strītvapakṣe vā ṅīp] (Said to be f. also, but rarely used)

(1) A jewel, gem, precious stone; maṇirluṭhati padiṣu kācaḥ śirasi

dhāryate . yathaivāste tathaivāstāṁ kācaḥ kāco maṇirmaṇiḥ H. 2. 68;

alabdhaśāṇotkaṣaṇā nṛpāṇāṁ na jātu maulau maṇayo vasaṁti Bv. 1. 73;

maṇau vajrasamutkīrṇe sūtrasyevāsti me gatiḥ R. 1. 4; 3. 18.

(2) An ornament in general.

(3) Anything best of its kind; cf. ratna.

(4) A magnet, loadstone.

(5) The wrist.

(6) A water-pot.

(7) Clitoris.

(8) Glans penis.

(9) A crystal. (10) The fleshy excrescence on the neck of a goat (also

written maṇī in these senses).

— Comp.

—iṁdraḥ, —rājaḥ a diamond.

—kaṁṭhaḥ the blue jay.

—kaṁṭhakaḥ a cock.

—karṇikā, —karṇī N. of a sacred pool in Benares.

—kācaḥ the feathered part of an arrow.

—kānanaṁ the neck.

—kāraḥ a lapidary, jeweller.

—tārakaḥ the crane or Sārasa bird.

—daṁḍa a. having a handle adorncd with jewels.

—darpaṇaḥ a jewelled mirror.

—dīpaḥ 1. a lamp having jewels. —2. a jewel serving as a lamp.

—doṣaḥ a flaw or defect in a jewel.

—dvīpaḥ 1. the hood of the serpent Ananta. —2. N. of a fabulous

island in the ocean of nectar.

—dhanuḥ m.,

—dhanus n. a rainbow.

—pālī a female keeper of jewels.

—puṣpakaḥ N. of the ocean shell of Sahadeva; Bg. 1. 16.

—pūraḥ 1. the navel. —2. a kind of bodice richly adorned with

jeweles. (

—raṁ) 1. N. of a town in Kalinga. —2. the pit of the stomach, or a

mystical circle on the navel (also maṇipūraka). —patiḥ. an epithet of

Babhruvāhana.

—pravekaḥ a most excellent jewel.

—baṁdhaḥ 1. the wrist; S. 7. —2. the fastening of jewels; R. 12.

102.

—baṁdhanaṁ 1. fastening on of jewels, a string or ornament of

pearls. —2. that part of a ring or bracelet where the jewels are set, collet;

S. 6. —3. the wrist; S. 3. 13.

—bījaḥ, —vījaḥ the pomegranate tree.

—bhittiḥ f. N. of the palace of Śeṣa.

—bhūḥ f. a floor set with jewels.

—bhūmiḥ f. 1. a mine of jewels. —2. a jewelled floor, floor inlaid

with jewels.

—maṁḍapaḥ N. of the residence of Śeṣa.

—maṁthaṁ rock-salt.

—mālā 1. a string or necklace of jewels. —2. lustre, splendour,

beauty. —3. a circular impression left by a bite (in amorous sports). —4.

N. of Lakṣmī. —5. N. of a metre.

—mekhala a. girdled with gems.

—yaṣṭiḥ m. f. a jewelled stick, a string of jewels.

—ratnaṁ a jewel, gem.

—rāgaḥ the colour of jewels (

—gaṁ) vermilion.

—viśeṣaḥ an excellent jewel.

—śilā a jewelled slab.

—saraḥ a necklace.

—sūtraṁ a string of pearls.

—sopānaṁ a jewelled staircase.

—staṁbhaḥ a pillar inlaid with jewels.

—harmyaṁ a jewelled or crystal palace.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

maṇiḥ puṁ, strī, (maṇa + sarvadhātubhya in . uṇā° 4 . 117 . itīn .)

aśmajātiḥ . (yathā, raghau . 1 . 4 .

maṇau vajrasamutkīrṇe sūtrasyevāsti me gatiḥ .) muktādikam .

tatparyāyaḥ . ratnam 2 maṇī 3 . ityamaraḥ . 2 . 9 . 93 . (tathācāsya

paryāyaḥ .

ratnaṁ klīve maṇiḥ puṁsi striyāmapi nigadyate .

tattu pāṣāṇabhedo’sti muktādi ca taducyate .. iti bhāvaprakāśasya

pūrbakhaṇḍe prathame bhāge .) asya guṇāḥ .

maṇiratnaṁ paraṁ śītaṁ kaṣāyaṁ svādu lekhanam .

cakṣuṣyaṁ dhāraṇāttacca pāpālakṣmīvināśanam .. iti rājaballabhaḥ ..

(tathācāsya guṇāḥ .

muktāvidrumavajrendravaidūryasphaṭikādayaḥ .

cakṣuṣyā maṇayaḥ śītā lekhanā viṣasūdanāḥ .

pavitrā dhāraṇāyāśca pāpmālakṣmīmalāpahāḥ .. iti suśrute

sūtrasthāne 46 adhyāye .) ajāyāḥ kaṇṭhasthitastanaḥ . liṅgāgram .

aliñjaraḥ . iti medinī . 24 .. yonyagrabhāgaḥ . iti śabdaratnāvalī ..

nāgaviśeṣaḥ . iti jaṭādharaḥ .. maṇibandhaḥ . iti hemacandraḥ ..

(munibhedaḥ . yathā, mahābhārate . 2 . 11 . 22 .

asito devalaścaiva jaigiṣavyaśca tattvavit .

ṛṣabho jitaśatruśca mahāvīryastathā maṇiḥ ..)

मणिक — maṇika Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899maṇika m. a jewel, gem, precious stone

maṇika m. (ifc. f: «ā») a water-jar or pitcher

maṇika pl. (accord. to globular formations of flesh on an animal’s

shoulder

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

maṇika (von maṇi) m. gaṇa sthūlādi zu P. 5, 4, 3. gaṇa yāvādi zu 29.

gaṇa caturvarṇādi zu 5, 1, 124, Vārtt. 1. 1) «ein grosser Wassertopf» AK.

2, 9, 31 (n.). H. 1022. HALĀY. 2, 162. ĀŚV. GṚHY. 2, 9, 3. 4, 6, 4.

dvāvudakumbhau maṇika āsiñcet GOBH. 3, 9, 6. 7. 1, 1, 26. ŚĀÑKH.

GṚHY. 2, 14. PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 9. avaṭe minoti maṇikam 5. ADBH. BR. bei

WEBER, Omina 316. vivṛddhamūṣikā raghyā vibhinnamaṇikāstathā MBH.

16, 37. Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 728, 2. — 2) nach SĀY. «kugelförmige

Fleischbildungen an der Schulter des Thieres»: skandhyā maṇikāstisraśca

kīkasāḥ AIT. BR. 7, 1. Vielleicht «das muldenförmig ausgehöhlte

Schulterbein.» — Vgl. māṇikya.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

maṇika maṇi + ka,

I. m. A precious stone, a jewel.

II. n. A small waterpot, Pārask. in Journ. of the German Oriental Society,

ix. xxi. n. 4.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

maṇika m. a large water-jar.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

maṇika maṇi-ka, m. large water-pot: pl. fleshy excrescences on the

shoulder of an animal: -karṇikā, f. earring of pearls or gems; N. of a

sacred pool near Benares; N.;

-kā-ra, m. jeweller;

-daṇḍa, a. having a handle adorned with jewels;

-datta, m. N. of a merchant;

-dara, m. N. of a chief of the Yakṣas;

-darpaṇa, m. jewelled mirror;

-dīpa, m. jewel-lamp (in which gems supply the place of the burning

wick): -ka, m. id.;

-dhanu, m., -dhanus, n. rainbow;

-puṣpa-ka, m. (gem-flowered), N. of the conch of Sahadeva;

-puṣpa+īśvara, m. N. of an attendant of Śiva;

-pūra, n. N. of a town in Kaliṅga situated on the sea-coast (also —

pura);

-pra-dīpa, m. jewel-lamp (= dīpa);

-bandha, m. fastening or putting on of jewels; (place where jewels

are fastened), wrist;

-bandh-ana, n. string or ornament of pearls; wrist;

-bhadra, m. N. of a brother of Kubera and prince of the Yakṣas; N. of a

Śreṣṭhin;

-mañjarī, f. rows of pearls;

-maṇḍapa, m. hall of crystal, hall resting on crystal columns;

-mat, a. jewelled; m. N.;

-maya, a. (ī) consisting of jewels: -bhū, a. having floors —;

-mālā, f. string of jewels, necklace;

-yaṣṭi, f. id.;

-ratna, n. jewel: -maya, a. (ī) consisting of jewels, crystal;

-rāga, m. colour of a jewel;

-varman, m. N. of a merchant;

-śṛṅga, m. sun;

-śyāma, a. blue like a sapphire;

-sara, m. string of pearls, pearl necklace;

-sūtra, n. string of pearls;

-sopāna, n. jewelled or crystal staircase;

-stambha, m. jewelled or crystal pillar;

-sraj, f. wreath of jewels;

-harmya, n. crystal palace, N. of a palace.

मेचक — mecaka Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899mecaka mf («ā») n. dark-blue, black &c. (in alg. applied to the 15th

unknown quantity

mecaka m. dark-blue colour, blackness

mecaka m. the eye of a peacock’s tail

mecaka m. a kind of gem

mecaka m. smoke

mecaka m. a cloud

mecaka m. Moringa Pterygosperma

mecaka m. (also n.) a teat, nipple

mecaka n. darkness

mecaka n. sulphuret of antimony, L:

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

mecaka a. [cf. Uṇ. 5. 37] Black, dark-blue, dark-coloured kurvanna

janamecakā iva diśo meghaḥ samuttiṣṭhate Mk. 5. 23; U. 6. 25; Me. 59.

—kaḥ

(1) Blackness, the dark blue-colour.

(2) An eye of a peacock’s tail; Māl. 6. 5.

(3) A cloud.

(4) Smoke.

(5) A nipple.

(6) A kind of gem. —kaṁ

(1) Darkness.

(2) Sulphuret of antimony.

— Comp.

—āpagā an epithet of the Yamunā.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

mecaka UṆĀDIS. 5, 37. 1) adj. f. ā «dunkelblau, dunkelfarbig»; m.

«dunkelblaue Farbe, Schwärze» AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 2, 9, 43. 3, 4, 14, 85. H.

1397. DURGA beim Schol. zu H. 1397. H. an. 3, 83. MED. k. 139. fg.

HALĀY. 4, 49. MBH. 12, 10410. SUŚR. 1, 274, 17. 2, 293, 3. MṚCCH. 84,

24. MEGH. 60. KĀM. NĪTIS. 7, 17. Spr. 4811. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 21, 15. 34,

3. 54, 107. UTTARARĀMAC. 111, 1. ŚIŚ. 6, 26. — 2) m. a) «das Auge im

Pfauenschweife» AK. 2, 5, 31. TRIK. 3, 3, 36. H. 1320. H. an. (lies —

candrake). MED. HALĀY. 2, 87. Hierher ziehen WILSON und BENFEY

MĀLAT. 90, 6, was aber wohl nicht richtig ist. — b) «Brustwarze» H. ś.

124. — c) «Rauch.» — d) «Wolke.» — e) «Moringa pterygosperma Gaertn.»

ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — f) «ein best. Edelstein» VYUTP. 138. — 3) n. a)

«Finsterniss» H. an. MED. — b) «Antimonium» MED.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

mecaka mechaka,

I. adj. Black, Utt. Rāmac. 149, 15; dark blue, Pañc. ed. orn. i. d. 63;

Megh. 60.

II. m.

1. Black, or dark blue (the colour).

2. The eye of a peacock’s tail.

3. A cloud.

4. Smoke.

III. m. and n. Darkness.

IV. n. Antimony.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

mecaka a. dark blue, black; m. an eye in a peacock’s tail.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

mecaka meca-ka, a. dark-blue, dark-coloured, sable, sombre; m. eye in a

peacock’s tail: i-ta, den. pp. having a dark-blue sheen.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

mecaka na° maca—vun pṛṣo° . 1 andhakāre 2 sroto’ñjane ca medi° 3

nīlāñjane rājani° . 4 mayūracandrake 5 kṛṣṇavarṇe medi° . 6 dhūme 7

meghe 8 śobhāñjane śabdara° 9 kṛṣṇavarṇayute tri° amaraḥ .

मेचकित — mecakita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899mecakita mfn. furnished with decorations which resemble the eyes of a

peacock’s tail

mfn. having a dark blue-colour

लोह — loha Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899loha mfn. (prob. fr. a «ruh» for a lost «rudh», «to be red»; cf. «rohi, rohiṇa»

&c.) red, reddish, copper-coloured

mfn. made of copper ()

mfn. made of iron

loha m. n. red metal, copper &c. &c.

loha m. (in later language) iron (either crude or wrought) or steel or gold

or any metal

loha m. a weapon

loha m. a fish-hook

loha m. blood

loha m. the red goat (cf. «lohāja»)

loha m. (prob.) a kind of bird

loha m. N. of a man g. «naḍādi»

loha m. (pl.) N. of a people

loha n. any object or vessel made of iron

loha n. aloe wood, Agallochum

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

loha a.

(1) Red, reddish.

(2) Made of copper, coppery.

(3) Made of iron. —haḥ, —haṁ

(1) Copper.

(2) Iron.

(3) Steel.

(4) Any metal.

(5) Gold.

(6) Blood.

(7) A weapon; Ms. 9. 321.

(8) A fish-hook. —haḥ The red goat. —haṁ Aloe-wood.

— Comp.

—ajaḥ the red goat.

—abhisāraḥ, —abhihāraḥ N. of a military ceremony resembling

nīrājana q. v.

—āmiṣaḥ the flesh of the red-haired goat.

—uttamaṁ gold.

—kāṁtaḥ a loadstone, magnet.

—kāraḥ a blacksmith.

—kiṭṭaṁ rust of iron.

—ghātakaḥ a blacksmith.

—cūrṇaṁ iron-filings, rust of iron.

—jaṁ 1. bell-metal. —2. iron-filings.

—jāṁlaṁ a coat of mail.

—jit m. a diamond.

—drāvin m. borax.

—nālaḥ an iron arrow.

—pṛṣṭhaḥ a heron.

—pratimā 1. an anvil. —2. an iron image.

—vaddha a. tipped or studded with iron.

—māraka a. calcining a metal.

—muktikā red pearl.

—rajas n. rust of iron.

—rājakaṁ silver.

—liṁgaṁ a boil filled with blood.

—varaṁ gold.

—varman n. iron-armour, mail.

—śaṁkuḥ an iron spike.

—śleṣaṇaḥ borax.

—saṁkaraṁ blue steel.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

loha 1) adj. «röthlich»: aja ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 13, 1. 15, 15, 2. chāgena

sarvalohenānantyam PAIṬHĪNASI. bei KULL. zu M. 3, 272. varāha MBH. 1,

5369 nach der Lesart der ed. Bomb. (lauha ed. Calc.). Vgl. lohita. — b)

«kupfern» (Comm.): kṣura ŚAT. BR. 2, 6, 4, 5. «eisern» KAUŚ. 25. — 2) m.

n. (n. AK. 3, 6, 3, 23) gaṇa ardharcādi zu P. 2, 4, 31. «röthliches Metall,

Kupfer» (nach den meisten Comm. der älteren Schriften); später «Eisen»

und «Metall» überh. (acht lohāni «Metalle» aufgezählt beim Schol. zu H.

1039) NAIGH. 1, 2. AK. 2, 9, 98. H. 1037. 1039. an. 2, 601. MED. h. 8.

HALĀY. 2, 16. 21. 5, 71. ŚAT. BR. 13, 2, 2, 18. śyāmaṁ ca me lohaṁ ca

me «dunkles und rothes Metall, Eisen und Kupfer» VS. 18, 13.

ayolohahiraṇyāni KAUŚ. 46. LĀṬY. 2, 8, 4. suvarṇa, rajata, trapu, sīsa,

loha CHĀND. UP. 4, 17, 7. 6, 1, 5 («Gold» nach ŚAṁK.). aśmano

lohamutthitam M. 9, 321 (= MBH. 5, 482. 12, 2010). 329. MBH. 14, 505.

Spr. 2771. 3952. BHĀG. P. 2, 6, 5. 24. 3, 28, 10. -parīkṣā Verz. d. Oxf. H.

86,a,15. lohopalohaśodhanamāraṇa Verz. d. B.H. 290, 20. No. 969. -kṣura

KĀTY. ŚR. 5, 2, 17. ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 28. PĀR. GṚHY. 2, 1. -kaṭaka Schol.

zu KĀTY. ŚR. 417, 20. -kīla 336, 6. 366, 16. -paṭṭikā 356, 6. 363, 7. KAUŚ.

16. -bhāṇḍa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 42, 11. -nāḍī SUŚR. 2, 325, 21. -khaṅga

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 269. -śṛṅkhala MĀRK. P. 125, 13. -pratimā AK.2,10,35.

SUŚR.1,35,13. fg. 96,12. 111,10. 228,3. RĀJA-TAR.4,298. BHĀG.

P.4,11,17. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 320,b,10 v. u. PAÑCAT. 99,25. 100,23. Spr.

1042. 4267. -gandhi SUŚR. 1, 103, 9. 2, 18, 12. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 8. 39.

ŚĀÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7, 71. «Eisen» so v. a. «ein aus Eisen gemachter

Gegenstand» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 28, 5. 41, 6. 50, 26 (= 54, 117).

tāmralohaiḥ parivṛtā nidhayo ye so v. a. «in kupfernen und eisernen

Behältern» MBH. 2, 2091. mīnastu sāmiṣaṁ lohamāsvādayati mṛtyave so

v. a. «eiserner Haken» Spr. 1221. — 3) m. a) «die röthliche Ziege» (vgl.

lohāja): khaḍgalohāmiṣam M. 3, 272. YĀJÑ. 1, 259. — b) wohl «ein best.

Vogel»: haṁsakukkuṭalohānāṁ śikṣeta caritaṁ nṛpaḥ MĀRK. P. 27, 17. —

c) pl. N. pr. eines Volkes MBH. 2, 1033. LIA. II, 135, N. 1. — d) N. pr.

eines Mannes gaṇa naḍādi zu P. 4, 1, 99. — 4) n. «Agallochum» AK. 2, 6,

3, 28. H. 640. H. an. MED. — Vgl. a-, kṛṣṇa- (auch VARĀH. BṚH. S. 41, 7),

tīkṣṇa-, tri-, nīla-, pīta-, mahā-, muṇḍa-, ravi-, sāra-.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

loha 1 I An Asura. When the Pāṇḍavas were living incognito they kept

their weapons in a secret place. Availing of this opportunity Loha made

an attack on the Pāṇḍavas. At once the devas made him blind and thus

helped the Pāṇḍavas. That place later became famous as Lohaṇapura.

(Skanda Purāṇa 1, 2, 65)

loha II An ancient place of India. Arjuna conquered this place during his

victory march. (Śloka 25, Chapter 27, Sabhā Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

loha loha, i. e. luh, instead of rudh (see rudhira), + a,

I. m. and n.

1. Iron, Man. 9, 321; Pañc. 100, 23 (cf. my transl.).

2. Steel.

3. Any metal, Hit. i. d. 92, M.M.

4. A weapon.

5. A fish-hook, Kām. Nītis. 1, 44.

6. Blood.

7. Aloe-wood.

II. m. An iron-coloured kid, Man. 3, 272.

— Comp. kṛṣṇa-, n. the loadstone, Suśr. 1, 142, 17. nīla-, n. blue steel,

Rām. 3, 53, 57. pañcaloha, i. e. pañcan-, n. a metallic alloy containing five

metals, copper, brass, tin, lead, and iron. mahā-, m. the loadstone. ravi-,

n. copper. sāra-, n. steel.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

loha a. reddish, of copper or iron. m. n. reddish metal, copper, also iron &

metal i.g.; n. an iron vessel.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

loha loh-a, a. [luh = 1. rudh] reddish (rare); made of copper (Br.1), —

iron (S.1 ); m. n. reddish metal, copper (V.); iron, metal (C.); m. red

goat; iron fish-hook; object or vessel made of iron;

-kāra, m. blacksmith;

-cūrṇa, n. iron rust;

-ja, a. made of iron;

-jaṅgha, m. N. of a Brāhman;

-jāla, n. iron net, coat of mail;

-daṇḍa, m. rod of iron;

-nagara, m. N. of a town;

-pāśa, m. iron chain;

-maya, a. made of copper or iron.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

loha puṁna° lū—vic laustaṁ jahāti hā—ka . 1 dhātubhede amaraḥ . 2

dhātumātre medi° 3 rudhire rājani° 4 agurucandane na° amaraḥ .

dhātubhedasvarūpādi bhāvapra° uktaṁ yathā atha

lohasyotpattināmalakṣaṇaguṇāḥ purā lomiladaityānāṁ nihatānāṁ

sureryudhi . utpannāni śarīrebhyo lohāni vividhāni ca . loho’strī śastrakaṁ

tīkṣṇaṁ piṇḍaṁ kālāyasāyasī . gurutādṛḍhatotkledakaphadāhasya kāritā .

aśmadoṣaḥ sudugandho doṣāḥ saptāyasasya tu . lohaṁ tiktarasaṁ śītaṁ

madhuraṁ tuvaraṁ guru . rukṣaṁ vayasyaṁ cakṣuṣyaṁ lekhanaṁ

vātalaṁ jayet . kaphaṁ pittaṁ paraṁ śūlaṁ śothārśaḥplīhapāṇḍutāḥ .

medomehakṛmīn kuṣṭhaṁ tatkiṭṭaṁ tadvadeva hi .

pāṇḍutvakuṣṭhāmayamṛtyudaṁ bha hṛdrogaśūlau kurute’śmarīñca .

nānārujāñcāpi tathā prakopaṁ karoti hṛllāsamaśuddhaloham . jīpahāri

madakāri cāyarsa cedaśuddhimadasaṁskṛtaṁ dhruvam . pāṭavaṁ na

tanute śarīrake dāruṇāṁ hṛdi rujāñca yacchati . kudmāṇḍaṁ tilatailañca

māṣānnaṁ rājikāṁ tathā . madyamamlarasañcāpi tyajellohasya sevakaḥ .

tatra sāralohasya lakṣaṇaṁ guṇāśca

kṣamāmṛcchikharākārāṇyaṅgānyamlena lepayet . lohe syuryatra sūkṣmāṇi

tatsāramabhidhīyate . lohasāro hyayaṁ hanyādgrahaṇīmatisārakam .

ardhasarvāṅgajaṁ vātaṁ śūlañca pariṇāmajam . chardiñca pīnasaṁ

pittaṁ śvāsaṁ kāsaṁ vyapohati . atha kāntalohasya lakṣaṇaṁ guṇāśca .

yat pātreṇa prasarati jale tailavinduḥ pratapte hiṅgurgandhaṁ tyajati ca

nijaṁ tiktatāṁ nimbavalkaḥ . taptaṁ dugdhaṁ bhavati śikharākārakaṁ

naiti bhūmiṁ kṛṣṇāṅgaḥ syāt sajalacaṇakaḥ kāntalohaṁ taduktam .

gulmodarārśaḥśūlāmamāmavātaṁ bhagandaram . kāmalāśothakuṣṭhāni

kṣayaṁ kāntamayo haret . plohānamamlapittañca yakṛccāpi śirorujam .

sarvān rogān vijayate kāntalohaṁ na saṁśayaḥ . talaṁ vīryaṁ

vapaḥpaṣṭiṁ kurute’gniṁ vivardhayet . atha kidamya dhmāyamānasya

lohasya malaṁ maṇḍūramucyate . lohasiṁhānikā kiṭṭaṁ siṁhānañca

nigadyate . yallohaṁ yadguṇaṁ proktaṁ tatkiṭṭa mapi tadguṇam . atha

lohasya doṣaśāntaye śodhanamabhidhīyate pattalīkṛtapatrāṇi

lohasyāgnau pratāpayet . niṣiñcet taptataptāni taile takre ca kāñjike .

gomūtre ca kulatthānāṁ kaṣāye ca tridhātridhā . evaṁ lohasya patrāṇāṁ

viśuddhiḥ saṁprajāyate . atha lohasya māraṇavidhiḥ śuddhalohabhavaṁ

cūrṇaṁ pātālagaruḍīrasaiḥ . mardayitvā puṭedvahnau dadyādevaṁ

puṭadvayam . puṭatrayaṁ kumāryāśca kuṭhāracchillikārasaiḥ .

puṭaṣaṭkaṁ tato dadyādevaṁ tīkṣṇā mṛtirbhavet . anyacca .

kṣipeddvādaśarmāśena daradaṁ tīkṣṇacūrṇataḥ . mardayet

kanyakādrāvairyāmayugmaṁ tataḥ puṭet . evaṁ saptapuṭairmṛtyuṁ

lohacūrṇamavāpnuyāt . satyā’nubhūto yogīndraiḥ kramo’nyo lohamāruṇe .

kathyate rāmarājena kautūhaladhiyā’dhunā . sūtakaddviguṇa gandhaṁ

dattvā kuryācca kajjalīm . dvayoḥ sarma lohacūrṇaṁ mardayet

kanyakādravaiḥ . yāmayugmaṁ tataḥ piṇḍaṁ kṛtvā tāmrasya pātrake .

gharme dhṛtvā rūcakasya patrairācchādavedvudhaḥ .

yāmadvayādbhaveduṣṇaṁ dhānyarāśo nyasettataḥ . dattvopari śarāvañca

tridinānte samuddharet . piṣṭvā ca gālayedvastrādevaṁ vāritaraṁ bhavet

. dāḍimasya dalaṁ piṣṭvā taccaturguṇavāriṇā . tadrasenāyasaścūrṇaṁ

sannīyāt plāvayedapi . ātape śodhayettacca puṭedevaṁ punaḥ punaḥ .

ekaviśativāraistanmriyate nātra saṁśayaḥ . eva sarvāṇi lohāni

svarṇādīnyapi mārayet . evaṁ māritalohasya guṇāḥ lohaṁ tiktaṁ saraṁ

śītaṁ kaṣāyaṁ madhuraṁ guru . rūkṣaṁ vayasyaṁ cakṣuṣyaṁ lekhanaṁ

vātalaṁ jayet . kaphaṁ pittaṁ garaṁ śūlaṁ śophārśaḥplīhapāṇḍutāḥ .

medomehakramīn kuṣṭhaṁ tatkiṭṭaṁ tadvadeva hi . guñjāmekāṁ

samārabhya yāvat syurnava rattikāḥ . tāvallohaṁ

samaśnīyādyathādoṣānalaṁ paraḥ . kuṣmāṇḍaṁ tilatailañca māṣānnaṁ

rājikāntathā . madyamamlarasañcava varjayellohasevakaḥ bhāvapra° .

yadā tu āyase pātre pakvamaśnāti vai dvijaḥ . sa pāpiṣṭho’pi

bhuṅkte’nnaṁ raurave paripacyate matsyapu° . ayaḥpātre payaḥpānaṁ

gavyaṁ siddhānnameva ca . bhṛṣṭādikaṁ madhu guḍaṁ nārikelodakaṁ

tathā . phalaṁ mūlañca yat kiñcidabhakṣya manurabravīt brahmavai° .

लोहित — lohita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899lohita mf («ā» or «lohinī») n. (cf. «rohita») red, red-coloured, reddish &c.

&c.

mf («ā» or «lohinī») n. made of copper, copper, metal

lohita m. red (the colour), redness

lohita m. a partic. disease of the eyelids, SarṅgS.

lohita m. a kind of precious stone

lohita m. a species of rice

lohita m. a sort of bean or lentil

lohita m. Dioscorea Purpurea

lohita m. Cyprinus Rohita

lohita m. a sort of deer

lohita m. a snake, serpent

lohita m. the planet Mars

lohita m. N. of a serpent-demon

lohita m. of a man (pl. his descendants) (cf.

lohita m. of a country

lohita m. of a river (the Brahma-putra)

lohita m. of a sea

lohita m. of a lake

lohita m. (pl.) of a class of gods under the 12th Manu

lohita mf («ā» or «lohinī») n. («ā») f. N. of one of the 7 tongues of Agni

lohita m. Mimosa Pudica

lohita m. a Punar-navā with red flowers

lohita mf («ā» or «lohinī») n. («lohinī») f. a woman with a red-coloured

skin or red with anger

lohita n. any red substance

lohita n. (also m. g. «ardharcādi»; ifc. f. «ā»), blood &c. &c. («-taṁ» «kṛ»,

to shed blood)

lohita n. ruby

lohita n. red sanders

lohita n. a kind of sandal-wood

lohita n. a kind of Agallochum

lohita n. an imperfect form of rainbow

lohita n. a battle, fight

lohita Nom. P. «-tati», to be or become red

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

lohita a. (lohitā or lohinī f.) [ruh-itac rasya laḥ Tv.]

(1) Red, redcoloured; srastāṁsāvatimātralohitatalau bāhū

ghaṭotkṣepaṇāt S. 1. 30; Ku. 3. 29;

muhuścalatpallavalohinībhiruccaiḥśikhābhiḥ śikhinovalīḍhāḥ Ki. 16. 53.

(2) Copper, made of copper. —taḥ

(1) The red colour.

(2) The planet Mars.

(3) A serpent.

(4) A kind of deer.

(5) N. of the river Brahmaputra.

(6) A kind of rice. —tā N. of one of the seven tongues of fire. —taṁ

(1) Copper.

(2) Blood; Ms. 8. 284.

(3) Saffron.

(4) Battle.

(5) Red sanders.

(6) A kind of sandal.

(7) An imperfect form of a rainbow.

(8) A kind of agallochum.

— Comp.

—akṣaḥ 1. a red die. —2. a kind of snake. —3. the (Indian) cuckoo.

—4. an epithet of Viṣṇu. (

—kṣaṁ) 1. the armpit, thigh-joint; hip.

—aṁgaḥ 1. the kāṁpilla tree. —2. the planet Mars.

—ayas n. copper.

—arman n. a red swelling in the whites of the eyes.

—aśokaḥ a variety of Asoka (having red flowers).

—aśvaḥ fire.

—ānanaḥ an ichneumon.

—ārdra a. dripping with blood.

—īkṣaṇa a. redeyed.

—uda a. having red or bloodred water.

—kalmāṣa a. red-spotted.

—kṛṣṇa a. dark-red.

—kṣayaḥ loss of blood.

—grīvaḥ an epithet of Agni.

—caṁdanaṁ saffron.

—puṣpakaḥ the granate tree.

—mṛttikā red chalk.

—śatapatraṁ a red lotus-flower.

—śavala a. dappled with red.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

lohita (= älterem rohita) UṆĀDIS. 3, 94. 1) adj. f. lohitā (SUŚR. 1, 135, 1)

und lohinī VOP. 4, 27. a) «röthlich, roth» AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. TRIK. 3, 3, 180.

H. 1395. an. 3, 290. fg. (wo wohl varṇabhede st. balabhede zu lesen ist,

welches WILSON durch «a form of array» wiedergiebt). MED. t. 148.

HALĀY. 4, 48. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. AV. 6, 127, 1. 14, 2, 48. 15, 1, 7. 8.

niryāsa TS. 2, 5, 1, 4. lohinī AV. 7, 74, 1. 10, 2, 11. tvac 13, 3, 21. tanū

54. mṛttikā AIT. BR. 3, 34. ŚAT. BR. 3, 5, 4, 23. 14, 5, 2, 3. KIR. 16, 53. —

ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 1, 2. 5, 4, 1. 6, 6, 2, 11. -piṇḍa 14, 6, 11, 3. -rasa 13, 4, 4,

10. -sūtra KAUŚ. 85. aja 19. 35. 39. aśvattha 48. lohitoṣṇīṣa ĀŚV. ŚR. 9,

7, 4. GṚHY. 2, 9, 7. roman ŚĀÑKH. GṚHY. 1, 24. -pāṁsu GOBH. 4, 2, 7.

ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. M. 5, 6. ghanāḥ MBH. 3, 14269. lohitāditya R. 3, 49, 4.

HARIV. 12794. bhūmi SUŚR. 1, 135, 1. lākṣā ṚT. 1, 5. VARĀH. BṚH. S.

21, 15. 65, 2. Ind. St. 8, 273. karman BHĀG. P.4,29,27.5,19,19. Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 175,b, No. 398. bhāskaraḥ sarvalohitaḥ R. 4, 60, 17. ati-

KUMĀRAS. 3, 29. ŚĀK. 119. atimātra- 29. mṛdu- MAITRJUP. 6, 30. — b)

«kupfern, metallen»: pātra KAUŚ. 29. svadhiti AV. 6, 141, 2. GOBH. 3, 6,

6. — 2) m. a) «eine best. Krankheit der Augenlider» ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 7,

87. — b) «ein best. Edelstein» (nicht «Rubin») Spr. 2693. — c) «eine

Reisart» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. SUŚR. 1, 228, 10. — d) «Linsen» ŚABDAC. im

ŚKDR. — e) «Dioscorea purpurea» RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — f) «ein best. Fisch,

Cyprinus Rohita Ham.» — g) «eine best. Hirschart» TRIK. ŚABDAR. im

ŚKDR. — h) «Schlange» DHAR. im ŚKDR. — i) «der Planet Mars» H. an.

MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 6, 8. Ind. St. 2, 261. — k) N. pr. a)

eines Nāga MBH. 2, 360. — b) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern unter dem

12ten Manu VP. 268. = surāntara DHAR. im ŚKDR. — g) eines Mannes P.

4, 1, 18. -smṛti MAŚK. Coll. I, 19. pl. «seine Nachkommen» PRAVARĀDHY.

in Verz. d. B. H. 57, 11. HARIV. 1465 (st. lohitā yāmadūtāśca liest die

neuere Ausg. lohitāyanapūtāśca, 1771 lesen beide Ausgg. lauhityāḥ). —

d) «eines Flusses» (der Brahmaputra) H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. MBH.

13, 7647. — e) eines Meeres: lohitasyodadheḥ kanyā krūrā lohitabhojanā

MBH. 3, 14366. 14494. raktajalaṁ ghoraṁ lohitaṁ nāma sāgaram. gatvā

R. 4, 40, 39; vgl. lohitodo varuṇālayaḥ MBH. 3, 14269. — z) eines Sees:

lohite (lohito die neuere Ausg.) hrade HARIV. 9791; vgl. 9145 und LIA. I,

155, N. — h) eines Landes MBH. 2, 1025. — 3) f. lohitā a) Bez. einer der

sieben Zungen des Agni GṚHYASAṁGR. 1, 14. — b) Bez. zweier Pflanzen:

= varāhakrāntā und raktapunarnavā RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) f. lohinī «eine

Frau von röthlicher Hautfarbe» HALĀY. 4, 53. JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. — 5) n.

a) «Kupfer, Metall» AV. 11, 3, 7. — b) «Blut» (auch m. nach gaṇa

ardharcādi zu P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 251,a,2 v. u.). AK.2,6,2,15. H. 621. H.

an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. AV.9,7,17. 10,9,18. 11,5,25. VS. 39,9. 10.

TS.2,1,7,2.4,1,1. yo lohitaṁ karavat «wer Blut vergiesst» 6, 10, 2. TBR. 3,

2, 9, 2. AIT. BR. 2, 14. lohitaṁ duhīta ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 2, 1. 14, 6, 2, 13.

KAUŚ. 11. 13. 36. CHĀND. UP. 6, 5, 2. M. 4, 56. 8, 284. MBH. 3, 14366. R.

4, 44, 65. 5, 14, 18. SUŚR. 1, 121, 13. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 59. 67. VET. in LA.

(III) 4, 7. salohitā diśaścāsan so v. a. «blutroth gefärbt» MBH. 3, 11399. —

c) «Schlacht» H. an. — d) «Safran; rother Sandel»; = gośīrṣa («eine Art

Sandelholz») H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. = pattaṅga, haricandana und

tṛṇakuṅkuma RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — e) «eine best. unvollkommene Form

eines Regenbogens» TRIK. — Vgl. a-, ā- (auch ṚT. 1, 21), kṛṣṇa-,

dhūmra-, nīla- (adj. auch R. 2, 96, 30), bṛhallohita, vi-, su-, lohitya,

lauhitya.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

lohita 1 (rohita) I (ROHITA) Son of Hariścandra. (For details see under

HARIŚCANDRA).

lohita 2 II A king of ancient India. This king was conquered by Arjuna.

(Śloka 17, Chapter 27, Vana Parva).

lohita 3 III A serpent. This serpent is a member of the court of Varuṇa.

(Śloka 8, Chapter 9, Sabhā Parva).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

lohita lohita (= lohita, q. cf.),

I. adj., f. tā, or inī, Red, Śāk. d. 29.

II. m.

1. Red, the colour.

2. The planet Mars.

3. A sort of deer.

4. A snake.

5. A form of array.

6. A sort of fish, Cyprinus rohita.

7. (m. ?). A kind of mineral, Pañc. i. d. 89.

III. n.

1. Blood, Man. 4, 56.

2. War, battle.

3. Red sanders.

4. Saffron.

— Comp. dhūmra-, adj. of a grey-red colour, MBh. 13, 753. nīla-,

I. adj. blue-red, purple, of a purple colour, Śāk. d. 194.

II. m. the name of one of the great periods called Kalpas.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

lohita (f. -tā & lohinī) reddish, red, coppery, metallic. — m. a cert.

precious stone, (*a kind of fish*). N. of a serpent-demon etc.; n. copper,

metal i.g., blood, *saffron.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

lohita loh-ita [later form of rohita], a. (C. ā; V., C. inī) reddish, red; made

of copper or metal (V., rare); m. a kind of gem (not ruby; very rare);

planet Mars; n. red substance (V., rare); copper, metal (AV.1); blood

(ord. mg.): -ṁ kṛ, shed blood (V.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

lohita na° ruha itac rasya laḥ . 1 kuṅkume 2 raktacandana 3

raktagośīrṣakabhede medi° . 4 pattaṅge 5 haricandane śabdaca° . 6

tṛṇakuṅkume 7 rudhire ca rājani° 8 yuddhe hemaca° . 9 nadabhede 10

mardane 11 raktavarṇe ca pu° medi° . 12 raktatāyuta tri° . 13 mṛgabhede

14 rohitamatsye 15 sarpe 16 devabhede bharataḥ . 17 masūre śabdaca°

18 raktālau 19 raktaśālau rājani° . 20 vanabhede 21 sarovarabhede

brahmaputraśabde dṛśyam . sarvatra jātau striyāṁ ṅīṣ . varṇe tu strītve

ṅīp tasya naḥ . lohinī lāhitavarṇayutastriyām . ruha—inan rasya laḥ .

rohaṇakartari striyāṁ ṭāp .

वैदूर्य — vaidūrya Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899vaidūrya mf («ī» or «rī») n. (fr. «vi-dūra») brought from Vidūra

vaidūrya w.r. for «vaiḍūrya».

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

vaidūrya a. (rī or ryī f.) Brought from, or produced in, Vidūra. —ryaṁ

[vidūre girau bhavaṁ ṣyañ] Lapis lazuli; Ku. 7. 10; Śi. 3. 45.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

vaidūrya und die damit zusammengesetzten und davon abgeleiteten

Wörter s. u. vaiḍūrya.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

vaidūrya vaidūrya, i. e. vidūra + ya,

I. adj. Brought from Vidūra.

II. n. A gem of a dark-blue colour, the lapis lazuli, Bhāg. P. 4, 25, 15;

Rām. 3, 49, 2; 53, 15.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

vaidūrya -> vaiḍūrya.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

vaidūrya na° vidūre girau bhavaḥ ṣyañ . kṛṣṇapītavarṇe viḍālanetratulya

varṇe maṇibhede keturatne (lasuniyā) rājani° .

muktāvidrumavajrendravaidūryasphaṭikādikam . maṇiratnaṁ saraṁ śītaṁ

kaṣāyaṁ svādu lekhanam . cākṣuṣyaṁ dhāraṇāttacca

pāpālakṣmīvināśanam rājavallabhaḥ . tacchāyālakṣaṇaṁ yathā ekaṁ

veṇupalāśakomalarucā māyūrakaṇṭhatviṣā

mārjārekṣaṇapiṅgalacchavijuṣā jñeyaṁ tridhā cchāyayā . yadgātraṁ

gurutāṁ dadhāti nitarāṁ snigdhantu doṣojvitaṁ vaiduryaṁ viśadaṁ

vadanti sudhiyaḥ svacchañca tacchobhanam . tasya kulakṣaṇaṁ yathā

vicchāyaṁ mṛcchilāgarbhaṁ laghu rūkṣañca sakṣatam . satrāsaṁ

paruṣaṁ kṛṣṇaṁ vaidūryaṁ dūrato nayet . tatparīkṣā yathā . ghṛṣṭaṁ

yadātmanā svacchaṁ svacchāyāṁ nikaṣāśmani . sphuṭaṁ

pradarśayedetadviadūryaṁ jātyamucyate . rājani° vaidūryapuṣparāgāṇāṁ

karketabhīṣmake vade . parīkṣāṁ brahmaṇā proktāṁ vyāsena kathitāṁ

dvija! . kalpāntakālakṣubhitāmburāśinirhrādakalpādditikṣasya nādāt .

vaidūryamutpannamanekavarṇaṁ śobhābhirāmaṁ dyūtivarṇavījam .

avidūre vidūrasya gireruttaṅgarodhasaḥ . kāmabhūtikasīmānamanu

tasyākaro’bhavat . tasya nādasamutthatvādākaraḥ sumahāguṇaḥ .

abhūduttarito loke lokatrayavibhūṣaṇaḥ . tasyaiva

dānavapaterninadānurūpaprāvṛṭpayodaravadarśitacārurūpāḥ .

vaidūryaratnamaṇayo vividhāvabhāsāstasmāt sphuliṅganivahā iva

saṁbabhūvuḥ . padmarāgamupādāya maṇivarṇā hi ye kṣitau . sarvāṁstān

varṇaḥ śobhābhirvaidūryamanugacchati . teṣāṁ pradhānaṁ

śikhikaṇṭhanīlaṁ yadvā bhavedveṇudalaprakāśam .

cāṣāgrapakṣapratimaśriyo ye na te praśastā maṇiśāstravidbhiḥ . guṇavān

vaidūryamaṇiryojayati svāminaṁ varabhāgyai . doṣairyuktodoṣaistasmād

yatnātparīkṣeta . girikācaśiśupālau kācasphaṭikāśca bhūminirbhinnāḥ .

vaidūryamaṇerete vijātayaḥ sannibhāḥ santi . likṣābhāvāt kācaṁ

laghubhāvācchaiśupālakaṁ vidyāt . girikācamadīptitvāt sphaṭikaṁ

varṇojjvalatvena . yadindranīlasya mahāguṇasya

suvarṇasaṁkhyākalitasya mūlyam . tadeva vaidūryamaṇeḥ pradiṣṭaṁ

paladvayonmāpitaṁ gauravasya . jātyasya sarve’pi maṇestu yādṛk

vijātayaḥ santi samānavarṇāḥ . tathāpi nānākaraṇānumeyabhedaprakāraḥ

paramaḥ pradiṣṭaḥ . sukhopalakṣyaśca sadā vicāryo hyayaṁ prabhedo

viduṣā navena . snehaprabhedo laghutā mṛdutvaṁ vijātiliṅgaṁ khalu

sārvajanyam . kuśalākuśalaiḥ prayujyamānāḥ prativaddhāḥ pratisatkriyā

prayogaiḥ . guṇadoṣasamudbhavaṁ labhante

maṇayo’rthāntaramūlyameva minnāḥ . kramaśaḥ samatītavartamānāḥ

prativaddhā maṇibandhakena yasmāt . yadi nāma bhavanti dāṣahīnā

maṇayaḥ ṣaḍguṇamāpnuvanti mūlyam . ākarān

samatītānāmudadhestīrasannidhau . mūlyametat khanīnāntu na sarvatra

mahītale . suvarṇo manunā yastu proktaḥ ṣoḍaśamāṣakaḥ . tasya

saptatimobhāgaḥ saṁjñārūpaṁ kariṣyati . śāṇaścatumāṁṣamāno

māṣakaḥ pañcakṛṣṇalaḥ . palasya daśamobhāgo dharaṇaḥ parikīrtitaḥ . iti

mānavidhiḥ prokto ratnānāṁ mūlyaniścaye . gāruḍe 73 a° . sitañca

dhūmrasaṅkāśamīṣatkṛṣṇasitaṁ bhavet . vaidūrvyanāma tadratnaṁ

ratnavidbhirudāhṛtam . brahmakṣatriyaviṭśūdrajātibhedāścaturvidhāḥ .

sitanīlo bhavedvipaḥ sitaraktastu vāhujaḥ . pītanīlastu vaiśyaḥ syāt nīla

eva hi śūdūkaḥ . atha guṇāḥ mārjāranayanaprakhyaṁ rasonapratimaṁ hi

vā . kalilaṁ nirmalaṁ vyaṅgaṁ vaidūryaṁ devabhūṣaṇam . sutāraṁ

ghanamatyacchaṁ kalilaṁ vyaṅgameva ca . vaidūryāṇāṁ samākhyātā ete

pañca mahāguṇāḥ . udgiranniva dīptiṁ yo’sau sutāra itīryate .

pramāṇato’lpaṁ guru yad ghanamityabhidhīyate . kalaṅkādivihīnaṁ

tadatyacchamiti kīrtitam . brahmaśastrakalākāraścañcalo yatra dṛśyate .

kalilaṁ nāma tadrājñaḥ sarvasampattikārakam . viśliṣṭāṅgantu vaidūryaṁ

vyaṅgamityabhidhīyate . karkaraṁ karkaśaṁ trāsaḥ kalaṅkā deha ityapi .

ete pañca mahādoṣā vaidūryāṇāmudīritāḥ . śarkarāyuktamiva yat

pratibhāti ca karkaram . sparśe’pi yattajjñeya ca karkaśaṁ

bandhunāśanam . bhinnabhrāntikarastrāsaḥ sa kuryāt kulasaṁkṣayam .

biruddhavarṇo yasyāṅke kalaṅkaḥ kṣayakārakaḥ . maladigdha ivābhāti

deho dehavināśanaḥ . jayati yadi suvarṇatyāgahīno yadā vā

bahuvidhamaṇihārī bhūpati rvā yati rvā . dadhadapi dhṛtadoṣaṁ jātu

vaidūryaratnaṁ pratihataphalarūpaḥ pātameṣyatyavaśyam .

yuktikalpataruḥ .

शार — śāra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śāra mf («ā») n. (in most meanings also written «sāra»; of doubtful

derivation) variegated in colour, of different colours (as dark hair mixed

with grey), motley, spotted, speckled 2

mf («ā») n. yellow

śāra m. variegating or a variegated colour, (esp.) a mixture of blue and

yellow, green

śāra m. (also «śāraka») a kind of die or a piece used at chess or at

backgammon

śāra m. air, wind

śāra m. hurting, injuring (fr. «śṝ»)

śāra mf («ā») n. («ī») f. a chessman &c. (see m.)

śāra m. a kind of bird (= «śāri»)

śāra m. Kuśa grass

śāra n. a variegated colour

śāra Vṛiddhi form of «śara», in comp.

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śāra a. [śār-ac śṝ-ghañ vā]

(1) Variegated, speckled, mottled, spotted.

(2) Yellow. —raḥ

(1) A variegated colour.

(2) Green colour.

(3) Air, wind.

(4) A piece used at chess, a chessman; kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake

trīḍati praṇiśāraiḥ Bh. 3. 39.

(5) Injuring, hurting

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śāra P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2 (vgl. P. 6, 1, 159). m. f. (ī) TRIK. 3, 5, 19. 1) adj.

«bunt, scheckig» P. 3, 3, 21. Vārtt. 2. AK. 3, 4, 25, 168. H. an. 2, 461.

MED. r. 90. HALĀY. 4, 56. palita- DAŚAK. 60, 5. Vgl. kṛṣṇa- und sāra. —

2) m. a) «ein beim Würfelspiel gebrauchter Stein, — Figur» H. 487.H. an.

MED. kālaḥ kālyā bhuvanaphalake krīḍati prāṇiśāraiḥ Spr. 2294.

pramādadatta- DAŚAK. 70, 4. — b) «Wind» P. 3, 3, 21, Vārtt. 2. AK. H. an.

MED. — c) nom. act. von śar, = hiṁsana ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. —

3) f. ī a) = 2) a) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. (sārī). — b) Kuśa-«Gras»

ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śāra śāra,

I. adj.

1. Variegated (in colour), Daśak. in Chr. 180, 1 (of hair, mixed with

greyand white).

2. Yellow.

II. m.

1. Hurting (vb. śṛ10).

2. A mixture of blue and yellow, a green.

3. Variegating.

4. Air, wind (cf. sāra).

5. A piece or man at chess, backgammon, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 24 (cf.

sāra).

III. f. rī.

1. An arrow (vb. śṛ10, cf. śara), Chr. 297, 16 = Rigv. i. 112, 16.

2. Kuśa grass.

— Comp. kṛṣṇa-, adj. blue-black, Megh. 48, read -śāra (Sch.).

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śāra f. ā mottled, spotted; m. a stone or piece used at sev. games (also

f. ī).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śāra śāra, a. variegated, speckled, spotted; m. piece or figure used on a

draught-board: ī, f. id.; a bird.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

śāra t ka daurbalye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ . (adanta curā°-para°-aka°-seṭ

.) aśaśārat . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śāra daurvalye ada° cu° uma° saka° seṭ . śārayati—te aśaśārat ta .

śāra na° śāra—ac, śṛ—ghañ vā . 1 karvūravarṇe 2 tadvati tri° amaraḥ 3

vāyau pu° amaraḥ 4 akṣopakaraṇe medi° .

श्याम — śyāma Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śyāma mf («ā») n. (said to be connected with «śyai») black, dark-

coloured, dark blue or brown or grey or green, sable, having a dark or

swarthy complexion (considered a mark of beauty) &c. &c.

śyāma m. black or blue or green (the colour)

śyāma m. a cloud

śyāma m. the Kokila or Indian cuckoo

śyāma m. a black bull

śyāma m. N. of various plants (fragrant grass; thorn-apple; Artemisia

Indica; Careya Arborea &c.)

śyāma m. (in music) a partic. Rāga

śyāma m. N. of a son of śūra and brother of Vasudeva

śyāma m. of a modern prince

śyāma m. of a mountain

śyāma m. of a sacred fig-tree at Prayāga or Allahābād

śyāma pl. N. of a Vedic school (a subdivision of the Maitrāyaṇīyas)

śyāma n. black pepper

śyāma n. sea-salt

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śyāma a [śyai-maka] Black, dark-blue, dark-coloured; pratyākhyāta

viśeṣakaṁ kurabakaṁ śyāmāvadātāruṇaṁ M. 3. 5; śyāmaṁ

druyorbhāgayoḥ V. 2. 7; kuvalayadalaśyāmasnigdhaḥ U. 4. 19; Me. 15, 23.

(2) Brown.

(3) Shady, dusky.

(4) Dark-green. —naḥ

(1) The black colour.

(2) The green colour.

(3) A cloud.

(4) The cuckoo.

(5) N. of a sacred fig-tree at Allahabad on the bank of the Yamunā;

ayaṁ ca kāliṁdītaṭe vaṭaḥ śyāmo nāma U. 1; soyaṁ vaṭaḥ śyāma iti

pratītaḥ R. 13. 53.

(6) The thorn apple. —maṁ

(1) Sea-salt.

(2) Black pepper.

— Comp.

—aṁga a. dark. (

—gaḥ) the planet Mercury.

—kaṁṭhaḥ 1. an epithet of Śiva; (nīlakaṁṭha). —2. a peacock.

—karṇaḥ a horse suitable for a horse sacrifice.

—patraḥ the tamala tree.

—bhās, —ruci a. glossyblack.

—śabalau the two four-eyed watch-dogs of Yama; cf. Rv. 10. 14.

10.

—suṁdarā an epithet of Kṛṣṇa.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śyāma UṆĀDIS. 1, 144. 1) adj. (f. ā) «schwarz, schwarzgrau,

schwarzblau, schwarzgrün»; = kṛṣṇa, nīla u.s.w. AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. 3, 4, 23,

145. H. 1397. an. 2, 338. MED. m. 31. fg. HALĀY. 4, 49. VIŚVA bei

UJJVAL. zu UṆĀDIS. = harit AK. 3, 4, 23, 145. H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O.

Jama’s Hund AV. 8, 1, 9. TS. 5, 7, 19, 1. ŚĀÑKH. BR. 2, 9. PĀR. GRHJ. 1,

16. — TS. 7, 3, 18, 1. TBR. 1, 3, 4, 4. NIR. 4, 3. ṚV. PRĀT. 17, 9. ŚAT. BR.

5, 1, 2, 9. 2, 5, 8. putra 14, 9, 4, 15. śyāma iva pāpmā KĀṬH. 13, 6. ayas

«Eisen» AV. 11, 3, 7. anu cchya śyāmena tvacam 9, 5, 4.

śyāmācchabalaṁ (als nom. abstr.) prapadye CHĀND. UP. 8, 13. — Ind. St.

8, 277. 10, 318. MEGH. 58. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 3, 29. 8, 17. 33, 16. 34, 23.

47, 23. 80, 7. LAGHUJ. 2, 18. KATHĀS. 22, 182. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 1. Erde

SUŚR. 1, 135, 5. Kuh 371, 17. Pferd BHĀG. P. 1, 16, 12. śyāmo lohitākṣo

daṇḍaḥ M. 7, 25. abhinavamadalekhāśyāmagaṇḍasthalānāṁ vāraṇānām

Spr. (II) 227. stana MEGH. 18. vilīnapallavaśyāmamukhau stanau

KATHĀS. 22, 5. stanāvāśyāmacūcakau 34, 32. śyāmayā cūcukatviṣā 120,

45. uras BHĀG. P. 3, 15, 39. -karṇa (haya) 9, 15, 6. -śroṇi 4, 24, 51.

añjanabhṛṅga- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 64, 2. vapus einer Wolke MEGH. 15.

nīlāmbuda- MBH. 1, 5911. prāvṛḍjaladhara- 5928. megha- R. 2, 83, 8.

PAÑCAR. 1, 5, 3. divasa ivārdhaśyāmaḥ (ivābhraśyāmaḥ v. l.) ŚĀK. 60.

udadhiśyāmasīmā dharitrī 48. snigdhaśyāmā daṇḍakāraṇyabhāgāḥ

UTTARAR. 32, 6 (42, 8). vanabhūmayaḥ śyāmāstamāladrumaiḥ GĪT. 1, 1.

phalapariṇatiśyāmajambūvanāntāḥ MEGH. 24. kuravakaṁ śyāmaṁ

dvayorbhāgayoḥ VIKR. 26. atasīkusuma- VARĀH. BṚH. S. 58, 32.

dūrvākāṇḍa- 5, 58. BHAṬṬ. 5, 18. dūrvā- VARĀH. BṚH. 2, 4. indīvara-

MBH. 3, 1721. HARIV. 7081. R. 2, 88, 14. R. GORR. 2, 1, 41. VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 24, 18. BHĀG. P. 3, 26, 28. nīlotpaladala- R. 4, 29, 9. palāśa-

KATHĀS. 21, 11. śastrī- P. 6, 2, 2, Schol. ŚIŚ. 4, 44. komalaśyāmaśaṣpa

SUŚR. 1, 22, 18. marakata- BHĀG. P. 8, 6, 3. 16, 35. Für schön gilt bei

Männern und Frauen die durch śyāma bezeichnete Hautfarbe:

rūpamatulaṁ -sundaram PAÑCAR. 1, 1, 3. 5, 3. ayaṁ śyāmo mahābāhuḥ

siṁhaskandho mahādyutiḥ MBH. 1, 5943. 3, 2450. 7, 2243. 5089. R. 2,

34, 1. 3, 42, 33. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 294. BHĀG. P. 1, 12, 8. 19, 28. 4, 7,

20. dāsīsahasraṁ śyāmānām MBH. 3, 12711. 1, 5949. 3, 2664. 2754. R.

2, 61, 4. 3, 79, 20. 42. MEGH. 80. ŚIŚ. 8, 36. Spr. (II) 6542. fg. KATHĀS.

45, 334. RĀJA-TAR. 3, 413. CAURAP. 40. MĀRK. P. 21, 18. PAÑCAR. 1, 4,

48. Inschr. in Journ. of the Am. Or. S. 7, 12, Einschiebung nach Śl. 48.

śyāmā = yauvanamadhyasthā UTPALA bei MALLIN. zu ŚIŚ. 8, 36. =

aprasūtastrī H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. śīte sukhoṣṇasarvāṅgī grīṣme yā

sukhaśītalā. taptakāñcanavarṇābhā sā strī śyāmeti kathyate.. Citat beim

Schol. 2. zu BHAṬṬ. 5, 18. 8, 100; vgl. Spr. (II) 1850. ghanaśyāma BHĀG.

P. 6, 4, 37. śyāmāvadāta 2, 9, 11. 3, 4, 7. 8, 18, 2. R. 5, 14, 23.

śyāmāruṇa VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 24. In VARĀH. BṚH. S. häufig śyāva als v.

l. — 2) m. a) «ein schwarzer Stier» TS. 1, 8, 8, 1. 2, 1, 4, 3. ĀŚV. ŚR. 9, 4,

6. — b) «der indische Kuckuck» H. an. MED. — c) Bez. verschiedener

Pflanzen: = vṛddhadāraka H. an. MED. VIŚVA a. a. O. = damanaka und

gandhatṛṇa ŚKDR. angeblich nach VIŚVA; = dhustūra, pīlu, śyāmāka

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — d) «Wolke» H. an. MED. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL. — e) N.

pr. a) eines Mannes gaṇa aśvādi zu P. 4, 1, 110. gaṇa śubhrādi zu 123.

eines Sohnes des Śūra und Bruders des Vasudeva HARIV. 1927. 1943.

5085. VP. 437. eines neueren Fürsten Verz. d. Cambr. H. 8, 1 v. u. — b)

pl. einer Schule Ind. St. 3, 258. — g) eines Berges MBH. 6, 419. — d) einer

für heilig erachteten Ficus indica H. an. MED. VIŚVA. a. a. O. R. 2, 55, 7.

22. RAGH. 13, 53. UTTARAR. 11, 8 (15, 11). — 3) f. ā a) «ein best. Vogel»

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 86, 37. 88, 1. 5. 14. -ruta Verz. d. B.

H. No. 896. PAÑCAT. 157, 4. = kokilā TRIK. 3, 3, 303. = pika (vgl. 2) «b»)

VIŚVA a. a. O. — b) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = gundrā, priyaṅgu (die

in H. an. und bei VIŚVA unterschieden werden) AK. 2, 4, 2, 35. TRIK. H.

1149. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 38. VIŚVA; = sārivā AK. 2, 4, 3, 30. 3, 4, 23,

145. H. an. MED. = pālindhī AK. 2, 4, 3, 27. = trivṛt, vāgujī (vāguji) und

nīlī H. an. MED. (kṛṣṇatrivṛtikā). und VIŚVA; = kṛṣṇā H. an. VIŚVA; =

somalatā H. an. = śyāmalatā VIŚVA; = guḍūcī, kastūrī, vaṭapattrī, vandā,

nīlapunarnavā, pippalī, haridrā, nīladūrvā, tulasī, kṛṣṇasārivā, śiṁśapā und

padmabīja RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — R. 4, 29, 12. SUŚR. 1, 59, 11. 139, 18. 144,

16. 162, 8. 2, 102, 11. 110, 12. 374, 15. -mūla 122, 5. 135, 1. MEGH. 102.

Spr. (II) 6044. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 54, 87. 55, 22. 85, 6. — c) «Nacht» AK. 3,

4, 23, 145. TRIK. 1, 1, 104. H. 142. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 108. VIŚVA.

KĀVYAPR. (II) 180, 1. — d) N. pr. einer Frau: śyāmāyā āśramaḥ MBH. 13,

1716. einer Tochter Meru’s BHĀG. P. 5, 2, 22. eine Form der Durgā

WILSON, Sel. Works 2, 78. 184. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 93, «b», 29. fg. 94, «a»,

44. fg. «b», 26. 96, «a», 8. 101, «a», 12. -rahasya 104, «a», 27. 108, «b»,

No. 169. WILSON, Sel. Works 1, 250. 254. fgg. 262. -kalpalatā Notices of

Skt Mss. 144. -kavaca 217. -nityapūjāpaddhati 179. -pradīpa 175. -ratna

213. -stotra 237. 269. śyāmārcanacandrikā 116. — N. pr. einer Göttin, die

die Befehle des 6ten Arhant’s ausführt, H. 44. N. pr. der Mutter des 13ten

Arhant’s 40. einer Fürstin HALL in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. 52. — e) N. pr.

eines Flusses MĀRK. P. 59, 15. ein N. der Yamunā MED. — 4) n. a)

«Pfeffer.» — b) «Seesalz» H. an. MED. VIŚVA. — Vgl. priyaṅgu-, maṇi-,

mahā-, rakta- (auch VARĀH. BṚH. S. 69, 27), śyāmāyana, śyāmeya.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

śyāma A mountain in Śākadvīpa. It is as dark as clouds and very tall.

(M.B. Bhīṣma Parva, Chapter 11, Verse 19).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śyāma śyāma (probably from śvi, cf. śyeta),

I. adj., f. mā.

1. Green.

2. Dark-blue, Vikr. d. 26.

3. Black, Bhartṛ. 2, 14; 36 (dry ?); shady, Utt. Rāmac. 42, 8.

4. Brown, Hiḍ. 2, 25; Nal. 12, 50; 18, 11.

II. m.

1. Green, black (the colour).

2. A cloud.

3. The kokila or Indian cuckoo.

4. A sacred fig-tree at prayāga, Utt. Rāmac. 15, 11; cf. Wilson, Hind.

Theat. 2. ed. i. 302, n. †.

5. Thorn-apple.

III. m., and f. mā, A sort of grain, Panicum frumentaceum.

IV. f. mā.

1. Night.

2. Shade, shadow.

3. The female of the Indian cuckoo, Pañc. 157, 4.

4. A cow.

5. Durgā.

6. A married woman before she has borne children.

7. A plant, commonly Priyaṅgn, Megh. 102; and name of several

others.

V. n.

1. Pepper.

2. Sea salt.

— Cf. [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śyāma a. black, dark-coloured. m. a black bull, a man’s name; f. ā a

young woman with particular marks, a cert. bird, N. of sev. plants, a

woman’s name.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śyāma śyāma, a. black, dark grey, green, or blue, sable, dusky, swarthy

(considered a beautiful colour in complexion); m. N. of a sacred fig-tree

at Prayāya: -tā, f. blackness, dark colour;

-tva, n. id.;

-phena, a. having black foam: -tā, f. abst. N.;

-mukha, a. black-faced (cloud); having black nipples.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śyāma pu° śyai—mak . 1 vṛddhadārakavṛkṣe 2 prayāgatīrthasthe vaṭe 3

kokile 4 meghe 6 kṛṣṇavarṇe 6 haridvarṇe ca . 7 tadvati tri° medi° . 8

dhustūre 9 pīluvṛkṣe 10 śyāmāke rājani° . 11 marice 12 sindhujalabaṇe ca

na° medi° . 13 damanakavṛkṣe 14 gandhatṛṇe pu° viśvaḥ . īṣadbhede’pi

kṛṣṇaśyāmanīlādīnāmamarādau paryāyatā tatra kṛṣṇavastūni katicit

kavikalpalatāyāṁ darśitāni yathā kṛṣṇāni keśavaḥ sīricīraṁ

candrāṅkarāhavaḥ . vindhyāñjanādrivṛkṣāhivanabhairavarākṣasāḥ .

śivakaṇṭhadhanadvaipāyanarāmadhanañjayāḥ . śaniḥ drupadajā kālī

kalikolayamā’surāḥ . keśakajjalakastūrīrājapaṭṭavidurajam .

viṣakoṣakuhūśastrāgurupāpatamoniśāḥ .

masopaṅkamaṭāmbhodhiyamunādhūmakokilāḥ . golāṅgūlāsyaguñjāsye

kaṇṭhaḥ ṇañjanakekinoḥ . śabalaṁ tālatāpiñjatilendīvaravallayaḥ .

rasāvadbhutaśṛṅgārau kaṭākṣo’liḥ kanīnikā . nīlī jambūphalaṁ mustā

kākakṛtyākukīrtayaḥ . bhinnacchāyā gajāṅgārakhalāntaḥkaraṇādavaḥ .

श्यामल — śyāmala Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899śyāmala mf («ā») n. dark-coloured &c.

śyāmala m. black (the colour)

śyāmala m. a kind of bee

śyāmala m. Terminalia Arjuna

śyāmala m. a species of plant serving as a substitute for the Soma plant

(= «pūtīka»)

śyāmala m. the sacred fig-tree

śyāmala m. black pepper

śyāmala m. N. of a poet

śyāmala m. of another man, Vāś., Introd.

śyāmala mf («ā») n. («ā») f. N. of various plants (Physalis Flexuosa; =

«kaṭa-ohī»; = «kastūrī»; = «jambū»)

śyāmala m. a form of Durgā

śyāmala m. N. of a woman

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

śyāmala a. Black, dark-blue, blackish; niśitaśyāmalasnigdhamukhī śaktiḥ

Ve. 4; Śi. 18. 36; śyāmalānokahaśrīḥ U. 2. 25. —laḥ

(1) Black colour.

(2) Black pepper.

(3) A large bee.

(4) The sacred fig-tree. —lā N. of Durgā.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

śyāmala (von śyāma) gaṇa sidhmādi zu P. 5, 2, 97. 1) adj. (f. ā)

«dunkelfarbig» AK. 1, 1, 4, 23. H. 1397. an. 3, 686. MED. l. 136. HALĀY.

4, 49. SĀH. D. 16, 5. ambara KATHĀS. 94, 9. nistriṁśa (vyoma von śyā-

zu trennen) 26, 232. 86, 123. śyāmalāgrapayodharā 124, 197. bhūmi

BHĀG. P. 8, 2, 4. -mṛdulakalevara GĪT. 11, 26. HARIV. 14708. 15838.

KATHĀS. 48, 82. RĀJA-TAR. 4, 329 (śyāmalā von rakta- zu trennen oder

śyāmalarakta- zu lesen). BHĀG. P. 8, 8, 32. PAÑCAR. 1, 3, 29.

abhinavamegha- MĀLATĪM. 145, 10. vanarāji- RĀJA-TAR. 4, 150.

kṛṣṇāgaru- DAŚAR. 190, 2 v. u. indīvaraśreṇī- GĪT. 1, 46. nīlotpalapalāśa-

DAŚAK. 77, 15. dūrvālatā- KATHĀS. 45, 333. priyaṅgu- 47, 109.

asitakuvalaya- KĀD. (ed. Calc. 1862) 32, 6 v. u. kalāya- PAÑCAR. 3, 7,

36. aruṇa- 35. — 2) m. a) «eine Bienenart» ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. —

b) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = pippala H. an. MED. = arjuna («eine

Grasart») Schol. zu PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 5, 7. = pūtīka Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 25,

12, 19. — c) N. pr. eines Mannes HALL in der Einl. zu VĀSAVAD. 41. 51. —

3) f. ā a) Bez. verschiedener Pflanzen: = aśvagandhā, kaṭabhī, jambū,

kastūrī RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b) «eine Form der» Durgā ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei

WILSON. — c) N. pr. eines Frauenzimmers (aus dem Tibetischen

zurückübersetzt) SCHIEFNER, Lebensb. 275 (45). — Vgl.

rājaśyāmalopāsaka.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

śyāmala śyāma + la,

I. adj., f. lā, Of a dark-blue or black colour, Daśak. in Chr. 190, 13;

blackish, Mālat. 145, 10.

II. m.

1. Black (the colour).

2. Pepper.

3. The religious fig-tree.

4. A large bee.

III. f. lā, Pārvatī.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

śyāmala a. dark-coloured.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

śyāmala śyāma-la, a. dark-coloured: -ka, m. N.;

-tā, f. blackness, dark colour.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

śyāmala pu° śyāmavarṇaṁ lāti lā—ka . 1 pippale 2 kṛṣṇavarṇayute tri°

medi° . 3 aśvagandhāyāṁ 4 kaṭabhyāṁ 5 jambvāṁ 6 kastūryāñca strī

rājani° . 7 śyāmavarṇe pu° amaraḥ .

सार — sāra Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sāra m. or n. (?) salts of iron

sāra (fr. «sṛ») m. course, motion (see «pūrva-s-«); stretching out,

extension ; mfn. driving away, destroying

sāra m. n. (ifc. f. «ā»; perhaps to be connected with 1. «sāra» above;

prob. fr. a lost root meaning. «to be strong») the core or pith or solid

interior of anything &c. &c.

m. firmness, strength power, energy &c. &c.

m. the substance or essence or marrow or cream or heart or essential

part of anything, best part, quintessence (ifc. = «chiefly consisting of or

depending on &c.» [cf. «para»] e.g. «dharma-sāraṁ jagat», «the world

chiefly depends on justice»; «tūṣṇīṁ-sāra» mfn. «chiefly silent»; «sārat

sāram», «the very best») &c. &c.

m. the real meaning, main point

m. a compendium, summary, epitome (often ifc. in titles of books)

m. a chief-ingredient or constituent part of the body (causing the

peculiarities of temperament; reckoned to be 7, viz. «sattva, śukra,

majjan, asthi, medas, māṁsa, rakta»)

m. any ingredient

m. nectar

m. cream, curds

m. worth, value («eṇa», «in consideration of.», «according to») &c.

m. wealth, property, goods, riches

sāra m. (in rhet.) a kind of climax («uttarottaram utkarṣaḥ»)

m. resin used as a perfume

m. water

m. dung

m. the matter formed in a boil or ulcer, pus

m. impure carbonate of soda

m. a confederate prince, ally

sāra m. (= 1. «śāra») a piece at chess or backgammon &c.

sāra mf («ā») n. hard, firm solid strong &c.

sāra mf («ā») n. precious, valuable

sāra mf («ā») n. good, sound, best, excellent

sāra mf («ā») n. sound (as an argument, thoroughly proved)

sāra mf («ā») n. full of (instr.)

sāra mf («ā») n. motley, speckled (= «śāra»)

sāra mfn. having spokes

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

sāra a. [sṛ-ghañ, sār-ac vā]

(1) Essential.

(2) Best, highest, most excellent; Mu. 1. 13.

(3) Real, true, genuine.

(4) Strong, vigorous.

(5) Sound, thoroughly proved.

(6) Highest or best (at the end of comp.); trivargasāraḥ Ku. 5. 38. —

raḥ, —raṁ (but usually m. only except in the first 4 senses)

(1) Essence, essential part, quintessence; snehasya tatphalamasau

praṇayasya sa Māl. 1. 9; U. 6. 22. asāre khalu saṁsāre

sārametaccatuṣṭayam . kāśyāṁ vāsaḥ satāṁ saṁgo gaṁgāṁbhaḥ

śaṁbhusevanaṁ .. Dharm; 14.

(2) Substance, pith.

(3) Marrow.

(4) Real truth, main point.

(5) The sap or essence of trees; as in khadirasāra, sarjasāra.

(6) Summary, epitome, compendium.

(7) Strength, vigour, power, energy; sāraṁ dharitrīdharaṇakṣamaṁ ca

Ku. 1. 17; R. 2. 74.

(8) Prowess, heroism, courage; R. 4. 79.

(9) Firmness, hardness. (10) Wealth, riches; gāmāttasārāṁ R. 5. 26.

(11) Nectar.

(12) Fresh butter.

(13) Air, wind.

(14) Cream, coagulum of curds.

(15) Disease.

(16) Matter, pus.

(17) Worth, excellence, highest perception.

(18) A man at chess.

(19) Impure carbonate of soda. (20) A figure of speech corresponding

to English ‘climax’; uttarottaramutkarṣo bhavetsāraḥ parāvadhiḥ K. P. 10.

—21. The heart. —rā

(1) Dūrvā grass.

(2) Kuśa grass. —raṁ

(1) Water.

(2) Fitness, propriety.

(3) Wood, thicket.

(4) Steel.

— Comp.

—asāra a. valuable and worthless, strong and weak. (

—raṁ) 1. worth and worthlessness. —2. substance and emptiness.

—3. strength and weakness. -vicāraḥ consideration of strong and weak

points &c.

—gaṁdhaḥ sandal wood.

—grīvaḥ N. of Śiva.

—jaṁ fresh butter.

—taruḥ the plantain tree.

—dā 1. N. of Sarasvatī. —2. of Durgā.

—drumaḥ the Khadira tree.

—bhaṁgaḥ loss of vigour.

—bhāṁḍaṁ 1. a natural vessel. —2. a bale of goods, merchandise.

—3. implements.

—mitiḥ the Veda.

—lohaṁ steel.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sāra (von sar) m. 1) «Lauf, Gang» in -sārin und pūrva-. — 2) = prasāra

«Ausstreckung»: sarvāṅgulyagra- KĀLACAKRA 3, 187.

sāra (sāra P. 3, 3, 17; vgl. 6, 1, 159) 1) m. n. gaṇa ardharcādi zu

P.2,4,31. SIDDH. K. 249,b,4. am Ende eines adj. comp. f. ā. a) «die

inneren festen Bestandtheile eines Körpers»: khadirasya «Kernholz» ṚV. 3,

53, 19. khadira-, śāla- P. 3, 3, 17, Schol. tindukasāreṇa nirmitaḥ

paryaṅkaḥ VARĀH. BṚH. S. 79, 11. abhyantaragataiḥ sārairyathā tiṣṭhanti

bhūruhāḥ. asthisāraistathā dehāḥ SUŚR. 1, 339, 18. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 5,

4. asthīni na vinaśyanti sārāṇyetāni dehinām SUŚR. 1, 339, 21. sārāṇi von

Früchten neben rasa und tvac vielleicht «Kerngehäuse» MBH. 3, 10064.

sāra m. = sthira P. 3, 3, 17. = sthirāṁśa AK. 3, 4, 25, 173. H. an. 2, 466.

MED. r. 96. = atidṛḍha ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. — b) «Festigkeit, Härte;

Stärke, Kraft»: bhujayoḥ sāramarpaya MBH. 1, 6029. 5, 1991. BHĀG. P. 5,

1, 29. -sthita SUŚR. 1, 188, 3. dharitrīdharaṇakṣama eines Berges

KUMĀRAS. 1, 17. -gurubhiḥ padanyāsaiḥ desgl. 6, 50. Kāma’s 3, 13.

akhilasārasaṁbhṛta Viṣṇu als Zwerg BHĀG. P. 8, 18, 20. yadi vaḥ

pradhane śraddhā sāraṁ vā kṣullakā hṛdi 6, 11, 5. adrākṣamahametatte

hṛtsāraṁ mahadadbhutam 7, 3, 18. āhārasya «die nährende Kraft» SUŚR.

1, 43, 5. 247, 21. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 6, 4. sāroddharaṇadūṣita (māṁsa)

MĀRK. P. 34, 56. sāra (sārā Padap., wohl für sāram) ṛṣabhāṇām «die

zeugende Kraft» AV. 4, 4, 4. vāksāra «die Kraft der Rede, Beredsamkeit»

VARĀH.BṚH. S. 2, S. 4, Z. 18. fg. am Ende eines adj. comp.:

vajrasamāna- ein Mann MBH. 1, 7076. mahendrādisamāna- RAGH. 6, 54.

mahābhujau giriśṛṅgasārau R. 6, 37, 64. bhuje bhujagendrasamānasāre

RAGH. 2, 74. nala- «die Härte» (d. i. «Weichheit, Schwäche) des

Rohrschilfs habend» MBH. 12, 11156. utpalapattra- RAGH. 6, 42.

sarvātirikta- (ātman) 1, 14. vapuḥ sasāram KUMĀRAS. 5, 19. dṛṣṭa- Spr.

(II) 6212 (gajendra). RAGH. 11, 47 (vīryaśulka).

dṛṣṭistṛṇīkṛtajagattrayasattvasārā UTTARAR. 111, 17 (151, 1 = SĀH. D.

38, 10). ajāta- R. GORR. 1, 39, 17. abhedya- RĀJA-TAR. 4, 298. kṣīṇa-

MBH. 13, 281. gṛhīta- BHĀG. P. 5, 14, 19. ātta- 6, 10, 29. smaranunna-

10, 21, 12. mahā- «fest, stark»: Bogen R. 2, 100, 19. alpa- «schwach» Spr.

(II) 1952. KĀM. NĪTIS. 11, 8. hṛtasārā sudhā «berauschende Kraft» R. 2,

61, 18. sāra m. = sthāman HALĀY. 5, 67. = bala AK. 2, 4, 12. H. an.

MED. — c) «Werth»: sāratas M. 8, 405. YĀJÑ. 2, 275. (vijñātaḥ) rājñā

himavataḥ sāro rājñaḥ sāro himādriṇā RAGH. 4, 79. puruṣārtha- BHĀG. P.

3, 13, 49. mahā- adj. «werthvoll, kostbar» R. 3, 72, 1. 4, 33, 15. 43, 33.

alpa- adj. «von geringem Werth» M. 11, 164. gata- adj. «werthlos

geworden, nichtig» Spr. (II) 2067. 6122. — d) «Vermögen, Besitz,

Reichthum»; neutr. H. 191. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 1, 80. masc. 5, 67.

sārāparādhau M. 8, 126. 9, 262. karaṁ dāpayāmāsa

sāragrahaṇapūrvakam MĀRK. P. 122, 10.

sārāpahāramakarotparihāsapurasya RĀJA-TAR. 5, 160. sāratas DAŚAK.

70, 13. am Ende eines adj. comp.: naikakoṭi- 75, 13. sāvitrīmātra- M. 2,

118. gāmāttasārām RAGH. 5, 26. — e) «Kern» so v. a. «Hauptsache,

Quintessenz, das Beste, Werthvollste, etwas Werthvolles»: etatsāram

(kāmaḥ) — dharmārthāvatra saṁsthitau MBH. 12, 6244. sāraṁ tato

grāhyam Spr. (II) 243. sarvataḥ sāramādadyāt 459. atra na kimapi

sāramaṇīyaḥ 554. 777. 1794. 2347. 2954. 5699. 5776. 6605. 6639. fg.

7211. sāra iti (besser als ratnamiti) VIKR. 143, v. l. KATHĀS. 28, 16. 34,

190. 39, 213. SĀH. D. 23, 17. MĀRK. P. 18, 43. VET. in LA. (III) 16, 16.

BHĀG. P. 1, 1, 11. 4, 18, 2. 13. SARVADARŚANAS. 158, 20. sārātsāraṁ

vadasva naḥ Verz. d. Oxf. H. 7, «a», No. 42. apām RAGH. 10, 10. 53.

kṛtsnasya jagataḥ R. 5, 12, 27. dharmasya KATHĀS. 33, 34. dṛṣṭaḥ

sārastasyāḥ (so ist zu lesen) puro bhavān 54, 62. tat —

sarvavedetihāsānāṁ sāraṁ sāraṁ samuddṛtam BHĀG. P. 1, 3, 41.

PAÑCAR. 1, 15, 13. sarvamantreṣu sāraśca mantrarājaḥ prakīrtitaḥ

2,3,104. Verz. d. Oxf. H. 252,b, No. 626, Z. 4. kathāmeva kathāsu sāram.

uddhṛtya puṣpebhya iva BHĀG. P. 3, 5, 15. -mārgaṇam Spr. (II) 4823.

sārādānaṁ ṣaṭpadavat KAP. 4, 13. -śūnya Spr. (II) 2919. -saṁgraha CĀṆ.

1. -grāhin R. 3, 72, 1. -darśin 5, 84, 7. sārārthin MBH. 4, 1567. samudra-

2, 1893. kathāsāro hi sā (kathā) matā 12, 12711. loka- 14, 597. trivarga-

(dharma) KUMĀRAS. 5, 31. muktā- RAGH. 4, 50. PAÑCAR. 1, 4, 54. 7, 49.

11, 13. veda-, yajña-, sāma- 4, 3, 50. ācāra- RĀJA-TAR. 4, 344. mandira-

Spr. (II) 473. sakalārthaśāstra- PAÑCAT. Pr. 3. jīvaloka- 49, 4.

samastavastusaṁbhāra- 157, 22. DHŪRTAS. 88, 1. vastusārāṇām BHĀG.

P. 2, 6, 4. 10, 6, 7. am Ende eines adj. comp.: hṛta- R. 2, 33, 18. R.

GORR. 2, 36, 12. upātta- MĀLAV. 22, 19. ātta- BHĀG. P. 3, 15, 23. sāra

m. = śreṣṭha H. an. HALĀY. 5, 67. — f) «das Vorwaltende, Hauptsache»

am Ende eines adj. comp. (vgl. den Gebrauch von para): tūṣṇīṁ- AIT. BR.

2, 31. prīti- (kāma) MBH. 2, 153. R. GORR. 2, 109, 61. kṣamā- HARIV.

15624. fg. dharma- R. 2, 33, 15. Spr. (II) 3113. WEBER, RĀMAT. UP. 338.

ŚRUT. 20. Spr. (II) 2789. 3738. 4253. 6233. 6985. GĪT. 5, 8. KATHĀS. 40,

48. VP. 1, 9, 22. BHĀG. P. 1, 19, 19. 3, 5, 45. 6, 9, 50. 8, 16, 60.CAURAP.

5. 33. — g) «ein dem Temperamente eines Menschen zu Grunde liegender

Hauptbestandtheil des Körpers»: es werden deren acht oder auch nur

sieben angenommen: sattva (fehlt bei VARĀH.), śukra, majjan, asthi,

medas, māṁsa, rakta und śukra SUŚR. 1, 125, 11. 126, 18. tvaksāra adj.

127, 3. CARAKA 3, 8. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 68, 1. 96. 69, 21. rakta- adj. 68,

97. māṁsa- adj. 100. LAGHUJ. 2, 13. fgg. — h) «Bestandtheil» überh.:

pañca- adj. (peya) SUŚR. 2, 421, 5. — i) «das Rechte, Richtige»; neutr. =

nyāyya AK. H. an. MED. naitatsāram Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 14, 5.

tadasāram zu 1, 21. — k) «Nektar»: yattatrotpatsyate sāraṁ tatpāsyāmaḥ

R. GORR. 1, 46, 19. sāraṁ juṣāṁ caraṇayoḥ BHĀG. P. 7, 6, 25. am Ende

eines adj. comp.: nirviṣṭasārāṁ pitṛbhirhimāṁśorantyāṁ kalām RAGH.

14, 80. — l) «Seim» KAP. 4, 13. BHĀG. P. 1, 18, 7. — m) «saurer Rahm»

SUŚR. 2, 378, 6. dadhnā sasāreṇa 441, 8. sāra n. = dadhyuttara ŚABDAC.

im ŚKDR. — n) «verdickter als Räucherwerk verwandter Pflanzensaft,

Harz» SUŚR. 1, 133, 9. 12. 183, 15. 2, 12, 15. 63, 1. 73, 21. 83, 14. fg.

119, 3. 175, 4. 468, 21. ŚĀRÑG. SAṁH. 1, 1, 42. Vgl. sārin. — o) «Dünger»

KṚṢIS. 8, 26. vinā sāreṇa yaddhānyaṁ vardhate na phalatyapi 9, 3. — p)

«ein Fürst, der einem andern im Kriege zu Hilfe kommt, Bundesgenosse»

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 34, 22; vgl. āsāra 3) in den Nachträgen. — q) Bez. «des

Gürtels bei den» Maga Verz. d. Oxf. H. 33,b,30. — r) m. in der Rhetorik

«eine Art Klimax»: uttarottaramutkarṣo bhavetsāraḥ parāvadhiḥ

KĀVYAPR. 173,8 (331,15). SĀH. D. 731. KUVALAJ. 113,a. PRATĀPAR.

103,b,3. Beispiele Spr. (II) 2347. 5776. — Die Lexicographen kennen noch

folgende nicht zu belegende Bedd. a) m. = majjan AK. 2, 4, 1, 12. H.

1121. H. an. MED. HALĀY. 2, 28. 5, 67. = asthi H. 626 (neutr. v. l.). =

tvacisāra 1153, Schol. = vajrakṣāra RĀJAN. 6, 256. = vāyu (vgl. śāra)

JAṬĀDH. im ŚKDR. = roga DHAR. ebend. = pāśaka (vgl. śāra) ŚABDAR.

ebend. — b) n. = jala H. an. MED. = navanīta RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = lauha

BHĀVAPR. ebend. = vipina ŚABDAR. ebend. — 2) f. ā = kṛṣṇatrivṛtā

ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. = dūrvā (vgl. śārī) ŚABDAC. ebend. — 3) f. ī «der

Vogel» Sārikā und = pāśaka (vgl. śārī) ŚABDAR. im ŚKDR. = saptalā

RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — 4) adj. a) «hart, fest, stark»: -druma VARĀH. BṚH. S.

43, 58. -dāru 54, 118. dhanuṣī R. GORR. 1, 77, 14. -puṅkha ŚĀK. 10. —

gātra (-yodha ed. Bomb.) MBH. 6, 3316. SUŚR. 1, 151, 5. CARAKA 3, 8.

madhusūdana HARIV. 5794. ye tu garbhāṅkurāḥ

sārāstāndivyānparvatānviduḥ 11446 (die neuere Ausg. hat eine andere

Lesart). bala «Kerntruppen» (Gegens. phalgu) MBH. 2, 1031. 5, 2205.

2516. fg. 5244. KĀM. NĪTIS. 18, 58. 19, 59. Spr. (II) 5966. MĀRK. P. 122,

18. — b) «kostbar, werthvoll»: sārābharaṇa DAŚAK. 84, 11. — c) «der

vorzüglichste, beste»; = vara AK. 3, 4, 25, 173. MED. sarvavedoddhṛtaḥ

sāro mantraḥ Verz. d. Oxf. H. 106,a,32. sūkta BHĀG. P. 4, 22, 17.

PAÑCAR. 1, 5, 22. — d) mit einem instr. «voller»: śukreṇa = śukrasāra

adj. comp. «Samen zum Hauptbestandtheil im Körper habend» VARĀH.

BṚH. S. 69, 33. — e) = śāra «bunt, scheckig»: maṇḍūkaḥ kṛṣṇaḥ sāraḥ

(kṛṣṇasāraḥ?) kuhakaḥ SUŚR. 2, 290, 6. sāraḥ śabalaḥ kṛṣṇaścāsau

sāraśca kṛṣṇasāraḥ kṛṣṇamṛgaḥ MALLIN. zu KUMĀRAS. 3, 36. nicht

«schwarz und scheckig», sondern «in dem das Schwarze vorwaltet.» —

sāraniyuktaṁ HARIV. 4530 wohl fehlerhaft für sādhunirvyūhaṁ, wie die

neuere Ausg. liest. Vgl. a- («werthlos, nichtig» auch MBH. 14, 597.

KATHĀS. 36, 105. BHĀG. P. 7, 5, 26), aguru- («das Harz der Aquilaria

Agallocha» SUŚR. 1, 183, 15. 2, 175, 4. RAGH. 6, 8), agra-, adri-, antaḥ-

(«innerer Gehalt» Spr.(II) 350. «inwendig hart, — fest» VARĀH. BṚH. 3, 7),

ambhaḥ, artha-, aśma-, kaṁ-, karka-, kāla-, kusuma-, kṛṣṇa-, kṣīra-,

gandha-, gāyatri-, giri-, ghana-, candana- (auch R. 2, 78, 6), carma-,

takra-, tantu-, tantra-, taru-, tīkṣṇa-, tṛṇa-, tvak-, tvaci-, dravya-,

dhānya-, naya-, niḥ-, nīti-, piṅga-, picchila-, pīta-, pīlu-, puṇya-,

puṣkarasārī, puṣpa-, prapañca-, prayoga-, prāṇa- («Lebenskraft» RĀJA-

TAR. 6, 368), bahu-, bindu-, bimbi-, bhadra-, bhāgavata-,

bhāvasāraviveka, bhāvanāsārasaṁgraha, bhūta-, bhūṣaṇasāradarpaṇa,

majjā-, maṇi-, mada-, manaḥ-, mahā-, māṁsa-, mādhvasiddhānta-,

megha-, moca-, yajña-, yathāsāram, yuddha-, yoga-, rakta-, laghu-,

lokabindu-, vajra-, vasu-, vākya-, vāri-, viveka-, viśva-, veda-, veṣṭa-,

vaidyakasārasaṁgraha, vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa- (unter

vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa), vyavahāra-, vyākhyā-, śāla-, śilā-, śubha-, śaila-

(auch KIR. 10, 14), śyāma-, śveta-, sakalavedopaniṣat-, saṁkṣipta-

(unter saṁkṣipta), saṁgīta-, samara-, samudra-, sarva-, sita-,

siddhānta-.

sāra 1) i) naitatsāram ebend. 8,21,b.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

sāra sāra, perhaps sṛ + a, with ‘cream,’

II.

9. as first signification,

I. adj.

1. Easential, Hit. iv. d. 71.

2. Excellent, best, Daśak. in Chr. 194, 22; Pañc. i. d. 284; Hit. iii. d.

89.

3. Hard, Śāk. d. 10.

4. Irrefragable (as an argument), proved, Man. 9, 262.

II. m. (and n.).

1. The pith or sap of trees.

2. The essence of anything, the essential or vital part of it, Hit. ii. d.

126; Pañc. 49, 4.

3. Nectar, Bhāg. P. 7, 6, 25.

4. The substance or material part (of a book, speech, etc.), Pañc. pr.

d. 3; 10 (n.).

5. Marrow, Ragh. 10, 10.

6. Strength, vigour, Hit. 104, 7; affluence, Hit. i. d. 90, M.M. (artha-, of

wealth, cf.

IV. 2.).

7. Prowess, heroism.

8. Firmness, hardness.

9. The coagulum of curds, cream.

10. Fresh butter.

11. Air, wind (cf. śāra).

12. Disease, pus, Hit. ii. d. 101 (and wealth).

III. m., and f. rī, A man at chess, backgammon (cf. śāra).

IV. n.

1. Water.

2. Wealth, Man. 8, 126; Daśak. in Chr. 189, 3 (at the end of a comp.

adj.).

3. Fitness.

4. Steel.

5. (In rhetoric), Climax.

V. f. rā, Kuśa grass.

VI. f. rī, Turdus Salica Buch.

— Comp. a-, adj. 1. sapless, Hit. iv. d. 87. 2. insipid, Daśak. in Chr. 188, 2;

vain, Pañc. 165, 17. 3. weak, Pañc. i. d. 376. 4. bad, Man. 8, 202. 5. poor,

Daśak. in Chr. 180, 23. sāra-a-, m. 1. strength and weakness, Hit. 104, 7.

2. excellence or defect, Man. 9, 331. 3. substance and emptiness. agra-,

f. rā, a method of numbering, by which one may sum up the sand of a

hundred Koṭis of Gaṅgā rivers, Lalit. 141 (cf. Arcimedes’ method). adri-,

m. iron. antaḥsāra, i. e. antar-,

I. m. and n. 1. the inward pus and wealth, Hit. ii. d. 101. 2. own worth,

Cāṇ. 69 in Berl. Monatsb. 1864, 411.

II. adj. 1. having inward essence, full of strength, Pañc. i. d. 142. 2.

heavy, ponderous. artha-, m. important motive, Pañc. ii. d. 46. aśmasāra,

i. e. aśman-, m. iron, Suśr. 2, 531, 4. eka-, m. only essence, Bhartṛ. 2, 1.

kṛṣṇa- (cf. śāra),

I. adj. of a blue-black colour, Rām. 5, 32, 47.

II. m. 1. the black-pied antelope, Man. 2, 23; Vikr. d. 120. 2. the name of

several plants. giri-, m. 1. iron. 2. tin. ghana-, m. camphor, Lass. 92, 8.

candana-, m. the best sandal, Rām. 2, 20, 43 Gorr. traksāra, i. e. tvac-,

m. reed, Man. 10, 37. dṛṣṭa-, adj. one of whom the strength is tested,

Kām. Nītis. 8, 67. nis-abhibhava-, adj. having the highest excellence, i. e.

than which there is nothing better, Bhartṛ. 2, 54 (but cf. also Böhtl. Ind.

Spr. 1859). niḥsāra, i. e. nis-, adj., f. rā, 1. sapless, Suśr. 1, 20, 16; Cāṇ.

66 in Berl. Monatsb. 1864, 411. 2. powerless, insignificant, Pañc. i. d. 421.

3. insipid.

4. vain, perishable, Hit. iv. d. 71. prāṇa-, adj. having the marrew of

life, Śāk. d. 37. vajra-,

I. adj. having the vigour of a thunderbolt, Pañc. 58, 10.

II. m. a proper name, Rājat. 5, 226. vedānta-, m. the essence of the

Vedānta philosophy, Vedāntas. title, in Chr. 202, 1. śilā-, m. iron. śaila-,

adj. firm as a rock, Kir. 10, 14 sa-kala-artha-śāstra-, adj. containing the

essence of precepts about all things, Pañc. pr. d. 3. sattva-, m. excellence

of strength, i. e. the most powerful, Utt. Rāmac. 151, 1. su-, m. 1. a kind

of jewel or crystal (?), MBh. 7, 672. 2. Mimosa catechu. sva-anubhūti-

eka-sāra-, adj. whose only essence consists in enjoying himself, Bhartṛ.

2, 1.

— Cf. sara; Goth. sāls; A.S. sel, sael.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sāra [1] a. driving away, removing; m. course, way (only —°).

sāra [2] m. n. the interior firm parts of a body; firmness, solidity,

strength; property, wealth; substance or essence of anything; nectar;

water.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sāra 1. sār-a, a. [sṛ] driving away, destroying (-°); m. course.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

sāra t ka daurvalye . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (adantacurā°-para°-aka°-seṭ

.) rephopadhaḥ . asasārat . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sāra daurbalye ada° cu° ubha° saka° seṭ . sārayati te asasārat ta

anekāckatvānna ṣopadeśaḥ

sāra na° sṛ—ghañ, sāra—ac vā . 1 jale 2 dhane 3 nyāyye tri° medi° . 4

navanīte na° rājani° . 5 lauhe bhāvapra° . 6 vane śabdara° . 7 bale 8

sthirāṁśe 9 majjani pu° amaraḥ 10 sarjakṣāre 11 vāyau jaṭā° . 12 roge

dharaṇiḥ 13 atidṛde 14 pāśake pu° śabdara° 15 dadhyagre pu° hemaca°

16 śreṣṭhe 17 vare ca tri° amaraḥ . 1ṣaparameśvare ekaṁ śivaṁ

śāntamanantamacyutaṁ parātparaṁ jñānamayaṁ viśeṣam . advaita

mavyagramacintyarūpa sārantvekaṁ nāsti sāraṁ tatonyat .

yasmādetajjāyate viśvamagryaṁ yasmin līnaṁ syācca paścātsthitañca .

ākāśavanmeghajālañca dhṛtyā yadviśvaṁ vai dhriyate tacca sāram .

aṣṭāṅgayogairyadavāptumicchan yogī yunaktyātmarūpaṁ sadaiva .

nivartate prāpya yanneha loke tadvai sāraṁ sāramanyanna cāsti

kālikāpu° 27 a° .

सितेतर — sitetara Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899sitetara mfn. «other than white», black, dark, blue

mfn. white and black

sitetara m. a kind of dark-coloured rice

sitetara m. Dolichos Uniflorus

sitetara m. «-gati» m. «having a black course», fire

sitetara m. «-saroja» n. a blue lotus

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

sitetara (3. sita + itara) 1) adj. a) «schwarz (dunkelfarbig») H. 17.

KUMĀRAS. 1, 38. VARĀH. LAGHUJ. 1, 6. H. 1326. HALĀY. 2, 97. — b)

«weiss und schwarz» BHĀG. P. 10, 41, 41. — 2) m. Bez. zweier Pflanzen:

= śyāmaśāli und kulattha RĀJAN. im ŚKDR.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

sitetara a. black, dark, blue (lit. opposite of white).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

sitetara sita+itara, a. (opposite of white), black, dark, blue;

-saroja, n. blue lotus.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

sitetara pu° sitāditaraḥ . 1 śyāmaśālau 2 kulatthe ca 3 śubhetaravarṇe 4

tadvati tri° .

सु — su Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899su cl.1.P. ā. «savati, -te», to go, move ( «sru»).

su (= 1. «sū») cl.1.2. P. ( xxii, 43 and xxiv, 32; «savati, sauti», only in 3.

sg. pr. «sauti» and 2. sg. Impv. «suhi») to urge, impel, incite ; to possess

supremacy

su cl.5.P. ā. ( xxvii, 1) «sunoti, sunute» (in 3. pl. «sunvanti, sunvire»

[with pass. sense] and «suṣvati»; p. «sunvat» or «sunvāna» [the latter

with act. and pass. sense] ; pf. «suṣāva, suṣuma» &c. ; p. in Veda

«suṣuvas» and «suṣvāṇa» [the later generally with pass. sense; accord. to

on «suṣuvāṇa» with act. sense]; aor. accord. to Gr. «asāvīt» or «asauṣīt,

asoṣṭa» or «asaviṣṭa»; in also Impv. «sotu, sutam», and p. [mostly pass.]

«suvāna» [but the spoken form is «svāna» and so written in , «suv-» in ;

and 3. pl. «asuṣavuḥ» ; fut. «sotā» ; «soṣyati» ; «saviṣyati» ; inf. «sotave,

sotos» ; «sotum» Gr.; ind. p. «-sutya» ; «-sūya» , to press out, extract

(esp. the juice from the Soma plant for libations) ; to distil, prepare

(wine, spirits &c.) on Pass. «sūyate» (in also ā. 3. sg. «sunve» and 3. pl.

«sunvire» with pass. sense; aor. «asāvi» Caus. «-sāvayati» or «-ṣāvayati»

(see «abhi-ṣu» and «pra-su»; aor. «asūṣavat» accord. to some «asīṣavat»)

Gr.: Desid. of Caus. «suṣāvayiṣati» Desid. «susūṣati, -te» Iutens.

«soṣūyate, soṣavīti, soṣoti»

su (= 2. «sū»), (only in 3. sg. «sauti» see «pra-sū») to beget, bring forth.

su ind. (opp. to «dus» and corresponding in sense to Gk. [greek];

perhaps connected with 1. «vasu», and, accord. to some, with pron. base

«sa», as «ku» with «ka»; in Veda also «sū» and liable to become «ṣu» or

«ṣū» and to lengthen a preceding vowel, while a following «na» may

become «ṇa»; it may be used as an adj. or adv.), good, excellent, right,

virtuous, beautiful, easy, well, rightly, much, greatly, very, any, easily,

willingly, quickly (in older language often with other particles; esp. with

«u», = «forthwith, immediately»; with «mo» i.e. «mā u», = «never, by no

means»; «su kam» often emphatically with an Impv. e.g. «tiṣṭhā su kam

maghavan mā parā gāḥ», «do tarry O Maghavan, go not past» ; «su»

always qualifies the meaning of a verb and is never used independently at

the beginning of a verse; in later language it is rarely a separate word,

but is mostly prefixed to substantives, adjectives, adverbs and participles,

exceptionally also to an ind. p. e.g. «su-baddhvā», «having well bound» ;

or even to a finite verb e.g. «su-nirvavau»

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following).

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following)

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following, in which the initial «ṣ» stands

for an orig. «s»):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following):

su (to be similarly prefixed to the following)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

su I. 1 U. (suvati-te) To go, move. —II. 1. 2. P. (savati, sauti) To possess

power or supremacy. —III. 5. U. (sunoti, sunute, suta; the s of su is

changed to ṣ after any preposition ending in i or u)

(1) To press out or extract juice.

(2) To distil.

(3) To pour out, sprinkle, make a libation.

(4) To perform a sacrifice, especially the Soma sacrifice.

(5) To bathe.

(6) To churn. —Desid. (suṣūsati-te) —WITH ud to excite, agitate. —pra

to produce, beget.

su ind. A particle often used with nouns to form Karmadhāraya and

Bahuvrīhi compounds, and with adjectives and adverbs. It has the

following senses:

(1) Well, good, excellent; as in suṁgadhi.

(2) Beautiful, handsome; as in sumadhyamā, sukeśī &c.

(3) Well, perfectly, thoroughly, properly; sujīrṇamannaṁ suvicakṣaṇaḥ

sutaḥ suśāsitā strī nṛpatiḥ susevitaḥ &c … sudīrghakāle’pi na yāti vikriyāṁ

H. 1. 22.

(4) Easily, readily, as in sukara or sulabha q. v.

(5) Much, very much, exceedingly; sudāruṇa, sudīrgha &c.

(6) Worthy of respect or reverence.

(7) It is also said to have the senses of assent, prosperity, and

distress.

— Comp.

—akṣa a. 1. having good eyes. —2. having keen organs, acute.

—aṁga a. well-shaped, handsome, lovely.

—accha a. see s. v.

—aṁta a. having a happy end, ending well.

—alpa, -alpaka a. see s. v.

—asti, —astika see s. v.

—ākāra, —ākṛti a. well-formed, handsome, beautiful.

—āgata see s. v.

—ādānaṁ taking justly or properly; Ms. 8. 172.

—ābhāsa a. very splendid or illustrious; Ki. 15. 22.

—iṣṭa a. properly sacrificed. -kṛt m. a form of fire.

—ukta a. well-spoken, well-said; athavā sūktaṁ khalu kenāpi Ve. 3.

(

—ktā) a kind of bird (sārikā. (—ktaṁ) 1. a good or wise saying;

netuṁ vāṁchati yaḥ khalān pathi satāṁ sūktaiḥ sudhāsyaṁdibhiḥ Bh. 2.

6, R. 15. 97. —2. a Vedic hymn, as in puruṣasūkta &c. -darśin m. a

hymnseer, Vedic sage. -vāc f. 1. a hymn. —2. praise, a word of praise.

—uktiḥ f. 1. a good or friendly speech. —2. a good or clever saying.

—3. a correct sentence.

—uttara a. 1. very superior. —2. well towards the north.

—utthāna a. making good efforts, vigorous, active. (

—naṁ) vigorous effort or exertion.

—unmada, —unmāda a. quite mad or frantic.

—upasadana a. easy to be approached.

—upaskara a. furnished with good instruments.

—kaṁṭakā the aloe plant.

—kaṁḍuḥ itch.

—kaṁdaḥ 1. an onion. —2. a yam. —3. a sort of grass.

—kaṁdakaḥ onion.

—kara a. (rā or rī f.) 1. easy to be done, practicable, feasible;

vaktuṁ sukaraṁ kartuṁ (adhyavasātuṁ) duṣkaraṁ Ve. 3 ‘sooner said

than done.’ —2 easy to be managed. (

—rā) a tractable cow. (

—raṁ) charity, benevolence.

—karman a. 1. one whose deeds are righteous, virtuous, good. —2.

active, diligent. (—m.) N. of Viśvakarman.

—kala a. one who has acquired a great reputation for liberality in

giving and using (money &c.).

—kāṁḍaḥ the Kāravella plant.

—kāṁḍikā the Kāṇḍīra creeper.

—kāṁḍin a. 1. having beautiful stems. —2. beautifully joined. (—m.)

a bee.

—kāṣṭhaṁ firewood.

—kuṁdakaḥ an onion.

—kumāra a. 1. very delicate or soft, smooth. —2. beautifully young

or youthful. (

—raḥ) 1. a beautiful youth. —2. a kind of sugar-cane. —3. a kind of

grain (śyāmāka). —4 a kind of mustard. —5. the wild Champaka. (

—rā) 1. the double jasmine. —2. the plantain. —3. the great-

flowered jasmine.

—kumārakaḥ 1. a beautiful youth. —2. rice (śāli). (—kaṁ) the

Tamālapatra.

—kumārī the Navamallikā jasmine.

—kṛt a. 1. doing good, benevolent. —2. pious, virtuous, righteous.

—3. wise, learned. —4. fortunate, lucky. —5. making good sacrifices or

offerings (—m.) 1. a skilful worker. —2. N. of Tvaṣṭṛ.

—kṛta a. 1. done well or properly. —2. thoroughly done. —3. well-

made or constructed. —4. treated with kindness, assisted, befriended. —

5. virtuous, righteous, pious. —6. lucky, fortunate. (

—taṁ) 1. any good or virtuous act, kindness, favour, service;

nādatte kasyacitpāpaṁ kasyacitsukṛtaṁ vibhuḥ Bg. 5. 15, Me. 17. —2.

virtue, moral or religious merit; svargābhisaṁdhisukṛtaṁ vaṁcanāmiva

menire Ku. 6. 47; tacciṁtyamānaṁ sukṛtaṁ taveti R. 14. 16. —3. fortune,

auspiciousness. —4. recompense, reward.

—kṛtiḥ f. 1. well-doing, a good act. —2. kindness, virtue. —3.

practice of penance. —4. auspiciousness.

—kṛtin a. 1. acting well or kindly. —2. virtuous, pious, good,

righteous; saṁtaḥ saṁtu nirāpadaḥ sukṛtināṁ kīrtiściraṁ vardhatāṁ H. 4.

132; Bg. 7. 16. —3. wise, learned. —4. benevolent. —5. fortunate, lucky.

—kṛtyaṁ a good action; Pt. 2. 41.

—keśa(sa)raḥ the citron tree.

—kratuḥ 1. N. of Agni. —2. of Śiva. —3. of Indra. —4. of Mitra and

Varuṇa. —5. of the sun. —6. of Soma.

—gaṁ a. 1. going gracefully or well. —2. graceful, elegant. —3. easy

of access; Pt. 2. 144. —4. intelligible, easy to be understood (opp. durga).

(

—gaṁ) 1. ordure, feces. —2. happiness.

—gata a. 1. well-gone or passed. —2 well-bestowed. (

—taḥ) an epithet of Buddha.

—gaṁdhaḥ 1. fragrance, odour, perfume. —2. sulphur. —3. a trader.

(

—dhaṁ) 1. sandal. —2. small cumin seed. —3. a blue lotus. —4. a

kind of fragrant grass. (

—dhā) sacred basil.

—gaṁdhakaḥ 1. sulphur. —2. the red Tulasī1. —3. the orange. —4. a

kind of gourd.

—gaṁdhāraḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—gaṁdhi a. 1. sweet-smelling, fragrant, redolent with perfumes.

—2. virtuous, pious. (

—dhiḥ) 1. perfume, fragrance. —2. the Supreme Being. —3. a kind

of sweet-smelling mango. (

—dhi n.) 1. the root of long pepper. —2. a kind of fragrant grass. —

3. coriander seed. -triphalā 1. nutmeg. —2. areca nut. —3. cloves. -mūlaṁ

the root Uśīra. -mūṣikā the musk-rat.

—gaṁdhikaḥ 1. incense. —2. sulphur. —3. a kind of rice. (

—kaṁ) the white lotus.

—gama a. 1. easy of access, accessible. —2. easy. —3. plain,

intelligible.

—gahanā an enclosure round a place of sacrifice to exclude profane

access. -vṛttiḥ f. the same as above.

—gṛha a. (hī f.) having a beautiful house or abode, welllodged;

sugṛhī nirgṛṁhīkṛtā Pt. 1. 390.

—gṛhīta a. 1. held well or firmly, grasped. —2. used or applied

properly or auspiciously. -nāman a. 1. one whose name is auspiciously

invoked, one whose name it is auspicious to utter (as Bali, Yudhiṣṭhira), a

term used as a respectful mode of speaking; sugṛhītanāmnaḥ

bhaṭṭagopālasya pautraḥ Māl. 1.

—grāsaḥ a dainty morsel.

—grīva a. having a beautiful neck. (

—vaḥ) 1. a hero. —2. a swan. —3. a kind of weapon. —4. N. of one

of the four horses of Kṛṣṇa. —5. of Śiva. —6. of Indra. —7. N. of a

monkeychief and brother of Vāli. [By the advice of Kabandha Rāma went

to Sugrīva who told him how his brother had treated him and besought

his assistance in recovering his wife, promising at the same time that he

would assist Rāma in recovering his wife Sīta. Rāma, therefere, killed

Vāli, and installed Sugrīva on the throne. He then assisted Rāma with his

hosts of monkeys in conquering Rāvaṇa, and recovering Sīta.]. -īśaḥ N. of

Rāma.

—gla a. very weary or fatigued.

—cakṣus a. having good eyes, seeing well. (—m.) 1. a discerning or

wise man, learned man. —2. the glomerous fig-tree.

—carita, caritra a. well-conducted, well-behaved. (

—taṁ, -traṁ) 1. good conduct, virtuous deeds. —2. merit; tava

sucaritamaṁgulīya nūnaṁ pratanu S. 6. 10. (

—tā, —trā) a well-conducted, devoted, and virtuous wife.

—carman m. the Bhūrja tree.

—citrakaḥ 1. a king-fisher. —2. a kind of speckled snake.

—citrā a kind of gourd.

—ciṁtā, —ciṁtanaṁ deep thought, deep reflection or

consideration.

—ciram ind. for a very long time, very long.

—cirāyus m. a god, deity.

—cūṭī a pair of nippers or tongs.

—celakaḥ a fine cloth.

—chatraḥ N. of Śiva. (

—trā) the river Sutlej.

—jana a. 1. good, virtuous, respectable. —2. kind, benevolent. (

—naḥ) 1. a good or virtuous man, benevolent man. —2. a

gentleman. —3. N. of Indra’s charioteer.

—janatā 1. goodness, kindness, benevolence, virtue; aiśvaryasya

vibhūṣaṇaṁ sujanatā Bh. 2. 82. —2. a number of good men. —3. bravery,

—janman a. 1. of noble or respectable birth; yā kaumudī

nayanayorbhavataḥ sujanmā Māl. 1. 34. —2. legitimate, lawfully born.

—jalaṁ a lotus.

—jalpaḥ 1. a good speech. —2. a kind of speech thus described by

Ujjvalamaṇi; yatrārjavāt sagāṁbhīryaṁ sadainyaṁ sahacāpalam .

sotkaṁṭhaṁ ca hariḥ spṛṣṭaḥ sa sujalpo nigadyate … —jāta a. 1.

wellgrown, tall. —2. well made or produced. —3. of high birth. —4.

beautiful, lovely; Māl. 1. 16, R. 3. 8.

—tanu a. 1. having a beautiful body. —2. extremely delicate or

slender, very thin. —3. emaciated. (

—nuḥ, —nūḥ f.) a lovely lady; etāḥ sutanu mukha te sakhyaḥ

paśyaṁti hemakūṭagatāḥ V. 1. 10.

—taṁtrī a. 1. well-stringed. —2. (hence) melodious.

—tapas a. 1. one who practises austere penance. —2. having great

heat. (—m.) 1. an ascetic, a devotee, hermit, an anchorite. —2. the sun.

(—n.) an austere penance.

—tamāṁ ind. most excellently, best.

—tarāṁ ind. 1. better, more excellently. —2. exceedingly, very, very

much, excessively; tayā duhitrā sutarāṁ savitrī sphuratprabhāmaṁḍalayā

cakāśe Ku. 1. 24; sutarāṁ dayāluḥ R. 2. 53, 7. 21, 14. 9, 18. 24. —3. more

so, much more so; mayyapyāsthā na te cettvayi mama sutarāmeṣa rājan

gatosmi Bh. 3. 30. —4. consequently.

—tardanaḥ the (Indian) cuckoo.

—talaṁ 1. ‘immense depth’, N. of one of the seven regions below

the earth; see pātāla. —2. the foundation of a large building.

—tiktakaḥ the coral tree.

—tīkṣṇa a. 1. very sharp. —2. very pungent. —3. acutely painful. (

—kṣṇaḥ) 1. the Śigru tree. —2. N. of a sage; nāmnā

sutīkṣṇaścaritena dāṁtaḥ R. 13. 41. -daśanaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—tīrthaḥ 1. a good preceptor. —2. N. of Śiva.

—tuṁga a. very lofty or tall. (

—gaḥ) the cocoa-nut tree.

—tejas a. 1. very sharp. —2. very bright, or splendid. —3. very

mighty. (—m.) a worshipper of the sun.

—dakṣiṇa a. 1. very sincere or upright. —2. liberal or rich in

sacrificial gifts; Pt. 1. 310. (

—ṇā) N. of the wife of Dilīpa; tasya dākṣiṇyarūḍhena nāmnā

magadhavaṁśajā . patnī sudakṣiṇetyāsīt R. 1. 31, 3. 1

—daṁḍaḥ a cane, ratan.

—dat a. (tī f.) having handsome teeth.

—daṁtaḥ 1. a good tooth. —2. an actor, a dancer. (

—tī) the female elephant of the north-west quarter.

—darśana a. (nā or nī f.) 1. good-looking, beautiful, handsome. —2.

easily seen. (

—naḥ) the discus of Viṣṇu; as in kṛṣṇopyasudarśanaḥ K. —2. N. of

Śiva. —3. of mount Meru. —4. a vulture. (

—nī —naṁ) N. of Amarāvatī, Indra’s capital. (

—naṁ) N. of Jambudvīpa.

—darśanā 1. a handsome woman. —2. a woman. —3. an order, a

command. —4. a kind of drug.

—dā a. very bountiful.

—dāṁtaḥ a Buddhist.

—dāman a. one who gives liberally. (—m.) 1. a cloud. —2. a

mountain. —3. the sea. —4. N. of Indra’s elephant. —5. N. of a very poor

Brāhmaṇa who came to Dvāraka with only a small quantity of parched

rice as a present to his friend Kṛṣṇa, and was raised by him to wealth and

glory.

—dāyaḥ 1. a good or auspicious gift. —2. a special gift given on

particular solemn occasions. —3. one who offers such a gift.

—dinaṁ 1. a happy or auspicious day. —2. a fine day or weather

(opp. durdina); so sudināhaṁ in the same sense.

—dīrgha a. very long or extended. (

—rghā) a kind of cucumber.

—durlabha a. very scarce or rare.

—dvara a. very distant or remote. (sudūraṁ means 1. to a great

distance. —2. to a very high degree, very much. sudūrāt ‘from afar, from a

distance’).

—ṭṭaḍha a. very firm or hard, compact.

—dṛś a. having beautiful eyes. (—f.) a pretty woman.

—dhanvan a. having an excellent bow. (—m.) 1. a good archer or

bowman. —2. Ananta, the great serpent. —3. N. of Viśvakarman.

—dharman a. attentive to duties. (—f.) the council or assembly of

gods. (—m.) 1. the hall or palace of Indra. —2. one diligent in properly

maintaining his family.

—dharmā —rmī the council or assembly of gods (devasabhā);

yayāvudīritālokaḥ sudharmānavamāṁ sabhāṁ R. 17. 27.

—dhita a. Ved. 1. perfect, secure. —2. kind, good. —3. happy,

prosperous. —4. well-aimed or directed (as a weapon).

—dhī a. having a good understanding, wise, clever, intelligent. (

—dhīḥ) a wise or intelligent man, learned man or pandit. (—f.) a

good understanding, good sense, intelligence. -upāsyaḥ 1. a particular

kind of royal palace. —2. N. of an attendant on Kṛṣṇa. (

—syaṁ) the club of Balarama. -upāsyā 1. a woman. —2. N. of Umā,

or of one of her female companions. —3. a sort of pigment.

—dhūmravarṇā one of the seven tongues of fire.

—naṁdā N. of a woman.

—nayaḥ 1. good conduct. —2. good policy.

—nayana a. having beautiful eyes. (

—naḥ) a deer. (

—nā) 1. a woman having beautiful eyes. —2. a woman in general.

—nābha a. 1. having a beautiful navel. —2. having a good nave or

centre. (

—bhaḥ) 1. a mountain. —2. the Maināka mountain q. v.

—nibhṛta a. very lonely or private. (

—taṁ) ind. very secretly or closely, very narrowly, privately.

—niścalaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—nīta 1. well-conducted, well-behaved. —2. polite, civil. (

—taṁ) 1. good conduct or behaviour. —2. good policy or prudence.

—nītiḥ f. 1. good conduct, good manners, propriety. —2. good

policy. —3. N. of the mother of Dhruva, q. v.

—nītha a. well-disposed, well-conducted, righteous, virtuous, good.

(

—thaḥ) 1. a Brāhmaṇa. —2. N. of Śiśupāla q. v. —3. Ved. a good

leader.

—nīla a. very black or blue. (

—laḥ) the pomegranate tree. (

—lā) common flax. (—laṁ), —nīlakaḥ a blue gem.

—netra a. having good or beautiful eyes.

—nau n. water (?).

—pakva a. 1. well-cooked. —2. thoroughly matured or ripe. (

—kvaḥ) a sort of fragrant mango.

—patnī a woman having a good husband.

—pathaḥ 1. a good road. —2. a good course. —3. good conduct.

—pathin m. (nom. sing. supaṁthāḥ) a good road.

—padmā orris root.

—parṇa a. (rṇā or rṇī f.) 1. wellwinged. —2. having good or

beautiful leaves. (

—rṇaḥ) 1. a ray of the sun. —2. a class of bird-like beings of a

semi-divine character. —3. any supernatural bird. —4. an epithet of

Garuḍa. —5. a cock. -ketuḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—parṇakaḥ = suparṇa. —parṇā, —parṇī f. 1. a number of lotuses.

—2. a pool abounding with lotuses. —3. N. of the mother of Garuḍa.

—paryāpta a. 1. very spacious. —2. well-fitted.

—parvan a. well-jointed, having many joints or knots. (—m.) 1. a

bamboo. —2. an arrow. —3. a god, deity. —4. a special lunar day (as the

day of full or new moon, and the 8th and 14th day of each fortnight). —5.

smoke. (—f.) white Dūrvā grass.

—palāyita a. 1. completely fled or run away. —2. skilfully retreated.

—pātraṁ 1. a good or suitable vessel, worthy receptacle. —2. a fit

or competent person, any one well-fitted for an office, an able person.

—pād (pād or padī f.) having good or handsome feet.

—pārśvaḥ 1. the wavedleaf fig-tree (plakṣa). —2. N. of the son of

Sampāti, elder brother of Jaṭāyu.

—pītaṁ a carrot. (

—taḥ) the fifth Muhūrta.

—puṁsī a woman having a good husband.

—puṣpa a. (ṣpā or ṣpī f.) having beautiful flowers. (

—ṣpaḥ) 1. the coral tree. —2. the Śirīṣa tree. (

—ṣpī) the plantain tree. (

—ṣpaṁ) 1. cloves. —2. the menstrual excretion.

—puṣpita a. 1. well blossomed, being in full flower. —2. having the

hair thrilling or bristling.

—pūra a. 1. easy to be filled; Pt. 1. 25. —2. well-filling. (

—raḥ) a kind of citron (bījapūra). —pūrakaḥ the Baka-pushpa tree.

—prakāśa a. 1. manifest, apparent. —2. public, notorious.

—pratarkaḥ a sound judgment

—pratibhā spirituous liquor.

—pratiṣṭha a. 1. standing well. —2. very celebrated, renowned,

glorious, famous. (

—ṣṭhā) 1. good position. —2. good re putation, fame, celebrity. —3.

establishment, erection. —4. installation, consecration.

—pratiṣṭhita a. 1. well-established. —2. consecrated —3.

celebrated. (

—taḥ) the Udumbara tree.

—pratiṣṇāta a. 1. thoroughly purified. —2. well-versed in. —3. well-

investigated, clearly ascertained or determined.

—pratīka a. 1. having a beautiful shape, lovely, handsome. —2.

having a beautiful trunk. (

—kaḥ) 1. an epithet of Kāmadeva. —2. of Śiva. —3. of the elephant

of the north-east quarter.

—prapāṇaṁ a good tank.

—prabha a. very brilliant, glorious. (

—bhā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—prabhātaṁ 1. an auspicious dawn or day-break; diṣṭyā

suprabhātamadya yadayaṁ devo ṭṭaṣṭaḥ U. 6 —2. the earliest dawn.

—prayuktaśaraḥ a skilful archer.

—prayogaḥ 1. good management or application. —2. close contact.

—3. dexterity.

—prasannaḥ N. of Kubera.

—prasāda a. very gracious or propitious. (

—daḥ) N. of Śiva.

—priya a. very much liked, agreeable. (

—yaḥ) (in prosody) a foot of two short syllables. (

—yā) 1. a charming woman. —2. a beloved mistress.

—phala a. 1. very fruitful, very productive. —2. very fertile. (

—laḥ) 1. the pomegranate tree. —2. the jujube. —3. the Karṇikara

tree. —4. a kind of bean. (

—lā) 1. a pumpkin, gourd. —2. the plantain tree. —3. a variety of

brown grape. —4. colocynth.

—phenaḥ a cuttlefish bone.

—baṁdhaḥ sesamum.

—bala a. very powerful. (

—laḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. —2. N. of the father of Śakuni.

—bāṁdhavaḥ N. of Śiva.

—bāhu a. 1. handsome-armed. —2. strong-armed. (

—huḥ) N. of a demon, brother of Mārīcha, who had become a

demon by the curse of Agastya. He with Mārīcha began to disturb the

sacrifice of Viśvāmitra, but was defeated by Rāma and Lakṣmaṇa; see R.

11. 29.

—bodha a. 1. easily apprehended or understood. (

—dhaḥ) good information or advice.

—brahmaṇyaḥ 1. an epithet of Kārtikeya. —2. N. of one of the

sixteen priests employed at a sacrifice.

—bhaga a. 1. very fortunate or prosperous, happy, blessed. highly

favoured. —2. lovely, charming, beautiful, pretty; na tu grīṣmasyaivaṁ

subhagamaparāddhaṁ yuvatiṣu S. 3. 9; Ku. 4. 34, R. 11. 80; Māl. 9. —3.

pleasant, grateful, agreeable, sweet; śravaṇasubhaga M. 3. 4, S. 1. 3. —4.

beloved, liked, amiable, dear; sumukhi subhagaḥ paśyan sa tvāmupaitu

kṛtārthatāṁ Gīt. 5. 5. illustrious. (

—gaḥ) 1. borax. —2. the Aśoka tree. —3. the Champaka tree. —4.

red amaranth. (

—gaṁ) good fortune. -mānin, subhagaṁmanya a. —1. considering

oneself fortunate, amiable, pleasing; vācālaṁ māṁ na khalu

subhagaṁmanyabhāvaḥ karoti Me. 94. —2. vain, flattering oneself.

—bhagā a woman beloved by her husband, a favourite wife. —2. an

honoured mother —3. a kind of wild jasmine. —4 turmeric. —5. the

Priyangu creeper. —6 the holy basil. -sutaḥ the son of a favourite wife.

—bhaṁgā the cocoa-nut tree.

—bhadra a. very happy or fortunate. (

—draḥ) N. of Viṣṇu. (

—drā) N. of the sister of Balarāma and Kṛṣṇa, married to Arjuna q.

v. She bore to him a son named Abhimanyu.

—bhadrakaḥ 1. a car for carrying the image of a god. —2. the Bilva

tree.

—bhāṣita a. 1. spoken well or eloquent. (

—taṁ) 1. fine speech, eloquence, learning; jīrṇamaṁge

subhāṣitaṁ Bh. 3. 2. —2. a witty saying, an apophthegm, an apposite

saying; subhāṣitena gītena yuvatīnāṁ ca līlayā . mano na bhidyate yasya

sa vai mukto’thavā paśuḥ Subbish. —3. a good remark; bālādapi

subhāṣitaṁ (grāhyaṁ). —bhikṣaṁ 1. good alms, successful begging. —2.

abundance of food, an abundant supply of provisions, plenty of corn &c.

—bhīrakaḥ the Palāśa tree.

—bhūtikaḥ the Bilva tree.

—bhrū a. having beautiful eyebrows. (

—bhrūḥ f.) a lovely woman. (N. B. The vocative singular of this

word is strictly subhrūḥ; but subhru is used by writers like Bhaṭṭi,

Kālidāsa, and Bha vabhūti; hā pitaḥ kvāsi he subhru Bk. 6. 17; so V. 3. 22;

Ku. 5. 43; Māl. 3. 8.

—maṁgala a. 1. very auspicious. —2. abounding in sacrifices.

—mati a. very wise. (

—tiḥ f.) 1. a good mind or disposition, kindness, benevolence,

friendship. —2. a favour of the gods. —3. a gift, blessing. —4. a prayer,

hymn. —5. a wish or desire. —6. N. of the wife of Sagara and mother of

60,000 sons.

—madanaḥ the mango tree.

—madhuraṁ a very sweet or gentle speech, agreeable words.

—madhya, -madhyama a. slender-waisted.

—madhyā, -madhyamā a graceful woman.

—mana a. very charming, lovely, beautiful. (

—naḥ) 1. wheat. —2. the thorn-apple. (

—nā) the great-flowered jasmine.

—manas a. 1. good-minded, of a good disposition, benevolent. —2.

well-pleased, satisfied. (—m.) 1. a god, divinity. —2. a learned man. —3. a

student of the Vedas. —4. wheat. —5. the Nimba tree. (—f., n.; said to be

pl. only by some) a flower; ramaṇīya eṣa vaḥ sumanasāṁ saṁniveśaḥ

Māl. 1 (where the adjectival sense in 1 is also intended); kiṁ sevyate

sumanasāṁ manasāpi gaṁdhaḥ kastūrikājananaśaktibhṛtā mṛgeṇa R. G.;

Śi. 6. 66. (—f.) 1. the great-flowered jasmine. —2 the Mālatī creeper. —

phalaḥ the wood-apple. -phalaṁ nutmeg.

—maṁtu a. 1. advising well. —2. very faulty or blameable. (—m.) a

good adviser.

—maṁtraḥ N. of the charioteer of Daśaratha.

—mitrā 1. N. of one of the wives of Daśaratha and mother of

Lakṣmaṇa and Śatrughna

—mukha a. (khā or khī f.) 1. having a beautiful face, lovely. —2.

pleasing. —3. disposed to, eager for; Ki. 6. 42. (

—khaḥ) 1. a learned man. —2. an epithet of Garuḍa. —3. of Gaṇeśa.

—4. of Śiva. (

—khaṁ) the scratch of a finger-nail. (

—khā, —khī) 1. a handsome woman. —2. a mirror.

—mūlakaṁ a carrot.

—mekhalaḥ the Munja grass.

—medhas a. having a good understanding, wise, intelligent. (—m.)

a wise man. (—f.) heart-pea.

—meruḥ 1. the sacred mountain Meru, q. v. —2. N. of Śiva.

—yavasaṁ beautiful grass, good pasturage.

—yāmunaḥ N. of Viṣṇu.

—yuktaḥ N. of Śiva.

—yodhanaḥ an epithet of Duryodhana q. v.

—raktakaḥ 1. a kind of red chalk. —2 a kind of mango tree.

—raṁgaḥ 1. good colour. —2. the orange. —3. a hole cut in a house

(suraṁgā also in this sense). (

—gaṁ) 1. red sanders. —2. vermilion. -dhātuḥ red chalk. -yuj m. a

house-breaker.

—raṁgikā the Mūrvā plant.

—rajaḥphalaḥ the jackfruit tree.

—raṁjanaḥ the betel-nuttree.

—rata a. 1. much sported. —2. playful. —2. much enjoyed. —4.

compassionate, tender. (

—taṁ) 1. great delight or enjoyment. —2. copulation, sexual union

or intercourse, coition; suratamṛditā bālavanitā Bh. 2. 44. -tālī 1. a

female-messenger, a go-between. —2. a chaplet, garland for the head. —

prasaṁgaḥ addiction to amorous pleasures; Ku. 1. 19.

—ratiḥ f. great enjoyment or satisfaction.

—rasa a. 1. well-flavoured, juicy, savoury. —2. sweet. —3. elegant

(as a composition). (

—saḥ, —sā) the plant siṁdhuvāra. (—sā) N. of Durgā. (

—sā, -saṁ) the sacred basil. (

—saṁ) 1. gummyrrh. —2. fragrant grass.

—rājan a. governed by a good king; surājñi deśe rājanvān Ak. (—

m.) 1. a good king. —2. a divinity.

—rāṣṭraṁ N. of a country on the western side of India (Surat). —

jaṁ a kind of poison. -brahmaḥ a Brāhmaṇa of Surāṣṭra.

—rūpa a. 1. well-formed, handsome, lovely; surūpā kanyā. —2.

wise, learned. (

—paḥ) an epithet of Śiva.

—rebha a. finevoiced; Ki. 15. 16. (

—bhaṁ) tin.

—lakṣaṇa a. 1. having auspicious or beautiful marks. —2. fortunate.

(

—ṇaṁ) 1. observing, examining carefully, determining,

ascertaining. —2. a good or auspicious mark.

—labha a. 1. easy to be obtained, easy of attainment, attainable,

feasible; na sulabhā sakaleṁdumukhī ca sā V. 2. 9;

idamasulabhavastuprārthanādurnivāraṁ 2. 6. —2. ready for, adapted to,

fit, suitable; niṣṭhyūtaścaraṇopabhogasulabho lākṣārasaḥ kenacit S. 4. 4.

—3. natural to, proper for; mānuṣatāsulabho laghimā K. -kopa a. easily

provoked, irascible.

—locana a. fineeyed. (

—naḥ) a deer. (

—nā) 1. a beautiful woman. —2. N. of the wife of Indrajit.

—lohakaṁ brass.

—lohita a. very red. (

—tā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—vaktraṁ 1. a good face or mouth. —2 correct utterance. (

—ktraḥ) N. of Śiva.

—vacanaṁ, —vacas n. eloquence.

—varcakaḥ, —varcikaḥ —kā, —varcin m. natron, alkali.

—varcalaṁ linseed.

—varcasaḥ N. of Śiva.

—varṇa see s. v.

—vasaṁtaḥ 1. an agreeable vernal season. —2. the day of full

moon in the month of Chaitra, or a festival celebrated in honour of

Kāmadeva in that month (also suvasaṁtakaḥ in this sense).

—vaha a. 1. bearing well. patient. —2. patient, enduring. —3. easy

to be borne. (

—hā) a lute.

—vāsaḥ 1. N. of Śiva. —2. a pleasant dwelling. —3. an agreeable

perfume or odour.

—vāsinī 1. a woman married or single who resides in her father’s

house. —2. a married woman whose husband is alive.

—vikrāṁta a. very valiant or bold, chivalrous. (

—taḥ) a hero. (

—taṁ) heroism.

—vid m. a learned man, shrewd person. (—f.) a shrewd or clever

woman.

—vidaḥ 1. an attendant on the women’s apartments. —2. a king.

—vidat m. a king.

—viditraṁ 1. a household, family —2. wealth.

—vidallaḥ an attendant on the women’s apartments (wrongly for

sauvidalla q. v). (

—llaṁ) the women’s apartments, harem.

—vidallā a married woman.

—vidha a. of a good kind.

—vidham ind. easily.

—vinīta a. well-trained, modest. (

—tā) a tractable cow.

—vihita a. 1. well-placed, well-deposited. —2. well-furnished,

wellsupplied, well-provided, well-arranged; suvihitaprayogatayā āryasya

na kimapi parihāsyate S. 1; kalahaṁsamakaraṁdapraveśāvasare

tatsuvihitaṁ Māl. 1. —3. well done or performed.

—vī (bī) ja a. having good seed. (

—jaḥ) 1. N. of Śiva. —2. the poppy. (

—jaṁ) good seed.

—vīrāmlaṁ sour rice-gruel.

—vīrya a. 1. having great vigour. —2. of heroic strength, heroic,

chivalrous. (

—ryaṁ) 1. great heroism. —2. abundance of heroes. —3. the fruit of

the jujube. (

—ryā) wild cotton.

—bṛkti f. 1. a pure offering. —2. a hymn of praise.

—vṛtta a. 1. well-behaved, virtuous, good; mayi tasya suvṛtta

vartate laghusaṁdeśapadā sarasvatī R. 8. 77. —2. well-rounded,

beautifully globular or round; mṛdunātisuvṛttena sumṛṣṭenātihāriṇā .

modakenāpi kiṁ tena niṣpattiryasya sevayā; or sumukho’pi suvṛttopi

sanmārgapatito’pi ca . mahatāṁ pādalagno’pi vyathayatyeva kaṁṭakaḥ

(where all the adjectives are used in a double sense). (

—ttaṁ) a good or virtuous conduct; Pt. 1. 69.

—vela a. 1. tranquil, still. —2. humble, quiet. (

—laḥ) N. of the Trikūṭa mountain.

—vrata a. strict in the observance of religious vows, strictly

religious or virtuous. (

—taḥ) a religious student. (

—tā) 1. a virtuous wife. —2. a tractable cow, one easily milked.

—śaṁsa a. wellspoken of, famous, glorious, commendable.

—śaka a. capable of being easily done.

—śalyaḥ the Khadira tree.

—śākaṁ undried ginger.

—śāradaḥ N. of Śiva.

—śāsita a. kept under control, well-controlled.

—śikṣita a. well-taught trained, well-disciplined.

—śikhaḥ fire. (

—khā) 1. a peacock’s crest. —2. a cock’s comb.

—śītaṁ yellow sandal-wood.

—śīma a. cold, frigid. (

—maḥ) coldness.

—śīla a. good-tempered, amiable. (

—lā) 1. N. of the wife of Yama. —2. N. of one of the eight favourite

wives of Kṛṣṇa.

—śrīkā the gum olibanum tree.

—śruta a. 1. well heard. —2. versed in the Vedaś. (

—taḥ) N. of the author of a system of medicine, whose work,

together with that of Charaka, is regarded as the olddest medical

authority, and held in great esteem in India even to this day.

—śliṣṭa 1. well-arranged or united. —2. well-fitted; Māl. 1.

—śleṣaḥ close union or embrace.

—satyā N. of the wife of Janaka.

—saṭṭaś agreeable to look at.

—sannata a. welldirected (as an arrow).

—saraṇa. N. of Śiva.

—saha a. 1. easy to be borne. —2. bearing or enduring well. (

—haḥ) an epithet of Śiva.

—sāra a. having good sap or essence. (

—raḥ) 1. good sap, essence, or substance. —2. competence. —3.

the red-flowering Khadira tree.

—sāravat n. crystal.

—sikatā 1. good sand. —2. gravel. —3. sugar.

—stha a. 1. well-suited, being in a good sense. —2. in health,

healthy, faring well. —3. in good or or prosperous circumstances,

prosperous. —4. happy, fortunate. (

—sthaṁ) a happy state, well-being; susthe ko vā na paḍitaḥ H. 3.

121. (susthita in the same sense).

—sthatā —sthitiḥ f. 1. good condition, wellbeing, welfare,

happiness. —2. health, convalescence.

—smita a. pleasantly smiling. (

—tā) a woman with a pleased or smiling countenance.

—svapanaḥ an epithet of Śiva.

—svara a. 1. melodious, harmonious. —2. loud.

—hita a. 1. very fit or suitable, appropriate. —2. beneficial, salutary.

—3. friendly, affectionate. —4. satisfied. (

—tā) one of the seven tongues of fire.

—hṛda a. having a kind heart, cordial, friendly, loving, affectionate.

(—m.) 1. a friend; suhṛdaḥ paśya vasaṁta kiṁ sthitaṁ Ku. 4. 27;

maṁdāyaṁte na khalu suhṛdāmabhyupetārthakṛtyāḥ Me. 38. —2. an ally.

-bhedaḥ the separation of friends. -vākyaṁ the counsel of a friend.

—hṛdaḥ a friend.

—hṛdaya a. 1. good-hearted. —2. dear, affectionate, loving.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

su 1 sunoti DHĀTUP. 27, 1 (abhiṣave, saṁdhākledapīḍāmanthe VOP.).

sunota ṚV. 7, 32, 8. sunotana 5, 34, 1. sunuta 10, 14, 13. sunavat und

sunvat 27, 22. sunvant partic.; med. sunve 3. sg. 7, 29, 1. 9, 88, 1.

sunvire, sunudhvam, sunavai 8, 80, 1. suvāna partic.; suṣāva, suṣuma,

suṣuviva (VOP. 12, Anf.), suṣuvaṁs, suṣuvuṣas 10, 94, 14. suṣvāṇa med.

4, 29, 2. 10, 148, 1. passivisch 9, 6, 8. sota, sotana, suṣvati 3. pl. (wohl

praes.) 2, 16, 5. asāvīt, asoṣṭa und asāvīt P. 7, 2, 72. VOP. 11, 1. 12, Anf.

soṣyati und saviṣyati 8, 46. 12, Anf. soṣyant KĀTY. ŚR. 16, 6, 10. (abhi)

saviṣyant ŚAT. BR. 9, 5, 1, 66. infin. sotave (s. auch sotu) ṚV. 1, 28, 1.

pass. sūyate, asāvi; partic. suta. «auspressen, keltern» (den Soma): sunu

somam ṚV. 1, 28, 6. 101. 9. 137, 1. yaṁ te suṣāva (adriḥ) 7, 22, 1.

andhaḥ 4, 16, 1. 5, 30, 6. 7, 21, 1. athā sunudhvaṁ savanaṁ madāya 4,

35, 4. havaṁ yajamānasya sunvataḥ 6, 60, 15. AV. 6, 6, 1. 54, 3. sotā hi

somamadribhiḥ 8, 1, 17. asāvyaṁśuḥ 9, 62, 4. soma u ṣuvāṇaḥ sotṛbhiḥ

107, 8. grāvabhiḥ ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 2, 14. payasā 15. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 6, 23.

soṣyatyasoṣṭa (zugleich zu 4. su) CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5.

śaśvatsūyamānātsūryaḥ MAITRJUP. 6, 7. suṣāva ca

vahūnsomānsomasaṁsthāstatāna ca MBH. 1, 4695. sarve sunvantaḥ P. 3,

2, 132, Schol. surāṁ sunoti so v. a. «braut» ebend. — asunvan AIT. BR. 4,

17 fehlerhaft für asanvan: s. u. 1. san. — suta partic.: suto aśnaiḥ ṚV. 8, 2.

2. 2, 11, 11. 4, 18, 3. aṁśu 25, 3. soma 41, 3. 6, 40, 1. sutāsa indavaḥ 8,

6, 21. sute adhvare 10, 94, 14. ŚAT. BR. 12, 8, 1, 5. pibasva somaṁ

sutamadya taṁ mayā MBH. 14, 277. sute somasahasre 1, 8042. sutam

Spr. (II) 2694 wohl fehlerhaft für hutam. masc. sg. und pl. «der Saft» d. h.

Soma NAIGH. 2, 7. suṣvāṇaḥ pavate sutaḥ ṚV. 9, 6, 8. parīto ṣiñcatā

sutam 107, 1. 2. 1, 135, 1. 2, 15, 1. 4, 32, 11. prātaḥ sutamapibaḥ 35, 7.

madhumantaḥ 7, 90, 1. 10, 27, 2. TS. 7, 3, 11, 3. ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 7, 10, 13.

AV. 4, 29, 2. ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. -tejas 10, 6, 1, 8. = somayāga BHĀG.

P. 7, 15, 48. neutr. CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 1. sava, 1. savana, asuta,

adriṣuta, jambhasuta, suṣuta.

adhi dass.: adhi suvāno nahuṣyebhirinduḥ ṚV. 9, 91, 2. — Vgl.

adhiṣavaṇa.

abhi, -suṇoti, abhyaṣuṇot P. 8, 3, 63. 65. -soṣyati, abhyasoṣyat 117. 1)

«kelternd verarbeiten, pressen, mit Steinen ausschlagen u.s.w.» ŚAT. BR.

1, 1, 4, 7. 2, 2, 2, 1. 4, 4, 15. 3, 3, 2, 6. 4, 5, 10, 2. abhiṣuṇvanta āsate

AIT. BR. 4, 14. 3, 15. 7, 17. plākṣāṇi 30. rājānam 32. ṛjīṣam TS. 6, 1, 6, 4.

3, 2, 2, 1. havirdhāne carmannadhi grāvabhirabhiṣutya 6, 2, 11, 4. ghnanti

vā etatsomaṁ yadabhiṣuṇvanti 4, 4, 4. 5, 1. sa yadyabhiṣūyamāṇaḥ

kiṁcidāpadyate ŚAT. BR. 12, 6, 1, 21. KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 5, 1. 10, 3, 12.

abhiṣutya R. 1, 13, 5, v. l. abhiṣūya (so ed. Bomb.) somam MBH. 14,

2624. some vṛthābhiṣūyamāṇe 13, 372. «mit Flüssigkeit ansetzen und

ausdrücken»: yāni caivābhiṣūyante puṣpamūlaphalaiḥ śubhaiḥ M. 5, 10.

kṣīreṇābhiṣutya (v. l. abhiplutya) SUŚR. 1, 317, 12. kiṇvapiṣṭam 2, 73, 17.

partic. abhiṣuta ŚAT. BR. 2, 4, 4, 16. 4, 1, 1, 15. 6, 1, 9. 14, 3, 2, 30.

KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 1, 9. LĀṬY. 1, 9, 20. — 2) «bespritzen»: abhisoṣyantaṁ

raktai rakṣāṁsi BHAṬṬ. 9, 90. — caus. -ṣāvayati P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 3,

Schol. — Vgl. abhiṣava fg., -ṣuta, -ṣotar, -susūs.

ā «keltern» u. s. w.: ā sotā pari ṣiñcata ṚV. 9, 108, 7. yo asmai

tīvrānsomāṁ āsunoti 10, 42, 5. ŚAT. BR. 12, 7, 3, 6. 12. tasmāttava

sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND. UP. 5, 12, 1. — Vgl. 2.

āsava, āsāva. āsāvya (BHAṬṬ. 6, 64). 2. āsuti.

ud «aufregen»: utsunoṣīkṣamāṇānāṁ kandukakrīḍayā manaḥ BHĀG. P.

3, 20, 35. Der Bedeutung nach eher zu 2. su (wie auch utsava).

ni desid. vgl. nisusūs.

nis, niḥṣuṇoti P. 8, 3, 65, Vārtt. 1, Schol.

pari, -ṣuṇoti, paryaṣuṇot, -soṣyati, paryasoṣyat Schol. zu P. 8, 3, 63.

65. 117. in Stellen wie ṚV. 9, 10, 4. 87, 7 ist die Präposition zum Verbum

finitum zu ziehen.

pra «fortkeltern»; partic. «fortgesetzt gepresst, der» Soma «einer nicht

bloss einmaligen, sondern andauernden Kelterung»: pūrṇamāse vai

devānāṁ sutasteṣāmetamardhamāsaṁ prasutaḥ TS. 2, 5, 5, 4. aharahaḥ

sutaḥ prasuto bhavati ŚAT. BR. 14, 5, 1, 3. 4, 1, 2, 6. saṁvatsaram

PAÑCAV. BR. 25, 5, 1. 2. 18, 5. KĀTY.ŚR. 6, 6, 27. 8, 10. 7, 1, 26. LĀṬY.

3, 3, 29. 7, 8. tasmāttava sutaṁ prasutamāsutaṁ kule dṛśyate CHĀND.

UP. 5, 12, 1. medial: dvādaśāhaṁ prasuto bhūtvā AIT. BR. 4, 24. — Vgl.

1. prasava, prasut. — caus. «fortgesetzt keltern lassen»: prasāvayet

NIDĀNAS. 5, 11, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 284.

vi, vyaṣāvīt; visoṣyati und visaviṣyati VOP. 8, 45. 12, Anf. «zerkeltern»:

suṣvāṇāso vyadribhiḥ ṚV. 9, 101, 11.

sam «gleichzeitig» (Soma) «keltern»: yau dvau saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4,

6, 1. saṁsuta TS. 7, 5, 5, 1. KĀṬH. 34, 4. PAÑCAV. BR. 9, 4, 1. — Vgl.

saṁsava, saṁsutasoma.

abhisam «gleichzeitig keltern für» (acc.): ekaṁ vā etāvindramabhi

saṁsunutaḥ TBR. 1, 4, 6, 1.

su (sū), savati (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ) DHĀTUP. 22, 43. suvati 28, 115

(preraṇe, VOP. kṣepe). suvatāt; med. (in den BRĀHMAṆA): suvate 3. pl.

ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 3, 13. suvāntai 14. suvante TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. suvai, suvāvahai

P. 7, 3, 88, Schol.; später (auch ŚAT. BR.; s. u. pra) sauti DHĀTUP. 24,

32 (prasavaiśvaryayoḥ). sāviṣat (ved. P. 3, 1, 34, Vārtt., Schol.), asāvīt P.

7, 3, 96, Schol. VOP. 13, 1. sāvīs; suṣuve AV. pass.: sūyate, sūyai; partic.

suta ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 5. 4, 3, 14. sūta (= īrita, prerita H. an. 2, 208.

MED. t. 72. fg.) in nṛṣūta; s. auch unter pari und pra. («in Bewegung

setzen), veranlassen, zum Vorschein bringen; bescheeren, schicken» (von

Savitar’s Wirkung); «aufstellen, bestimmen, weihen für Etwas;

Ermächtigung geben zu Etwas»; med. «sich weihen» u. s. w. «lassen»:

savitā suvāti ṚV. 7, 40, 1. śreṣṭhaṁ savaṁ savitā sāviṣannaḥ 1, 164, 26.

AV. 6, 1, 3. devebhyo hi prathamamamṛtatvaṁ suvasi bhāgam ṚV. 4, 54,

2. fgg. 5, 42, 3. 82, 4. vāmamasmabhyaṁ sāvīḥ 6, 71, 6. yadadya sūra

udite suvati savitā bhagaḥ 7, 66, 4. AV. 7, 14, 3. 14, 1, 33. 19, 8, 4. yathā

sindhurnadīnāṁ sāmrājyaṁ suṣuve 14, 1, 43. suṣuvāṇa «in der Weihe

begriffen, geweiht» TS. 2, 1, 9, 1 (P. 3, 2, 106, Schol., wo suṣuvāṇam zu

lesen ist). 5, 6, 3, 4. 7, 5, 15, 2. TBR. 1, 8, 1, 1. ŚAT. BR. 5, 4, 3, 23. 4, 8.

5, 2, 1. PAÑCAV. BR. 18, 9, 1. 10, 1. pass.: yo vai somena sūyate (=

niṣpadyate Comm.) TBR. 2, 7, 5, 1. sūyate ha vā asya kṣatram AIT. BR.

8, 5. ŚAT. BR. 5, 3, 1, 3. 3, 11. 15. 9, 3, 4, 6. agnisavena suto bhavati 9.

sarvaṁ vastatsutam «zu all diesem seid ihr ermächtigt» 13, 4, 2, 17.

sūyate vā eṣa yo ‘gniṁ cinute TS. 5, 6, 3, 1. yasmādeveme

candraṛkṣagrahasaṁvatsarādayaḥ sūyante (= abhiṣūyante āpyāyante

Comm.) so v. a. «in Thätigkeit gesetzt werden» MAITRJUP. 6, 16. mā na

sāvīrmahāstrāṇi so v. a. «schleudere» BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — prajāpateḥ sutaṁ

rayiṣṭham N. eines Sāman Ind. St.3,225,a. — Vgl. 2. sava, 2. savana, 1.

savitar, savīman.

anu «nach Andern antreiben» u. s. w.: paśūn ŚAT. BR. 5, 5, 4, 19. anu

ṣva (vgl. unter nis) TAITT. ĀR. 2, 6, 4 falsch; vgl. AV. 6, 121, 4. 117, 3.

apa «wegschicken, vertreiben» ṚV. 10, 37, 4. apāmīvāṁ savitā sāviṣat

100, 8. yattatraino apa tatsuvāmi AV. 6, 119, 3. VS. 35, 11.

abhi, -ṣuvati, abhyaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. «weihen für» (acc.): oṣadhīḥ

ŚAT. BR. 5, 2, 3, 9. «begaben mit»: pāpmanaivainamabhiṣuvati KĀṬH. 13,

2. — desid. -susūṣati P. 8, 3, 64, Vārtt. 1, Schol.

ā «zutheilen, zusenden, schicken»: von Savitar ṚV. 1, 110, 3. a

smabhyamā suva sarvatātim 3, 54, 11. 56, 6. saubhagam 4, 54, 6. 5, 82,

5. dāśuṣe vāmam 6, 71, 4. vasūni 7, 45, 3. 10, 35, 7. vayaḥ 100, 3. AV. 2,

29, 2. 7, 14, 3. 4, 24, 5. ŚAT. BR. 13, 4, 2, 9. med. ṚV. 7, 38, 2. PAÑCAV.

BR. 21, 10, 15. ā suvorjam (agne) ṚV. 9, 66, 19. (indraḥ) ā

sāviṣadarśasānāya śarum «sende» so v. a. «werfe auf» 10, 99, 7.

«herbeischaffen, hercitiren»: ā te prāṇaṁ suvāmasi AV. 7, 53, 6. — Vgl. 1.

āsava, āsavitar und 1. āsuti.

ud «aufwärts gehen heissen»: ūrdhvāmeva varuṇamenimutsuvati

KĀṬH. 19, 5.

ni, partic. -ṣuta «hineingegeben, eingeworfen»: camase ‘ṣṭātayāni

niṣutāni bhavanti AIT. BR. 8, 5.

nis «fortscheuchen, fortgehen heissen»: duḥṣvapnyaṁ duritaṁ niḥ

ṣvāsmat (suva) AV. 6, 121, 1. 7, 83, 4. 19, 57, 2. 1, 81, 1. 2.

niritastatsuvantu ṚV. 7, 50, 3.

parā «wegscheuchen» u. s. w.: parā ṛṇā sāvīḥ ṚV. 2, 28, 9. duritāni

parā suva 5, 82, 5. 10, 137, 4. AV. 6, 127, 3. 7, 53, 6. 19, 39, 10. VS. 16.

5. TS. 1, 3, 14, 4.

pari, -ṣuvati, paryaṣuvat P. 8, 3, 63. 65. partic. «geheissen, (heraus)

getrieben» (vom Grase): devānāṁ pariṣūtamasi varṣavṛddhamasi TS. 1,

1, 2, 1. TBR. 3, 2, 2, 4. iti («bei Gelegenheit dieses Spruches»)

darbhānpariṣauti ĀPAST. in TS. Comm. 1, 53, 3 v. u. so v. a.

«zusammenraffen.» — Vgl. pariṣūti.

pra «in Bewegung bringen, erregen, zur Thätigkeit rufen» (namentlich

von Savitar gesagt); «heissen, veranlassen; Jmd Etwas verstatten,

überlassen»: niveśayaṁ ca prasuvaṁ ca bhūma ṚV. 7, 45, 1. 77, 1. 4, 53,

3. 5, 82, 9. prāsāvīddevaḥ savitā jagatpṛthak 1, 157, 1. arthamityai 124,

1. bhadraṁ dvipade 5, 81, 2. matim 9, 21, 7. pra vo grāvāṇaḥ savitā

suvatu 10, 175, 1. AV. 1, 10, 2. saubhāgyāya 18, 2. yajñam TBR. 3, 1, 1,

9. dānam VS. 18, 33. jīvātave 67. ŚAT. BR. 1, 7, 4, 8. adhvaryum 5, 2, 1.

8, 3, 20. 2, 5, 2, 30. omiti brahmā prasauti TAITT. UP. 1, 8. auṣṇyaṁ

prāsuvat MAITRJUP. 2, 6. sanim TS. 2, 1, 6, 3. annam ŚAT. BR. 9, 3, 4, 1.

vahvannaṁ prasuvīran «zur Verfügung stellen» ĀŚV. ŚR. 2, 18, 8. puruṣān

ŚAT. BR. 13, 6, 2, 9. yamu dviṣmastamu te pra suvāmasi «hingeben» AV.

12, 2, 3. śvānaṁ prasauti «überlassen» (zum Todtschlagen) TBR. 3, 8, 4,

1. prasuhi (v. l. -sūhi, in paralleler Stelle -suva) KĀTY. ŚR. 9, 14, 19. so v.

a. «schleudere» Comm. zu BHAṬṬ. 9, 50. — partic. prasūta «angetrieben,

gesandt, geheissen; verstattet, dem es verstattet ist» ṚV. 1, 113. 1.

arṣantvāpastvayeha prasūtāḥ 3, 30, 9. dūta 54, 19. janāḥ sūryeṇa

prasūtāḥ 7, 63, 4. pṛṣṭhe ninaddho jayati prasūtaḥ «entsandt» (Pfeil) 6,

75, 5. 11. prasūto bhakṣamakaram 10, 167, 4. AV. 6, 63, 1. 19, 51, 2.

savitṛ- AIT. BR. 1, 7. 2, 38. 7, 22. ŚAT. BR. 1, 1, 2, 17. 5, 1, 1, 4. TS. 2, 5,

2, 6. 5, 3, 4, 4. — ĀŚV. GṚHY. 1, 15, 1. varuṇa- KAUŚ. 3. a- «keine

Erlaubniss habend» ŚĀÑKH. ŚR. 14, 7, 2. «nicht gestattet, nicht erlaubt»

ŚAT. BR. 4, 1, 4, 3. — AV. 3, 1, 4 ist (vgl. ṚV. 3, 30, 6) zu verstehen pra sū

te. — Vgl. 2. prasava, 1. prasavitar, 1. prasūti, indraprasūta, bṛhaspati-,

brahma-, vāja-, haryaśva-.

adhipra «wegschicken von» (abl.): prajāpatirindraṁ vajrādadhi

prasuvati KĀṬH. 14, 7.

abhipra «hintreiben zu»: yadenāmabhiprasuvanti nadyaḥ NIR. 9, 26. —

sūta «veranlasst, geheissen» 11, 12.

pratipra, partic. -sūta «wieder verstattet» Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 6, 6, 23.

vi, -ṣuvati, vyaṣāvīt VOP. 8, 45. 13, 1.

su adj. in dāvasu vielleicht auf 2. su zurückzuführen.

su (sū), sūte DHĀTUP. 24, 21 (prāṇigarbhavimocane). P. 6, 1, 186. VOP.

9, 39. suve 1. sg. ṚV. 10, 125, 7. suvai VOP. 9, 40. suvāte, suvate 3 pl.,

suvāna; asūta, sūta; später auch sūyate DHĀTUP. 26, 23 (prāṇiprasave).

savati und sauti s. u. pra. suṣuve, susāva, sasūva (P. 7, 4, 74) ṚV. 4, 18,

10. 10, 86, 23. AV. 10, 1, 23. asaviṣṭa und asoṣṭa (CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5)

VOP. 8, 40. 46.11, 5. savitā und sotā P. 7, 2, 44. soṣyate und soṣyati

(CHĀND. UP. 3, 17, 5); sūṣyantī und soṣyantī ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 22.

sūtave ṚV. 10, 184, 3. AV. 1, 11, 2. savitave 6, 17, 1. sūtvā KĀŚ. zu P. 7,

2, 44. TS. 2, 1, 5, 4. partic. sūta, suta (s. besonders; nur wegen suta und

suṣuti ist die Annahme von su mit kurzem u gerechtfertigt) und sūna (P.

8, 2, 45. VOP. 26, 88. fg.). «zeugen, gebären» ṚV. 1, 135, 8. 164, 17. 168,

9. nārī naryaṁ susāva 7, 20, 5. sūṣyantī 5, 78, 5. asūta pūrvo vṛṣabhaḥ

«wurde geboren» 3, 38, 5. yadīṁ suvāte uṣasā 5, 1, 1. 2, 2. starīryatsūta

10, 31, 10. suvānā putrān AV. 2, 36, 3. «brüten» (von Vögeln) ṚV. 1, 164,

22. pass. wohl hierher: asāvanyo asura sūyata dyauḥ 10, 132, 4. — In der

späteren Sprache meist in der Bed. «gebären»: āyuṣmantaṁ sutaṁ sūte

M. 3, 263. 9, 9. 10, 39. Spr. (II) 1748. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 51, 41. suvāte R.

1, 23, 14. asūta RAGH. 3, 13. 15, 13. KUMĀRAS. 1, 20. KATHĀS. 23, 64.

28, 66. 42, 70. PRAB. 11, 10. BHĀG. P. 3, 1, 30. 17, 18. 26, 19. 4, 1, 34.

38. 13, 15. 24, 8. 9, 20, 17. 24, 47. sūyate CŪLIKOP. in Ind. St. 9, 12.

asūyata MBH. 1, 2599. BHĀG. P. 4, 1, 39. 51. suṣuve MBH. 1, 2539. 5908.

3, 8844. 16638. R. 2, 90, 11. 92, 21. R. GORR. 2, 99, 14. 5, 36, 57. RAGH.

5, 36. 7, 54. MĀRK. P. 104, 8. RĀJA-TAR. 1, 74. BHĀG. P. 3, 23, 48. 4, 13,

18. 6, 18, 11. 9, 11, 11. PAÑCAT. 238, 6 (suṣūve gedr.). suṣuvire

KATHĀS. 39, 18. suṣāva MBH. 1, 4765. R. GORR. 1, 39, 16. MĀRK. P.

104, 6. suṣuvus 49, 9. soṣyate KATHĀS. 21, 35. 34, 43. sūtvā BHĀG. P. 5,

2, 19. sūya MBH. 3, 10004. pass.: kausalyayāsāvi sukhena rāmaḥ prāk

BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. «erzeugen»: sūte M. 10, 32. 34. suṣuve (subj. Mann und

Weib) ŚĀK. 186. pass.: akrūraḥ suṣuve tasmāt HARIV. 1916. «erzeugen»

uneig.: prakṛtiḥ sūyate sacarācaram BHAG. 9, 10. phalaṁ sūte pādapaḥ

KATHĀS. 27, 99. asūta sadyaḥ kusumānyaśokaḥ KUMĀRAS. 3, 26.

khanibhiḥ suṣuve ratnaṁ kṣetraiḥ sasyaṁ vanairgajān (bhūḥ) RAGH. 17,

66. payaḥ sūte ‘dya medinī, ratnaṁ vaiḍūryabhūḥ RĀJA-TAR. 4, 300.

sūṣyant BHĀG. P. 3, 8, 13. dhūmāt — payaḥ sūte ghanasyodgamaḥ Spr.

(II) 3162. dharmaṁ sūyanti prajāḥ MBH. 3, 11298. — partic. sūta mit act.

Bed. = prasūta H. an. 2, 208. MED. t. 72. fg. sūtā «gekalbt habend» M. 8,

242. vanye sattve sūte «wenn ein wildes Thier Junge geworfen hat»

VARĀH. BṚH. S. 91, 3. — Vgl. savitrī.

nis vgl. niḥṣūti.

pra 1) «gebären»: prasūte sma sutam KATHĀS. 39, 19. 56, 287.

MĀRK. P. 51, 114. prāsūta R. 7, 35, 21. KATHĀS. 17, 65. kanyā prasūyate

MBH. 3, 13057. 4, 71. ṢAḌV. BR. 5, 11. SUŚR. 1, 367, 18. Spr. (II) 1403.

VARĀH. BṚH. 5, 8. 11. 16. PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 34. gauryā prativarṣaṁ

prasūyate Schol. zu P. 5, 2, 12. prasūyante mithunānyeva tāḥ MĀRK. P.

49, 10. prasavanti MBH. 1, 6077. prasavantī M. 4, 44. prasuṣuve BHĀG. P.

3, 17, 2. prāsoṣṭa RĀJA-TAR. 3, 106. 4, 39. BHAṬṬ. 1, 14. prasaviṣyasi R.

7, 9, 24. MĀRK. P. 51, 113. 77, 6. BHĀG. P. 3, 21, 29. prasoṣyantī 11, 1,

15. prasūya ŚĀK. 94. 95, v. l. KATHĀS. 14, 38. PRAB. 11, 10. prasotum

BHAṬṬ. 1, 13. «erzeugen»: prasūyate M. 10, 27. 30. fg. anena

prasaviṣyadhvam «Nachkommenschaft haben» BHAG. 3, 10. «erzeugen» in

uneig. Bed.: (buddhiḥ) prasūte hi phalaṁ śrīmadaraṇīva hutāśanam KĀM.

NĪTIS. 13, 2. Spr. (II) 7062. dhūmaṁ prasauti (agniḥ) RĀJA-TAR. 5, 125.

aṣṭamāsadhṛtaṁ garbham — dyauḥ prasūyate R. 4, 27, 3. prasūyate

saṁgatiḥ śriyam PRAB. 86, 18. (drumāḥ) śayanāni prasūyante

citrāstaraṇavanti R. 4, 44, 99. MĀRK. P. 49, 30. 59, 19. dīpaḥ kajjalaṁ

prasūyate Spr. (II) 2816. taravaḥ prāsūyanta «trugen Früchte» BHĀG. P.

4, 19, 8. yathā prasūyamānastu phalī dadyātphalaṁ bahu MBH. 14, 498.

(śāstraviṭapī) phalaṁ prasūya Spr. (II) 5426. — 2) «geboren werden,

entspringen, entstehen»: kārāvaro niṣādāttu carmakāraḥ prasūyate M. 10,

36. tiryagyonau prasūyate MBH. 3, 12500. asyāmeva prasūyadhvam 1,

2502. 2504. etasmācca jagatsarvaṁ prasūyeta janārdanāt HARIV. 11053.

prasūyatas 2. du. MBH. 13, 2565. prasūyāmas HARIV. 173 = VP. 1, 15,

128. sarveṇa khalu martavyaṁ martyaloke prasūyatā Spr. (II) 6949.

sindhoḥ prasūya kamalā RĀJA-TAR. 6, 317. pra keśāḥ suvate TBR. 2, 7,

17, 1. śabdaḥ u. s. w. vedādeva prasūyante M. 12, 98, v. l. — 3) partic.

prasūta a) mit act. Bed. f. ā «geboren habend, niedergekommen» (die

Ergänzung im acc.; hier und da statt des verbi finiti) AK. 2, 6, 1, 16. MED.

t. 124. HALĀY. 118. 285. 345. AV. 12, 1, 62. YĀJÑ. 2, 145. SUŚR. 2, 180,

8. devasadṛśānputrān HARIV. 4625. R. 7, 66, 3. UTTARAR. 38, 7 (52, 1).

WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 249. 282. fg. 289. KATHĀS. 21, 117. 29, 137

(śatapadī). MĀRK. P. 51, 101. Schol. zu P. 2, 1, 65. PAÑCAT. 218, 21.

HIT. 72, 14. a- Spr. (II) 2055. pratyagra- Schol. zu KĀTY. ŚR. 24, 6, 8.

jananī prasūtatanayā «deren Tochter niedergekommen ist» Spr. (II) 6033.

prasūtamātrā «eben niedergekommen» KATHĀS. 28, 67. — b) «geboren,

erzeugt, entsprungen, entstanden» H. an. 3, 273. MED. mit gen. oder loc.

(auch abl.) P. 2, 3, 39. VOP. 5, 29. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 5, 2. KAUṢ. UP. 1, 2.

tasyām M. 3, 19. tataḥ MBH. 1, 35. mama kāyāt R. 2, 74, 21. tadanvaye

RAGH. 1, 12. nīcakule Spr. (II) 6475. yasya tasya 5369. MĀRK. P. 104, 8.

R. 1, 16, 26. ŚĀK. 178, v. l. Spr. (II) 1431. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 11. BṚH.

23, 14. MĀRK. P. 76, 17. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 266. 284. etaddeśa- M. 2, 20.

kālanemi- ŚĀK. CH. 144, 4. KATHĀS. 50, 139. BHĀG. P. 6, 6, 24. 9, 6, 3.

kula- R. 2, 82, 31 (Pferde) Spr. (II) 5970. BHĀG. P. 9, 3, 21. nandakula-

PAÑCAT. 45, 2. veda- PRAB. 86, 19. vindhyapāda- (nadī) MĀRK. P. 57,

25. BHĀG. P. 9, 9, 14. PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 40. kalpavṛkṣa- (madhu) MEGH. 67.

matprasūtaṁ bhayam MBH. 3, 2844. matprasūtena tejasā 11970.

bhīṣma- (duḥkha) 5, 7029. dharmaviśeṣa- KAṆ. 1, 1, 4. saraladrumāṇāṁ

srutakṣīratayā prasūto gandhaḥ KUMĀRAS. 1, 9. prasūtaṁ tarhi

saukhyaṁ naḥ Z. f. d. K. d. M. 2, 426. — c) n. als Synonym von avyakta

TATTVAS. 5. — 4) partic. prasūna a) = prasūta H. an. 3, 388. = jāta

MED. n. 87. — b) n. «Blüthe, Frucht»; s. u. prasūna. In der Bed. «Blüthe»

auch Spr. (II) 7411, v. l. UTTARAR. 98, 6 (129, 12). MĀLATĪM. 57, 13.

BHĀG. P. 3, 18, 8 («engendre» BURNOUF). PAÑCAR. 1, 7, 50. — Vgl. 3.

prasava, prasavana, 2. prasavitar, 2. prasavin, prasūta, 2. prasūti,

prasūna, devaprasūta (hierher oder zu 2. su).

anupra, partic. -sūta «darauf entstanden»:

sṛṣṭistathaiveyamanuprasūtā MBH. 13, 7361.

abhipra, partic. -sūta «erzeugt, geboren»: mātuḥ pituḥ

karmaṇābhiprasūtaḥ saṁvardhate vidhivadbhojanena MBH. 5, 964.

saṁpra 1) «erzeugen»: -sūte MBH. 13, 2582. -sūyate M. 10, 33. — —

sūyate MBH. 13, 5850 fehlerhaft für -ṇūyate, wie die ed. Bomb. liest. — 2)

«geboren werden»: tadāhaṁ saṁprasūyāmi gṛheṣu śubhakarmaṇām MBH.

3, 12978. — 3) partic. -sūta «erzeugt, geboren»: bahvīḥ prajāḥ puruṣāt

MUṆḌ. UP. 2, 1, 5. śarmiṣṭhayā MBH. 5, 5044. brahmāsyatas, bāhubhyām

12, 11814. 13, 4426. guṇavipuleṣu kuleṣu R. 4, 41, 79. māyā

guṇasaṁprasūtā BHĀG. P. 11, 10, 13. — Vgl. saṁprasūti.

vi «gebären»: sumatyapi garbhaṁ tumbaṁ vyasūyata R. GORR. 1, 40,

17.

sam dass.: śāradvatasya (so die neuere Ausg.) dāyādamahalyā

samasūyata HARIV. 1784. «erzeugen» in uneig. Bed.: dattaṁ śreyāṁsi

saṁsūte (Conj.) Spr.(II) 4252.

su 5 savati v. l. für sru (gatau) DHĀTUP. 22, 42. VOP. 8, 95. asāvīt,

suṣavitha, suṣuviva, savitā und sotā 96.

su adv. gaṇa cādi zu P. 1, 4, 57. VOP. 1, 8. über die euphonischen

Veränderungen des Wortes (ṣu, ṣū), über die Dehnung eines

vorangehenden Vocals und über den Wandel eines nachfolgenden na in ṇa

handeln VS. PRĀT. 4, 183. TS. PRĀT. 3, 7. 14. P. 6, 3, 134. 8, 3, 107. 4,

27. «wohl, gut»; überhaupt verstärkend oder versichernd: «gewiss,

leichtlich, völlig» u. s. w. wie «wohl» in älteren deutschen Liedern. Die

indischen Lexicographen geben dem Worte folgende Bedeutungen: pūjana

(pūjā) AK. 3, 5, 5. MED. avj. 79. nirbhara AK. 3, 5, 2. H. 1535, Schol.

MED. bhṛśa, anumati, kṛcchra, samṛddhi MED. anāyāsa BHAR. zu AK.

nach ŚKDR. 1) selbständig; nie am Versanfang; im AV. selten und meist

in Verbindung mit u. u ṣu ṚV. 1, 26, 5. 4, 6, 2. 20, 4. vidmo ṣvasya

mātaram AV. 1, 2, 1. 6, 84, 3. mo ṣu ṚV. 2, 18, 3. 3, 55, 2. AV. 5, 11, 7.

mā su VS. 11, 68. uta su ṚV. 8, 2, 42. itsu 4, 22, 10. ā su 8, 34, 12. pra su

1, 136, 1. 8, 6, 32. vi ṣū 2, 28, 7. 8, 32, 19. ni ṣu 5, 13. adhi ṣū 8, 24, 7.

paryū ṣū 9, 110, 1. asmāntsu 1, 9, 6. 17, 7. asmabhyaṁ su 3, 30, 21.

asmākaṁ su 31, 14. asmābhiḥ su 8, 70, 8. tvaṁ su VS. 4, 14. asme su 4,

32, 14. sa su 12, 1. imaṁ su 2, 35, 2. idaṁ su AV. 14, 2, 8. yaṁ svaśnaṁ

jaghāna ṚV. 2, 14, 5. sakṛtsu 16, 8. 8, 1, 14. namaḥ su te VS. 12, 63.

vasvī ṣu te ṚV. 7, 20, 10. jīvātave su 10, 59, 5. ni māmṛje pura indraḥ su

sarvāḥ ṚV. 7, 26, 3. su kam am Ende 1, 191, 6. 3, 53, 2.

nāsmāllokātsvetavyamiva «nicht wohl» TS. 6, 1, 1, 1. bodhā su ṚV. 7, 22,

3. juṣasva sū 3, 24, 2. mandasvā su 8, 6, 39. pibā su 17, 4. AV. 6, 32, 1.

jarāṁ su gaccha 19, 24, 5. na vai su viduriva manuṣyā nakṣatram KĀṬH.

8, 3 bei WEBER, Nax. 2, 296. su veda KENOP. 9. sūrmī jvalantīṁ

svāśliṣyet M. 11, 103. su virājate sma MBH. 4, 2089. svanuyāsyanti 8,

1321. su śakyante R. 2, 33, 4. su samīkṣyatām Spr. (II) 1402. su

saṁdadhīta 1961, v. l. su śobhante 4157. svanuṣṭhīyatām 6275.

svaśikṣayat RĀJA-TAR. 4, 51. — MBH. 3, 14392 und 7, 8603 hat die ed.

Bomb. tu und hi st. su. Vor einem absol. MBH. 7, 5783 (so ‘bhidrutya st.

svabhidrutya ed. Bomb.). vicintya MṚCCH. 103, 16. baddhvā 176, 1.

cintya und vicārya Spr. (II) 7100. snātvā WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 291. — 2) am

Anfange eines comp. vor Adjectiven und Substantiven (über solche

compp. handelt P. 1, 4, 94. 2, 1, 6. 5, 4, 69. 6, 2, 117. fgg, 145. 172. fgg.

195. 7, 1, 68. 8, 1, 67. fg. Vārtt. 4 zu 1, 4, 60. Vārtt. 1 der SAUNĀGA zu 2,

2, 18. VOP. 6, 88). svalaṁkṛta «schön geschmückt» MBH. 3, 2114.

surakṣita «wohl gehütet» 2144. suprīta «hocherfreut» R. 1, 1, 76.

sūcchritadhvaja 2, 43, 10. susaṁrabdhatara 6, 31, 44. susādhya «gut zu

handhaben» PAÑCAR. 1, 8, 33. sumanohara «überaus reizend» MBH. 1,

5976. sudāruṇa R. 1, 8, 12. susūkṣma VARĀH. BṚH. S. 11, 44. sunikhilam

«ganz vollständig» HARIV. 7034. suprākṛta «ganz gemein» R. GORR. 2,

11, 24. susita «schön weiss» PAÑCAR. 3, 11, 8. susugandha «sehr

wohlriechend» VARĀH. BṚH. S. 48, 32. suduṣkara «sehr schwer zu

vollbringen» MBH. 1, 6118. sunistriṁśa «ein schönes Schwert» MBH. 6,

5639. subhakṣya «eine prächtige Speise» Spr. (II) 7113. susahāya «einen

guten Gefährten habend» M. 7, 31. sulalāṭa «eine schöne Stirn habend» R.

1, 1, 12. sukara (s. d.) «leicht auszuführen», sulabha (s. d.) «leicht zu

erlangen», susaṁtoṣa (s. d.) «leicht zu befriedigen.» — su verhält sich

wohl zum demonstrativen sa wie ku zum interrogativen ka. Vgl. sutarām.

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

su 1. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par., and sū sū, ii. 4, suya (properly pass. refl. of

su), and ii. 2, Ātm.

1. To beget, Man. 10, 32.

2. To bear, to bring forth, Man. 10, 39; Pañc. pr. d. 5. ii. 5, sunu, Par.

Ātm. (the act of expressing the Soma juice being compared to the act of

generating, cf. Rigv. i. 28), To express the Soma juice, Chr. 294, 3 =

Rigv. i, 92, 3. Ptcple. of the pf. pass.

I. suta,

1. m. A son, Pañc. i. d. 185.

2. f. tā, A daughter, Chr. 3, 9.

3. m. pl. Cildren, Man. 2, 28. Comp. giri-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Pañc. i. d. 175.

jahnu-, f. tā, the Gaṅgā, MBh. 1, 3913. jīva-, adj. one who has living

children, Bhāg. P. 6, 19, 25. dāra-, m. wife and son, Yājñ. 2, 175. dāsī-,

m. a base man, Rājat. 5, 179. dharma-, m. (the son of the god Dharma),

epithet of Yudhiṣṭhira, Bhāg. P. 1, 7, 49. bhū- and mahī-, m. the planet

Mars. bhṛgu-, m. 1. Śukra or Venus. 2. Paraśurāma. rādhā-, m. Karṇa.

śaila-, f. tā, Pārvatī, Vikr. d. 128.

II. sūla,

1. Engendered.

2. Born. f. tā,

1. A daughter, Pañc. 181, 5.

2. A woman lying in; see s.v. Comp. sūra-, m. Aruṇa, the dawn.

III. sūna,

1. Born, produced.

2. Blown, budded (as a flower). m. A son, Pañc. 198, 2. f. nā, A

daughter. n.

1. Bringing forth, parturition.

2. A flower.

— With the prep. abhi abhi, ṣu,

1. To express the Soma juice, Rām. 1, 13, 5 (cf. Sclegel’s translation).

2. To extract juice, Man. 5, 10.

3. To sprinkle, Bhaṭṭ. 9, 90.

— With ud ud, ii. 5, To agitate, Bhāg. P. 3, 20, 35 (cf. 2. sū).

— With pra pra,

1. To beget, Man. 10, 30.

2. To bring forth, Man. 4, 44.

3. Pass. To be brought forth, Man, 10, 36; with the termination of the

Par. (i. 4, Par.), MBh. 12, 5687. prasūta,

1. Engendered, Hit. pr. d. 23, M.M.

2. Born, Pañc. 45, 2.

3. Produced, Chr. 294, 8 = Rigv. i. 92, 8.

4. Engendering, Man. 3, 19.

5. Having brought forth, delivered, Hit. 72, 14; Utt. Rāmac. 52, 1 (she

has brought forth). Comp. a-, adj. one who has not brought forth, Böhtl.

Ind. Spr. 809. kula-, adj. descended from a respectable family, Pañc. pr.

d. 6. prasūna, Born, produced. n.

1. A bud, a blossom, Utt. Rāmac. 129, 12; flower, Mālat. 57, 13.

2. Fruit. Comp. visa-, n. a lotus.

— With saṁpra sam-pra,

1. To beget, Man. 10, 33.

2. Pass. To be brought forth, MBh. 3, 12978 (with the termination of

the Par.).

— Cf. [greek] Goth. sunus; A.S. sunu (cf. sūnu).

su 2. su, i. 1, and ii. 2, Par. † To possess power or supremacy (cf. the

last).

su 3. su, i. 1, Par. Ātm. † To go.

su 4. su (for original vasu, cf. [greek] = Zend. vaṅhvām = Sskr.

*vasvām),

I. adv. ved. Beautifully, Chr. 296, 1 = Rigv. i. 112, 1.

II. Very seldom combined and compounded with a verbum finitum; e. g.

Pañc. i. d. 205, but cf. Böhtl. Ind. Spr. 647; but very often with nouns,

1. Good, well, Rām. 3, 53, 6; Ṛt. 6, 2; Lass. 15, 5.

2. Beautiful, beautifully, Rām. 3, 52, 35.

3. Much, very, Chr. 4, 12.

4. Easily, Daśak. in Chr. 185, 2. Comparat. sutarām,

1. Better.

2. With na, Very badly, Pañc. 199, 24; with mā, In no way, Megh. 108.

3. More, Śiś. 9, 67; Pañc. 163, 3.

4. Exceedingly, Śiś. 9, 55.

5. Consequently, of course.

— Cf. [greek]

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

su sunoti sunute v pp. suta1 (q.v.) press out, extract, esp. the Soma. —

adhi = S.

abhi press out, prepare or win by extracting.

ā & vi = S.

sam & abhisam press out together. — Cf. prasuta.

su [2] (sū) adv. well, indeed (strengthening and assevering); often °— in

adj., adv., & subst. = Gr. ‘eu (opp. dus).

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

su 1. SU, V.P. suno, sunu, (sts. Ā.) press out, extract (Soma; V., rare in

E.): pr. pt. sunvāna, suvāna; pp. suta, pressed, extracted.

abhi (-ṣuṇoti), press out; ps. -ṣūyate, be extracted: pp.

abhiṣuta (V.). ā, press out, extract (V.); boil, prepare (ghee).

pra, pp. prāsuta (V.), pressed continuously; having continuously

pressed.

su 2. SU (= 1. sū), in sauti, suhi, and pp. suta, urged, instigated (ŚB.).

su 3. SU (= 2. sū), in pra-savati (rare), pra-sauti (rare), pp. suta, son,

and suṣuti.

su su (in V. also sū), ad. [perh. for vasu = Gk.[greek]: cp. uṣu, ū shu, and

u loka] good, well, indeed, right, very, thoroughly (never used

independently at the beginning of a verse; rarely as an independent ad. in

C.; very common °- with a. or N., in C. also with gd.).

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

su gatau . aiśvarye . prasave . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-para°-saka

°-aniṭ .) savati . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

su ña gatau . iti kavikalpadrumaḥ .. (bhvā°-ubha°saka°-aniṭ .) ña, susāva

suṣuve . iti durgādāsaḥ ..

su vya, nirbharam . ityamaraḥ . 3 . 4 . 2 .. (yathā, mahābhārate . 1 . 158 .

16 .

viditvā vyavasiṣyāmi yadyapi syāt suduṣkaram ..) pūjā . ityamaraḥ . 3 .

4 . 5 .. (śobhanam . yathā, manuḥ . 7 . 31 .

praṇetuṁ śakyate daṇḍaḥ susahāyena dhīmatā ..) anumatiḥ .

kṛcchram . samṛddhiḥ . iti medinī .. anāyāsaḥ . iti

bharataikārthasaṁgrahaḥ .. upasargaviśeṣaḥ . yathā .

supūjānāyāsātiśayeṣu . iti mugdhabodhaṭīkāyāṁ durgādāsaḥ .. saptamyā

vahuvacanavibhaktiḥ . iti vyākaraṇam ..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

su avya° su—ḍu . 1 pūjāyām 2 atiśaye amaraḥ . 3 kṛcche 4 anumatau 5

mamṛddhau medi° 6 anāyāse ca anekārthako° . pūjāyāmasya

nopasargatvam tena sustutamityādau na ṣatvam . atiśayādau tu suṣṭuta

ityādi . gaṇaratne’rthaviśeṣānuktakrameṇodāhṛtam yathā su

praśaṁsānumatipūjābhṛśakṛcchraśubheṣu . surūpaḥ sukṛtaṁ susādhuḥ

sutaptaḥ suduḥ karaṁ sugandhaḥ .

हरिक — harika Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harika m. (for 2. see p.1291, col.2) a thief, gambler

harika m. (for 1. see p.1289, col, 2) a horse of a yellowish or reddish

brown colour

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harika (von 1. hari) 1) m. «ein gelbliches Ross» H. 1242. — 2) am Ende

eines adj. comp. (f. ā) in a- «nicht das Wort» hari «enthaltend» (Gegens.

harivant) LĀṬY. 3, 1, 18.

harika (von 1. har) m. «Dieb» und «Würfelspieler» ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei

WILSON.

harika1 *harika m. «ein gelbliches Ross.» Vgl. aharika

harika2 *harika m. 1) «Dieb.» 2) «Würfelspieler.»

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

harika hari + ka, m. A horse of a yellowish-blue tint.

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

harika pu° hari + saṁjñāyāṁ kan . pītaharidvarṇāśve hemaca0

हरित — harita Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899harita mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. yellowish, pale yellow, fallow, pale red, pale

(also, «pale with fright»), greenish, green (also; «verdant» as opp. to

«śuṣka» «dry») &c. &c.

harita m. yellowish (the colour)

harita m. Phaseolus Mungo qr Lobatus

harita m. a lion

harita m. N. of a son of Kaiśyapa

harita m. of a son of Yadu

harita m. of a son of Rohita

harita m. of a son of Rohitāśva

harita m. of a son of Yuvanāśva

harita m. of a son of Parāvṛit

harita m. of a son of Vapushmat

harita m. of an ichneumon (v.l. «hariṇa»)

harita m. pl. the descendants of Harita (also called «harītāḥ»), āśvśr. (cf.

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. N. of partic. verses of the (also «haretā

mantrāḥ»)

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. of a class of gods in the 12th Manvantara

harita mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. («ā») f. Dūrvā grass (= «nīla-dūrva»

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. turmeric

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. a brown-coloured grape

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. Sesbana Aegyptiaca

mf («ā» or «hariṇī») n. a kind of Svara-bhakti

harita n. a yellowish or greenish substance

harita n. gold

harita n. greens, vegetables («unripe grain»

harita n. a kind of fragrant plant (= «sthauṇcyaka»)

Apte, Vaman Shivaram: The Practical Sanskrit-English Dictionary. Poona :

1890

harita a. (tā or hariṇī f.) [hṛ-itac] Green, of a green colour, verdant;

ramyāṁtaraḥ kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ S. 4. 10; Ku. 4. 14; Me. 21; Ki. 5.

38.

(2) Tawny.

(3) Dark-blue. —taḥ

(1) The green colour.

(2) A lion.

(3) A kind of grass.

— Comp.

—aśman m. 1. an emerald. —2. blue vitriol.

—chada a. green-leaved.

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

harita UṆĀDIS. 3, 93. 1) adj. (f. ā und hariṇī ŚĀNT. 2, 20. P. 4, 1, 39.

VOP. 4, 27. AK. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. an. 3, 233. MED. ṇ. 87. VIŚVA bei UJJVAL.

zu UṆĀDIS. 2, 46. hariṇī in der älteren, haritā in der späteren Sprache)

«falb, gelblich; grünlich, grün» (daher auch im Gegensatz zu śuṣka dem

«verdorrten Kraut») AK. 1, 1, 4, 24. 3, 4, 13, 53. H. 1395. MED. t. 175.

HALĀY. 4, 49. mṛga ṚV. 10, 86, 3. Rosse MBH. 13, 4923. Bart des Indra

ṚV. 10, 23, 4. Wagen u. s. w. 3, 44, 1. 4. 10, 96, 3. 9. Soma und was

dazu gehört: śṛṅge śiśāno hariṇī 9, 70, 7. ruc 111, 1. 10, 94, 2. AV. 6, 49,

2. dhānāḥ 18, 4, 34. Frosch ṚV. 7, 103, 4. 6. 10. takman AV. 1, 23, 2. 5,

22, 2. 6, 20, 3. śocañchuṣkāsu hariṇīṣu jarbhurat ṚV. 10, 92, 1. vanaspati

9, 5, 10. AV. 10, 8, 31. kuśa ŚAT. BR. 4, 5, 10, 6. Gras LĀṬY. 2, 11, 15.

KĀṬH. 32, 1. KAUṢ. UP. 2, 8. HARIV. 3574. R. GORR. 2, 65, 16. 3, 73, 39.

KIR. 5, 38. AK. 2, 1, 10. 9, 16. TRIK. 3, 3, 297. H. 955. HALĀY. 2, 4.

BHĀG. P. 3, 22, 30. Bohne SUŚR. 1, 197, 18. kamalinīharitaiḥ sarobhiḥ

ŚĀK. 86. — ŚAT. BR. 14, 7, 1, 20. ŚVETĀŚV. UP. 4, 4. VARĀH. BṚH. S. 5,

54. 8, 17. 9, 44. 30, 12. fg. 54, 30. 34. 67, 5. 68, 91. BṚH. 2, 5. LAGHUJ.

1, 6. WEBER, KṚṢṆAJ. 270. -puṣpa KAUŚ.10. 26. 116.

vaiḍūryamaṇiratnābhaḥ prāsādo haritaprabhaḥ HARIV. 8985. -pāṇḍu

SUŚR. 1, 159, 19. -kapiśa MEGH. 21. haritāruṇa KUMĀRAS. 4, 14. —

gomaya wohl «frischer Kuhmist» KAUŚ. 19. GOBH. 4, 8, 12. «gelb» als

Farbe des Goldes AV. 4, 37, 4. 7, 99, 1. 10, 2, 33. 3, 3. 11, 2, 12. 15, 2, 1.

ŚAT. BR. 12, 4, 4, 6. rukma KĀṬH. 10, 14. VS. 23, 37. AIT. BR. 1, 23. TS.

6, 2, 3, 1. TBR. 1, 8, 9, 1. 2, 2, 9, 8. 3, 9, 6, 5. «gelb» (vor Schrecken),

«bleich» (vgl. hariṇa) TS. 6, 5, 5, 2. hariṇī śyāvā «gelbbraun» (ohne Röthe)

als Farbe der Schwangeren TBR. 2, 3, 8, 1. — 2) m. a) «Phaseolus Mungo»

(mudga) H. 1172. «ein best. Gras», = manthānaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — b)

«Löwe» ŚABDĀRTHAK. bei WILSON. — c) pl. Bez. eines Abschnittes des

AV. 19, 22, 5. hierher vielleicht haritā mantrāḥ (so trennen wir) Verz. d.

Oxf. H. 93,a,1 v. u. — d) N. pr. a) pl. einer Klasse von Göttern im 12ten

Manvantara MĀRK. P. 94, 23. BHĀG. P. 8, 13, 29. — b) verschiedener

Männer P. 4, 1, 100. PRAVARĀDHY. in Verz. d. B. H. 56, 7 (haritakutsa-

zu lesen; vgl. ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3). Kaśyapa ŚAT. BR. 14, 9, 4, 33. ein

Sohn Jadu’s HARIV. 4206. Rohita’s 758. BHĀG. P. 9, 8, 1. Rohitāśva’s VP.

373. Yuvanāśva’s 369. Parāvṛt’s (vgl. hari) 420. 421, N. 13. Vapushmant’s

MĀRK. P. 53, 27. pl. Harita’s Nachkommen (vgl. hārita) P. 2, 4, 67, Vārtt.

ĀŚV. ŚR. 12, 12, 3 (im comp.). — g) eines Ichneumons (nakula) MBH. 12,

4942. hariṇa ed. Bomb. — 3) f. haritā a) Dūrvā-«Gras» TRIK. 3, 3, 194.

MED. = haridrā «Gelbwurz» DHANV. 1, 17. RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. = jayantī,

kapiladrākṣā, pācī und nīladūrvā RĀJAN. ebend. — b) «eine best.»

Svarabhakti (v. l. haritā und hā-) Comm. zu TS. PRĀT. 21, 15. — 4) f.

hariṇī s. u. hariṇa — 5) n. a) «Gold» AV. 5, 28, 5. 9. 11, 3, 8. KĀṬH. 8, 5. —

b) «Grünes» so v. a. «Gemüse» CARAKA 1, 27. — c) «eine best.

wohlriechende Pflanze», = sthauṇeyaka RĀJAN. im ŚKDR. — Vgl. pīta-

und hārita.

harita 1) Adj. (f. haritā) in der älteren Sprache hariṇī «falb, gelblich» (von

der Gesichtsfarbe eines Erschrockenen) ; «grünlich, grün» 304,23. 2) m.

a) «Phaseolus Mungo.» b) «eine best. Grasart», = manthānaka

RĀJAN.8,135. c) «Löwe.» d) Pl. Bez. «bestimmter Sprüche.» Auch haritā

mantrāḥ. e) N.pr. a) Pl. einer Gruppe von Göttern unter dem 12ten Manu.

b) verschiedener Männer. g) eines Ichneumons. 3) f. haritā a) «Dūrvā-

Gras» ŚIŚ.4,21 (am Ende eines adj. Comp. f. ā) = nīladūrvā RĀJAN.8,108.

b) «Gelbwurz.» c) «grüne Traube» RĀJAN.11,104. d) «Sesbania

aegyptiaca» RĀJAN.4,133. e) «eine best. Svarabhakti.» 4) n. a) «gelblicher

oder grünlicher Stoff» ŚAT.BR.14,7,1,20.2,12. b) «Gold.» c) «Grünes», so

v.a. «Gemüse» VIṢṆUS.5,85 (nach dem Comm. «unreifes Getraide).» d)

eine best. wohlriechende Pflanze, = sthauṇeyaka.

Mani, Vettam: Puranic Encyclopaedia. Delhi 1975

harita 1 I A King who was the grandson of Hariścandra and son of

Rohita. (Bhāgavata, 10th Skandha).

harita 2 II A King, who was the son of Vapuṣmān and grandson of

Svāyambhuvamanu. He was King of Haritavarṣa in the island of Śālmali.

(Mārkaṇḍeya Purāṇa 50, 28; Brahmāṇḍa Purāṇa, 2, 3).

harita 3 III A son born to Yadu of the nāga woman called Dhūmravaṇā.

He founded an independent kingdom in the Nāga island and became a

prominent leader of the Madgura tribe. (Hari Vaṁśa, 2, 38; 29, 34).

Benfey, Theodor: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1866

harita harita,

I. adj., f. tā, or iṇī (cf. hariṇa),

1. Green, Megh. 21; Hit. i. d. 178, M. M. (in haritī-kṛta, adj. Made

green)

2. Dark blue, Kir. 5, 38.

3. Grassy.

II. m.

1. Green, the colour.

2. A lion.

III. f. tā.

1. Bent grass.

2. Turmeric.

3. A brown grape.

Cappeller, Carl: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary, based upon the St.

Petersburg Lexicons. Strassburg : 1891

harita (f. ā, older hariṇī fallow, pale, yellow, green. m. N. of sev. men

etc.; f. haritā Dūrvā grass; n. gold, greens, any yellowish or greenish

substance.

Macdonell, Arthur Anthony: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1893

harita har-ita, a. (ā, C.: hariṇī, V.) yellowish, tawny; pale (with fright);

greenish, green (C.); n. gold (V.); vegetable (C.): -ka, a. green; n. grass;

vegetable;

-kapiśa, a. yellowish brown;

-cchada, a. having green leaves;

-dhānya, n. green = unripe corn;

-pattra-maya, a. (ī) formed of green leaves; (harita) -sraj, a. bearing

yellow (or green) festoons (trees; AV.); adorned with a golden chain

(steed; Br.).

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

harita pu° hṛ—itac . 1 siṁhe 2 manthānatṛṇe rājani° 3 haridvarṇe 4

tadvati tri° amaraḥ striyāṁ ṅīp tasya naśca . 5 dūrvāyāṁ medi° 6

jayantyāṁ 7 haridrāyāṁ 8 kapiladrākṣāyāṁ 9 pācyāṁ 10 nīladūrvāyāñca

strī rājani° ṭāp . 11 sthauṇeyake na° rājani° .

हरिताश्म — haritāśma Monier-Williams, Monier: A Sanskrit-English Dictionary. London : 1899haritāśma n. «green-coloured stone», a turquoise or emerald

n. sulphate of copper or blue vitriol

Böhtlingk und Roth: Großes Petersburger Wörterbuch

haritāśma n. 1) «Türkis» RĀJAN.13,217. ŚIŚ.13,56. 2) «*Kupfervitriol»

RĀJAN.13,103.

Rādhākāntadeva: Śabdakalpadruma (5 Vol). Third edition, reprint of the

1886 edition. Varanasi : 1967

haritāśma [n] klī, (haritaṁ aśma .) tuttham . perojam . iti rājanirghaṇṭaḥ

..

Bhaṭṭācārya: Vācaspatyam (6 Vol). Chaukhamba Sanskrit Series 94,

reprint of the 1873-1884 edition. Varanasi : 1962

haritāśma na° haritavarṅamaśma aśmeva vā acsamā° (perījā) 1

maṇibhede tutthe (tuṁta) upadhātubhede ca rājani° .

Comments

Write a comment

*